Global Democracy Commons

Making Sense of the Elections of 2024

Part of the Global Democracy Commons initiative

The American election closed out a year of momentous elections. Almost two decades on from the financial crisis of 2007 that helped unleash a wave of authoritarian, populist, and nativist movements in global democracies, a range of social and political forces have reshaped political processes around the world.

What do the election results of 2024 tell us about the health or fragility of global democracy, and how might we better understand the outcome of the American election as part of a broader global process?

Recorded on November 21, 2024, this panel featured a group of UC Berkeley scholars discussing the 2024 elections, with perspectives from different parts of the world. The panel featured James VernonHelen Fawcett Distinguished ProfessorHistory; Alison PostAssociate ProfessorPolitical Science; Trevor JacksonAssistant ProfessorHistory; Aarti SethiAssistant ProfessorAnthropology; and Kwanele SosiboLecturerArt History.

Presented as part of the Global Democracy Commons initiative.

Podcast and Transcript

Listen to the presentation as a podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

JAMES VERNON: Hey, everyone. Good afternoon and welcome. Thanks so much for coming on an utterly horrible day, which is maybe fitting for what we’re going to be talking about this afternoon. My name is James Vernon. I’m a professor in the history department and I’m the director of the Global Democracy Commons, which is the group on campus, which was organized this event. Now, it seems at the moment that every few weeks, we have an announcement launching a new initiative or program aiming to buttress American democracy and, dare I say, liberal understandings of it on this campus.

That’s not the purpose of the Global Democracy Commons. Our starting point is rather different. It is that the Euro-American model of liberal democracy has always been as much about containing the demos as emancipating it, and we are keen to remember the ways in which Euro-American democracy was always inseparable from settler colonialism, imperialism, slavery, and capitalism.

So while we’re interested in many of the issues that we’ll be talking about today, like the rise of authoritarian populism, neoliberal capitalism, and the planetary emergency, and the ways in which these phenomena have created a new crisis of democracy around the world, we’re also equally interested in the new forms of political mobilization unleashed by those phenomena.

We believe that some of these new forms of politics that we see arising around the world provide opportunities to realize the radical and unrealized promises of democracy to help us materialize a commons that could ensure our collective well-being. We aim to understand and propagate those approaches to democracy rather than believing scholars at Berkeley know best what democracy is or who should have it.

So the Global Democracy Commons is funding three collectives, which consists mainly of faculty, graduate students, and undergrads who are working with a variety of groups beyond the Academy to realize different histories, practices, and visions of democratic practice. The three labs at the moment have their work located in Guatemala, the Caribbean, and India. In addition, we have a Scholars At Risk program which is supporting the development of an English language version of the political diary podcast about Russian politics by the two elias Matvick and Brustofski, who are visiting scholars here at Berkeley.

And finally, we also have a monthly podcast exploring the way that universities around the world are being targeted as spaces of critique and protest, including, of course, here at Berkeley. All of these activities are traced on our website, demos.berkeley.edu. So please do get in touch if you’re interested in being involved or you want to discuss future projects. Now, let’s turn to why we’re actually here this afternoon, not to listen to me, but to listen to these wonderful people.

I hope it’s clear from what I’ve already said, that the Global Democracy Commons was not set up to study elections or to equate our understanding of democracy simply with the conduct of elections. Nonetheless, what a year we’ve had, and there have been some momentous elections all around the world, including in the largest democracies in the world, like India, Mexico, and the United States, all of which we’ll be talking about this afternoon.

In many ways, these elections allow us to see some of the ways in which political alignments and democratic practices have been restructured since the apparent global triumph of democracy in 1991 with the fall of the Soviet Union and then the financial crisis of 2007/8. So to make sense of all of this, we’ve put together these wonderful people, who I’ll now introduce. Let me just briefly say before I do that how this is going to work is I’m going to ask them a series of questions that they’re going to respond to.

They’ll be in conversation with each other. We’ll probably try and do all of that in the next half an hour or so. So there’s plenty of time for you to join the discussion, ask them questions, and for us to hear the ways that you understand the developments that we’ll be discussing. So I’m going to start. We’ll go down the row. We’re going to start with Kwanele Sosibo, who’s a freelance writer and editor, currently working as a lecturer at UC Berkeley’s History of Art Department. He’s a journalist by profession.

Sosibo started out as a freelance arts writer for various publications in Durban, South Africa, and he later worked at the Mail and Guardian in Johannesburg, covering beach ranging from labor to arts and culture. He was the arts editor at the Mail and Guardian between January 2019 and April 2022. Sitting next to him is Alison Post, who is an associate professor of political science and global metropolitan studies.

Her research, which has been funded by almost everyone on the planet, examines urban politics and policy and other political economy themes, including environmental politics and policy, regulation and business government relations. She’s the former chair of the Latin American Political Economy Network and the former president of the urban and local politics section of the American– section of the American Political Science Association.

Next to Alison is Trevor Jackson, who is an assistant professor of history and political economy. He’s an economic historian with research interests in crisis, inequality and occasionally catastrophe. So he’s well placed to speak here today. His first book, Impunity and Capitalism, is out from Cambridge University Press, and he writes about money, banking, and the financial crises for places like Dissent, The Nation, and the New York Review of Books.

And then finally, at the end, there is Aarti Sehti, who is an assistant professor at the Department of Anthropology and the associate director of the Global Democracy Commons. She’s a sociocultural anthropologist, primarily working in South Asia, and she has two projects on the go at the moment. The first examines cash crop agricultural economies to understand how monetary debt undertaken for transgenic cotton cultivation transforms intimate social and productive relations in rural society.

And she has a second project called Republic of Readers, which explores the relationship between reading, literacy, and libraries as sites of postcolonial democracy and citizenship. OK, I’m going to sit down and then get this conversation started. And I want to just go down the row here and briefly get everyone situated with the part of the world that you want to talk about this afternoon.

The outcomes of the elections in that country this year, who won and lost, and how far those results signal something changing or something staying the same in the political conditions. So I’m going to start with the momentous 30-year year test of South African democracy post-apartheid.

KWANELE SOSIBO: Yeah, so I think in a large sense, even as these elections were pretty momentous, I think one can kind of think of the situation in South Africa as largely unchanged as of now. I think the machinations of the election results, which for the first time saw the– which for the first time since 1994, saw the ANC fall below 50%, and not just below 50%, kind of hover at the 40% mark, kind of signals that something momentous is to come.

But the last 30 years have been basically characterized by a stasis of some sort in the sense that at the very beginning of 1994, the so-called post-apartheid period, the ANC found itself having to make many concessions in terms of with the former apartheid state and the interest that it represented, the population groups that were served by those interests.

And so, for example, CODESA, which took place in 1992, in which– from which came out a negotiated settlement, found it created a situation where mining, for example, land redistribution, mining, agriculture, and quite a lot of the financial sector remained in white hands. And that’s been a situation that it’s basically managed through the past three decades.

Some have characterized it as a compradorian sort of party, in essence, in terms of what it was handed and the maneuvers it could make largely because of larger geopolitical sort of happenings around the early ’90s and so on, the fall of the Berlin Wall and what that meant economically worldwide. So with it falling below 50% now, part of that is a manifestation of people’s frustrations on the ground.

But largely, it’s a part of it’s sort of internal erosion as well, which takes shape or is best represented here by the rise of a party called the MK, which styles itself after the moniker of the ANC’s liberation wing. Now, that party is now helmed by the former state president whose name is Jacob Zuma. So the party’s seemed to mushroom right under people’s noses, so to speak, right at the cusp of the election.

So it kind of took a lot of people by surprise, but maybe people who have been kind of watching the attrition of the ANC and its cannibalizing of itself internally weren’t surprised that this happened. So it’s unknown what the results of that will be because, in a way, it’s still partly a manifestation of the ANC just kind of going into disarray. But the rhetoric around this party has kind of caused a lot of people on the ground who are desperate for change to latch on to it as some kind of a vehicle that will take them there.

But obviously, local government elections are coming up in 2016. That’s where the chips fall. I think that’s where maybe we’ll start to see what decisive changes could take place, because what happened with this government of national unity in which the ANC was forced into coalition with the main opposition, which is a white-led party, the Democratic Alliance, was– and other smaller parties as well, was an attempt to circumvent this kind of rising up of the MK.

And I guess in Kwazulu Natal, where the MK is– actually stole a lot of the ANC’s ground and a lot of the other parties’ ground and almost got a 50%– 50 plus 1 majority, missed it by probably a couple of percentage points in that province as well, which is strategic and key because of harbors and so forth, the ANC was able to galvanize the other parties again to circumvent the MK, which only won 15% of the vote nationally.

But in KZN it represented a bigger threat. So they’ve been able to keep it at Bay. But nobody knows as of yet how that situation is going to unfold.

JAMES VERNON: Brilliant, brilliant. Thank you. Alison.

ALISON POST: Thanks. I’m going to be speaking a bit about the Mexican presidential election, which took place in June of this past year. What we saw in that election was the election of Claudia Sheinbaum, who is the hand-picked successor of the prior president, Manuel Lopez Obrador, commonly known as AMLO, from the Morena party. They want a very decisive victory against the PAN, which is the right of center party and a smaller left wing party. Presidential elections just take place every six years in Mexico, and there’s no possibility for re-election.

So this was essentially an election in which AMLO was anointing his hand-picked successor. And it was really a landslide, a landslide victory for Morena with 61% of the vote. At the time, Sheinbaum was the sitting mayor of Mexico City. Morena is emphasized as a left of center party in the Mexican context. At the same time, Morena won a really commanding number of seats in Congress, both in the legislature and in the Senate, and is now in a position to institute or pass constitutional changes following this election.

The results really signal continuity in the Mexican context. Sheinbaum is very much seen as carrying forward AMLO’s program at the moment. She hasn’t done anything yet really to indicate that she’s departing from that. Morena has been in power since 2018, so it’s looking like it’s going to be quite long run. Lopez Obrador had had very high approval ratings throughout his administration.

And now with this new increased control in Congress, the party is in a much better position to move forward with the program they have been advocating for since 2018. So AMLO has been an economic populist, pushing for increased role for the state in the economy, as well as for a movement towards more majoritarian control of political institutions for the country.

So he has been proposing, and these reforms are now moving forward in ways that we’ll talk about in subsequent questions that James has mentioned about unwinding and weakening alternative power centers outside of the executive. So things like the independent electoral commission, the judiciary, regulatory agencies, the press, et cetera.

JAMES VERNON: OK, thank you.

TREVOR JACKSON: OK, well, my remit is Europe. And I mean, one thing about Europe is there’s a lot of it, and it offers us a wide variety of different ways to think about failing. And so I think most of the– to kind of sum together many of the things that I’ll describe, I think we can imagine most of the elections over, not just this year, but the past few years in Europe as a repudiation of a prior politics rather than a coherence around a new one. Just by way preface, I think I would also say that as far as I could tell today, since 2021, there have been 54 national elections in the world, and in 40 of them, the incumbents have lost.

Even among those that the incumbents haven’t lost, there are different ways to lose. So one such example is the case of France, where Ensemble, which is, I think, the third rebranding of Emmanuel Macron’s party that he invented a few years ago, remains in government. But absolutely, every interpretation of that election is one of a repudiation of his party. In the first round, his party came third behind the front popular and behind the right wing coalition.

The actual election was the result of 311 constituencies having three or four candidate run offs, which is the most that has ever happened. And so his party was able to survive, but only through a series of tactical voting, largely on the side of the left to keep out the far right, thanks in no way at all to Macron’s own. So, OK, there’s a case of an incumbent staying in, but it’s still clearly a repudiation of his politics.

The other political story of 2024 was, of course, in Britain, where after 14 years of utterly murderous misrule, the Tories were annihilated and wiped out to their lowest level, I think, in the history of the party. Keir Starmer, the leader of Labor, has already seen his approval ratings utterly collapse. This was a repudiation of the Tories, not so much a move towards some sort of durable new Labor politics. If we’re able to step back a couple of years, another example that we might point to is the case of Italy, where Mario Draghi, former Goldman Sachs executive, MIT economist, chair of the European Central Bank, had led a government that he was appointed to.

They were wiped out. And now Giorgia Meloni is the leader of the Brothers of Italy Party, which has emerged as the largest party in Italy. They are an explicitly far right, xenophobic political party. Somewhere like Spain, the government survived, but at the cost of completely restructuring the governing coalition. Germany has been the great exception to the story of instability in European politics over the last couple of decades. And we have just now seen their governing coalition collapse, and they’re going to have elections next year.

So a great deal of instability. And I think maybe to pick on a couple of already obvious threads, a story in which attempts to form coalition governments have unraveled and a great deal of difficulty reconstructing some sort of political center.

AARTI SETHI: So I am going to talk very briefly about India, as we– this was a very, very significant election for many reasons. It was an election following on the last two elections in which the Bharatiya Janata Party, which is the party led by the current prime Minister Narendra Modi, had won– had done what no party had been able to do before him for the last two decades, which was an era of coalition politics in India, and had managed to take his party, the BJP, which is a far right Hindu nationalist party, to a kind of landslide victory in the parliament.

India has 543 seats, and so the BJP emerged as the single largest party in both those elections and which means that it could rule singlehandedly without the support of any other parties, which has been rare, which has not been the case in India for the last 25– 20 years, actually, almost three decades. And so it was very much an election.

And these last 10 years have consolidated Modi as a populist, charismatic leader, as a leader who, in a sense, goes it alone, much like Trump, where the party falls in line behind the leader, as a man who is able to command a kind of cross caste, cross class presence, someone who has concentrated the power of the executive into himself.

And he’s widely credited with, in a sense, running a parliamentary democracy, like a presidential– like a presidential system where he is where, in a sense, not just material power has concentrated on the prime minister’s office, but also symbolic power in the figure of Modi. And so this election was touted as one in which Modi would prove after Nehru that he was going to be the first prime minister after Indian independence, after Nehru, the first prime minister of India, who would win a third term and be in that sense, the longest running prime minister of India.

And that has happened, but certainly not in a way that the BJP expected. All exit polls, basically, which turns out were rigged, predicted a kind of landslide victory for his party. But that landslide victory did not happen. The BJP has come back to power. He is the prime minister, but the BJP and its allies suffered a very decisive blow. So the BJP has come back to power, but they have had to come back to power in a coalition government for the first time since they have come to power in the center.

And more importantly, and what is significant about the election is that it has dented– and this is probably its biggest gain– it sort of dented Modi’s image as an invincible man who cannot be defeated, because that is what the last 10 years of Modi rule seemed to suggest, that he is a kind of Teflon prime minister, that nothing he does can shake his sort of preternatural hold over the mind of the Indian electorate over the Indian polity.

And so this kind of shock and awe mode of running a government where the mishandling of the COVID crisis, the demonetization of the Indian economy, the successive worsening of the living conditions of most Indians, the extraordinary exacerbation of social inequality, the kind of crony capitalism, intense corruption in the government, that all of this– despite all of this, Modi’s kind of charisma is unshaken.

And what this election has done is to shatter that. It is to basically say that Modi is not a prime minister who cannot be defeated. And so prior to the election, he made the claim that he was fighting– There? Are 543 seats in the parliament, and that he was personally fighting on all 540. And so when the BJP has lost, and it especially lost in some of its key holds in the North, it’s seen as a moral defeat of the prime minister.

And that, if there’s anything that has been achieved, we don’t know actually what the long term outcomes will be. But this is– it is significant. It’s significant for this kind of reason, the sort of symbolic shattering of Modi’s power.

JAMES VERNON: Great. That’s brilliant. And we already have lots of overlapping themes between you, which is really great. So let’s try and make sense of these shifts that you’ve all been talking about, which with the exception of Alison and Mexico, seems to cohere to this story that Trevor was suggesting of a sort of revolt against the incumbent. Yeah, however entrenched in power they are as the ANC or the BJP.

So what’s your reading of how we understand that type of revolt, if it is a revolt against an incumbent? Are we thinking that this is– that there’s a political analysis here, which is about people’s exhaustion or loss of faith in the institutions of government and of democratic processes in and of themselves? Or the other frequent explanation proffered here is that there’s a materialist explanation, which is people are hurting, whether you’re in a country that produces stuff or you’re a country that consumes stuff, you’re not having a great time.

And so there’s a clear attempt to vote people out of office because people are having an economically hard time. I’m interested in how you would all try and figure out what’s happening, both in your own cases and in others. And because Mexico seems to be the sort of exception in terms of the incumbent revolt, let’s start with Alison.

ALISON POST: Yeah, I mean, you could even think about AMLO’s victory in 2018 as representing perhaps that shift that you’re describing. So the 2024 election really was kind of an endorsement of– a popular endorsement of the approach that he had been developing over the previous six years. The Morena’s support base is comprised primarily of the working class, younger people, rural areas, Indigenous populations, as well as those who had placed themselves on the ideological left.

So in some sense, this is a support of that program, of those groups. His overall policy program has focused on addressing poverty. And in fact, a number of new social programs were rolled out that contributed to satisfaction with his performance, although in comparative terms, I would say the Mexican economic performance has really been middling and hasn’t been by any means outstanding in the Latin American context in his administration.

But in particular, the rhetoric that Morena has used and that AMLO has used is really sort of an anti-system rhetoric that maybe we could tie to these other cases. So it’s very much of a us versus them. We are the masses versus the elites type rhetoric, which he exemplifies in his personal style refusing to use the presidential plane, reducing salaries, his own salary, those of top bureaucrats, railing against the conservative media.

And then looking for ways in which to elevate popular opinion but in a way that is not necessarily systematic in the same way that we might have an election. So for example, structuring ad hoc referenda on public projects and then canceling them. So for example, there was a long running construction project for a new airport for Mexico City. They put that up for referenda.

It didn’t win, and so they went to instead expanding an existing military airport instead. So arguably, taking decisions where the public didn’t necessarily have full information, putting it out to public vote, et cetera. He’s also elevated, very visibly, the role of the state vis a vis foreign investors. So strengthening state-owned enterprises by restricting opportunities for foreign investors in those areas, sometimes in ways that conflict with his own government’s environmental objectives.

So, for example, giving more control to the state electricity monopoly in the generation space when it was foreign investors bringing in the green investment into that sector. But the kind of broader picture is consistent with this kind of anti-system, anti neoliberalism approach that represents a repudiation of prior approaches.

And I’d say the final example of that is turning to the sort of an emphasis on nationalism that we see in things like turning to the military to perform functions that wouldn’t necessarily have been traditionally performed by the military, like managing public works projects or turning the war against cartels away from state level or municipal police officers to the military.

JAMES VERNON: Brilliant. Kwanele, do you want to talk about where you think that the– taming is the wrong word, but the shrinking of the ANC base, what’s motivating because it’s been going– this isn’t the first election. It’s been a progressive policy– a progressive trend, but this election seems to have been a decisive moment. And I’m wondering if you have any thoughts about what’s driving that.

KWANELE SOSIBO: I think we can think of what’s happening as a nannying of the ANC in some way because the coalition sort of called the Government of National Unity, largely supported by the DA, which is the biggest opposition party, the white-led party with the large white constituency.

So I think in a sense, like the ANC’s lack of controls over its cadres, which it’s deployed in various government departments and so on. And that sort of deployment of cadres was a way of dispensing patronage within the party. I think that sort of deteriorated through a lack of accountability and a lack of recourse to people who were plundering the public purse.

And, of course, ANC factionalism also led to a further entrenching of patronage as a system of keeping factions in place. But that lack of governance also allowed, I think, private sector interests to thrive in the health sector, in the education sector, in the energy sector. So it was kind of good for business interests that the ANC kind of was in collapse.

A couple of years ago, I think maybe probably 15 or so years ago, there was the emergence of– with the emergence of Jacob Zuma, who kind of– I think, his presidency represented a little bit of an upsetting of that cozy relationship between ANC and business to some extent in the extent that he allowed new people to enter the fray. Much has been made of his relationship with, for example, the Gupta family, a kind of oligarchic family from India with interests in different parts of the world.

Much was made of how that was a kind of a steep descent into the pilfering of the public purse for personal interests and for interests of this family. But that represented a kind of– maybe a departure with cozier relationships, say, with established capitalist interests with Mbeki and so forth. So I think, by and large, that led to a capturing of very key strategic resources in the country, and they fell into the lap of Zuma and his cronies.

And so what I think you have with the emergence of Cyril Ramaphosa in 2017 is an attempt to remedy that, to steer it back to the usual course, which, by and large, kind of overarchingly structures this relationship between the ANC and business and obviously has colonial roots in and of itself. So I think that’s maybe how you could characterize the GNU in its current state.

But what you also have is because of this lack of governance is huge agitation on the ground from the poor masses and so forth. And that has tended to take the form of xenophobia. Like, for example, everybody, everybody, every party smaller than the ANC campaigned around xenophobia. And xenophobia in the sense, it takes on many forms. But one of the form it takes on is it’s obviously brought on by corruption within Home Affairs, which allows the borders to be porous in a way.

So this large influx of people from the SADC region and in fact further afield even provides a very sort of cheap labor pool, which– and I think in the South African case, it’s not a case of people at the bottom of the economic ladder don’t want to take on these jobs. It’s more like these people are open to be exploited by South Africa’s largely very developed, sort of capitalist markets, which can absorb them into service industry jobs.

And they get exploited quite treacherously. But the capitalist class obviously exploits this. But I think it’s also now coming to bite because it’s obviously starting to lead to huge, huge tensions on the ground. So I think that would be a characterization, I think, at this point, yeah.

JAMES VERNON: Great. Trevor or Aarti, do you want to comment?

AARTI SEHTI: So one of the interesting things about this election is that the way it’s being read by commentators is that economic issues are back on the table in a very big way. And what Modi’s kind of rise to power had seemed to do was to consolidate– and this was his kind of creativeness as a politician, ever since his days where he began as chief minister in Gujarat, was to consolidate a Hindutva, a kind of Hindu identity, which was a cross caste identity.

The political scientist Christopher Jaffrelot, has a very persuasive reading of the rise of Hindutva. And he has essentially– has this description, which is that from the 1990s onwards, one can look at the terrain of Indian political life as a kind of contest between middle and lower caste assertion, a kind of democratization of Indian politics and the Indian political field that happened after the demise of the congress.

And the mandal, which was a kind of reservations for middle for middle and backward castes in jobs and government jobs and government educational institutions and so on in the early 1990s, where a new constituency actually entered into the structures of Indian political life, who had, in a sense, been marginalized through the era of Congress dominated politics.

Which the Congress party was– post-independence Congress party very much was a kind of clientelistic umbrella party which worked through local landed interests across the country. And this shattering of Congress dominance through the 1980s and this new kind of democratization is where then you have the era of coalition politics beginning. You then have liberalization.

And this upsurge of these middle and backward castes was viewed with a great deal of worry and anxiety by the RSS and by the BJP, who have– whose entire political kind of project is based on creating a seamless Hindu identity. And that Hindu identity has been created through all kinds of mechanisms, extraordinary polarization of public and social life, the continuous demonization of Muslims and minorities, Christians.

The kind of tentacular efforts of the RSS and all of the BJP-allied Hindu organizations through society. All of this created a– very successfully, Narendra Modi was able to exploit this Hindu– this kind of massive rightward movement of Indian polity along with these new aspirations brought on by liberalization in which the economy opened and opportunities expanded, but for a very small elite.

And all of this sort of comes to a head in the mid decades of 2014, by which time you have a lot of disaffection among many classes of people against an incumbent Congress government, which is seen as having created jobs for a small minority along– and Modi is able to mobilize this resentment and cast it in this– alongside this very potent cocktail mix of Hindutva and class and caste resentment.

That has, in a sense, shattered. And it’s shattered because over the last 10 years, this mix, in a sense, has– the limit of that kind of politics of his has been made evident now in this election, which is that this cross caste identity that the BJP had created has– caste is again back on the table in a very big way.

So all of this rhetoric of India moving forward– because this is what got a lot of people to vote for him, this idea that he is an outsider against the elitism of the congress, that he’s a man of the people who comes. He’s a speaker. He’s a doer. He is– connects with the dreams and aspirations of ordinary Indians against these elite– the elite of New Delhi and the Congress party.

His cozying up to big business, all of this created a– has, over the last 10 years, alienated very large numbers of people. And so the social compact that he had managed to create, The contradictions of that social compact, of radical joblessness, of crony capitalism, of– and so his rhetoric this time, which was one of the most communal campaigns India has ever seen, didn’t work.

And so even though the entire campaign of the BJP was aimed at stoking kind of resentment against Muslims and minorities, people finally voted again, in a sense, in a normal way, which is that people voted on what are called pocketbook issues in India after, we could say, 10 years of aberrant politics. Now, whether that sustains, we don’t know. But that’s the kind of broad terrain.

JAMES VERNON: So, Trevor, how does the nativism in Europe align or misalign with the material challenge of– challenges there?

TREVOR JACKSON: Well, so I think three things about this. And the first is that I think we are now something like 15 years into a giant global crisis of political legitimacy that I think I imagine will get to the fallout of the 2008 crisis, but that, I think, began then. And that has had the effect in some cases of a crisis of political legitimacy of politics as such or of political systems as such.

But I also think that it means that legitimacy has been up for grabs and that– on to the second point, that legitimacy seems to have been something able to be seized, not necessarily by new political movements that reflect existing material divisions, but that are able to reconstitute or reinvigorate or create new forms of political subjectivity, that we’re seeing the emergence of new types of identities that are able to be articulated, almost all of which have turned out to be exclusionary and xenophobic and racist in some way.

And it seems to me that most attempts at the creation of a new– well, of egalitarian universalist left political subjectivities have been defeated, either through the complicity of the center with a far right or perhaps because they’ve sometimes failed to articulate a new vision that they’re trying to, like, recreate a left subjectivity from some moment in a lost past rather than recognizing the current situation. And so it seems that there’s been a much more successful effect around constituting new political subjectivities that are in some way exclusionary and xenophobic.

That does and doesn’t map on to the actual material inequalities and realities. And that brings me, I think, to the third point, which I’m a historian, I’m going to reference books from the past, in his 1993 book, Politics and the People, our chair of this panel proposes that we can think about elections as a kind of text to be read and a text that is written. And it’s a text in which voters act out some imported melodramatic narrative that they think that they’re living through.

And one such narrative possibility is a romance, and not a romance in a, well, romantic sense, but a romance in the sense of some self-fashioning and overcoming the constraints of society, the kind of hero’s journey. And it seems to me that political movements that have successfully implanted themselves in that way have won in ways that others have not, that the performance of not being bound by social rules seems to be something that voters respond to.

And so we get these weird things where these political leaders seem to be able to do things that we would have otherwise would have thought to be impossible and seem to not face consequences for things that we would have previously thought would have been annihilatory, but nevertheless, there they are exactly because the performance of not being bound is something that seems resonant to people.

JAMES VERNON: Yeah.

AARTI SEHTI: I completely agree with you, Trevor. And what is interesting about the rise of the BJP– and I would really be interested to hear what others who are working on these other– in these other contexts, Mexico, South Africa feel about this– in India, we’ve seen in the last 10 years or– yeah, in the last 10 years, I would say, a massive transformation in the imagination of the relation between the state and people.

Till about the early 2000s, there was this kind of rights-based framework had emerged in which the state welfare was part of the social compact of citizenship, this is kind of Yamnaya. She writes very interestingly about social policy in India, and she has this– she’s written this very interesting paper where she talks about a kind of new techno patrimonialism as the mode now of– and this is what we see in India– where it is not– it is because the post liberalization economy has been so unequal and has left out most sections of Indian society.

India is one of the most unequal countries in the world. Only like 10% of the population controls 77% of national wealth. And 1% of the population controls 40% of national wealth. And so. This kind of India’s kind of growth story of 7% GDP growth a year and so on is one that has essentially been a jobless, unequal kind of growth.

Now, the response, strangely, of the state– and it’s not strange, it’s an interesting development– is that instead of investing in the creation of public goods like health, like education, skills, infrastructure, there has been– and this is the kind of rise of this whole technology, that the state now relies on cash transfers to the poor, what are called direct benefit transfers.

So the people no longer are seen as rights bearers who have a claim on the state, but as beneficiaries of targeted schemes, women, youth, unemployed. So the people now are a population of direct– of beneficiaries, which in a sense, flows from the generosity of the leader.

And it is in this context then that Narendra Modi’s charisma also for the last 10 years has devolved on this intense publicity of him as the paternalistic leader who gives the Indian people things his face on every COVID certificate, his face on every scheme, cooking gas subsidies for Indian women, and so and so scheme for Indian youth and so and so scheme.

It’s this kind of scheme-driven politics where everything seems to flow from the paternalism of the leader in this kind of technocratic mode of governance. And all of these bureaucrats who see themselves as technocrats. What this election was interesting was that lots of people began to say, I don’t want 2,000. rupees What am I going to do with 2,000 rupees?

I don’t want 5 kilos of grain. Like, 5 kilos of grain is not going to feed my family for even a month. I want a job. We want a job. Why don’t they fix Health Just one last thing, if you look at the career of a party called the Aam Aadmi Party in Delhi, which came out of nowhere, it’s kind of civic party that came out of nowhere in the last 10 years, what they did was they said, we will fix schools and we will fix education.

And so that’s what they did. They fixed the schools and they fixed the education, and they have managed somehow to retain power at the level of the state because they have articulated a kind of welfarist agenda in the face of this decline of welfarism and the rise of this kind of techno patrimonialism what I would be interested to see post this election is if this older imagination of the state and citizens as having a right on the state for the creation of public goods has a way to make–

If that is again a political– if parties can continue to win– begin to win on a welfarist agenda again as opposed to this kind of technocracy that has come into being under Narendra Modi, where it’s personalized and himself and he has this direct address through cash benefits to individual voters.

JAMES VERNON: I’m going to ask you one last question, you all, because I’m conscious of how quickly the time is. So let’s try and keep it brief. And it’s really to pick up on the election that we’ve all just lived through in the US, where the rhetoric of the crisis of democracy was claimed by all sides. And this seems to be a common feature in all of the elections we’ve seen around the world, that democracy and the protection of democracy is variously interpreted but constantly articulated.

And so I wonder whether you have any thoughts about what’s actually going on there and whether there’s anything useful that we can say about the way in which democracy is invoked to defend what’s up for grabs.

KWANELE SOSIBO: Yeah, I think, firstly, to just to Aarti and Trevor, the romanticism around Zuma is kind of that he’s also been indestructible and he’s emerged after all of these attempts to go for his jugular and he’s emerged victorious. I think that’s part of his popular appeal. But to talk to the crisis of democracy, I think in South Africa, it often feels like the populace, voting or non-voting, it’s often been characterized by large so-called apathy.

But I don’t think it’s apathy. I think it’s really people grappling at where to go and what to choose, given the options that they are facing. It often feels like nobody is really up to the challenge of what the society presents and everybody is kind of using. Electoral politics as a way of looting the fiscus and kind of re-emerging as the singular political figures.

So I think, like 2021, when there was a looting sort of spree that was sparked by Jacob Zuma, kind of absconding from the state capture commission of inquiry, where he was kind of like being brought to account for the plundering of the state through this cronyism and his association with this oligarchic family that had entrenched itself into the South African state, I think what we witnessed there was one man’s ability to mobilize millions of poor people.

And the death toll of that event, which a lot of people forget, was in the region of about 500 people or so. So it was kind of on the scale of June 16, 1976, when young people were actually marching on legitimate grounds and catapulting the downfall of apartheid. But here you kind of have this party hemorrhaging from inside, and it leads to such a dastardly catastrophe, which kind of reshaped society in immeasurable ways.

It kind of brought to the surface racial tensions that had been simmering for a long time and going unchecked. It also brought into to the fore the enclavism that is at the heart of South African society, you know, the rich can always retreat to estates and big fenced walls and are armed to the teeth and they can kind of emerge and wave their guns when the situation calls for it.

And when you look at what do people have to gain and what gains do we have to show for 30 years of democracy? It’s really like next to nothing, yeah.

JAMES VERNON: Alison.

ALISON POST: Right. So I think in the Mexican case, what we see are two– this is simplifying, of course– but two quite different views of what constitutes democracy and how to achieve it. And we need to think about that against the backdrop of 20th century Mexican history, which was characterized by essentially one party rule within the context of regular elections where the PRI was always going to win. That was clear to everyone. You had opposition parties running, but the electoral victory of the PRI was just always understood that was going to happen.

And for a while, as a big tent party, they spanned much of the ideological spectrum. And it’s as you move into the 1980s with neoliberal reforms that you see these divisions developing between the technocrats who are educated in economics departments, the United States and the more traditional politicians. And at that point, you have a left of center party that breaks off. AMLO is one of the leaders in that shift, that party system, and then to eventually transition a Democratic transition in 2000 at the National level in which the center right party wins against the PRI.

And during that period of one-party rule, things like the press were not independent. I mean, they were on the payroll. Most major journalists were on the payroll of the party. Fraud was used, not always– it wasn’t used in a way often that was decisive in elections. The PRI typically won the majority of the votes outright and just padded it a bit so it looked like an overwhelming victory. But there’s a history of a sense of democratic institutions aren’t necessarily Democratic, particularly in a context with very high levels of inequality historically.

And then López Obrador in particular has a number of unsuccessful runs for the presidency before he actually wins. And he is convinced that there has been fraud, absolutely convinced that the National Electoral Institute did not administer the elections fairly. And so he builds up a new party that’s coming from a grass roots, more of a grass roots base to essentially challenge the existing system.

And so now what you see is this tension between that view of democracy, which is very much we need to challenge the existing institutions and party structure because they’re associated with this old regime with elite control, et cetera, with another vision, which is championed more by members of the middle class, educated groups, professionals, et cetera, which actually has a lot of faith in the institutions that have been developed post-transition.

In particular, this National Electoral Institute, which was pivotal in terms of facilitating the transition from one-party rule to democratic competition post 2000. And so now there are a set of constitutional reforms, some of which have already gone through, others of which AMLO simply proposed prior to leaving office that represent shifts or potential shifts from the sort of view of democracy that involves checks and balances and independent institutions kind of constraining each other towards a more majoritarian system, which is what AMLO and his movement is moving for.

And so things like. do we popularly elected judges rather than have them be chosen on the basis of professional experience and these sort of things? And that has recently gone through the Supreme Court, the move towards popularly electing all judges. They have just– in October, a new constitutional change went through that stops courts from reviewing legislation passed by Congress. And so there are a number of other proposed reforms, things like taking all of the independent regulatory agencies and moving their functions to line ministries, as well as taking–

Making the electoral officials within– basically changing the institutional structure for managing elections such that electoral officials are elected rather than being kind of an independent board that oversees elections. So it’s a lot of shifts that are kind of removing checks and balances that have certain constituencies very concerned. So just these two very different competing notions of what constitutes democracy against a very difficult history in which you really had elections, but they weren’t really free.

JAMES VERNON: Either of you want to have a very quick word on this?

TREVOR JACKSON: Just very briefly, one of the striking things about the past few years is that although there’s a great drama of these incumbents losing elections and a lot of the characters are kind of larger than life, that obscures the way that many of these elections are the result of very low turnout and some large degree of democratic disaffection. So, OK, there’s a dramatic shift in Britain, but that was the lowest turnout election thus far this century. And Giorgia Meloni comes to power in 2022 in Italy, and the lowest turnout election in post-war Italian politics.

And one way of reading the 2024 American election isn’t that it was a stampeding victory for Donald Trump and the Republicans. It was that it was a turnout collapse for the Democrats. And I think we’ve probably talked a lot, you’ve probably read a lot and heard a lot about all of these shifts of different demographic groups from Democrats and Republicans. Well, that’s a shift of the people who showed up to vote. And another way of reading this is that a whole bunch of people who showed up to vote in 2020 didn’t in 2024.

And one way that we might interpret that, which kind of picks up on some of the elements of my co-panelists here is that, well, look, the Democrats were trying to put together a coalition that, in their words, ran from Chomsky to Cheney. Well, that is itself already a failure of some sort of Democratic process to set aside the formalism of the Democratic process of not having a primary season.

If you’re in that kind of world, at some level, repudiation of that is a repudiation of a larger set of Democratic failures that have already happened and, I think, a repudiation of a willingness to believe the claims of the threats of democracy being in peril, that I just think if the Democratic Party genuinely believed that Trump was the end of American democracy, they would not be or, at least, should not be handing over the reins of power and authority in the way that they are. And so that makes me think they just don’t take it seriously.

And if they don’t take it seriously, well, then it’s hard for me to be mobilized to a politics that then would put me in the same political party as, like, a Bush era war criminal.

AARTI SEHTI: I mean, the–

JAMES VERNON: Very, very quick, Aarti.

AARTI SEHTI: Yeah, very quick, India is actually a intensely multi-party system because it’s a federal country and there are very, very strong regional parties. So very quickly, one of the things that happened in the last 10 years with the Modi regime was it appeared as though federalism is under great threat, this kind of enormous centralization of the polity. And what, again, this election is doing is hopefully reigniting and creating, again, a kind of coalition government where the BJP will be forced now, we hope, to be in coalition with strong regional parties.

So that’s one thing that is unique about India is the fact that it is a multi-party system. There are very strong regional parties which the party at the center has to make compacts with. The Modi era was, again, an aberrant era after the Congress, that is, where they didn’t have to do that. And I think Democratic opening will hopefully mean that this era of coalition governments actually comes back again.

JAMES VERNON: Great. We have time for questions, and I have a mic that you have to hold in order to ask a question. Does anyone have a question? And do us a favor and tell us who you are when you ask your question.

AUDIENCE: Hi, I’m Nat Arutasi. I’m a post-doc in history. So I have a question. We talked a little bit about the material conditions, but I have a specific question about inflation. So a lot of Democrats here have been consoling themselves that all globally incumbents haven’t been able to prevail because of this force from without that’s called inflation that they can’t control. And so I know it seems that the Mexican case proves that that’s not true and maybe a little bit the Indian case.

I also think, you know, in Turkey, Erdogan also prevailed, despite rampant inflation there. So yeah, I’m wondering if you could reflect a bit about the role of inflation in these elections and if the incumbents somehow that prevailed were able to manage it better or just the role of inflation in general.

TREVOR JACKSON: Well, everybody looked at me.

JAMES VERNON: They all will have to answer. So go on.

TREVOR JACKSON: I think my answer to that is that across the board, voters say inflation was a problem, cost of living is a problem, we want this solved. I think, though, that too could have been something that would have been fertile ground or maybe in some cases was for a set of claims to who is a friend and who is an enemy and like how a political subjectivity is constituted. Inflation isn’t just a thing that happens. It goes somewhere. And I mean particularly in the US case, when you break down the sources of inflation, it’s housing, health care, food, and fuel.

Well, OK, that’s not just the weather that happens. There are some people benefiting from those things. A political movement could have cast those people as villains who were the result of everyone suffering rather than either claiming that this isn’t happening, which the only other post-election panel I’ve been on was with a bunch of political scientists who were baffled because they felt that real wages had increased relative to prices.

And so why were people upset? Well, maybe that’s true, but I’m not sure that has been the lived experience of most people. And instead, in absence of a clear narrativity that explains how and why this has happened and whose fault it is, well, then it’s the fault of whoever is in power.

ALISON POST: Yeah, I’ll just say briefly, I think it’s also important to think about how current rates compare to historic rates and the frame of reference that people are coming in with. And I would say that in the Mexican case, historically, perhaps there were higher rates of– the rates in this recent period weren’t as different as previous periods. So you see a huge distinction though between the Argentine case elections in November 2023 and this inflation there.

They’ve had an entire restructuring of the political system because the Peronists were– lost the support of the working class because of inflation. They had just become completely discredited by their inability to contain inflation in a way that they can make up for with social handouts. And that’s how that explains Milei’s rise in Argentina.

AARTI SEHTI: Oh, yeah, in India, inflation was– it was absolutely one of the determining facets of this election. And what also happened, inflation is very high, food inflation, cost of living very, very high, fuel inflation very high. And the opposition was able to use all of this to their advantage. A lot of their ads, for instance, centered on inflation and the cost of living.

But they were also able to basically use this to target the Ambanis and the Adanis, which was to basically create a narrative about how, while the cost of living for normal people was going through the roof and people couldn’t afford atti dal kabhaab, which is the cost of lentils and the cost of flour. The BJP was making massive handouts to the capitalist class symbolized in these two industrial houses. Adani and Ambani, who are– I mean, they owned Narendra Modi, was the kind of rhetoric. So yes, inflation swung this election, I think.

AUDIENCE: Yeah, thank you so much. Professor of political science at Temple University and based at the Berkeley Economy and Society Initiative this year. Yeah, this is just such a wonderful panel. And as I listened to the different countries that were brought up and these different kind of factors, is it about anti-incumbent politics? And then also hearing about limits of explanations on politics of identity or limits on the racial resentment explanation.

And so I guess I’m just– I don’t know if it’s more of a thought or a comment, but just thinking about then where are we going, like, in the future? Is it about– At the end, democracy was brought up. And I think in Africa, in South Africa case, kind of a lack of solutions. But then Alison Post, you mentioned, well, in the Mexico case, there are these kind of democratic institutions that might still have strength and kind of played a role, particularly if you look across time of where the Mexican kind of landscape is going to.

But then when we look at the American case, we see folks who are so disenchanted with democratic institutions that maybe they’re not even coming out to vote. So I guess my question for all of you, if you have thoughts about this, is, well, what’s the future if it’s not about necessarily the politics of identity or maybe the limits to the racial resentment– or I’m sorry, the economic explanations?

How can we think about where– are we just going to continue to have these different pathways? Or how can we think about what’s going to happen next? Yeah.

AARTI SEHTI: You want to go first?

JAMES VERNON: Well, I think what’s started to happen in South Africa is that how news is consumed and how issues are understood, that has started to shift in the sense that new technology has brought about new commentators and new ways of engaging the current situation. I think, for me, I’m encouraged just listening to the political analysis emerging out of young people.

And also, I think there’s been an emergence of parties, even though marginal in terms of how much they were able to gain, in terms of percentage in the election, how many votes they were able to get, what you do have is kind of like people kind of taking this huge political shift that is still kind of waiting to be seen in terms of what it transpires to be.

I think people are kind of stepping into that breach and kind of thinking about citizen power in a more egalitarian way. And also, I think South Africa also is lucky in that it possesses a lot of soft power. Its cultural outputs continues to have relevance globally, be it in fine arts, be it in music, and in other forms of expression.

And I think that sort of creativity can kind allow new narratives to emerge and kind of new ways of breaking out of the stranglehold of electoral politics.

ALISON POST: So just in the Mexican case, I could see two possible pathways and I have no idea which one is going to prevail. One pathway is you essentially see the weakening of these various veto players or constraining institutions in the Mexican case, and you move back more into this pattern of one party dominance that we’ve seen historically. The other scenario then, which is it’s not uncommon in the Latin American context, is that the hand-picked successor eventually separates herself or himself from the patron.

And Sheinbaum is a very different pedigree than AMLO. She has a PhD in a science field. She worked on the international climate change report. She could end up– once she has had sufficient space to develop her own support network and alliances, she may be able to shift in a way that allows her to divert the kind of train from the direction that’s currently headed in, which would kind of leave more room for political pluralism in the way we’ve traditionally thought about it in an institutional sense. And so we have to see how things play out over the next year.

TREVOR JACKSON: I’m going to be extremely brief because historians shouldn’t be believed about the future. And so instead, I will I’m going to pose a question to all of you, which is what resources exist, institutional, energetic, financial or otherwise, to build a kind of countervailing politics to the xenophobic, anti-egalitarian, exclusionary politics that we’ve seen emerge around the world? What resources are there to oppose that?

AARTI SEHTI: I mean, I don’t know actually what it looks like. I think the entrenchment of anti-Muslim othering is very, very deep now in India. I think there has been a kind of deep social transformation. It’s not complete. India’s 1.4 billion people, so really, any claims to be made about social forms are always contingent.

I think the way forward, if there is one, is to really, really focus on– is to focus actually on the material conditions. They are not sufficient ever, of course. I think that’s what the rise of the BJP shows us, right, this question, why do people vote against their own class interests? Well, because people desire many things, and one of those things is a sense of self and symbolic resources. And the BJP has been able to offer those to large numbers of people.

There’s a long history to why and what. I hope that, again, that the states– that politics will move to the states in a big way because each of those have very different histories. The Southern states have deep, again, rooted democratic traditions and maybe– and those have always been very strong and vibrant. But I think that the future of what democracy looks like in India is very much an open question right now. I don’t really have– I don’t want to speculate on that.

JAMES VERNON: I love the fact that Kwanele has asked us to think about art and culture as a domain where new alliances and new visions can be enacted. We have time for one last question, which is from–

AUDIENCE: Yeah, that was such a great way to end. I hate to drag it back down into the morass of a more detailed question, but so I wanted to pick up on some of what’s been said by the panelists. And so a lot of what we’ve been talking about is a revolt against incumbency. And I really liked Aarti’s periodization schema of going back to the 1990s, the post 1989 moment in which a lot of these parties that we associate with incumbents and a kind of anti-incumbency cycle really kind of gained traction and form and the kind of identity of their politics, particularly in India.

I’m thinking of the Congress in the US with the Democrats under Clinton and its aftermath. And there are lots of things, as we’ve been talking about, that unite these parties globally, not only their emergence and sort of reconstitution in this moment, but one of the things that is also sort of shared amongst them is a kind of revulsion and a kind of– and sort of Trevor touched on this a little bit, a kind of hatred of doing popular politics or being perceived to be as engaged in a kind of populism from the left in particular.

So I’m wondering why you think that kind of style and that kind of symbolism associated with earlier moments of liberal politics is sort of no longer– seems to be kind of no longer present or sort of no longer part of the repertoire or political vocabularies of these parties. I think in the Indian case, it’s really fascinating where one of the kind of galvanizing, symbolic moments prior to the last election were these marches that Rahul Gandhi took, right?

And it was this– it was a very direct attempt, actually, to reconnect with a kind of populist sensibility and a move away from the sort of critique of elitism that had sort of enabled Modi’s rise. So I’m curious why the kind of why the kind of hatred of doing politics or the revulsion of doing politics and sort of, is that a kind of future for these liberal center left coalitions?

AARTI SEHTI: Say something very quickly? India is interesting because voter turnouts are very, very high, very high. Almost 70% of its– it’s very high voter turnout. You’re absolutely right. I think one of the things that they are doing, especially the Congress, Rahul Gandhi’s marches were a way to re-mobilize, re-energize a Congress base where the cadre-based party had basically– its own internal structure had been completely, like– it had been decimated, really, over the last 20 years for all kinds of reasons.

But I think much of the energy and invigoration of the opposition in this election came from the opposition parties doing politics again, especially the Congress party, very, very much so. And Rahul Gandhi saying we’re doing– we’re going out to the people again. We’re rebuilding the Congress from the ground up. Now, whether they have– how successfully they’ve done that remains to be seen. But yeah, that was certainly what happened in this election as well.

ALISON POST: I would say in the case of Morena, they have actually a quite well-developed grassroots infrastructure that has really been helpful for them in terms of building up their electoral majority at the national level. And their form of doing that has been more of the politics you’re describing than the traditional grassroots type network that the PRI administered, which in some cases, involved vote buying and exchanges of favors.

And so there’s, in some sense, a part of the reaction against the system is a reaction against that old form of clientelistic networks. But Morena has been using grassroots mobilization in a different sense, in an effort to differentiate themselves and build up a popular support base that looks quite different than what the PRI was able to use over time.

KWANELE SOSIBO: So I don’t know if I’m answering your question, but I can say that, in the case of the MK, let’s take this party that’s kind of eaten what was remaining of the ANC majority, at the moment, it’s kind of starting to recruit, credible leaders from other formations to the left of the ANC, in particular the EFF. It could go either of two ways, right, because on one sense, you get the sense that it’s working backwards, right?

It comes out of this fissure of the ANC, but it suddenly realizes that there’s real people’s aspirations that are also in its hands, firmly in its hands now. And I think it’s starting to build structures and it’s starting to recruit certain people who are considered credible, particularly in terms of their political capabilities. So I think for some people, they do see a real opportunity kind of emerging out of this as a way of this party being somehow a vehicle to provide the opportunity for a new politics to emerge.

TREVOR JACKSON: I mean, I think–

JAMES VERNON: Try and keep it hopeful again. Don’t bring us down.

TREVOR JACKSON: Oh, no. [CHUCKLES] I’m going to fail at that, James. I think two answers that are related, and one is that the parsimonious answer is that these parties do what their donors want them to do. And in the Chomsky to Cheney coalition, the donors are not on the Chomsky end. They’re on the other end. They are opposed to doing those kinds of politics. And so for that reason, a party like the Democrats are happier being a losing party of capital than a winning party of Labor.

And their leadership– and this is the second reason– is more concerned about their power within the organization than the organization’s power in the world. And so these parties are also not only are opposed to doing popular politics, but they’re also implacably opposed to internal democracy and are very good at keeping out challengers within the parties. And so the struggle over the control of the Labor Party, ultimately resolving against internal democracy is a good example of that.

JAMES VERNON: And on that cheery note, can we give these people a massive round of applause?

[APPLAUSE]

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

New Directions

New Directions in the Study of Labor

silhouettes of various people representing the labor workforce

In this “New Directions” panel, recorded on December 2, 2024, an interdisciplinary group of UC Berkeley graduate students explored the evolving dynamics of work, management, and labor organization.

The panel featured research by three current Berkeley PhD students: William Darwell (Jurisprudence and Social Policy), Kristy Kim (Economics), and Vera Parra (Sociology). The panel was moderated by John Logan, Visiting Scholar at the UC Berkeley Labor Center.

The presenters’ studies focus on such topics as the impact of pension systems on workforce participation, labor union organizing in automotive supply chains across North America, and how different political and economic systems influence workplace management practices.

This event was co-sponsored by the Institute for Research on Labor and Employment (IRLE), the UC Berkeley Labor Center, and the Berkeley Law Program in Jurisprudence and Social Policy. 

Panelists

William Darwall

William Darwall is a PhD candidate in Jurisprudence and Social Policy at Berkeley Law working on social, political, and legal theory of work, the workplace, and its management. Will’s dissertation employs a critical historical account of the emergence and ongoing development of the science of management to reframe and reconstruct normative debates over the legitimacy and appropriate legal regulation of workplace hierarchy, authority, and control. Special attention, here, is paid to the present and future of techniques and technologies of workplace management, as the workplace as we know it dissipates, if not disappears. Prior to graduate work, Will co-founded and managed a worker-cooperative cafe and bar in Philadelphia, PA.

Kristy Kim

Kristy Kim, a PhD Candidate in the UC Berkeley Department of Economics, researches issues at the intersection of public and behavioral economics. Her job market paper studies how changes in retirement benefits affect labor supply and workforce composition. Her other research focuses on the distributional impacts on tax-preferred property inheritances and behavioral welfare measures.

 

Vera Parra

Vera Parra, a PhD Student in the UC Berkeley Department of Sociology, interested in labor history, political economy, and organizing in the 21st century. She is researching the recent history of auto industry organizing drives, both in the US and Mexico. She is interested in examining how green industrial policy– in particular the transition to EVs and attempts to secure a North American supply chain– shape organizing conditions on both sides of the border.

 

John Logan
John Logan

John Logan (moderator) is Professor and Director of Labor Studies at San Francisco State University and a Visiting Scholar at the UC Berkeley Labor Center. He is an expert on the anti-union industry and anti-union legislation in the U.S., and comparative labor issues, particularly how multinational companies treat employees and unions differently in the U.S. compared to European countries.

 

Podcast and Transcript

Listen to the presentation as a podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

 

[MUSIC PLAYING]

MARION FOURCADE: Hello, everyone. My name is Marion Fourcade. I’m the Director of Social Science Matrix. And it’s such a great pleasure to welcome you to this panel on the New Directions in the Study of Labor. Matrix organizes New Directions panels twice a year. These are panels where the presenters are exclusively graduate students. And so for us, it’s very special.

And I’m very excited today because our panelists will explore the dynamics of work management and labor organization. And as is common with all our Matrix panels, they come from different departments, jurisprudence and social policy, economics, and sociology. So you have a wide range of approaches to this topic.

This event is co-sponsored by the Institute for Research on Labor and Employment, the UC Berkeley Labor Center, and the Berkeley Law Program in Jurisprudence and Social Policy. Before I introduce our moderator, let me just say a few upcoming events. This is a busy week at Matrix. This is the last week of the semester, but it is busy.

This panel today. Tomorrow, we have an Author Meets Critics panel. A book by my brand new colleague, Stephanie Canizales. And then actually my own book talk on Friday. This is an event that’s co-sponsored by Matrix but organized by BESI. So I actually did not schedule myself for this.

Anyway, let me now introduce John Logan, who is our moderator for today’s event. John is Professor and Director of Labor Studies at San Francisco State University and a visiting scholar at the UC Berkeley Labor Center. He is an expert on the anti-union industry and anti-union legislation in the US, on comparative labor issues, and particularly on how multinational companies treat employees and unions differently in the US compared to European countries. And so John will now introduce our panelists, and thank you all for being here, and I very much look forward to this.

JOHN LOGAN: Thank you all for coming. I will just briefly introduce the panelists who are all going to speak for about 15 minutes, and then we should have at least half an hour or slightly over for questions, and comments, and discussion.

I mean, we have a great panel to discuss new directions in labor history. As we just heard, people from three separate social science disciplines, from economics, from sociology, and from jurisprudence, law. I’m actually from history background originally. I never taught in the history– My first job was an industrial relations department at London School of Economics, and I taught comparative labor. And then I was Director of the UC Berkeley Labor Center.

But I mean, it’s appropriate, I think, to have these sort of multidisciplinary conversations when talking about new directions in the study of labor and I think new directions in the labor movement more broadly because, I mean, the two, depending on your discipline, are very closely connected often.

And the disciplines represented today, I mean, sociology for several years now has had the largest sort of labor contingent within academic disciplines. I don’t know how many hundreds of members are in the labor group at the ASA, but that’s where a lot of the scholarship has come out.

I mean, economics is obviously the labor economists, people like John R. Commons and Selig Perlman were the people who founded industrial relations and sort of labor scholarship as an academic discipline in the US. And economists have been sort of central to academic debates over labor ever since then. Even although I’m not an economist, I spent most of my academic life around economists.

And law and jurisprudence too. I mean, when I started graduate school over 25 years ago, it was the sort of critical legal studies scholarship. People like Karl Klare, and Mark Barenberg, and Kathy Stone, this sort of influenced my own work originally. And now Berkeley has become very much a sort of center for the study of labor law with Catherine Fisk and others who are now at Berkeley Law.

So are we going in this direction? Yes. So I apologize for the longwinded. First is Will Darwell, who’s a PhD candidate in Jurisprudence and Social Policy at Berkeley Law. And his research is on the politics and political economy, past, present and future regimes of workplace management, broadly defined.

WILLIAM DARWELL: Yeah. Thanks, everybody, for coming. Thanks so much, Ambrosia and Marion, for organizing and John for moderating. and yeah, showing up after Thanksgiving on an academic calendar is really something. So I’m glad to see more faces in the room than I expected, to be honest.

So yeah. I guess sort of in that spirit of interdisciplinarity that John mentioned, I thought that what I would use my time today to present is almost something like a method section for my dissertation. So I come from a philosophy background but do moral, political, and legal theory of work and the workplace. Particular, workplace management is what I’m most focused on.

But yeah. Since we’re coming from different disciplinary backgrounds, I thought it might make sense to just open the hood a little bit on how I approach that as a legal theorist. So the broadest way of talking about what I try to do is try to identify what’s fundamentally political about work, the workplace and its management.

So there’s been a sort of a really, really large and cresting tide of new scholarship and normative theories of political economy, of moral economy, and the workplace and workplace justice. In general, in my view though, that literature tends to conceive of the nature of doing political theory of work in terms of the normatively salient effects of institutions of work in the workplace and workplace management.

And the main conceptual intervention that I’m trying to make is to give an account really of what sort of constitutively political about work. The practices through which we work, the spaces in which we work, which is a slice of a broader question about what’s political about the economy in general.

So just some sort brief overview of the way that literature slices up sort of potentially normatively concerning effects of workplace management. Some are distributional, some account of unjust appropriation of the benefits of labor. Fruits of labor, some economic surplus to which the answer is some kind of regime of ameliorated, either pre or redistribution.

Other sort of like dignitary effects like vulnerability to demeaning working conditions, which are supposed to be protected against by the implementation of the right kinds of regulatory guardrails. Others are accounts of ways in which people are allowed to express their equal moral agency as working people, which is supposed to be protected by some set of fundamental rights of workers.

Others are about autonomy, concerns, ways in which the way that work is distributed, and structured, and managed might interfere with people’s ability to realize the sort of rational plan of life. These are sort of supposed to be protected against by different ways of structuring markets.

But obviously, most primarily structuring the labor market in specific ways. And there’s a more general concern about domination or subjection to arbitrary control, where theorists try to analyze and examine potential schemes for rendering the kind of control that work is supposed to necessarily involve, that labor is supposed to necessarily involve non-arbitrary or subject to some kind of scheme of co-determination of one kind or another.

So in my view, the tendency to conceive of the normative problematic of work in this way as sort of a question about the normatively salient effects of workplace management is kind of downstream of trends in the social sciences on the one hand that sort of conceive of the economy as a distinct realm of human activity.

On the one hand, that’s downstream of just neoclassical economic conceptions of efficient markets. On the other hand, Weberian conceptions of the economy as a realm of necessity, governed solely by instrumental rather than intrinsic reasons.

So moral philosophers, political philosophers, theorists in general, I think, try to tend to accept this picture. But in terms of a scholarly division of labor, I think it’s sort of our job to interrogate that conception of economic activity rather than accept it and then ask questions within or having accepted that assumption.

So here, I sort of like start from what’s a really well-worn observation in labor studies and studies of employment in general, that labor contracts are radically underspecified, which makes them sort of fit poorly as an object of economic analysis. And it’s hard to do market efficiency analysis of something that’s underspecified in this way. It sort of makes labor weird as a commodity, as it were.

So then to the extent that to the extent that work is treated by market institutions as a commodity, it’s something that we literally produce for sale into a labor marketplace. It’s always what heterodox economists would call a contested economy. That’s a contested commodity rather.

So it’s a commodity that nature or the content of which isn’t prespecified but is fought over, contested between the exchanging parties. So in their model, that means that labor as a commodity is subject to what they call enforcement rents. It basically means that the more powerful, whether that’s the form of social, or a market, or other kind of power, means that that empowered party will sort of win the day in determining the nature of that commodity.

That to me is a sort of a starting point for thinking about the political nature of work, the political nature of labor, and the labor exchange, which I take to be sort of constitutively political rather than political and the effects it produces.

Another way of saying that it’s sort of like necessarily a creature of political morality. But I take that to mean is that it’s a kind of a social practice that involves overlapping confluences and conflicts of interest for which the rules that govern those confluences and conflicts of interests aren’t pre-given and necessarily can’t be determined a priori but must be constituted, authored, and maintained by the parties to those practices.

And so I arrive at that sort formal definition by some grounding work in philosophy of joint action and social practices that I’ll skip, so that nobody leaves while I’m talking. Stuff that sort of only the philosophers want to stick around for.

But briefly, I find that that literature sort of fails on two accounts. One is a failure of attention to the internal organization of jointly acting groups, which except in what I take to be edge cases, involve some kind of vertical or asymmetric division of roles within those groups, which raises the question of control of any kind of joint or shared productive activity.

The other is that lack of attention to the structural dynamics that are generated by repeated and long term practices of social coordination and joint action. So institutions create sort of durable forms of social relations and a sort of a slogan, a way of saying.

The point here is that there’s no such thing as a merely technical division of labor. Divisions of labor are always social in the sense that they’re constructive of asymmetrical social relations, as well as the people or roles that fit in to those sort of relational matrices, not to make a pun.

So since those social relations tend to self-naturalize but are always, in every case, constructed by some kind of deliberate human activity, the social relations themselves are worthy or apt objects of normative analysis and criticism. So that’s the sort of starting point or how we get to the starting point for the project.

So I use that to then reconstruct this actually existing normative debate over workplace justice. So as I mentioned before, there’s a lot of recent writing. I was looking through the list of edited volumes that I have to read upcoming. And there’s just a lot of writing these days that people are compiling on normative questions about the nature of economic organization, from the highest to the lowest level.

Yeah. So again, against the sort of construction of that normative problematic as a set of questions about what sort of positive or negative effects are generated by the way that we structure our economic institutions.

I try to look for a way of reconstructing that debate in general from what you might call something like output reasons to input reasons or sort of where I generally find a normative requirement that people participate in the processes of their own subject formation.

So insofar as the kinds of social relations that are necessarily generated by the workplace construct us as individuals on lots of different kinds of normative frameworks. The result I find is that people have either a right or relevant interest of one kind or another to be able to participate in the processes and institutions that construct them as individuals.

I use that set of core normative interventions and then apply them to a set of real world cases in the latter parts of the dissertation. So those are going to be very, very familiar. But the first is algorithmic management. The second is platform employment or platform-based gig work.

And the second is corporate fissuring, corporate restructurings that place workers at one or two or three levels of removed from who we might think of as their real employer. Some sort of dominant form in a sometimes global value chain.

So that’s, again, that’s the sort of general pitch about how I do the kind of work that I do, which again is aimed at producing work for this, what I see as a kind of a cloistered set of conversations within normative theory around what might render the way that we work together just or at least in what ways that the ways that we work together are criticizable and might be ameliorated or require amelioration of one kind or another.

I figured I’d use the last couple of minutes that I have to just say a couple of things about what I take to be interesting new directions for the study of labor. Yeah. Here they are. So first, and these are sort of basically like stuff that I am paying attention to and reading that informs my work.

One is the a renewal of a certain kind of Marxian analysis built from people call the value form reading of Marx’s work, that reads the work rather than developing a critical political economy or something like that. Like built from assumptions about the labor being the source of all value, this kind of Ricardian Marxism.

Instead reads Marx as offering a critique of political economy, where he’s using the ways that political economists of his time have analyzed market society to try to identify in a kind of a German sense of the term, critique, what are the conditions of possibility of the society that we have and what set of historically specific social relations does it generate?

As part of that, growing out of that, I mean, there’s a reading group at the Matrix, I think, [INAUDIBLE] the Matrix, on the new translation of Marx that I think is bringing this reading also to the surface. So that’s really great. But yeah.

One particular way of describing the Marxist project on that reading is the analysis of the dynamics of class and a historically specific moment, where class means borrowing from Benkler and Syed, the asymmetric social relations in the Division of Labor and the distribution of its fruits, rather than conceiving class as either an identity category, a job category, or merely about distributional struggle or the expropriation of a surplus.

Yeah. So taking class in that way of describing it is describing the set of rules in a complex society and how they relate to one another. I’ll just say a couple of things. Yeah. One is just about the changing role of labor in global political economy and the way that that is creating changes in the nature of class composition domestically and globally.

So one set of literature comes from Robert Brenner and student Aaron Benanav about premature deindustrialization and global industrial overcapacity yielding secular decline in the global economy and how that is likely to generate chronic underemployment rather than something like automation creating technical unemployment or something like that.

What I see as a really sort of related thread insofar as it’s about the declining role of labor in social reproduction is work, on the one hand, on asset manager capitalism, and in particular, Melinda Cooper, and I forget her co-authors, book on asset economy, which emphasizes the sort of declining role of remuneration from work in household and in household finances essentially as compared with Minskian households, which are making decisions under uncertainty to manage capital flows and secure their sort of financial well-being in that way, rather than primarily through remuneration from work, whether it’s salary wages or whatnot.

I think to just bring us back to a picture of the working class as the most general category when we’re talking about class analysis as constituted by a negative unity, constituted by what it lacks rather than what it has, which is namely, in the old formula, the double freedom and inability to reproduce itself apart from the work that it can sell into the labor market.

And I think that Vera is going to talk about this a little bit more, but the last slide that I have is just about renationalisation in global political economy and the reassertion of states as economic actors. Yeah. And that’s just a big question mark, basically, what’s that going to look like. But I think it’s going to have really, really significant effects on international division of labor, domestic division of labor, and class structure in general.

[APPLAUSE]

JOHN LOGAN: Next, we have Kristy Kim, a PhD candidate in the economics department at UC Berkeley, whose work studies changes in retirement benefits affect labor supply and workforce composition. I won’t take up any of your time, but reporters contact me all the time about labor issues.

And one of the things that they want to know most these days. I mean, we’ve had these strikes, obviously, the big three, involving UAW and more recently, Boeing and Puget Sound. And everyone’s like, oh, are we going to get a return to defined benefit pension plans? And I say, not a chance. But I mean, of course, it’s more complicated than that. But it’s interesting that it has become back on sort of the union agenda in terms of the– pleas, sorry. Go ahead.

KRISTY KIM: Yeah, no. That’s perfect because– so I’ll go a little bit into my research, which actually looks at exactly the movement away from defined benefit pensions to more defined contribution plans. And so sorry. Thank you for hosting this panel, everyone, and for everyone who came.

So I’m Kristy. I work in behavioral public economics. So I really try to understand how individuals behave towards different policy designs with an emphasis on looking at quasi-experimental settings, sort of in the wilds, and trying to understand through the choices that people make, what the implications would be if policy was different.

And so I will go into my dissertation. And so I’ll start a little bit more niche and then try to bring it out more towards the political movements and the unionization efforts to change retirement benefits. But my dissertation focuses on how changes in workforce retirement benefits affect firm-specific labor supply.

And this is across the lifecycle. So throughout your whole life, as retirement benefits change, how does your labor supply decisions change? And so this is in part to understand how non-cash compensation, which has become this large portion of total compensation in the United States, is really affecting labor supply decisions, especially when we think about a marketplace of firms that are offering different compensation structures.

And so normally, empirically, this is difficult to understand for two reasons. So one, there’s just very limited data on private employer pension plans. And so we can theorize how these things go. But often, the incentives for retirement plans are non-linear, they’re dynamic, and so they’re very difficult to predict.

And if you do have data on them, they’re often very limited in scope, right? So you’ll have a few years. The second reason why it’s difficult is because it’s really hard to disentangle pure incentive effects of retirement systems that we’re interested in versus selection effects.

And so what I mean by that is that there are different types of people that will choose to work for different types of firms because of their retirement benefits. And so when we study the effects of retirement benefits, what we don’t want to do is conflate the fact that different types of workers are going into different types of work, versus the retirement benefit itself changing your behavior.

And so in my work, what we do is that we study federal government workers around a policy change that occurs in 1984. And there are some nice things about this setting. So one, it’s the US government, so it’s the largest employer. In the United States, they employ about 2% of all the workforce.

And two, it’s going to happen in the ’80s, right? And so we have 35 years of their entire work history. And so we can really follow these people through their life cycle or most of their life cycle. Some people will work more than 35 years.

And the last sort of quality about this policy change that’s really nice is that it’s actually retroactive. And so what that means is that the people who start under this new system, when they change it discretely for newly hired workers in 1984, they’re not going to be aware of what the retirement system looks like for about two years, which means this really helps us mitigate the selection effects. So we’re going to have pretty similar workers but with two different retirement benefits. And that’s really the strategy that I use to figure out what happens to the labor supply outcomes of these workers.

And specifically, what we do is that we study the last few cohorts of the old system and the first few cohorts of the new system, with the assumption being that these workers are similar and compare them across time. So I can explain a little bit about what the federal government does and why and how we should think about it.

And so in the ’80s, they’re going to make this move towards retirement benefits that look a lot like private sector retirement benefits. So prior to 1984, the retirement benefit that they had was just to a pure defined benefit plan, where they provided an annuity to their workers based on their work history.

And so we can think of this as really employer-tied benefits. Your benefits at retirement really depend on your wages that you’ve accrued there, the tenure at the firm, and whatever percentage they want to give. And they move away from that. They decrease that annuity portion, and they introduce more modern technologies.

So they introduce what we would think of as like a 401(k). So what that is that you would put some of your own money away, and that’ll grow in an investment vehicle. You would get it as a lump sum, but you sort of carry the risk of outliving it.

And in addition, they add Social Security, which is sort of like an annuity, but it’s based on your total employment history. And so what we think of this is as a movement away from employer-tied benefits to more portable benefits. Now you can pick up the 401(k). You can move it around to different employers. Social Security will only depend on all formal employment. So you can leave more freely.

And so what we’ll find in this study is that this movement away from defined benefit to a mixed defined benefit, defined contribution system is going to reduce the total lifetime retirement benefits that they’ll receive. It will reduce on average for workers by about $45,000, which is pretty substantial. We can think if people are in retirement for about 20 years, that’s about over $2,000 a year that they sort of lose out on from this new retirement system.

It is going to increase the portable benefits but really severely decrease the benefits tied to the employer. But it’s not going to change anything about the quality of the jobs or their cash compensation. So they’re not compensating these workers for this loss in benefits.

And what we’ll find when we compare the labor supply outcomes for these workers is as follows. So in the beginning, what we have suggestive evidence for is that workers are quite inattentive when they first enter work about the retirement system. So they don’t seem to be reacting to early incentives in your work.

So like vesting schedules, we don’t see any reaction towards, but we see some kind of learning happening around 10 years of service towards the federal government, where both young and old workers will start responding. So it doesn’t seem to be a function of how close you are to retirement but basically for how long you’ve worked at, in this case, the government for.

And essentially, we find that workers mid to late career are the workers that really start responding to these changes and benefits. They are about 2 to 3 percentage points less likely to be in the federal workforce between 15 to 30 years of tenure. This roughly translates into a one to three-year reduction in their tenure.

And so in a resource perspective, this sort of all checks out. You have a $45,000 reduction in your lifetime benefits. And for workers who maybe face better wages outside, maybe they can get $20,000 extra per year. They work that one to three years more and make up for that loss in benefits.

And this is really going to be concentrated among workers who have better outside options, so who face better private sector wages. So that tends to be workers who start off with higher education levels, higher pay, starting pay. And it’s also going to be concentrated amongst workers who seem to be working through the government pretty quickly and being promoted really fast.

And so what this seems to suggest is that moving away from a defined benefit plan does save the government a lot of money. It saves them about $94,000 per person. But they do start losing out on their very experienced and very productive workers.

And so ultimately, because I don’t have additional data on how productive these workers are or how much they might mean to the employer, the welfare consequences are sort of ambiguous. Or like the sort utility of workers from moving to one place to another, I don’t have information on where they move.

So we have this sort of ambiguous effect. And then sort of later on in life, we see a convergence of the percent of workers that are separated because now, most of the workers under the new system have left earlier. Under the old system, they’ll start to leave as they become eligible for retirement.

And so yeah. So now, it’s sort of become this interesting stage because in the last 50 years, many employers, institutions have really started moving towards the defined contribution type of benefit, right? Because it’s more sustainable fiscally or financially for the employer to provide these kinds of benefits.

So Berkeley has done it, for anyone who works here, and other state governments are now considering reducing their pension plans and really introducing these savings. And so we as economists, we can speak to what might happen to the workforce.

And it’s sort of interesting now that– so I think Boeing is the big one that want to bring back the pension plans. And ultimately, it’s hard to give a normative or even like a positive judgment on how this might affect the employer or the worker in economic terms.

It ultimately will depend on, so I can do the financials. I can say how much it saves. But ultimately it sort depend on what you’re losing from losing these older, more productive workers. There’s a tradeoff, right? Sometimes, what we want is we want to upskill an organization. And so having these workers churn out could be beneficial for both the firm and also for the worker because now that they have benefits that are less tied to the employer, they’re free to move to another employer that might better match their skills or preferences.

But on the other hand, these older workers bring a lot of experience, and it’s hard to retrain and rehire workers. And so you might be losing out on those workers. And these workers might be losing out on benefits that they don’t realize they’re losing out on.

And so ultimately, I think by revealed preference, it seems people prefer the defined benefit plan. I think the reason why employers seem to be very resistant against these defined benefit plans is because the costliness, they’re going to have to spend, at least if we look at the federal government, at least like $100,000 more per employee in addition to these regulations that they will have to follow and promise to these employers.

And so what I’m hoping to do with my research is give a little piece of the puzzle and really show empirically with data how workers are responding throughout their lifetime, which has been very difficult to do. Yeah. And so I’ll pass it on to Vera to talk about her research.

VERA PARRA: OK. Two caveats before I begin. One, I’m a second year, and this is all very new research. So first time I’m presenting about it. The other caveat is that the election really affects a lot of things about tariffs, trade, the relationship between the United States and Mexico. Every day, I get a fun new piece of news. So I have that to look forward to for the next four years.

And yeah. I’m still sort of like– and I think it’ll actually just take time to see how this shapes what was the pattern that was established under the Biden administration and in Trump’s first term. So with that, what I’ll do is I’ll share a little bit about my own research and how I came to it. And then I’ll also offer some extemporaneous thoughts about labor and the election.

So yeah. My master’s research topic is on the paradoxical impacts of US trade protectionism on the Mexican labor movement, which, as Will referenced, we are moving, it seems clear, into a world of more trade protectionism. We don’t know yet what that will look like. But increased competition over exports in a world with less demand, and in particular, increased competition between the United States and China.

And that has had actually some interesting– it puts at least Mexico, potentially, maybe other countries positioned similarly as Mexico, but in a pretty interesting position. So yeah. I’ll say a little bit more broadly my larger research agenda, like the questions that brought me to grad school, are about how the 21st century political economy is evolving and what that means in terms of the possibilities for labor organizing.

And I’ll share I come from a background of immigrant rights organizing. It became increasingly clear to me that the pathway on immigration runs through the labor movement. And with that brings the question of what the actual possibilities for labor and labor organizing are in the 21st century for some of the reasons that we’ll mention at the end that we can maybe talk about.

So as I was kind of looking around what was happening and sort of seeing what are some of the bigger picture, bigger structural changes, one is a clear move towards more protectionist trade policy that we saw under the Trump administration but also under Biden. So it’s something that is seemingly bipartisan. And in particular, as I mentioned, competition over exports.

And then with that, under the Biden administration, also green industrial policy, which we don’t know what will come of that. But a real attempt to stimulate, to use the energy, to use climate crisis as a, I don’t know, pretext, we could call it, to use state intervention to try to stimulate investment and an attempt to bring back manufacturing. That may or may not work. We’ll see. There’s a lot of reason to be very skeptical about the possibility of that, but it has certainly changed the politics.

So that was sort of like the stuff I was paying attention to. And then I went to a Labor Notes Conference this past year in 2023 or 2024, this year. Labor Notes, for those who don’t know, kind of interesting labor left institution that formed in the 1970s with a vision to try to reform unions from within through rank and file internal movements for internal democracy.

Labor Notes, interestingly, in this moment, it is a tiny old institution. And I think for a confluence of interesting, different set of circumstances, has massively exploded over the course of the last six years. So the conference they had last year had a waiting list of 4,000 labor leaders and organizers. So something interesting happening there, which of course overlaps with the leadership transition in the UAW with Shawn Fain.

So here I was at Labor Notes. And I met some organizers who had come from Mexico who were organizing Mexican auto plants and were there looking to build relationships with the UAW, with leaders at the UAW.

And they told me some pretty interesting things. Kind of the story is like a paradoxical impact of increased US trade protectionism. The USMCA, the new NAFTA negotiated under Trump, had actually really enormously benefited efforts to build independent unions in Mexico.

And they were like, we’re on the phone every day with the Department of Labor. To our surprise, they’re really helping us. We don’t totally understand why, but we’re taking the opportunity that we have in this moment and running with it. So I got curious about this, and that’s what the premise of what’s become my master’s project. So I’ll share just a little bit about the Mexican auto industry. So the Mexican auto industry largely supplies parts for the American market.

There’s an earlier wave of plants in Mexico. But really, it grew. It expanded massively after ’76 as profits– As the big three in the United States faced competition from Germany and Japan, they used Mexico in order to be able to– as basically for parts to supply cheap parts and cheap labor.

And during this period of time, Mexico switched from having an import substitution model to a low wage export model of development. And what you saw is really beginning in the late ’70s, rapid industrialization in Mexico but real wages declining during this entire period of time.

Now we’re in the midst of a shift where the US is trying to reindustrialize by onshoring or what sometimes also get nearshoring or sometimes called friendshoring. So manufacturing in response to the Trump election in 2016 and then also in the context of escalating trade competition.

And so there are three actually tightly interrelated policies that were passed between the years 2018 and 2022 under multiple administrations. So the USMCA was negotiated, finally approved in 2020 as Trump is leaving. Negotiations begin earlier.

And in addition, a 2018 labor law reform in Mexico. And then the IRA, the Inflation Reduction Act. And I’ll share a little bit about how these policies are all sort of woven together. So back up.

So Mexico has a corporatist model of Labor Relations. And this is basically from the Mexican Revolution, this system was in place, is built into the Constitution. Where the Mexican Revolutionary Party, the party that ruled as one party rule for a long time, relied on the labor movement in Mexico, on state-backed unions.

The Mexican Union Federation is called the CTM, the Confederacion de Trabajadores de Mejicanos, relied on them to do turnout and but also relied on them to control any more independent or militant labor organizing.

And so it was really like, the CTM is like a pillar of the party, which had single party control in Mexico for a long time. What that meant is that during the period of the ’60s and the early ’70s, you had under Import substitution. Basically, everybody was [INAUDIBLE] workers were benefiting under that model.

The union was quite powerful within the PRI. And then also the state supported the CTM to repress any kind of independent labor organizing efforts. There’s an interesting blip in the 1970s of union democratization, which sort of overlaps with the same period of time as you have big labor movements developing in Brazil and in South Africa. I can circle back to that.

But then starting in ’76 with the big three, beginning to produce auto parts plants in Mexico. There’s US pressure on Mexico through the IMF to clamp down on this like new wave of independent labor organizing that started, and the CTM begins a practice of employer protection contracts.

So basically, it’ll be like GM comes in, negotiates with the government of Mexico, says we want to build a plant here. They negotiate on a wage, agree to which union affiliate of the CTM is going to become the union that represents the workers. The union rubber stamps the wage and the contract, and the workers are none the wiser.

And that practice began in the 80s and then like continues Mexico’s entry into the GATT, and then NAFTA just exacerbates that. So that’s why you’ve seen rapid industrialization while wages decline for Mexican auto workers.

The question is what’s happening now? And I’ll say maybe just like a little bit in terms of the literature that I’m speaking to. So Beverly Silver’s Forces of Labor, masterful work. Who has this sort of like pithy summary is where capital goes, labor unrest follows. And Beverly Silver writing in 2003 looking for hope for workers of the world.

Basically is like it is– labor– so at the site of divestment. So for workers in the Global North where capital is divesting, that means that labor loses power. But at the site of investment in the Global South, if you have the expansion of new supply chains, investment in the Global South will also mean labor unrest in the Global South.

And she traces with a real focus on auto as like leading edge of capitalist profitability in the 20th century. And so her examples, she’s like, Brazil, South Africa, all examples of big labor unrest that develops in the ’70s and ’80s. In many ways, my question is like why not Mexico in this period of time? Why was there not big labor unrest in Mexico? And then also how do we explain the current moment where we’re seeing the seeds, like maybe little springtime of labor movement in Mexico?

And here I build on Silver by drawing on the political economy framework of growth models. So this is the work of Baccaro and Pontusson and Mark Bly. They published a– yeah. Anyways. And according to this framework, the idea is states pursue distinct growth models, importantly in relation to an integrated and also increasingly competitive and with low growth political economy.

And the thing I find very useful about this framework is it helps to think about how when growth is difficult to come to come by, political coalitions have to become unstable and have to shift and rearrange themselves. And it helps understand the kind of critical relationship between Mexico and the United States in influencing the shape of Mexico’s own labor movement.

So the argument I’m making is that the shifts in growth models impacts impact the state’s own system of labor relations and set new limits on the strategic possibilities for labor actors. And that the major changes in the US’s own growth model have in turn forced Mexico to adapt its growth strategy and in turn, its own system of labor relations is the overall hypothesis or thing I’m trying to argue.

So there’s these two phases. We’re in the late 1970s, facing rising international competition. The US, via the IMF, pressured the Mexican government to shift from an import substitution to a low wage export led growth model. And importantly, unlike Brazil, where Brazil also shifted from import substitution to export. But it was final assembly in Brazil, like final car assembly and for a more diversified export market.

In contrast, in Mexico, the real focus was auto parts, where wages must be much lower because profits are lower, and it goes entirely to the United States domestic market, which gives the United States an enormous amount of say and pressure on Mexico, as we all are seeing today.

And so in this context, the Mexican government, under the PRI pressures, the CTM, the Trade Federation, to encourage these employer protection contracts and suppress workers’ efforts to build independent unions.

And the argument is that in this latter period, from 2018 to 2024, the US’s own attempts to adapt its growth model through protectionist trade policy, an attempt at green industrial policy, which to be determined what comes of that, but impacted Mexican labor organizing in two ways.

So first, the USMCA directly empowers independent labor unions in Mexico to fight for higher wages through some mechanisms that I’ll explain. And it also incentivized AMLO and the Morena Party to implement a genuine reform of Mexico’s system of labor relations. So that’s the impact of the USMCA.

And second, IRA subsidies resulted in growing investments in Mexican EV manufacturing, thereby easing some of the pressure on Mexico to suppress wages in the auto industry. That first part remains in place or at least until the renegotiation of the USMCA in 2026.

The second part, there’s a big question now with Trump election. So Tesla had a plant that they already started constructing in Monterrey, which was canceled. Musk said he would wait until after the election to see if that plant would continue in effect.

Chinese. The Chinese auto EV company, BYD, is moving forward in building but also paused until after the election. In response to all of that, Sheinbaum has announced that she’s that they’re going to build a Mexican EV, but we’ll see how that goes. But this is all very much in flux.

And yeah. So just briefly, in terms of what the USMCA actually does. So one is Mexico’s labor law reform was a precondition for the passage of the USMCA. So basically, in order for– so negotiators, and this was largely pushed by the Dems, were like in order for us to be able to continue in negotiations over the USMCA and not pull out of the agreement, we’re forcing AMLO’s government to push through a labor law reform.

This was initially begun under Peña Nieto, more conservative under the PRI Party. And when AMLO comes in, they implement a much broader labor law reform than Peña Nieto would have done. But either way, there was a labor law reform that was going to be in place.

What the labor law reform does is a few important things. One, it requires like some internal mechanisms of union democracy. And then importantly, it also makes it much easier for workers to be able to form independent unions.

And the final thing that it did was it required all workers to approve the existing contracts. So contracts that weren’t up for a vote among workers got nullified. When a contract is nullified, then workers have the opportunity to vote if they want to put a new union in place. So that was the labor law reform, among other things. Oh, and it also moved union negotiations outside of the executive into the judiciary branch. So it’s no longer under the executive.

And then the USMCA, which sort of went like hand in hand with this labor law reform in Mexico, does a few things. Most notably, there’s a rapid response enforcement mechanism, which basically, if you are a worker or an organizer and there’s some experience a labor law violation, you can actually appeal to a body that was created, like an oversight body that was created through the USMCA with trade representatives from the United States and from Canada, and they will intervene on your behalf.

The enforcement piece of this, because there was some sort of nominal labor side agreement to NAFTA. But the enforcement piece of the USMCA is that if the company refuses to respond, then they actually could face penalties in terms of losing their special non-tariff status.

So this has actually been used a lot of times. And in fact, every case where there was an independent labor union that formed, that I’ve tracked in Mexico, there was some intervention of the USMCA on the American side, which is why the organizers were like we’re on the phone all the time with American trade officials. It’s very strange, but here we are.

And the other thing is that there is an enormous amount of money that came from the US Department of Labor that went into funding, organizing on the Mexican side through something called the Solidarity Center, which has a, for those who know, there’s a new book out, Blue Collar Empire. For those who know, there’s a long history of US intervention in international labor movements for IIL. This though might be a case of US intervention in Mexico for good. And it’s through this Solidarity Center, which then funds organizers in different places to form these independent unions.

So yeah. I have done some preliminary interviews and ethnographic work in Coahuila in Mexico, where there was a campaign and then also where there are active campaigns right now, where they’re salting in plants. And in the process of interviewing labor leaders and organizers and then also government officials who are responsible for implementing the labor reform law. And then also, we’ll be looking at archival records as well, comparing this earlier period to the present period.

And yeah, I’ve been talking a while. So I’ll close with that. Maybe just to say I think some of the questions that are up for grabs for sure in terms of the relationship between Trump and Sheinbaum. The USMCA gets renegotiated in 2026. Likely the main issue will be at stake is the question of electric vehicles built by Chinese companies in Mexico making their way into the American market.

And yeah, we don’t really know where it’s going to go. But in some ways, the USMCA really was negotiated when Trump attempted to pull out of NAFTA on the first round. The AFL-CIO saw an opportunity. The big three really can’t do that. And the AFL-CIO there saw an opportunity to be able to push forward something that they’d wanted to do for a very long time. And so we’ll see in an ongoing way how those negotiations play out moving forward. Yeah. We’ll close.

[APPLAUSE]

JOHN LOGAN: I’ll just open it up for questions and comments. I just said very briefly, and so as I said at the beginning, with the field like labor, I mean, it’s true of other fields too, of course, of subspecialties of study. There’s always this sort of balance between innovations in the discipline. Like if you’re an economist, if you’re a sociologist, and like what’s really new and exciting that’s happening within your discipline? How is your research agenda influenced by that?

But then there’s also the real world of labor out there and how that sort of impacts what you think are the most important questions to ask. And the balance between those two things is always like varies with individual people. Like my own work, I mean, I’ve worked with unions since I was a grad student, and I was always obsessed with contemporary labor issues, even although I supposedly was a historian, wasn’t a very good historian.

Most of my publications have not been historically historical. Hopefully not ahistorical, but they were always obsessed with this real world of labor, what’s happening out there. How does a sort of historical sensibility help us understand how we got to where we got. And I think, we see in the three presentations here too, there is sort of that dynamic going on. But anyway, sorry. I don’t want to take up time. Open it up to questions and comments.

AUDIENCE: Ah, yes. This was really, really interesting. So thank you all to the panelists. I learned a lot. I have a question for William. It’s kind of two-sided question. I’m curious about where you classify surveillance and sort of how do you think about competing moral claims between employers and employees, especially considering that courts typically side with employers and their moral visions?

WILLIAM DARWELL: Yeah. Surveillance is a big issue. It raises, lots of different kinds of normative concerns. I think like maybe what I’ll say just as far as my work goes, and yeah, I don’t have too much to say about the courts, apart from they’re very sensitive to employer concerns.

As far as what my sort of distinctive take on intervention, the way that I think about what’s going on there is, again, to think about the way that subjection to one kind of mode of discipline, control, vulnerability to being watched in any variety of ways across any variety of like ways of conceiving what a person is to think about sort of vulnerability to being out of control of the conditions of your own self-making or something like that, as a sort of, again, the formal language that I’m working with.

Kind of, maybe not obvious is too strong. But I take it as kind of obvious that like the modes of surveillance that people are subject to at work ought to really alarm us in many cases. My aim is to try to articulate what’s wrong with what’s going on there in those terms to add something to the literature in general.

JOHN LOGAN: Can I just add very briefly to that, Sorry? I try to think about your paper, and like I do not have any philosophy background, and I always have to think try to make things concrete. And I mean, obviously what you’re saying brings to mind Amazon. And Amazon has adopted this slogan, we are not robots, because this is the way they’re being treated. Every sort of like single movement within the workplace is being surveilled, and monitored, and people are being penalized for.

And so I guess when I tried to explain to people like what is it that’s happening right now with these union campaigns, Amazon, and elsewhere, I think, well, if people think they’re being treated unfairly, unjustly at work, they have some notion of what constitutes just treatment, and where they get these notions of what constitutes just treatment is a sort of complicated issue. It comes from all over the place. And like surveillance at work is one of the things that they have really focused upon in terms of articulating their notions of just treatment at the workplace. But sorry.

AUDIENCE: Yes, thanks. Thank you for this amazing panel. It was really instructive. I have two questions. One to William, one to Vera. I guess this is going to be like a huge question. I apologize in advance. But what do you exactly mean by political in this setting. Because political can mean a lot of different things. And you said work is inherently, constitutively, I think, political, which I would agree. But I would like you to clarify what you mean by that. And kind of like going on the political thread, I guess.

My question to Vera, when you were mentioning, like why not Mexico, with this 1970s, ’80s labor upsurge in Brazil and South Africa but not so much in Mexico, from drawing from Beverly Silver. One thing that came to my mind was like, well, there’s actually big political movements going on in these two countries in South Africa and Brazil.

In Brazil, it’s democratization coming out of the military dictatorship. And in South Africa, obviously, the anti-apartheid movement. So my question is like, what is going on at this time in Mexico? And I don’t know how to insert this in the causal chain, but like how would that factor into this map that your conceptual map that you’re drawing? Thank you.

WILLIAM DARWELL: Yeah. So thanks for the question. I think it’s really great. I’m really stoked to talk about it. So again, the first attempt at a definition that I tried to give is like what I mean when I say the word political and saying that there’s something constitutively political about work is that politics is about the terms on which we live together.

And what it means to live together is to be sort of in these overlapping situations or situations and practices together where they’re overlapping confluences and conflicts of interest. So we can’t do what we’re doing together, engage in a kind of a social practice. And the terms of that social practice bring us into conflict with one another, either over our role in the practice, or again, the disposition of the fruits of that practice.

And it’s that notion of living together but in a kind of a tense way. That’s what’s constitutive of politics for me. So like part of what’s– yeah, there’s some other work on like, yeah, there’s a live question in moral theory right now about whether there’s a distinctive kind of normativity called political normativity or whether that’s all just reducible to just moral claims building off of the work of Bernard Williams, who’s at Berkeley and who made the sort of first claim that there’s something sort of different about what we do when we operate as groups through institutions and most importantly, with the institution of estate that’s different than the kind of terms of interpersonal morality, blah, blah, blah.

And I think that, again, the best way to think about what that is that the political is the way in which we set the terms of living together in a sort of a social relationship. One more thing that I’ll say about that is like there’s another kind of slogan that I feel like is good for labor studies.

In the past, the labor movement saw as its telos industrial democracy, which means let us run the economy, right? Either as a sort of a full participant through our unions or just give us the firms. We’ll do it. We know how to do it, like factories to the workers.

And so I think that like one thing that I would push for is also a new direction. Labor is also thinking about talking more between labor studies and business studies and thinking of corporations, firms. However, we want to think about them, as sort of like a horizon for labor to aim toward.

The reason that I say that in the context of the question about what I mean by political is because there’s also lots of interesting new work in theories of the corporation, the things about the corporation as a political actor. And one version of it, it’s just the thinking about the corporation as operating a concession from the state as sort of basically being a deputized form of the state itself.

And when we think about the corporation as a sort of like fundamentally like franchised or deputized form of what we’re really doing as states or people governed by states, is again setting the terms by which we live together, that’s the way in which I’m thinking about the work. And again, work in firms, shared work, socially necessary work as necessary or constitutively political.

VERA PARRA: Yeah. Thanks for that question. I think it’s a really good question. So one thing I can say is so Mexico in ’68, there a big student movement. Many of the young people who came up in that movement had, kind of parallel to in the United States, the sort of like move to industrializing or salting. There were people who came out of the movement of ’68 and entered into to try to build independent unions.

And in the early ’70s, so under then Echeverria’s government, had something called the apertura democratica, so the democratic opening, which was a response to the Dirty War in Mexico and the student and guerrilla movements there.

And it created a momentary opening for independent unions to form of that legacy comes basically like a three-year period in which the only independent unions that exist, at least in the auto industry formed in Mexico.

The argument that I’m making is that moment was like a real moment of possibility, and it gets cut short in 1976. So it isn’t given the chance to develop because of the influence of the United States and this push or like a shift in Mexico’s growth model, if that makes sense.

So there was actually the leadership and the social movement possibility. And if we were to compare it to, I don’t know how it would compare to Brazil and South Africa. The kind of curious thing is that in Brazil, the labor movement in auto develops in the context of dictatorship, and it’s actually the shift into dictatorship during that period of time that the Brazilian labor movement grows. Whereas in Mexico, the Democratic closing then really clamps down. So it doesn’t totally answer the question.

I’ll say just like two more thoughts. This isn’t a real answer. I think probably I’ve been thinking about it as labor movement creates the conditions for broader social movements. And there might be, in your question, like maybe there’s a reverse causality thing or it’s sort of like multiple. But what I will say, of course, is like in the period of time that the labor like industrialization in auto like really kicks off. Obviously after NAFTA, though it’s growing and expanding throughout the 80s.

And of course, the big movement in Mexico is the Zapatistas during that period of time. And I think there’s something to explore about the relationship between the Zapatistas and the state. Like is there something less compatible between the Zapatistas’ strategy of taking territory and not contesting directly for state power and labor? I don’t know. So that’s kind of like a question mark.

Maybe the last thing I’ll say is in spending time there over the summer, it’s clear that the movement that’s really influenced the labor organizers and their perspective coming in a younger generation of labor organizers that has formed is the feminist movement and the like the Ni Una Menos like against violence. And they actually talk in terms of like workplace violence or the abuses in the workplace are a form of violence that then reproduce themselves in the family. So it’s like very much oriented their political consciousness, the feminist movement. Anyways, I’ll leave it at that. All very preliminary.

MARION FOURCADE: Thank you. That was really a wonderful panel. So I have a question for Kristy and one for Vera. So Kristy, if I understand correctly, so the treatment that you’re using is sort of comparing this, sort of the last generation that came in under the old system and then the new generation from the new system, right?

But I was wondering if there’s a way– is there a change in applications? Is there a change in the number of people who want to work in this issue? And it could be that the federal government is not the place where you can see that, and there might be other places. But I was wondering about that. Is there a change in the selection of people who are coming into for government jobs?

Another piece of that sort of question is, have you thought about looking at UC system? Because I mean, casually, you would expect that, especially with the transformation of the system for the younger generation, especially of faculty, you would expect a lot more turnover, and casually, this seems to be the case. But I don’t know if there’s any sort of truth to that.

And then to Vera, I find this whole question of this sort of development of the labor movement and both sides of the border to be really fascinating because on the one hand, you can say, and indeed, the institutions are sort of called this way. It’s about solidarity. It’s about worker solidarity. The Department of Labor gives them grants, and so on, and so forth.

But of course, if you manage to raise wages in Mexico, of course this is lessening competition with the US. And so the US labor movement directly benefits. So you have two institutions, the US labor movement and Mexican labor movement, who are really in competition with one another but who are using this as a way to assert worker solidarity. So I just want to see how in your interviews and so on, how people navigate this fundamental contradiction in their respective positions. Thank you.

KRISTY KIM: OK, great. I will try to answer really quickly. So the first question was about selection. And to your point, even today, so some things that we might worry about is like perhaps in anticipation of this change in system, even though they don’t know what it is, you might start to hire people a little bit earlier, right? And which will change the composition of workers and become a threat to the identification strategy, which I’m assuming that these workers are very similar.

So one example is that as if you’re trying to find a job today, the threat of a Trump hiring freeze, for example, might cause firms to start hiring in December before the new administration comes in place. So we do check for that. We don’t see necessarily any speed-up of hiring, so we don’t see any anticipation in that sense.

Now I do take it to your point that of course, there may be some unobservable characteristics. Perhaps people who like more risk are OK with entering in the new system without knowing what it is. And that may be true.

And so the limitation of the paper is that the only thing I’m able to look at are observable, measurable characteristics that have existed at that time. But so long as it’s not correlated with– if it’s correlated with observable measures that I have. So let’s say risk is associated with age or your compensation. If that’s the case, then I can more confidently say that we don’t seem to see differences in that.

But certainly there may be other differences that I can’t observe. And so this is just a step towards understanding life cycle effects. And it’s this big movement. So there’s that. And in terms of the UC system, so I think it might be too early to study it because I believe the change happens in 2002.

JOHN LOGAN: 2013.

KRISTY KIM: 2013. OK, OK. So we don’t have a lot of data, and I’m not sure if the UC would provide that data, although I’m sure it’s scrape able based on where faculty go, for example. Anecdotally, it does seem to be the case that younger faculty seem to be looking at their outside options.

The other thing that we might want to think about, so it’s dynamic. So you have these short term workers that might leave sooner, but you also have workers that intend to stay at Berkeley for a really long time. And if we compare like Berkeley versus Harvard, for example, Harvard has no annuity. There are pure savings. The Harvard professors tend to stay much longer than Berkeley professors. They tend to retire in their 60s here, and in Harvard, maybe around their 80s. And so we might see some kind of bimodal effect from these short term workers leave faster, but the ones that intend to stay long, stay longer to build up their retirement savings.

JOHN LOGAN: It’s a national trend among universities. So it’s not just Berkeley.

MAROIN FOURCADE: That would be really interesting to look at the [INAUDIBLE].

KRISTY KIM: We’d like to help.

[LAUGHTER]

VERA PARRA: Yeah. Thanks for the question. I think the like confluence and the interest in confluence and intention are actually quite complicated and also sort of shifting politically. And I think they’ve shifted now after the election. We’ll sort of see what the UAW does.

But what I’ll say is there’s kind of like, from the US labor movement perspective, in terms of specifically thinking, well, it’s like speak specifically about auto, there’s two options, which is do everything you can to try to get them pulled out of the USMCA. Or you do what you can to try to raise wages in Mexico and support independent union organizing.

I think the thing that’s tricky is, of course, if this is like labor ultimately is tied to the companies that it’s part of. So in some ways, I mean, if the United States were to pull out of the USMCA, the big three would totally collapse, and you’d be left with foreign auto companies and Tesla, which of course, are not UAW.

And so in some ways, there is sort of like rhetorically, the UAW, of course, is saying the USMCA was a bad deal. But in reality, the American, the big three depend entirely on Mexico. And so in order to be able to be competitive in any kind of way, you need the parts sector from Mexico.

So the idea is like for the big three to be globally competitive with China or with Chinese EVs, you need to be able to have this nearshore model. Of course, there are tensions and divisions within the UAW itself. And so the move that Fain has made or made at least before the election is to say we’re going to support independent union organizing in Mexico.

And I think within the UAW, there’s also Fain is not in control of the entirety of the UAW, and different local presidents are putting countervailing pressures on him. So I would say I would say that for sure, the sell of the AFL-CIO to the Trump administration and also under the Biden administration is if we raise wages in Mexico, the jobs will come back to the United States.

But the reality is that the wages would have to be raised enormously for it no longer to make sense for GM to be producing cars or to be producing car parts, at least in Mexico, if that makes sense.

So I think it’s part of what I guess I’m seeing is that there’s a kind of labor solidarity that’s possible because of shared interests, actually, where on the one hand, in Mexico, they really need the money and also money from the UAW potentially, I think they feel more comfortable with than money that comes from the American government, where it feels like, A, potentially more strings attached, but B, it’s much more like politically volatile. So people have said to me like we’re depending too much on the Department of Labor and on the rapid response mechanism, which could disappear at any moment.

So that’s on the one hand. And then on the other hand, I think the other potential confluence of interest for the UAW is not just about having wages rise in Mexico enough to bring jobs back, which would really take quite a powerful labor movement, but is also about the possibility of some kind of coordinated strategy and coordinated disruption.

So Stellantis agreed to reopen a plant in Belvidere as part of the big three strike. That was like a victory. And then now is walking that back and is also simultaneously announcing investments in Mexico.

In Coahuila, a place where I’m like doing my field research, if potentially there was actually a strong independent labor movement there that the UAW could coordinate with there would be much more strategic opportunity, certainly in terms labor disruption. and from the conversations I’ve had with people, the supply chains are quite vulnerable to disruption. Like it doesn’t take much to shut down an auto parts plant that then put it’s like just in time production.

And so that potentially the possibility of doing coordinated labor action I think is the real potential benefit to the UAW, more so than wages rising up so much that the jobs return back. I don’t know if that makes sense.

JOHN LOGAN: Thank you all. More comments on that and the auto industry later. Thank you very much for coming and terrific presentations and great discussions. Thank you, everyone.

[APPLAUSE]

 

Authors Meet Critics

Sin Padres, Ni Papeles: Unaccompanied Migrant Youth Coming of Age in the United States

Part of the Authors Meet Critics book series

Recorded on December 3, 2024, this video features an Authors Meet Critics panel on Sin Padres, Ni Papeles: Unaccompanied Migrant Youth Coming of Age in the United States by Stephanie L. Canizales, Assistant Professor of Sociology at UC Berkeley and Faculty Director of the Berkeley Interdisciplinary Migration Initiative.

Professor Canizales was joined in conversation by Kristina Lovato, Assistant Professor of Social Welfare at UC Berkeley, and Caitlin Patler, Associate Professor of Public Policy at UC Berkeley. Sarah Song, Professor at Berkeley Law, moderated.

This event was presented by Social Science Matrix as part of the Authors Meet Critics book series, which features lively discussions about recently published books authored by social scientists at UC Berkeley. For each event, the author discusses the key arguments of their book with fellow scholars. These events are free and open to the public. The panel was co-sponsored by the UC Berkeley Department of Sociology, the Berkeley Interdisciplinary Migration Initiative (BIMI), the Center for Race and Gender, the Othering and Belonging Institute, and the Latinx Research Center.

About the Book

Each year, thousands of youth endure harrowing unaccompanied and undocumented migrations across Central America and Mexico to the United States in pursuit of a better future. Drawing on the firsthand narratives of migrant youth in Los Angeles, California, Stephanie L. Canizales shows that while a lucky few do find reprieve, many are met by resource-impoverished relatives who are unable to support them, exploitative jobs that are no match for the high cost of living, and individualistic social norms that render them independent and alone.

“Sin Padres, Ni Papeles” illuminates how unaccompanied teens who grow up as undocumented low-wage workers navigate unthinkable material and emotional hardship, find the agency and hope that is required to survive, and discover what it means to be successful during the transition to adulthood in the United States.

Stephanie L. Canizales, PhD, is a researcher, author, and professor at the University of California at Berkeley, and a Resident Scholar with the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Stephanie’s research specializations include international migration and immigrant integration; children, youth, and families; inequality, poverty, and mobility; and race and ethnicity. She uses in-depth interviews and ethnographic research methods to understand the causes of Latin American-origin migration to the U.S. and how immigrant children, youth, and families fare once there. Born and raised in Los Angeles, California, Stephanie is the daughter of Salvadoran immigrants whose experiences growing up as unaccompanied youth in Los Angeles inform her scholarship and motivate her commitment to public scholarship.

Podcast and Transcript

Listen to the presentation as a podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

CHUCK KAPELKE: Hi, everyone. Thanks for coming. I’m Chuck Kapelke, the communications manager here at Social Science Matrix. Our director, Marion Fourcade, could not be here today, which she regrets. So I’m filling in her place, and it is my pleasure to welcome you to this Authors Critics Panel on the book Sin Padres, Ni Papeles, Unaccompanied Migrant Youth Coming of Age in the United States by Professor Stephanie Canizalez.

Just a few quick words before I kick things over to our moderator. First, I want to thank our co-sponsors for this event, including the UC Berkeley Department of Sociology, the Berkeley Interdisciplinary Migration Initiative, or BIMI, the Center for Race and Gender, the Othering and Belonging Institute, and the Latinx Research Center.

And I also want to invite you to join us here on Thursday at 4:00 PM as the Berkeley Economy and Society Initiative will present a book talk featuring Marion Fourcade, Director of Matrix and Professor of Sociology, who will talk about her recently published book, The Ordinal Society. Now, let me introduce our moderator for today’s panel.

Sarah Song is the Milo Rees Robbins Chair in Legal Ethics, Professor of Law, and Professor of Philosophy and Political Science here at UC Berkeley. She is a political theorist with a special interest in issues of democracy, citizenship, migration, and inequality. She teaches in the PhD program in Jurisprudence and Social Policy at Berkeley Law, including courses in political and legal philosophy, citizenship and migration, and feminist theory and jurisprudence.

She is the author of Justice, Gender, and the Politics of Multiculturalism, published in 2007, and Immigration and Democracy, which was published in 2018 and explores the values and principles that shape and ought to shape public debate about immigration. So thank you for moderating, Professor Song. And the floor is yours.

SARAH SONG: Thank you, Chuck, for that generous introduction. Welcome, everyone. Thank you all for coming to this Author Meets Critics panel. I just want to briefly tell you about the format of today’s panel and then introduce our panelists. So I’m going to introduce our panelists, and then Professor Canizales will give a short presentation (with PowerPoint) of her book.

Then professor Kristina Lovato and Professor Caitlin Patler will offer their comments. Professor Canizales will then take a few minutes to respond to some of their comments, and then we’ll open it up for Q&A. If we stick to time, we should have 20 minutes for Q&A. And when we get to that portion, catch my eye, and I’ll call on you, and Chuck will come out and circulate a mic. So please wait for the mic before you speak.

So I’m going to first introduce our commentators, and then I’ll introduce the author of our book for today. First, Kristina Lovato is Assistant Professor of Social Welfare here at Berkeley. She is the member of the Latinx and Democracy Cluster and serves as the director of the Center on Immigration and Child Welfare in the School of Social Welfare. Her scholarly work and teaching is directly informed by her dedication to community-engaged social justice.

She spent the past 20 years working at the intersection of child well-being and immigration issues as a bilingual social work practitioner, educator, and teacher. Her research utilizes intersectional, qualitative, and mixed-method approaches to examine the impact of immigration policy on Latinx and migrant child and family well-being.

Our second commentator is Caitlin Patler, who is Associate Professor of Public Policy at the Goldman School of Public Policy here at Berkeley and a faculty affiliate of the Berkeley Interdisciplinary Migration Initiative. She’s a sociologist whose research examines US immigration and criminal laws, legal statuses, and law enforcement institutions as drivers of socioeconomic and health disparities.

She also studies the spillover and intergenerational consequences of systemic inequality for children and household well-being. She’s received multiple grants and awards for her research on undocumented immigrant young adults, the impacts of the Deferred Action for Childhood Arrivals, also known as DACA program, and the US immigration prison system.

Last but not least, the author of the book that we’ll be discussing today is Professor Stephanie Canizales. She is a researcher, author, and Assistant Professor of Sociology here at Berkeley and also the faculty director of the Berkeley Interdisciplinary Migration Initiative, also known as BIMI, and a resident scholar with the United States Department of Health and Human Services.

Her research specializations include international migration and immigrant integration; children, youth, and families, inequality, poverty, and mobility, and race and ethnicity. She uses in-depth interviews and ethnographic research methods to understand the causes of Latin American origin migration to the US, and how immigrant children, youth, and families fare once here.

Born and raised in Los Angeles, Stephanie is the daughter of Salvadoran immigrants whose experiences growing up as unaccompanied youth in Los Angeles inform her scholarship and motivate her commitment to public scholarship. So without further ado, let me introduce Professor Canizales.

[APPLAUSE]

STEPHANIE CANIZALES: Thank you. Well, thanks, everyone, for being here. I’m Stephanie Canizales. This is my fourth book talk on campus this semester. So some of them are recorded. Some of them live in the ether. I’m hoping to give you both what I normally do with a little bit of a spin so I’m not repeating myself. But you can hear me, right? I don’t need that? OK, great.

Sin Padres, Ni Papeles is a book that I wrote that is based on six years of research in Los Angeles. It is my first book project, and I’m very excited to be sharing on it with you today. To ground us in the research, I want to start here with trends of unaccompanied child migration to the US.

We know that millions of youth migrate by themselves across the globe each year. And in the US, unaccompanied minor migrants are predominantly of Central American origin — El Salvador, Guatemala, and Honduras particularly, and a smaller proportion of unaccompanied children also from Mexico. In 2014, the year that is known as the humanitarian crisis, the number of child apprehensions doubled from the year prior for the first time in recent history.

Apprehensions rose to about 69,000. Around 70,000 children were apprehended, and that is known as the year of the crisis. We’re now in 2024, a decade later. The average rate of apprehensions at the US-Mexico border of unaccompanied children since 2021 is about 146,000. So we’ve now doubled what was the year of the crisis.

I want to note a few important patterns, demographics related to this population that are relevant to the book that you all will hear about today: 81% of these children are between the ages of 13 and 17, so in adolescence and in their transition to adulthood. This is the average working age in Latin America.

61% of unaccompanied children apprehended at the US-Mexico border are young men. And teenagers and teenage males are more likely than younger aged children and teenage women to be the first in their families to migrate, to migrate alone, and to engage in transnational migration as their first migration experience, as opposed to internal or regional.

There is a sort of expected pathway– there you go– of entry into the US for unaccompanied children following their arrival in which they’re apprehended at the US-Mexico border by the Department of Homeland Security. Children who are from contiguous border countries, countries that we share a border with, are immediately returned to the country of origin, unless they can prove a well-founded fear of persecution at the moment of apprehension by a Customs and Border Protection agent.

If they are from a non-contiguous border country, children are transferred to the Department of Health and Human Services custody, where then they are given over to the Office of Refugee Resettlement, ORR. ORR then transfers children into the custody of an adult caregiver, of which 40% are typically parents. The US government then assumes that the sponsor, the adult caregiver, will care for and protect children as they come of age and through the time when their legal protection is granted or the child is ordered removed, deported.

That assumption was turned on its head very publicly when the New York Times published this report, Alone and Exploited, in February of 2023, which revealed that children were being released from ORR custody to their sponsors across 20 states, and were ending up as low-wage exploited workers in meatpacking, dairy farming, construction, and other dangerous industries.

A follow-up report later last year told us of teenagers who lost their limbs and their lives working dangerous jobs to pay off migration debt and then to make ends meet in their everyday needs. Since these stories were released, there’s been much confusion about how we got here. Like, this is America, we value children. Or this shouldn’t be happening.

But there is a history of US intervention in Central America and Mexico that has led us here, and children have always been embedded in the migration flows. I hate using that word. The migration trends from Latin America to the US. So I want to give us a little bit more context. My goal for the next 15 minutes is to unpack who unaccompanied and undocumented migrant youth in the US are, and how immigrant youth experience incorporation as they come of age without parents or papers.

To get at that first question, we have to understand that the population is much larger and more diverse than what’s written into policy reports or what we’re reading in the media. And this is because there’s more than one pathway of arrival into the US. While over 146,000 children on average are apprehended at the US-Mexico border, some also evade apprehension.

Some youth can be reunited with family members upon evading apprehension. Some youth might also remain unaccompanied. Research on the trends of unaccompanied migration at the height of the population’s growth in the ’90s and early 2000s suggested that for every one person that was apprehended, about three others were not.

So we might actually have a larger population of unaccompanied children who evaded apprehension and are growing up in different household contexts, including being the head of their own household in the US. With this in mind, my research really– the book is focused on answering the second question. How do immigrant youth experience incorporation as they come of age without parents nor papers?

I’ve argued that answering this question is important as a matter of empirics. We don’t know how many, but there could be at least 450,000 more children living in the US without parents or legal status. But it’s also one of theoretical significance, primarily in the social science areas of the sociology of migration and immigrant incorporation.

Until now, immigrant youths coming of age has been studied in an existing theoretical frame that treats incorporation as an individual or group-level experience. Scholars ask which immigrant individuals or groups are incorporated, which ones are not, and what mechanisms make these outcomes so.

In this way, incorporation is treated as a static outcome. We’ve measured– oh, no, my graphics are not going to work. Assume my presentation is really pretty. We’ve measured this outcome in socioeconomic terms, educational attainment and English language dominance, occupational and wage mobility, and wealth accumulation.

Immigrants’ attainment of these markers informs claims of their deservingness of political protection and social inclusion. So thinking here of the DREAM Act, DACA, DAPA. If you achieve a certain level of success, therefore you are deserving of our consideration of rights and privileges. Scholars have focused on the possibility of attaining these markers within distinct contexts.

We typically study youth in schools and adults at work. We’ve largely understood that immigrant parents labor on behalf of their children so that they can occupy that role of students at school. This is the general premise of the foundational, segmented assimilation theory, which has been the leading immigrant youth incorporation theory over the last three decades.

Segmented assimilation theory offers us three potential pathways of incorporation. Upward mobility into the mainstream, reserved for children who are received favorably race, class, citizenship status, so forth. Selective mobility for those who are less welcome, but who benefit from remaining embedded in parent-led households and K through 12 schools and are incorporated into their local communities or co-ethnic communities.

And downward mobility for youth who are disconnected from traditional family, co-ethnic networks, and do not complete K through 12 school. The role of parents really cannot be overstated in segmented assimilation theory. The theory of immigrant youth incorporation. The mechanism that scholars attribute the successful, upward, or selective incorporation pathways to is the availability of financial, human, social, and emotional capital within households that are transferred from parents to children that can buffer them from potential hardships in the present but also in the future.

Parents also act as liaisons to extended family and community networks who do the same. So the idea is that the child is idealized in the household and protected in the household and the community, and everyone is invested in their coming of age. The assumption of who immigrant youth are in the context they’re growing up in ties us to one dominant empirical frame, one in which children are passive, accompanied migrants who grow up in parent-led households, where parents’ resources and discipline are supplemented by extended family, community, and schools until they transition into adulthood and work.

Research on undocumented youth shows us that, by and large, the household and school contexts render them indistinguishable from their US-born peers until they age out of K through 12 schools and age into illegality. But as we know, more undocumented Latin American origin youth are knowingly migrating to the US unaccompanied by a parent.

They’re remaining unaccompanied as they come of age. They’re growing up outside of the bounds of normative childhood and complex households and families and independently enter the co-ethnic community. They don’t have that liaison. So I attempt to widen the empirical frame to account for this marginalized group and offer a chance to reassess our assumptions about how immigrants experience incorporation and how distinct pathways of incorporation come to be.

I can also reveal something new about how immigrant and young people experience identity formation, survival, what it means to thrive from their perspective. So like I said, Sin Padres, Ni Papeles really sets out to answer that question, how do immigrant youth experience incorporation as their coming of age without parents nor papers?

I advance several incorporation theory arguments moving beyond an institutionally bound, static, socioeconomic endpoint to argue that incorporation is a dynamic, material, and emotional process that occurs within and across societies over time because young people are not just growing up here. But they’re also connected to families there.

Engaged in an incorporation process, Immigrants experience their well-being and success in ways that reflect their social roles and their social position and that young people are capable of navigating this process independently. In the absence of an adult, that doesn’t mean that the child inherently becomes deviant or is disconnected from society. But the connections might look a little bit different.

So I really try to lay that out in the book across six substantive chapters. I begin at the point of departure, where you set individual and collective migration goals that are rooted in advancing their own and their family’s futures. I really try to draw on youth’s understanding of migration metas. What are those goals that they’re setting that really motivate not just their migration, but their persistence in what are unimaginable conditions a lot of the time.

Many arrive in the US to find that long-settled relatives who are constrained by their own legal and socioeconomic status are unable to offer material and emotional support, rendering children unaccompanied upon their arrival. Young people might feel disoriented as they’re thrust into material and emotional independence and their role as low-wage workers in the US.

Over time, they experience orientation to life as an unaccompanied and undocumented immigrant youth worker. Some establish meaningful social ties with individuals and organizations that facilitate their emotional orientation. Some people talk about being unaccompanied but not alone. These young people move into a phase of “adaptación al sistema,” adaptation to life in the US.

They learn to navigate the structure of opportunities before them. But there is also young people who might learn to navigate the bus system, how to get a job, how to get an apartment. They still feel emotionally disoriented and experience what participants refer to as “perdicion,” a state of perdition, of loss, of an emotional despair, where they not only lose their sense of self, but lose the metas, the things that motivated them.

As youth move from disorientation to orientation to adaptation or perdition, they make meanings of success and well-being that really are a reflection of the conditions of their lives. It’s not diplomas or wealth that they point to as a marker of success, but their ability to take care of themselves independently, to take care of left-behind families, and to support others similarly situated peers that matters most to them.

I said a lot. I’m talking really fast, but I’ll give you a quick rundown of the research methods. And if you all want to know more, I’m happy to answer in the Q&A. I spent six years conducting ethnographic observations and in-depth interviews with Central American and Mexican young adults all over the age of 18 when I interviewed them. I can explain my IRB restrictions on that, but all had arrived in the US as minors between the ages of 11 and 17 in the decade before the onset of the crisis.

I observed a support group for six years. I attended church mass prayer groups, weekly gatherings, community gardens, book clubs, adult English language classes– where I did some recruitment and observations– community festivals. And then just over time, the general hanging out at the donut shops and the McDonalds and all of that stuff, really getting a sense of how young people spent their time when they weren’t at work.

Of the 75 in-depth interviews that I conducted, 61 of the interviewees were Central American, 14 were Mexican. About half of the sample was Indigenous Maya, 36, Indigenous Maya language speakers. The sample included 53 men and 22 women. The median age of interviewees was 23. So really in young adulthood, anticipating the future, but also very much connected to the teenage years that they migrated in.

The median age of migration was 16. As I mentioned, the youngest interview participant was 11 at the time of arrival. The oldest was 17. Participants had spent– on average across the 75– about 8.6 years in Los Angeles. So they were really able to tell me what happened in their incorporation. About five of the 75 were received by long-settled relatives that set them on the path of school enrollment.

They told the story very similar to the Dreamer story, the DACA student story. So I focused really on young people who were not well received, that other 70 who became full-time workers. A quick glimpse of the types of work they did. Most of my participants focused in manufacturing, garment manufacturing, which is really densely populating the Downtown LA area.

Food manufacturing, some domestic home making, janitorial workers. One woman worked at a salon. One was a restaurant DJ. It’s kind of across the board, but predominantly in what we consider these racialized immigrant jobs where single men were exploited predominantly decades ago, and then women, families, and now children are the target recruiting worker population.

So sociologists have long studied immigrant youth in schools and adults at work. Because these are deemed the age-appropriate institutions, we don’t really question how they function in making the incorporation process. If we want to study immigrant youth, we go to a school, and we end up studying students. If we want to study adults, we end up talking about work.

So I’m trying to really understand when you dislocate the age and the institution, what does that tell us about how institutions work in shaping the incorporation process and the role of age in navigating space? So those two things concurrently. Beyond the narrative arc that I described across the six substantive chapters earlier, I hope readers also engage with these important takeaways.

First, that migration and coming of age are co-occurring processes. These are adolescents transitioning into adulthood. They’re also newcomers transitioning into a long-settled migrant status and that there are also material and emotional dimensions to those two things. There’s a lot happening. I talked earlier about how we’ve come to understand the material endpoint of incorporation, and we’re keen on uncovering the material lives that immigrants live, how they live, where they live, how they work, how they make community.

So I really urge us across the six chapters to think about the emotional dimensions of immigrants’ lives. What does it feel like to depart? What does it feel like to arrive? How does this orientation of being a new migrant also then intermingle with being an adolescent that just every day feels uncomfortable in their body, is learning how to make friends, maybe has their first heartbreak, is learning how to drive. All of those things, or maybe not learning how to drive, but learning how to drive in Los Angeles, which is its own beast, and then getting your first, second, and third job.

All of these firsts, not just as an immigrant, but an adolescent in a new society. I also urge readers to consider how the emotional dimensions of youth lives are being navigated without an adult supervisor or a guide, someone that they can, at the end of the day, either say nothing happened at school or unload the thing that– those everyday interactions that we might have with our siblings, our parents, our caregivers.

I draw on youth perspectives and their own words and outline the material and emotional dimensions of how they’re living through these ongoing processes of disorientation, orientation, adaptation, and perdition. And I want to also highlight that all of those chapter titles come from when you read the book. You’ll see that they are drawn out of the words that young people use.

They said “disorientado.” They said “adaptacion,” “perdicion,” all of these words. I don’t introduce a framework. I give you the language that young people use to give texture and color to their own lives. So that is the youth-centered approach. I also play with these concepts that I’ve been developing over the past few years and previously written work that I bring together and the narrative of Sin Padres, Ni Papeles.

The concepts that I’ve played with are work primacy and trying to understand the subjective meanings that young people draw around their well-being and also success. What does it mean to feel well, to live well, but also what does it mean to succeed when they’re outside of all of those markers and institutions that we’ve defined as normative.

The first concept, work primacy, I introduced in the book to illustrate how unaccompanied immigrant youth experience incorporation when the primary institutional context that they’re growing up in is the workplace and the primary social role that they take on is one of low-wage worker. With this concept, I analyze how institutional primacy undergirds the immigrant incorporation process within and across spheres and societies.

So really drawing attention to the fact that we don’t call it school primacy, but we’ve really assumed that young people are growing up in schools and that certain resources and socialization processes are happening in their lives. What I draw out of this concept is that immigrants relationships to institutions make the incorporation process by shaping a immigrants’ live chances, who they are in the present, and who they can become in the future.

And I think that’s something that studying young people’s transitions into adulthood lets me think a lot about where they’ve been and also what they imagine the future would look like for them. Again, I do this across multiple spheres of society to show how immigrant incorporation plays out in a way that is shaped by institutional primacy.

I focus on four vital spheres through which immigrants encounter the structure of opportunities, starting with youth at work, how work lives shape educational access and opportunities, the way they engage in community, how they relate to their families that are still in the origin country. I talk in the book about how long hours at work and physical ailments caused at work makes it impossible for young people to enroll in K through 12 schools.

You can’t both be at work and school at the same time but then near impossible to enroll in adult English language schools that might meet at 7:00 or 8:00 PM. And young people really try to learn the English language. So turning, again, on its head, this idea that if an immigrant is not– if an immigrant young person is not in school, they don’t value the culture.

Young people revere the English language as something that is essential for their work lives. So they’re really trying to learn the language. I highlight the cases like that of Tomas, who arrived in Los Angeles at 14. I met him when he was 19. He said he saw how attending school was nearly impossible because he said no one helped me.

I had to pay rent. I had to pay for food. So either I go to school and I don’t have money for rent or food, or I don’t go to school and I have money for rent and to eat. There’s these negotiations that a 14-year-old is making that they wouldn’t normatively make in the US. In interview after interview, I heard comments like this.

People would say, I wish I could go to school, but no one’s going to support me. It’s just me. “Estoy solito,” I’m by myself. A garment worker said, when I got here, no one wanted to help me, but I needed to find a job to survive, to pay rent, to pay food, to take care of myself. There’s so much talk a lot in the book about how young people felt being solito, being alone, and therefore relegated to work and limited mobility opportunities.

I don’t know how much time I have. I’m doing great. In particular, without English language proficiency, young people have a lesser chance of getting jobs outside of the exploitative garment industry, restaurant, kitchens, and construction work. Low wages make it hard to send consistent remittances to left-behind families, breeding feelings of guilt and shame.

Youth cope, then, by withdrawing from families only calling when work is going really well and then not calling on all of those weeks that work is not going well. Youth also participate in communities in ways that time and resource constraints posed by work enable them to. So maybe they only see friends on a Sunday afternoon because they’re working Monday through Saturday.

They go to church on Sunday morning, and they only have a few hours to themselves or engaging in physical activities. I talk in the book about a few young men who got together and started a running club. They wanted to get faster, but not just faster runners, but faster at work. They wanted to earn. I think the phrase was– something about if you work more, you earn more.

So it’s very much getting faster. That’s work primacy, getting faster for the sake of doing better at work. So that’s the relationship between institutional primacy and the lives that young people live that I try to draw out across the chapters. The everyday material conditions shape how youth feel about themselves and about whether or not they were attaining the metas they set out to and whether or not they were growing up in a way that they could feel proud of and they could communicate to their left behind families that the parents would be proud of.

Unaccompanied youth noticed that they were surrounded by adults at work and that children were either accompanied throughout the neighborhood or that kids were not at work because they were at school learning for the first time. The education is compulsory. And even if you grew up as a child worker in Guatemala, and you think this is what everyone does, arriving in the US and realizing that that’s not what everyone does, hurts their feelings in a way that I wasn’t anticipating finding.

I call this the emergent frame of reference. They’re learning in real time how kids live and how that’s different from how they’re living themselves, but also how other kids that they’ve left behind are living, including their younger siblings. One participant described that they grow up as unaccompanied young people feeling discriminated against.

He said, I feel like I’m less than them, kids with parents. I would look at other kids, say, wow, why not me? I would ask myself, why am I not a kid who was born here? Why aren’t my parents here? Why is my life different? I say, look, the ones who were born here, they go to school, they have parents, they have everything. I wish I could speak the language too. I feel like there’s no way out. I like being here, but I feel stuck. I feel less than others.

So again, the material and emotional coming together and making young people feel a sense of deprivation they probably weren’t anticipating upon migration or departure. Tomas, who we met earlier, said that when youth migrate to the US without their parents and don’t get familial support upon arrival, they have to grow up as workers (NON-ENGLISH). They only come here to suffer.

I saw sufrimiento, how young people tried to cope with sufrimiento, through reports of drug and alcohol addiction. Several instances of self harm. I talk in the book about how these structurally produced voids that young people feel prompt young people to take up behaviors to fill the void. So when we see what is called deviant behavior, it isn’t something that is inherent to a young person.

But it is an emotional response and really trying to draw attention to the structure that produces the void. I talk about in that final chapter on perdicion. But I also find that youth make positive meanings and fulfillment of their work and kept promises. Use definitions of success reflect the primacy of work and their ability to claim social responsibility.

Youth claim belonging and citizenship within an emergent frame of reference. A guy who left school in Guatemala in sixth grade after his father passed away migrated to Los Angeles at 16 after years of trying to fill the role, the financial gap, his father left behind. He thought he’d be able to attend school while working.

This didn’t happen for him. While growing up in LA, he became preoccupied with ensuring that his younger siblings didn’t end up migrating as unaccompanied youth after him. He made it his goal to ensure that his five siblings completed education and were able to get jobs in Guatemala. He said he’s spending a lot of money and working hard for them to succeed in Guatemala.

A lot of people say, I don’t have a house. I don’t have an education. Those traditional markers. He says, I’ve been here for five years, and I’ve accomplished nothing. So he’s basically saying in sociology speak, a lot of people would say that I have that third downward incorporation pathway. He says, you know what? I always think that what I’m doing for my family.

He says his mom is happy. His siblings are safe. They all finish school. Everyone is there, and they admire how much I’ve overcome. That relational success is what he’s pointing to. Esmeralda provides another example. She migrated at 16 when her two older siblings stopped remitting money. They both got married and started families in Los Angeles.

So Esmeralda was the next one in line. She was 26 when we met. She said she felt proud that she hadn’t achieved that life stage marker. The normative marker of getting married and starting a family. She said they’re happy because I haven’t gotten married. So I went, yeah, I’m the good daughter. Because a lot of women come here and a few years later, they get married, have children, forget about their families.

The not forgetting about her family became the marker of success. So again, pointing to these idealized– the high school diploma, the college diploma, the home ownership, and young people from their institutional position as workers say, my marker just happens to be different, and I’m doing well along that line. So I started off with these two questions, who are unaccompanied and undocumented migrant youth, and how do they experience incorporation? Sin Padres, Ni Papeles.

The book advocates for scholars to widen the empirical frame of who immigrant youth, but also who undocumented youth and unaccompanied youth are. I’ve relied on the case of unaccompanied undocumented youth workers who enter the US not having been apprehended at the border to show how young people are active agents in their own lives.

They can navigate complex households, transnational families. They can learn communities and workplaces and survive. They transition into adulthood as workers, and I’ve argued that this doesn’t mean that youth experience downward incorporation into deviance and institutional disconnection. Instead, they experience incorporation as a process that is conditioned by their starting point. Their institutional primacy, which is work.

I define the incorporation process as one that occurs within and across institutions and societies over time. Once pathway along the material and emotional incorporation process is informed again by their context and the role they take within that context. I introduced work primacy as a concept that shows how relationships to the place that we occupy in society is what makes the process– gives structure to that process for us.

Youth can be relegated to work, but they’re also not flatly just workers. They’re living these multi-dimensional lives, and they engage in society in ways that reflect their access to opportunities, time, resources, and also their goals. Last thing I will say is that we can see youth agency in how they draw subjective meanings of success and well-being from within their distinct social contexts in relationship with other people and that they navigate these processes, Sin Padres, Ni Papeles.

Actually, last thing I’ll say is that within my– I mentioned that 36 of the youth that I interviewed for this project are Indigenous young people. And throughout the book I really tried to explain how gender and ethno-race can shape or make these processes just a little bit different in different contexts, but it wasn’t enough. So there’s another book coming next summer that is just on those 36 young people and explains the role of ethno-race and language. So be on the lookout for part two of Sin Padres if you enjoyed it, which I hope you did.

SARAH SONG: Thank you, Stephanie.

[APPLAUSE]

Kristina.

KRISTINA LOVATO: Well, thank you, first and foremost, for such an amazing presentation. My name is Kristina Lovato, and I’m an assistant professor here. And I’m going to just start off with recognitions of the amazing contributions that Stephanie’s book has offered all of us. First, I’m so appreciative and honored to be here today to engage with you all in such a beautifully written, engaging, accessible, and deeply analytical book.

As a social welfare scholar, my work focuses in similar ways, particularly focusing on immigration-related family separations. And when I knew that this book was coming out, as I followed Stephanie’s work for many years, I quickly assigned it to my research lab, and we have consumed it week after week this semester. So it’s really an honor to be here with all of you.

So again, starting off with some contributions, I’d like to say that this book shifts the way we think about who migrates and how individuals incorporate into the US and shape their resettlement. It provides nuanced and innovative insights into the framing and reconceptualization of migration.

In terms of the broad literature, as Stephanie pointed out, we’ve really understood migration from the vantage point of the push-pull factors that have centrally focused on US-Mexico relations. These push-pull factors that really have driven male migration. Fathers who come to the US. We have later learned about the experiences of women.

Mothers who experienced transnational family separation. More recently, we have learned about the experiences of youth who migrate to the US with their parents and have the opportunity to, at some point, perhaps apply for and potentially receive DACA status. This book really shifts that and places us into understanding the experience of unaccompanied migrants, again, who come here without parents, without papers.

It focuses on a demographic and a region that we have really not had the luxury of understanding, despite the humanitarian crisis that has been at the helm of the US border for the last decade. And so essentially, this population has been rendered invisible despite the intensified human rights crisis. And with that being said, particularly during a time of heightened restrictive immigration policies that is only becoming more restrictive in the next administration to come.

So with all that being said, this book is a huge contribution to the literature. This book also underscores the reality that these migrations are motivated by individual and collective urgencies and care. And this is such an important point to really think about, the fact that care is deeply involved in the decision and need to migrate.

There is a poignant quote by Caleb, one of the participants in this book. This quote stands out as he remembers how his mother confessed her concern for his future in Guatemala. At the young age of 14, in this act of care, Caleb’s mother encourages him to leave home for his own economic and emotional future.

He recalled her saying, there is no way for you to get ahead, to become a better person, and build your home. Caleb, like all of the participants, left home to obtain their metas, their goals, of becoming better individuals, earning money, caring for their families, and for many, returning home and participating in their local communities at some point.

So essentially, there was a hope to return back home and to participate and engage back in the communities that they were from. This book shows that migration is not an individual or selfish act, but rather a form of transnational family care motivated by individual and collective socioeconomic forces and urgencies that really are at the helm of their present and their metas for the future, their goals.

Stephanie also does an amazing job of highlighting youth voices as she presented here. Stephanie demonstrates how youth construct hybrid identities that bridge their own local incorporation process, settling into this major Metropolitan city of Los Angeles, as well as tending to family ties abroad, all the while experiencing work primacy, as she mentioned, and providing this type of transnational family care, emotional, and financial support, staying deeply invested and engaged with their families back home.

Stephanie illuminates the variety of resettlement experiences as she shows that many of these experiences– that not all of these youth fared the same. That males, in some cases, fare differently because of the opportunities or non opportunities that were available to them, as well as female participants.

There were a lot of gender constraints on the ways that they were received, and so they experienced incorporation differently, as did Indigenous Mayan Guatemalan youth, who experienced a disproportionate amount of anti-Indigenous reception and sentiment in Los Angeles. So little has really been written on the importance of the context of reception in which one is received.

Oftentimes, sometimes it can be welcoming, but most of the time it’s hostile. And so through the narratives that are told throughout this book, Stephanie points to the household as a very important context of reception for providing the material and emotional support that shapes youth transition. She pointed out in her presentation that for some youth, they actually do have long-settled relatives who are here, who are resourced, who have the capacity to hear about their day.

And for a lot of them, they actually didn’t have their long-settled relatives who they moved in with. Uncles, aunts, just simply didn’t have the capacity, the resources to hear about their day, to receive them because of constraints on their own financial realities, their own status as undocumented individuals in the US.

And so this book provides examples of how long-settled receiving family members faced constrained conditions on their own due to macro-level structures, which really shaped not only their own mobility processes, but of course, the youth who tried to settle with them. And so an individual– I’ll give an example of Patrick, for example– who discussed how long-settled relatives weren’t able to support him.

He says, sometimes you don’t find the necessary support here. I know I can become someone here but only if someone supports me. I don’t know where to go on my own. And so essentially, many of the youth, like Patrick, felt emotionally and materially and physically disoriented. And while it might be easy to cast some kind of judgment, blame, on relatives who can’t receive these youth, their family members, Stephanie points to the larger macro-level structures and influences that absolutely make it impossible sometimes to receive their relatives.

Another contribution that I’d like to point out is the way that Stephanie attends to the emotional and social lives of these youth. She provides deeply intimate and a personal lens and window into the emotional lives of these youth who are navigating dual transitions. According to these youth, America, the US, is not the dream that they expected.

It’s a rude awakening when they get here that the US is really not what they imagined, and the emotional narratives that are portrayed really weave in youth’s voices. Essentially, they theorize their own experience, challenging dominant paradigms and dominant theories around what incorporation should look like. Through their own words, as Stephanie mentioned, they name their incorporation process through three dynamic processes, this orientacion, adaptacion, and perdicion.

And so just returning back to this idea of disorientation, many of the youth experience this lack of emotional and material support. In some ways, the ups and downs of finding work, being exploited at work, having to deal with not being able to go to school, navigating transportation, all of this was disorienting.

At the same time, many of them were also able to adapt over time. They found support through youth groups or rather, I should say, through groups like Voces de Esperanza, which Stephanie spent six years observing and engaging in. And I’d like to point out this quote that was so powerful to me. It was the organizer of the group, Wilfredo, and he really talks about youth agency in creating mutual aid and a collective space to share emotions, which this group offered.

And so Wilfredo says to the youth themselves, “Right now, you are OK. You have your feet. You have your hands. You can work. You can smile. You have what you need. But if you latch on to one thing that is happening, then you will not be fine. Instead of living in the present, your mind will be focused on something else that is difficult. So you must have courage, which is why we have this space. These are the things that you bring here to share, that you can share with a friend. That is the only way to heal.”

And so this quote, when I read it, it just hit me so powerfully. As someone who is a social welfare scholar and someone who has engaged in the importance of groups, this speaks to the power, really, of healing through the connection that exists through these narratives with others.

So adaptation is something that Stephanie highlights through community and family. These youth– I should say the long-settled relatives that sometimes the youth have access to. These youth are able to adapt. They learn how to go to– they learn how to form study groups, to learn English, to be, again, more productive at work. They learn how to pay rent, how to navigate a huge city like Los Angeles.

They learn how to advance their careers through job jumping. And at the same time, some of them experience this process of perdition, of loss because it is so overwhelming, this process. And so Stephanie speaks throughout this book about the way in which goal setting, setting one’s metas, is challenging. And they go through processes of some of them engaging in substance use and harmful relationships and even suicidality, unfortunately, constrained by these macro-level structural forces that are at play.

I’d like to jump through to– because I think I only have one minute left– to some of the questions that I’d like to pose. So really wanting to share the utmost respect and really the power that came through this book and through these narratives. As a social welfare scholar, I encourage social work students, professionals, those who work in mental health, community-based settings, legal professionals, human-service professionals, and policy makers to engage in this book.

This is a book about the real life stories of youth who are engaging and trying to make lives for themselves here on their own. This book provides critical contributions and recommendations for policy makers, really showing that we must engage and create policies and programs that mitigate harms so that our unaccompanied youth can really fulfill their futures and dreams.

And so I’ll pose three questions that I have for Stephanie, which really just came as thoughts and as curiosities as I was reading this book. So the first one really centers the geographic context of this book and the transferability. And so, Stephanie, while you show that household arrivals and context matters significantly in the process of incorporation in that when receiving families are stably situated and children are received well, you also demonstrate that local institutions, whether it’s faith-based agencies, churches, local institutions, and co-ethnic communities can act as mediators in potentially hostile situations and bridge aspects to mobility.

So this makes me wonder, how might incorporation processes differ in states and communities with less immigrant friendly policies than California, particularly in context shaped by the current heightened anti-immigrant sentiment and restrictive governance at play? How applicable are these findings in geographies other than California, which also may have high unaccompanied immigrant populations?

The second question focuses on methodological reflections. So the methods of this book. While reading the introduction and the appendix, we learned that Stephanie spent six years embedded doing ethnographic research in immigrant enclaves in Los Angeles, in which you take the role of providing a lot of care to these young participants.

You serve, at times, as a bilingual tutor, giving participants rides, waiting until the right time to conduct the focus group. So you really act with care in this ethnographic research, and this made me wonder what guidance might you offer? Are the emerging scholars who attempt to build the same depth of community engagement in their work?

Is sustained immersive engagement essential to gain such insights, or are there alternative methodological approaches for similar studies, especially as researchers? We’re often told that we don’t have a lot of time to engage in research. So that is another question for you. Lastly, I’ll focus on policy and practice implications.

Those of us who study social inequities and access to services, our work is really ensuring equitable access to social service systems and the social service safety net. And you provide some important suggestions around how governments, schools, how institutions may invest in alternative and flexible education programs, giving, again, the shifting political landscape and restrictive immigration climate that we’re entering.

How can institutions and service systems translate these important findings into tangible and attainable guidance? How might institutions and governments support the educational and psychosocial needs of this population while we see that the social service landscape is evolving and becoming increasingly punitive? Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

 

CAITLIN PATLER: Hi, everyone. Thank you for being here. And thank you to Dr. Steph for providing this opportunity to engage with this beautifully written, incredibly well theorized, meticulously researched, deeply respectful at times, really quite painful. Had to put the book down a few times while reading it. But this portrayal of the experiences of undocumented and unaccompanied children.

So I’m going to do something similar to what Christina did, which is organize my thoughts around three things of many that I really thought were just incredible contributions to the book, and then pose three points for discussion. I wanted to share a little bit about how I came to this read, just the lenses through which I read.

I was introduced a little bit in terms of my academic work. So I was introduced as having spent a lot of time writing about young, undocumented immigrants who come to the United States as children, this sort of so-called dreamer group, who are all presumed to come to the US with the goal of either staying with or reunifying with their parents.

So as you say, the parents are such an important part of the story of the dreamer. I’ve also written a lot about the US immigration detention and deportation systems and how these laws define and structure normative and public perceptions of immigrant goodness and criminality, which I’ll come back to in a second.

And then finally, how many folks in here are from LA. I see the Dodgers hat in the back. OK. Anybody have lived or been through the Pico Union, Westlake, MacArthur Park area? OK. Yes. All right. So also in my previous life, before I was an academic, worked for many years in an immigrants rights organization right down there in Pico Union Westlake, and then later helped run a youth boxing program in Pico Union right on Venice and Pico. And many of the youth that would go to that boxing gym had very similar stories to the types that you mentioned in the book. And so I felt that deep and personal connection to the book, too, so thank you.

Which brings me to the kind of three main contributions. And actually, I think you did such a good job talking about the main theoretical contribution, which is to really help us rethink, refocus, really reconsider what are considered to be the paradigms of the immigrant integration literature. So maybe I’m actually going to skip over that so that our LA friends and everyone else have time to ask some questions.

But I will say, Dr. Steph really turns a lot of that on its head. And thank god. Like, we were all a little bit tired of hearing about downward assimilation. Other people have rightly criticized some of the many problematic elements of that, but you do so as well in a way that’s really, really important, focusing on the structural inequalities that compel youth toward disorientacion and can lead to perdition, and I’ll say more about that in a moment.

I want to underscore something you said, too, which is really about making forefront the emotional realities of immigrants lives, their emotional well-being, their physical health, and how those two things are related, and also come about and are influenced by the role of work primacy of basically living all day long in these very difficult work environments that contribute to both social and emotional poor health, really.

And that has– that really hasn’t been present or at least not at the forefront of a lot of the work on immigrant incorporation, and I’m so grateful to you for bringing it in. You centered the well-being of these young people so beautifully. You delved into their fear, their pain. You talked about how they described [SPANISH], [SPANISH], loneliness, agony.

I mean, this reminds me of some of the really beautiful work that sociologist Lacey Abrego has done and talking about transnational family lives and the pain of living in separation and just bringing that to the forefront, because that is so profoundly important for people’s lives when you live away from your family, when you don’t have that love to draw on every day. So I just appreciated that a lot.

Your book also speaks the unspoken. Your respondents talk to you about incest, about rape, about the sexualization of immigrant women and girls. Those parts were very hard for me to read. You talked about drug and alcohol abuse, suicidal ideation, and actual suicide, successful suicide. Very painful accounts of anti-indigenous racism, the complexities of families that some parents abandoned their children.

Those are things that I feel like the stereotype of the good immigrant just chokes people and doesn’t let them talk about the multifaceted– like, that life is complex. What was the word you used? Multi-dimensional. Yeah. Like, our families aren’t perfect. And people aren’t allowed to not have perfect families and perfect stories if they want to get ahead in this country. And that in and of itself is oppressive. So I wanted to applaud the book for doing that. And you do it beautifully and you do it subtly.

  1. Another thing I really think is cool and that I think more scholars need to do over and over and over again, and not just scholars, but anybody who’s talking about immigration, is to say it clearly over and over and over again, the structural relationship between US policies and what happens in countries of origin, and then what happens when migrants settle. And how those are all interrelated.

So I’m just going to use some of your words. So this is Dr. Steph writing. “The history of US intervention has destabilized political and economic systems and repressed collective action in countries of origin, imported violent gangs that prey on vulnerable children and their families, heightened environmental degradation and depletion of natural resources, and contributed to the rise of extreme poverty and debt, with few opportunities in these home countries for safety, mobility and well-being.” That’s US intervention.

And these very same home country conditions then, quote, “Force children to become knowing political and economic actors within their families and communities early in life. They are caught at the intersection of compulsion and choice as they make decisions to migrate.” But if that weren’t bad enough already– and a lot of us know this history of US intervention in Central America.

But we have to say it over and over and over again, because other people don’t know. And if that weren’t bad enough, then the US policies then structure what immigrant youth even can achieve once they get to the United States. Again, Stephanie writes, “US authorities not only create conditions for migration, they then criminalize immigrants once they are in the United States while barring them from accessing public assistance.”

You rightly call out this violence, quote, “To legally and socially construct barriers for immigrant families to secure young people’s mobility and well-being as they come of age and then weaponize families immobility as the justification for their legal and social exclusion is not only nonsensical, it is cruel.”

So this careful framing is just so utterly and beautifully sociological, and I just want to emphasize that a lot of us, again, in this room, we come to this work. We know that reality. We know that history, but a lot of other people don’t. And I just really appreciate how clearly you stated it and how important it is, especially right now when we’re just seeing this onslaught against immigrant communities from every direction to remind people that the US caused a lot of these problems, continues to cause problems that drive people out of their home countries, and then hurts those very same people who are forced to leave once they come here. And that those things are intimately related.

And it doesn’t mean that immigrants don’t have agency, that they don’t push back and resist a lot of that and do their very best within those contexts. It just means we have to name it. OK. And then my last thing I loved, and then I’ll get to my questions– I loved many things. But one of the things I thought was really, really great was your deep attention to methods and methodological precision, and that came up also in what Christina said.

I really appreciated the informant as expert. That methodology in which youth are the experts in their own lives. And you were not. You came in and you said, I have a relationship to this reality, but I’m not living in your shoes. I want your voice to structure the way I write about this, and you’ve done that.

I also want to say, if anyone in the room is thinking about doing an ethnographic project, I have not engaged in one like this myself. But I thought– I wrote down– I scribbled in the margins over and over. She has this beautiful methodological appendix that was also painful and hard to read. But it was like a real guidebook for students who want to do this work.

And you talk about your own socioemotional and physical health and how it’s hard to witness the kind of pain that you witnessed, the challenges you faced as a– you described yourself as a young female researcher doing this work in areas that are often male dominated. Those were REAL Insights about research that we don’t often get, the raw truths that some of us run into when we do this work that others do not. So for anyone teaching students, I really highly recommend that methodological appendix.

All right. So a few topics for discussion. Great. OK. So I was thinking a lot about work primacy. We’ve talked a lot about– we’ve talked a little bit about this in some of the work that I do. I’m working with people who have been released from immigration detention, and they’re trying to re-enter the world and work– shapes their lives too, because they also have to make ends meet. And they end up working in secondary labor markets as well.

And those labor markets are exploitative, and the jobs are very difficult. But they’re actually able to work precisely because it’s in these secondary labor markets where undocumented immigration status is the norm. It’s considered, quote, the cost of doing business. Employers have this don’t ask, don’t tell policy around that, and they seem to be doing something very similar by hiring children, which is also not lawful. Or that there are also barriers to those children’s participation in more formal labor markets. So I just thought I’d love to hear more about the kind of distinct role of secondary labor markets in work primacy.

And then, let’s see, I would love– I know you previewed your baby sister to this book, but I really was– I thought you very importantly drew attention to how anti-indigenous sentiment shapes settlement experiences. And I would welcome you to say more about how scholars should theorize and think about indigeneity in the context of US racial structures and hierarchies, and how can we do better about addressing that in our work.

And then my last comment is really about where we are right now today facing a Trump 2.0. And I know– one of the things that struck me was that not a lot of what you wrote about was fear of apprehension by ICE or by immigration or even by the police. And I thought that was so interesting because so much of this work is about people, quote, unquote, “living in the shadows” and living in the shadow of fear, really.

And the idea that their whole lives are determined by this fear of being discovered. And you don’t really– that didn’t seem to come up. I mean, in terms of youth being experts, they were not talking about that. And so I’d like to hear, do you think– what do you think might have chan– has anything changed since you left the field in 2018?

Do you think– what would they say if you asked them today how they feel. And then how would that change the policy and programmatic recommendations you made at the end of the book? What can we all think about collectively doing to promote the well-being of this very important and very vulnerable group of immigrants and also immigrants in general? I’ll leave it there. Thanks.

STEPHANIE CANIZALES: Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

Yeah. Can I just– We don’t have too much time, but I’ll just make a few comment. Oh, thank you. An Author meets critics. Like, the critics really killed me when I got the invite for this because I was like, no, only friends can read my book.

[LAUGHTER]

So I really appreciate the– you know, it’s almost an out-of-body experience to hear how people receive the thing that you’ve– I’ve spent 14 years working on this project. I’m going to cry saying this, but I really appreciate your time and attention. I appreciate that you– like, I wrote this book in solitude. We were in a lockdown. No one read it until it was done.

And to have the things that were heavy– I think, embodied heavy on me, that I needed people to know that I wrote draft after draft alone in my room, I just appreciate so much hearing the resonance, and it makes it feel like, sure, tenure, sure, all of these things. But it’s also just, I feel like I know things that I need other people– now I need you all to know, and help.

Let’s do it together because you just carry it. You’re the only person that knows for so long. So I appreciate the kindness with which you showed up, and also just the attention you gave it. So yay. Thanks. Yeah. Do we want to take other questions and maybe I’ll just mesh them all together?

SARAH SONG: Questions from the audience. Yes.

AUDIENCE: Ooh, that’s a lot.

[LAUGHTER]

SARAH SONG: There’s a mic. There’s a mic.

AUDIENCE: First of all, it doesn’t matter. Ooh, my heart is racing right now. So let me take a minute. How to speak in this space, especially talking about this particular group of undocumented students. I mean, documented persons. I look forward to reading your book. I am myself an undocumented graduate student without DACA who has– I mean, as I hear the stories, yeah, I grew up in that type of environment.

I don’t know. I guess my questions, I have two questions. One of them is, I never understood or never considered my experience as an unaccompanied minor. And so I was wondering what exactly is– I think, if I understood correctly, you’re unaccompanied minor as you’re traveling. But once you’re here, you might potentially be meeting your family, which I think was my case. But I never thought of myself as an unaccompanied minor, which is interesting to process that information.

And then the second one was more just language stuff. I’m in the English department here, but the usage of incorporation and assimilation. So moving between those two. It seemed like you were just using them, like–

STEPHANIE CANIZALES: Interchangeably, yeah.

SARAH SONG: –interchangeably Yes. Sorry, I’m a bit nervous. Shaky. Yeah. So I guess the main question that I had was that, yeah, how do we– like you were describing. And I guess once I read the book, I’ll get a better sense of it. But what how do– what is considered unaccompanied in this particular situation? Thank you.

STEPHANIE CANIZALES: Yeah. So unaccompanied minor federal law, it is a term used to describe someone who migrates before the age of 18, no legal status at the point of apprehension, and no guardian or caregiver with them at the point of apprehension. That means you have to be apprehended, and you have to be classified as those things to have the title of unaccompanied minor.

And then that gives you the rights and responsibilities bestowed to that particular group. Like immediately put in removal proceedings, the right to different social services, so on and so forth. The way I talk about unaccompanied, because I’m bringing the material and emotional dimensions of the experience together, I refer to an unaccompanied child as someone who migrates unaccompanied regardless of apprehension and who lives unaccompanied.

So by my definition, then a young person who meets a long settled relative, like, the federal government still gives an unaccompanied– a child an unaccompanied minor title if they’re reunified with a parent in the US, which I don’t know that you’re– so in some ways, your experience might overlap with that. But is that child then unaccompanied in their coming of age? So I talk about it as, you don’t have an adult in the room that is you’re experiencing socialization through or that is a liaison between you and institutions.

So I just made that up, and you get to do that when you write a book. And I love that for me. So I think that then allows me to say, there are experiences of unaccompaniment that then– things like I talk in the book about the importance of the [SPANISH]. I talk in the book about unburdening, the venting.

We can then– if there’s no parent or sibling or someone in the household caring for you and you are truly materially and emotionally unaccompanied, there’s null space of this [SPANISH] at the end of the day where you say, this happened to me, I did this. I met this person. Good thing or bad. I talk about the importance of witnessing having a witness, someone who validates that you are– so many of the young people were eager to be interviewed by me, and they would say, thank you so much for asking me these questions.

And I’m like, thank you for letting me write something about you. But the fact that no one had witnessed them because they were unaccompanied. So being able to use the word in a way that I think encapsulates the lived experience regardless of federal designation. And that people can be, again, unaccompanied but not alone.

There can be a point of accompaniment where young people are living alongside one another. Or Wilfredo and other people that I met in the field who intentionally sought to create spaces where youth that were living in this particular circumstance could make friends with one another or provide each other advice, [SPANISH] guidance, that sort of thing. Witnessing, I think, is really important. Which– oh, go ahead.

AUDIENCE: Hi. Thank you very much for the presentation and for the comments and so on. I’m from the architectural background, so I’m an architect. I’m doing research in migration and also refugee and so on. So I’m interested in your research, also from the point of view of the space. I don’t know if doing the research in Los Angeles is the same– I mean, the context of the city of Los Angeles.

I mean, how does this context affect the life of the people in terms of– I can imagine that creating community maybe in Los Angeles is not the same as creating community in Berkeley or wherever. So I think, how did you incorporate this kind of parameter, the space in your methodology? Yeah. If there is better spaces or better cities or better, yeah, institutions that work with the space, like, public space where people can build this community. That’s my issue.

STEPHANIE CANIZALES: Yeah. I really– I can’t tell if this is on. OK. I really appreciate that comment. And I think it goes to the context of reception. And also, how applicable is this to another geography question. I’m doing it. So I’ll say this. There are some empirical components of the work that are simply not applicable to somewhere in Arkansas or Kansas or somewhere where there isn’t a long history of migration. There isn’t a density of– the Pico Union is little Central America in Los Angeles. And actually in the US, it is the highest density place of central Americans.

Long history of immigrant rights organizing some mediocre public transportation. The idea that you can both be deeply embedded in a secondary labor market. There is a concentration of that deeply exploitative work there. And that young people can hide in plain sight. They don’t talk about federal– even Obama’s language trickled down into conversations, but it was language, the rhetoric, the shithole country, the bad hombres talk, not so much, the policy shift affects my life because they’re so insulated in Pico Union, which is neighboring to downtown LA and walking– they’re just walking around.

I talk a little bit in the book about how disorientacion, adaptacion– disorientacion. Disorientation to orientation occurs spatially. My neighborhood, my block, my neighborhood. This workplace, that workplace. Now I’ll cross the street to this other– and then they learn the beach cities, and then maybe they want to go to San Francisco and see the Golden Gate Bridge.

And that is still disorientation to orientation to adaptation cyclically. I talk to people– it’s like a helix. You become oriented to this, so then you do the next one, and then your social world grows in that way. In which case, that is the component of the work that I think is applicable across geography, across context. That you can be plopped into Arkansas, middle of nowhere. I don’t know why Arkansas, but that’s what I decided.

And that you would be disoriented, and then you become oriented, and then you adapt to that place. And then you arrive to Los Angeles, and then you’re disoriented again. And you just keep undergoing these processes in which I say in the conclusion, aren’t we all then always doing that? Aren’t we all constantly being disoriented?

You get a new job. I just got here in August. I’m a little disoriented. And then the process keeps happening. So I think that is the sort of– regardless of where you are, even outside of the US context, I imagine it is experienced in that helix way. And then this idea of the work primacy. In Los Angeles, it might be work primacy to the garment industry or to the hotels in downtown LA.

But again, you might be in a rural place of the US where it’s meatpacking and roofing, and that’s the primacy of the work. And it might be even more severe there because there isn’t the organizations and the organizing and the churches. So I think that– it might be even more intensified in a place where there isn’t the built environment around you that lets you diversify your Sunday afternoon, even if your Monday through Saturday is all work. [LAUGHS]

SARAH SONG: Do we–

STEPHANIE CANIZALES: Yeah. I think what I would love to do is answer that. Like, the way forward, you each had like policy practice implications. One as it relates to the research. I think this research is both more important than ever and also will be harder to get funded than ever.

So I’m not sure that– I got NSF funding to do this fieldwork for a year and a half. I got different foundations that were very focused on– again, I was in grad school 2011 through 20– I don’t even want to say it out loud, to 2018, and there were foundations that were getting federal funding to do this work. And I benefited from that. I don’t know that those resources will be as robustly available, so I don’t know that it’s– honestly, I’m going to be very honest. I don’t know that you could do a six year long ethnography.

But I do think that more and more– because of the anti-immigrant sentiment, just the spillover– the chilling effect of– like, all of these punitive immigration laws, the embeddedness is actually more important now than ever to get people to talk to you about things like incest, the suicidal ideation, to uncover those really sensitive topics that I didn’t get in interviews. I only got in observations.

Like, I wouldn’t have known that. And I didn’t interview someone that was experiencing actively a place of perdition, that was being domestically abused or that was using drugs and alcohol to cope with– to fill the void. That was something I saw. So I think there needs to be, I think, a little bit of scrappiness with the way we move forward in order to do embedded, meaningful work that illuminates people’s lives in this way.

And then in terms of the policy implications, I think you were asking, like, what can we all do? And then, Caitlin, you were asking, how would my policy recommendations change? I think there’s one thing that I tell people and that I mentioned, this idea of [SPANISH], the unburdening and the witnessing.

Simple, simple things that aren’t actually like– you can’t do the organizing. Some people ask me, what is the process of taking in an unaccompanied child? And I’m like, OK, that is the extreme. Like, let me save a child vibe that I don’t recommend anyone walk away with that takeaway. But I think the [SPANISH] and the witnessing are simple things we can do every day that can make a difference between a child experiencing adaptacion or perdicion.

I make it clear, all of these young people– I try to make it clear in the book that all of these young people were constrained by the same structural forces. And the thing that fork in the road made it one way or the other was a meaningful social tie. Which is then all of our burden to walk around knowing that human-social relationship, it isn’t just the information that’s shared across social networks and the capital that’s built. It’s also the witnessing that is important for all of us, but especially for adolescents transitioning into young adulthood. The feeling of being lost. No one knows I’m here. No one knows I’m going through this. It could be really detrimental to young people.

And then thankfully, I would say that my conclusion would not change. My policy recommendations are the same. I’ve learned through my work with the federal government, that they don’t like– they do not like reading anything that’s prescribes, these are the steps of the things you have to do. Because if step 2 is not feasible by the law or by funding, they’ll throw out anything. And they’re not going to sit there and be creative about how to apply.

So I rewrote my whole conclusion after I learned that fact in a conversation in DC. And I said, OK, on the level of ideology, on the level of this managing emotion and material wor– emotional material world simultaneously, my recommendations will stand. Recognize the refugee status of children. Recognize the importance of legal status.

If you don’t want to legalize children, offer legal protection to children, what about the people that have been here for 15 or 20 years that you’re expecting to receive them? Can you support the system you believe is supposed to be functioning in a certain way? Can you believe in children’s ability to define for themselves?

I think the book opens with the conversation, like, what would you want the government to do for you locally, regionally, or at the federal level? And they said, listen to us. Like, children have insight. Young people have insight into what matters to them. And that, I think, is something I still think needs to happen.

And we need to empower a youth movement and unaccompanied youth movement in the same way that dreamers and DACA youth really thrust themselves to the fore of the immigrant rights debate. We can do that again. And it will be harder, but it is, again, still– one of the most important things you can do is tell the stories and illuminate the complexity of children’s lives.

SARAH SONG: Thank you so much, Stephanie, Kristina, and Caitlin. Thank you. Thank you all for coming.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

 

Authors Meet Critics

Authoritarian Absorption: The Transnational Remaking of Epidemic Politics in China

Recorded on November 13, 2024, this Authors Meet Critics” panel centered on the book Authoritarian Absorption: The Transnational Remaking of Epidemic Politics in China, by Yan Long, Assistant Professor in the UC Berkeley Department of Sociology.

Professor Long was joined in conversation by Matthew Kohrman, Associate Professor in the Department of Anthropology at Stanford University; and Rachel E. Stern, Professor of Law and Political Science at Berkeley Law, and the Pamela P. Fong and Family Distinguished Chair in China Studies. The panel was moderated by Tom Gold, Professor of Sociology Emeritus at UC Berkeley.

The panel was presented as part of the Social Science Matrix Authors Meet Critics book series, which features lively discussions about recently published books authored by social scientists at UC Berkeley. For each event, the author discusses the key arguments of their book with fellow scholars.

About the Book

Authoritarian Absorption portrays the rebuilding of China’s pandemic response system through its anti-HIV/AIDS battle from 1978 to 2018. Going beyond the conventional domestic focus, Yan Long analyzes the influence of foreign interventions which challenged the post-socialist state’s inexperience with infectious diseases and pushed it towards professionalizing public health bureaucrats and embracing more liberal, globally aligned technocratic measures. This transformation involved a mix of confrontation and collaboration among transnational organizations, the Chinese government, and grassroots movements, which turned epidemics into a battleground for enhancing the state’s domestic control and international status.

Foreign interveners effectively mobilized China’s AIDS movement and oriented activists towards knowledge-focused epistemic activities to propel the insertion of Western rules, knowledge, and practices into the socialist systems. Yet, Chinese bureaucrats played this game to their advantage by absorbing some AIDS activist subgroups—notably those of urban HIV-negative gay men—along with their foreign-trained expertise and technical proficiency into the state apparatus. This move allowed them to expand bodily surveillance while projecting a liberal façade for the international audience.

Drawing on longitudinal-ethnographic research, Long argues against a binary view of Western liberal interventions as either success or failure, highlighting instead the paradoxical outcomes of such efforts. On one hand, they can bolster public health institutions in an authoritarian context, a development pivotal to China’s subsequent handling of COVID-19 and instrumental in advancing the rights of specific groups, such as urban gay men. On the other hand, these interventions may reinforce authoritarian control and further marginalize certain populations—such as rural people living with HIV/AIDS and female sex workers—within public health systems.

Podcast and Transcript

Listen to the presentation as a podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

[OPENING LOGO]

[MARION FOURCADE] Welcome, everybody. My name is Marion Fourcade. I’m the Director of Social Science Matrix, and I am absolutely delighted to welcome you to this book panel for my colleague from the Sociology Department, Yan Long. Authoritarian Absorption: The Transnational Remaking of Epidemic Politics in China is officially out as of this morning. So there is– yes, that– [CHUCKLE]

[AUDIENCE APPLAUDING]

And you can buy it from an unnamed website starting next week. And the book portrays the rebuilding of China’s pandemic response system through its anti-HIV/AIDS battle from 1978 to 2018.

Yan analyzes the interactions between local officials, Western donors, international organizations, and health activists to understand how public health expertise in China both expanded during this period and also became bureaucratized.

It is really a stunning read. It’s a longitudinal ethnography. I really highly recommend it to you. So today’s event is part of Our Author Meets Critic Series, which features critically engaged discussions about recent books from our division. And it is also co-sponsored by the Department of Sociology.

Before I introduce our moderator, let me just mention a few events that are coming up. The Global Democracy Comments on November 21. We’ll try to make sense of what just happened in the United States. On December 3, another Author Meets Critics by another sociologist. Actually, it’s all sociologists this end of year.

It’s not a particular bias. It just happened that we had books together. So Stephanie Canizales will present her book. And then my own book, I’ll lecture on my own book in December. So this is for the upcoming events. But now let me introduce our intrepid moderator who just came from teaching and is now starting in a new role.

Thomas Gold is Professor of Sociology Emeritus at UC Berkeley– emeritus, but still teaching– where he taught from 1981 to 2018. His research focuses on social, political, and cultural change in China and Taiwan. And his list of publications is very long. So let me just mention the most recent book titled Sunflowers And Umbrellas: Social Movements, Expressive Practices, and Political Culture in Taiwan and Hong Kong that was co-edited with Sebastian Veg.

So, Tom, the floor is yours. And you can introduce the book and the panelist.

Thank you.

[THOMAS GOLD] Thank you.

Thanks, Marion. And I apologize for getting here late. Yes, I retired six years ago, but they pulled me back in. And here I am teaching Soc 1. So should I introduce the whole panel before we start?

[INAUDIBLE]

So, of course, our main speaker is Yan Long– Long Yan. It’s a problem with Chinese with two names. It’s hard to know which is surname, and which is the first. We call first name.

But Long Yan is an Assistant Professor in the Sociology Department here. Political and organizational sociologist studying the interactions between globalization and authoritarian politics across empirical areas such as public health, civic action, urban development, and digital technology with a geographic focus on China.

Her recent research investigates the urban politics around COVID-19 testing in China. She concentrates on how community mobilization facilitates or undermines the utilization of digital tools in public health measures.

Then to her left is Matthew Kaufman, Associate Professor at the Department of Anthropology, and by courtesy, the Department of Medicine. Senior Fellow by courtesy at the Freeman Spogli Institute for International Studies at Stanford. Matt’s research and writing bring anthropological methods to bear on the ways health, culture, and politics are interrelated.

His first monograph, Bodies Of Difference Experiences of Disability and Institutional Advocacy– this is his first book, Experiences of Disability and Institutional Advocacy in the Making of Modern China.

Over the last decade, he’s been involved in research aimed at analyzing and intervening in the bio-politics of cigarette smoking among Chinese citizens. More recently, he’s begun projects linking ongoing interests at the intersection of phenomenology and political economy with questions regarding environmental attunement and the arts.

And Rachel Stern is Professor of Law and Political Science and currently holds the Pamela P. Fong and Family Distinguished Chair in China Studies here at Berkeley. Her research looks at law in mainland China and Hong Kong, especially the relationship between legal institution building, political space, and professionalization. She’s the author of Environmental Litigation in China: A Study in Political Ambivalence.

She’s currently part of a collaborative effort to analyze the 60 plus million Chinese judicial decisions placed online following a 2014 policy change. This massive expansion in the public record of court activity promises to reshape our understanding of Chinese law beyond China, of authoritarian legality. So with that, I will turn it over to Professor Long.

[YAN LONG] Thank you.

 

[THOMAS GOLD] You’re going to use the PowerPoint?

[YAN LONG] Yeah, I’m going use. Thank you so very much for the introduction. And Thank you very much for coming. This is a great pleasure to share my book. Since I only have 20 minutes, so I’m going to be really brief. And as an ethnographer, it’s a shame that I cannot really share the most important part for me, which is the field work.

But hopefully, you get a little bit of flare from today’s presentation. OK. So Infections. Infections have always been very daunting. But the newly emerging epidemics from HIV/AIDS, swine flu to Ebola and COVID-19 had introduced novel uncertainties about state responses.

So for those of you who are familiar with [INAUDIBLE] might think, OK, of course, medical surveillance that is such a core to the state responses to anything. However, in reality, emerging epidemics actually define such assumptions. So basically, we would see drastically different responses from various governments around the world to COVID-19 as a demonstration.

Even the same government might change its attitude to the same epidemic overnight. So in China, for three years, nobody can actually enter into the hospital without getting COVID-19 test. But nowadays, even with potential symptoms, the doctors will not test you for COVID-19. So basically, this is how my book takes on this questions.

Under what conditions does a state forfeit or acquire the desire and the means to actually consider unfamiliar epidemics as worthy of attention and restructure its administration to manage them? So the state must make a series of very difficult decisions.

First of all, how the transmission and treatment of those diseases shall be regulated or deregulated, which populations pains actually count as suffering, and who shall take on responsibilities to care and treat for those infected? Ultimately, this is about the building of public health institutions, which for whatever reasons, have not received a lot of attention from sociologists, probably a little bit more from political scientists.

So in studying public health or institutions in general, scholars have largely focused on domestic factors. This is particularly true when scholars try to understand authoritarian regimes. After all, for example, countries such as Russia, Cuba, and China had a very long history of using public health as instruments to achieve socialist revolution.

Since the COVID-19 outbreak, many scholars or practitioners or just journalists also come up with this idea of what we call as authoritarian advantages. So basically, the success or failure of authoritarian countries to tackle infectious disease are always considered as a natural functions of their regime type.

So contrary to the conventional wisdom, my first book actually showed that the seemingly distinctive authoritarian public health institutions might not be endogenous to the country. Instead, we shall look at transnational factors or foreign interventions as I focus.

So my book is about how transnational AIDS interventions actually drove China’s infectious disease control systems rebuilding between 1978 to 2018. So nowadays, as we blame or praise China, you’ve got to think about it. It looks really similar to what’s going on here in the United States. And I will get into a little bit more details later.

So hopefully I have some time to use my ongoing research for my second book to talk about how the established characteristics continue or transformed during the COVID-19 era. And here I wanted to emphasize that China is really not an exceptional case. Because health officials in the Global South are often caught between transnational organizations and local situations.

So here is to show you the funding that spend on HIV/AIDS interventions in the Global South, middle, and lower-income countries. Even up to nowadays, almost 50% of that funding comes from the Global North. So I always say you can blame the United States empire. However you want, but global health is actually one of the things that it really contributes to since America is the biggest donor in global health areas.

So it’s a pretty long book. And there are two arguments from the book I want to highlight today. So first, using HIV/AIDS governance as a case study, I wanted to show you that transnational organizations have used every measure, including one billion US dollar, to build a liberty-oriented HIV/AIDS governance in China.

And then secondly, I wanted to talk a little bit about how foreign interventions with the whole process of learning and incorporating transnational rules and practices, especially democratic ones, actually did not weaken but actually strengthened the infrastructure power of authoritarian China.

So in many ways, the book is about how the Democratic liberal world actually contributed to the persistence and consolidation of authoritarianism in China. And liberal interventions actually do matter. It doesn’t work in a way that we imagine.

And there are other two themes that in the book that I don’t have time to go through. One is the life and death enduring epidemic, and different people’s life actually count very differently. And there is definitely a hierarchy of whose life matters more in this process. And secondly, there is a major part of the book that talks about the operation of international agencies in China.

I’m very proud of that part because I think I’m probably the only one whose studies does internal ethnography in that field, but we probably don’t have time to go through it. So my goal is not simply to just contribute to global health studies. Rather, my book is trying to speak to a core debate in international relations and world politics, especially as the United States is spending billions of dollars overseas.

So how do foreign interventions actually matter in authoritarian regimes? In fact, transnational interventions regularly fail. That’s the rule. It fails. It doesn’t work. And similar interventions I’m talking about here had actually happened in many Southern countries. Some authoritarian states, such as Russia, unsurprisingly kept the transnational aid programs completely outside to protect its sovereignty.

But other countries such as Uganda, even Iran, actually accepted quite some transnational practices. So what makes it even more puzzling is that foreign interventions further strengthened the unequal landscape of public health in China as urban HIV-negative gay men benefited the most from foreign interventions.

So how would the transnational law fare in authoritarian countries? Especially why would China, as a very homophobic state, make any concessions when it comes to homosexuality issues?

So foreign efforts to change targeted governments behaviors are very old phenomena. We’re still seeing this huge debate nowadays. And scholars often applaud or praise this kind of interventions into targeted countries to correct the government’s non-democratic behaviors.

I think we see a lot around, for example, Russia. This is what I call a corrective approach. So it basically assumes that as long as you adopt some liberal practices, it is adapt towards integrating or assimilating into the world of Democratic governance. And the corrective effects happen in two ways.

One is directly. You use carrots or you use sanctions, try to change their behaviors. And then there is also indirect mechanism, which is transnational collaboration. Because most governments are not susceptible to the foreign interventions. So sometimes the foreign organizations must collaborate with domestic activists trying to change the government’s behavior.

So as you can see here, this triangular interactions between these three entities, certainly are very important. And I also agree that transnational organizations pushed their way into China exactly because they successfully cultivated a very powerful AIDS movement, which is a major part of the book.

However, the problem is, scholars often assume that the antagonism between transnational organizations and domestic activists on one side, OK, they’re the good guys. And then the authoritarian state on the other. In reality, those entities actions or relations are in constant motion, and they don’t follow any specific scripts for long.

And another problem is scholars often predominantly focus on one set of outcomes, which is basically different degrees of corrections. OK. We want to see Democratic improvement. So it’s either compliance or resistance from the targeted states. So you can see that a lot of the discussion about whether sanctions work. That’s pretty much along that way.

But the problem is, interventions don’t really only achieve intended goals, and it can go various ways. So in my book, alternatively, I argue that interventions don’t just impose negative corrections on existing authoritarian practices as intended.

They can rather prescribe positive incentives, opportunities, and means for government organizations to build what my comments often refer to as specialized capacities or infrastructure power to penetrate and organize the bodies of different people.

So this is what I call authoritarian absorption. Such absorption of transnational resources, networks, cultural rules, and organizational models can create brand-new practices. So this kind of absorption can take place directly through bureaucratic learning The direct interactions between foreign organizations and targeted government agencies can certainly generate new behavior.

But then another major part of the book talks about this indirect mechanism, which is through no one other, but social movements. So interveners can train and cultivate very powerful social movements to carry transnational practices into the targeted domestic context.

Secondly, while activists push for changes, the government organizations can actually respond in ways that re-appropriate those transnational rules and practices for very authoritarian purposes. So for those of you who love Star Wars as much as I do– OK, so just remember Anakin Skywalker, who trained him? We’re talking about the Jedi actually trained him only for him to become Darth Vader.

So in many ways, social movements are not just this rosy good guys. When they formulate, they can serve very different purposes. So just because gay men activism was cultivated by foreign funding and resources, you cannot assume that they would absolutely go up against the homophobic, authoritarian states.

So before I show a little bit of my data– actually just some cases. I wanted to show you a little bit about my multi-sited longitudinal fieldwork. So between 2007 and 2018, over a course of 11 years, I had to trace the development of China’s AIDS politics through conducting fieldwork at three different sites.

One is transnational AIDS institutions and different organizations. The second is the Chinese state, and the third one is the three different groups of community-based organizations. Also, when it comes to Chinese state, I investigated different organizations from health, civil affairs, Foreign Affairs, to police and security.

So here is just a laundry list of various things. It’s a combination of archival research, ethnographic research, as well as interviews with hundreds of officials– government officials, as well as community leaders. If you’re interested, I can show you more details during Q&A.

But here is just to give you some snapshot of what my research site looks like. Especially– for example, I don’t have time. On the left, you can see I don’t have time to talk about, for example, the Global Fund meeting, which is the largest transnational entities in HIV/AIDS, infectious disease overall.

So all the presentations were given in both English and Chinese. I don’t have time to get into details, but for those of you who– I know at Berkeley, we always talk about neoliberalism, the US empire. But come on, like international agencies, life in China, very difficult, very difficult.

And then on the left– the bottom, that was the Beijing government. And then on the right– so you can see the right bottom corner, that was where I usually hang out with the gay activists, which I will talk a little bit more today. But on the top, since I don’t have time to talk about the rural activists, I just wanted to show you a little bit of what one of their rural organizers home looks like.

So there was a mountain of trash and garbage right next door. It was summer when I visited. So I wanted to remind you in that household, there were three children under 10, and two of them were HIV positive. The smell was overwhelming. And you cannot see because all the walls and the floors were covered in flies.

Because at the time, I had an open wound in my leg. So it was just too much. And I ended– that was less than one hour interview. That was the shortest interview I’ve ever done. So that’s one of the things I don’t have time to talk about. But it was very prominent in the book, which is suffering’s, life and death. And it actually matters the least when it comes to epidemic politics.

  1. So let me quickly show you the 40-year history of public health building revealed in this book. So here is just to show you the funding for HIV/AIDS intervention in China over the years from the 1990’s. I don’t have the data before that. But basically, there was no funding.

So China’s contemporary public health had not really started to develop until the early 2000. So in the 1980s and 1990s, for two decades, the party had completely abandoned the Maoist tradition of emphasizing public health.

So back then, the concept of epidemiology hardly existed as its wealth grew, the state was really not willing to put money into public health. So there was not really institutional building per se. So you can see here on the right, that was the Prime Minister, Li Qiang, visiting China CDC for COVID-19. But this entity was not founded until 2002.

So nobody at the Ministry of Health back in the 1980s would ever imagine that one day it would host an international briefing on the left, on the sharing his experiences about COVID-19 with WHO– World Health Organization. Neither can it imagine that public health would one day become a very important part of China’s growing impact in Africa.

So let’s go back to the book. So first three chapters in my book talk about this unseen infectious era when public health department basically denounced professional expertise and technical knowledge with hardly any funding. Since the public health main task at the time was really to defend the socialist moral boundaries. If you’re interested, I can talk more about it during Q&A.

So at the time, they would treat infectious diseases such as HIV as a foreign disease undeserving of recognition, which resulted in China’s largest HIV/AIDS outbreak in the 1990s. And the transnational organizations began to intervene in the 1990s.

In the late 1990s, as you can see, the funding started to grow. But it didn’t really go anywhere until early 2000, when they brought an unprecedented amount of political pressure. That was when health finally became a very important political issue because of SARS. Then it started this whole process of democratizing public health in China.

So the rest of six chapters in my book demonstrate how such foreign interventions– you can see the huge drive, the rise in the funding, not just in the international side, but also from the domestic side. Just to show you the public health bureaucracy expansion, Chinese health departments began to cultivate the specialized capacities and professional identities by learning from especially the US and the UK experts.

So nowadays, local agents had to study and implement a US-style project managerial skills such as basic accounting and finance, especially, as well as substantial techniques for conducting statistically robust randomized, controlled, and cost-effective interventions.

So departments began to increase their staff with epidemiology background, as well as biology or preventive medicine, instead of just public hygiene degrees from vocational schools. So it’s fast to show you that there is this what I call projectified contracting model. It’s all about the contracts and the projects. And I think we academics know the difference between doing research versus doing research project.

So transnational funding accounted for between 30% to 70% of funding for China’s HIV/AIDS programs in the 2000. And it pushes the whole conception of projects into health departments as a whole. AIDS funding also accounted for almost half of public health funding at the time, which is one of the reasons why it was such a driving force in terms of public health reform.

Even when transnational programs, you can see began to pull out after 2013, the institutionalization of project continued. So nowadays the Chinese government actually took over and injected a large amount of funding. It also applied the projects to tackling other infectious disease as well as chronic disease.

Nowadays, HIV actually has very low prevalence rate in China, but the mortality is very high. So before COVID, it was the biggest killer among all infectious disease in China. But again, before COVID, the central government continued to invest at least 30% of public health funding onto this disease.

  1. So I want to talk a little bit about how does authoritarian absorption work in this process. So my book focuses on these two mechanisms. One is directly how does the bureaucrats learn the professional knowledge as well as other capacities from foreign agencies. And especially very importantly, I talk about how transnational organizations can breed the government agencies interests to recognize certain disease and affected populations as worthy government objects.

But the second one is to really think about how the social movements play a role in this process. So I’m going to give you one story, one story of Yao Ming. So he had been a leader of gay community in the northern city since the 1990s. Back then, homosexuality was a moral corruption. It was a political taboo that the state refused to acknowledge at all.

So several medical doctors who try to study homosexuality actually was forced to commit suicide at the time. So community leaders like Yao Ming were pretty much hiding away in the shadow trying to avoid police harassment. Thanks to foreign resources and legitimacy, he co-founded Rainbow Group to organize in the name of AIDS Intervention in 2003.

And the group’s relationship with the local authorities had been quite contentious in the 2000s. But the relationship had completely changed in the 2010s when local health department regularly supported the Rainbow Group’s activities. Starting in 2014, local CDC officials would even attend their gay Pride Month activities every year.

By 2018, Rainbow Group had grown to become this very big health organization that provide not only gay men, but also the youth and migrant workers with HIV, STD, Hepatitis C, and other services. They were also a very key factor during the COVID-19 battles.

So this is just one example to show you how homosexuality had changed from a moral to a public health issue. So in this photo, again, the Prime Minister, Li Qiang. This was the first time he ever shook hands with community leaders on TV. And guess what? This was an HIV/AIDS intervention event. And most of the people, the majority of the people there were HIV negative men– OK, gay men.

So gay men organizations– and this was basically displayed in front of– as you can see, the white lady in the picture was a UN representative. It was basically to showcase China was very much committed to this community mobilization style– liberal style of public health campaigns.

So this was really unexpected change. And if you’re interested, I can talk more about the homophobic state. China is still a very homophobic state in this sense. But the point is what had brought this once antagonistic government and urban activists together?

 

So in my book, I probably don’t have time to get into the details. But let me see. But just to leave this question here, if you’re interested, I could talk more about how those two come together. But just to conclude, since I really only have 20 minutes, one other thing is to really think about– to rethink about infectious disease control and state building in the context of world order, whether this is really just a domestic issue. But to really think about what roles it played in the establishment of China as whole, or the rise of China as a superpower.

But the second one, today I don’t have time to get into details, but really to think about how to bring organizational theories into international relations studies. So it’s not just about the politics, it’s not about democratic or authoritarian, but really to think about why different organizations would operate in certain ways. And that is a very key to understanding why transnational organizations with the mission to democratize the rest of the world actually ended up doing the opposite things.

But the third one is to really think about civil society from a transnational perspective. Obviously, as you can see, when the government leaders were shaking hands with gay men, where were the rural activists? They were on the street protesting during the same period, and they were just sent home. So civil society is a very stratified world, and who got on top and who got on the bottom becomes very important.

And in the end, I wanted to just respond to the people always talk about authoritarians or the advantage in doing certain things. OK? As if Trump becomes this Superman, strongman, the things would change. But one of the things it might be much more subtle, but I want to highlight that China’s nowadays infectious disease control looks very much like US because it absorbed the two key points about the system here.

One is, it is all about disease-oriented rather than system-oriented infectious disease response. So that’s one of the major thing. Another thing is the technical-oriented tendency. So China is even more obsessed with numbers, with labs, with technical preventive measures, rather than providing substantial care and other things that are very important for public health.

So there are several features that actually was established during the HIV era that continues. One is the fluctuation of states wealth and ability to see pandemic. It’s still going to be a battle, and it’s not going to be about the mortality or other factors that takes a role. And secondly is, what I just mentioned, the enhancement of technical bodily surveillance.

It’s very funny that one of the gay activists talk about it because they will become such an important object of state intervention. They were subjected to constant blood tests, and they were very happy during the COVID-19 era because everybody had to go through that test every day. So the prioritization of testing over treatment, that was also one thing that the opposite of United States, but in a similar sort of flare.

The third one is the neglect of rural regions in epidemic infrastructure, and then the pivotal roles of non-state actors in pandemic control. That’s what continue to be praised as community participation that can actually work really well in the authoritarian context. But last but not least is the intertwining of China’s pandemic strategies with its global interactions. Actually, during the Trump era, United States was pretty much giving up its leader roles in global health during COVID. It was when Biden came into office that started this whole new competition with China to use vaccine diplomacy to fight again.

So we don’t know what’s going to happen next in the global health era. And I will just stop there. Thank you so very much for your attention.

[THOMAS GOLD] I want to thank Yan for an exceptional job of summing up an unbelievably rich and complex book. And now we’ll turn to Matt and then Rachel for their comments.

[MATTHEW KOHRMAN] OK. So yeah, thank you so much. This was a pleasure to read from beginning to end. On so many levels, I recommend to you all this breathtakingly sophisticated book. It’s not a hard read. I mean, you would think a book on the AIDS pandemic, oh my gosh, a long 300 page book. It just reads, it just goes. And it goes because of the fantastic design of the argument. It goes, and it flows because the way you interweave historical scope and the way you rigorously chronicle in a very vivid way, the formation of the AIDS epidemic in China. Going back to the mid 1950s and the foundational ways that infection and health were set up in the 1950s under Mao, with the patriotic health campaigns. Which for those of you who don’t know, we’re very much tied to US military intervention in Northeast Asia, particularly the Korean War.

I also just found the book vivid and exciting to read because of its ethnographic depth. The texture, the ethnographic flair that you bring to it based on just really, really what struck me as hard, difficult fieldwork that you were doing across so many different registers– especially in the rural context– was just remarkable. But so is the ethnographic texture that you bring to these institutions, and the way you describe how it was very hard, but how you were able to traverse so many institutional registers. And that, I think is definitely one of the proudest parts of the book.

The analytical and theoretical sophistication of the book– I think you got a sense of that from Yan’s presentation. I want to add that one of the things that I was constantly taken by in the book, and that kept me going and consuming it with such a keen avarice sense, was the way you tenaciously avoid so many received theories and schools of thought, and how you very diplomatically do that. I mean, you’re not dismissive. You’re elegantly showing how they don’t work in these specific cases. And through that, you’re building out an argument about authoritarian absorption that is really quite profound, and I would say trailblazing.

And the concept of absorption that you have, I particularly liked how you worked it at and focused in on what you call this mezzo level, and the interrelatedness, the focus on relationships, the relationships between the registers. So it’s not just a matter of what’s going on at these different registers, and how is particularly at the top of the register and the bottom of the register are these tensions. But it’s really how you help us understand these otherwise obscured mezzo levels.

How am I doing for time, Tom?

[THOMAS GOLD] I don’t–

[MATTHEW KOHRMAN] Eight? 8 to 10 minutes.

[THOMAS GOLD] You still got five.

[MATTHEW KOHRMAN] I still got five. Great, OK. So I would also draw your attention in one of the things that propelled me through the book– is an elegance of writerly élan. There is a flow. There’s a quality to the prose that is spectacular. And in these days when it’s so hard to get people to read books, it’s so hard to get people to read sections of books, it’s so hard to get students to read an academic article. The importance of clarity and writerlyness is so, so essential. And you bring that to us. And I think it’s going to serve the book very, very well.

And other things I want to draw your attention to, which I think Yan didn’t speak to so much, is this is a book that has a very profound ethical rootedness. You are a sociologist by training, this is a book that is highly objective in its analysis. But you bring a subjective positionality that seems to be very, very grounded in a sense of an ethical compass about what you have observed over the years as profoundly wrong, and that you’re trying to speak to and speak back against. And it never comes across as just dismissive or simply argumentative for the stake of that. It’s rather the way this rootedness emerges in a extended metaphor in a very grounded way.

This is definitely much more than a China studies book. And for those of us who work in China studies, we know what that means– that it’s a book about China, gets read by China study scholars. And we seem to have a hard time finding others outside of China studies to look at our work. I don’t think that’s going to be a problem here. I think this is going to be a book that’s going to be picked up and talked about for years to come, as so much more. And so much more than a book about a specific virus. This is a penetrating study at the intersection, I would say, of critical global health and political theory. And I think, for those reasons, it’s going to be picked up and read widely, and I encourage everybody to get a copy quickly before the first run is sold out.

So as a medical anthropologist– as someone who trained with a heavy focus on ethnographic methods– I really, really like the first two chapters. I like the other chapters too. They also have an ethnographic flair and perspective that you’re bringing to these government institutions. But I guess, maybe because I have a sense of those government institutions a little bit more, and I always want to know more about rural life. The first two chapters, which take us back to the viral emergence with the plasma and blood-selling enterprises in central China, I couldn’t put the book down in those sections.

So I would encourage you to look at chapters 1 and 2, especially the first chapter. Chapter 1 pays a deep, deep attention to what you call institutional ignorance out in the countryside, and how that drives the initial rise of infection. And while institutional ignorance sounds dismissive or condescending, it doesn’t come across as that at all. Chapter 2, I really, really loved a lot. I’m only going to talk about this last chapter, and then I’m going to have some concluding questions. This second chapter pays a deep attention to how processes of social exclusion at the village level, with a special attention to gender exclusion, was what lit the fire in the countryside, for people deciding to start to sell their blood. At a time when there was tremendous stigma against people selling their blood. People didn’t want to do it, and they were not eager to do it. And what broke through the stigma of selling blood, which then allowed for the infection to burst out in Central China, was processes of gendered exclusion. And that was just really fascinating to read.

So I have some questions, and I’m not sure if this is the forum for raising questions. And because I don’t know if we’re going to have conversation, but some questions I had that I thought might be worthwhile thinking about as an audience– either when you’re reading the book, or at some future time. The concept of authoritarianism that you use here, I think it works really, really well. And I think you tie in all of these various arguments under it.

It’s a term that we’ve been hearing a lot in the last five, six years, particularly in discussions of China– authoritarianism. But as someone, like others at this table, who’ve been studying China and around for a while, I mean, I think back 10 years ago, we didn’t use the term authoritarianism anywhere to the degree to which we do now. And certainly not in discussing China outright. And I think in other contexts as well. So I’m just wondering what you’re thinking now about that term, and are you at all worried that it will, maybe in years ahead, maybe start to take on different valences that you don’t mean in this book?

I have questions just about the sharing of these findings. The deep commitment you have to the people of Hunan, strikes me as especially kind of problematic– because how do you get this book, how do you get what you’ve learned, what those people that you document as kind of living in the zones of desertion– a really engaging phrase you used, is the zones of desertion, to talk about the people in Hunan? How is it possible in China today for us to get this kind of knowledge back to those kinds of people in those circumstances?

So I’m going to end with one more question. And I think this is a question that I’ve been hearing a lot from China’s studies academics, which is– How, given the Li Qiang and Xi Jinping, and now post Li Qiang era of Xi Jinping China, how do we– is this kind of book possible? Is it possible for graduate students to do the research that you did? Is it possible for assistant professors to do this kind of work today? I mean, look, people are just saying, it’s not possible. So what is possible? What can be done? And how do we do it? And how can this book, maybe even, help open up some doors that– the shaking of the head, that not possible. But might this book actually, in some ways, if circulated back into China, serve to open some doors? Thank you.

[YAN LONG] Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

 

[RACHEL STERN] Thanks. I had the advantage of attending an event in this room and sitting in the back row a couple of weeks ago, and I couldn’t see anything. So I’m standing up so I could see you guys. So what a wonderful book. What a wonderful opportunity to be here today and have an opportunity to celebrate a colleague’s work and the culmination of a decade of research. What a special day for all of us today.

One way to frame this book– and I think the top-line finding– is that it’s an effort to map a middle ground about how much international exchange matters. So as I was reading, I thought about an old book by a professor of history at Yale, Jonathan Spence, who is emeritus and has died subsequently, called To Change China, which is a history of Western efforts to change China and never works. That’s what that book is about over 300 years– it never works.

And I think this book is in some ways, in dialogue with that book, to say that it works in unanticipated ways. That transnational practices meld with socialist practices to create a new public health model that has features of global public health models. It’s cognizable– in some ways, it looks like the United States– but is also distinctively socialist and distinctively Chinese.

My own background is I’m a political scientist by training, and I’m a terrible presentist. Like all my efforts are to try to understand the world that we live in right now. So 2024, next year will be 2025.

So for me, coming to this book, and I’m so glad that Matt highlighted the historical chapters because those are wonderful too. But for me coming to this book, what was most interesting was its relevance for the present moment. To think about how the China’s experience with international exchange has led to the emergence of what the book calls epidemic infrastructural power, or I would call state capacity to measure, to manage infectious diseases. And to recognize that this whole COVID response, that people who don’t study China turned on the news five years ago are like, what? What’s going on? that it came out of somewhere. That it was cognizable, and for those– humans instinctively out of the HIV, the HIV/AIDS world.

And I think the book is really convincing. I love the last chapter. That’s the one on COVID, talking about the core features of China’s response being molded by the HIV/AIDS crisis. So all the emphasis on testing, on numbers, on quantifiable targets, the divide between urban and rural China being completely different– all of that is echoed in this earlier period in the context of a different pandemic.

Matt did such a nice job talking about the virtues of the book. There’s so much to admire here. There’s sustained and emotionally challenging fieldwork. I love the efforts to look at a policy area over decades, rather than just flying in and taking a snapshot. And then overall, it’s a complicated book. I love the book’s insistence on nuance and refusal to simply repackage overly simplistic narratives about anyone, about Western funders or the Chinese state, having all the power and authority. And that’s not to say that the book is not attentive to power– it’s very attentive to power. But it’s a book that puts real people at the center, often with beautifully realized, detailed portraits of them, and insists on their agency. Insists that power has to be negotiated and that it’s not absolute, and that there’s agency for everyone and dignity for everyone. That’s maybe a way of saying there are no bad guys. They’re all good guys, working in complex ways.

By way of comments, and to kick off our discussion, I wanted to pull out some themes and some that I think are ripe beneath the surface and to transition into asking some questions. I’m going to focus on the public health professionals that are one of the players– not the only player. I told you it was a complex book, but one of the key groups here. And the themes that I wanted to pull out were status and ambition.

And so what motivates the public health professionals? Why do you bother with transnational exchange? And here, I think a lot is about status. And the chapter on this is really well done in giving us a portrait of how public health officials are delighted with the new found status and training that they get from international contacts. So for one of the public health officials that we meet in the book, named Shangbin, they say HIV/AIDS represented a life-changing chance. And it means personally, like a life-changing chance for them to further their career and to do meaningful work.

So thinking about status, which I think is a main theme of human behavior. It makes me curious about status and what happened to status after the withdrawal of International funding. I’m curious about alternative forms of status that might have emerged– domestic forms of status, alternative forms of hierarchy– and how that withdrawal of International funding changed the public health field.

And then the second theme is ambition that by the end of the book, public health has become an arena for diplomacy and for China to project soft power. So the book ends with China looking for apprentices in the Global South, donating, I’m going to get the scale wrong– billions of vaccines, millions of vaccines– millions, lots and lots of vaccines, a lot of vaccines, donating lots of vaccines around the world and exporting its own project-based model. And this ambition is really familiar to me as someone who studies law, because I think law is also an arena in which China has tried to lead the world in recent years. A place where, to echo one of Xi Jinping’s slogans, China’s story can be told well and a possible arena for diplomacy.

So if you take these two areas together– law and public health– as part of soft power of China’s leadership, I think it’s interesting to put them in dialogue. But then I want to go back to the conceptual framework of the book and use the approach that the book does, and disaggregate the state. And just ask the question, where does this ambition come from in the system? If we disaggregate the state, is the vaccine diplomacy and the rest, the desire to engage internationally? Is this the public health officials? This is another arena for status and authority or institutional legitimacy, depending on what vocabulary you want to use. So is this about them, or are they driving this? Or is this happening even higher up, or in some other agency, as part of a broader soft power diplomacy initiative?

And then last, I wanted to ask, and Yan can push back against this framing, but as I was reading, I was trying to figure out what this book tells us about Xi Jinping’s time in power. Xi barely appears in the book. And in fact, international funding, which changes right around 2013, it disappears relatively quickly and off stage. But of course, there’s a broader context there about the drying up of international funding and programming. There’s a whole legal dimension to it– new laws are passed, and international funders leave, and civil society organizations, in terms of number and robustness, precipitously decline by the end of the period– all of which I know is in the book and is known.

But I was really struck by the periodization. So the periodization of the book has the China model of epidemic control emerging from 2009 to 2018. So that’s a period that predates Xi Jinping and goes through his first term in power. So I just wanted to ask about that. I’m curious about the choice not to periodize by leader, not to periodize by who’s on top of the system. I can imagine that perhaps public health is an arena that is less sensitive to directions from the top, or maybe this is something that just has not been a priority of Xi or of the Politburo. Or maybe this is a disciplinary question. Maybe this is because I’m coming from political science, and we’re just like, this is the question that if a political scientist falls asleep in a job talk, it wakes up, you’ll say, what does this tell me? China studies job talk, you say, what does this tell me about politics under Xi? And say, how is the Xi era different, given that he’s the most powerful and transformative leader since Mao and Deng?

But I did want to at least ask the question and ask about the choices that were made in putting the manuscript together in the way that it is. And then a more subtle version of the question, which I’m starting to grapple with myself is to try to think about change over time, as Xi’s time and power lengthens. So what can we say when someone’s in charge for a really long time. They’re not the same leader at the end of that period as they were in the beginning of that period. So how can we distinguish between early Xi and late Xi? And of course, to some extent, this is an unfair question because the fieldwork for the book ends in 2018. But I feel I know that the second book project is about the state’s response to COVID. So I feel justified in asking it. So maybe if we have time, we can go a little bit beyond the boundaries of the book to talk about what shifted in the last several years in terms of epidemic infrastructural power, and what lessons were taken away specifically from the COVID 19 pandemic. Thank you. Thank you guys for a wonderful book too.

[THOMAS GOLD] Thanks, Rachel and Matt. And Matt, very glad that you came up from Stanford. I appreciate that effort. Just a couple of comments on the point that you made about appealing to a greater audience than just China types. The book, Yan’s early work, has won several awards from the American Sociological Association, which is already a testimony to its greater appeal. And as I read it, I learned so much about so many different subfields in sociology, to tick some off– political globalization, stratification, civil society, social movements, gender, organization, sexuality, public health, medical sociology, and technology. So there’s something here for everybody, I think, and hopefully people will be aware of that.

I also want to single out the whole fieldwork aspect– the unbelievable amount of fieldwork and just the different groups within Chinese society that she was able to deal with, to gain access to, and to humanize them. I think the point that you made about these are real people, and we get a sense of real people grappling with very sensitive and very difficult issues. I have a couple of– in my own experience with INGO, International NGOs in China, it’s been in the environmental space. So the point that Rachel just made, if you’re dealing with HIV/AIDS, a very sensitive issue, it touches on so many different things in terms of Chinese society. But if you were looking instead at human trafficking or labor or the environment, it would be a very different book, it seems to me. You’d come to a very different– possibly that’s a question, I guess– very different set of conclusions about the nature of the Chinese bureaucracy, Chinese state, and its relation with civil society.

Once again, also the point that Rachel made about– both Rachel and Matt– on fieldwork, is this is, of course, a big issue in the China field now– will it be possible to conduct this sort of fieldwork? You, as a Chinese, may have certain advantages, such that you’ve got networks and family and so on within China. But for someone who is not ethnically Chinese or not from the PRC, will it be possible to do in-depth ethnographic fieldwork or interviews in the future?

And because you interviewed people in so many different spheres of life, what did you tell them you were doing? There’s always in fieldwork and ethnography, there’s also a certain amount of deception, in some cases. You don’t want to tell people exactly what you’re asking, especially in something as sensitive as this. How did you present what you were doing? So I’ll give you a chance to respond. And then we have– when are we supposed to end, at 1:30? Yeah, five minutes, if you can deal with that, and then we’ll see how the questions go.

[YAN LONG] OK, thank you so very much for your generous comments. I really appreciate them. There are a lot of questions–

[THOMAS GOLD] It’s up to you, you don’t have to answer.

[YAN LONG] Yeah OK. Let’s see. I guess everybody mentioned fieldwork, so let me respond to that. When I was doing my fieldwork, everybody like– I got a similar reaction. It’s like, It’s too sensitive, it’s too difficult. It’s kind of funny, like the Security Bureau under various professors were telling me the same thing. So now when I look at it, it’s similar, the situation isn’t. I don’t feel like it’s necessarily that much worse. It really depends on the location. The rural areas are much more difficult. But even back then, it was very hard for me. I was carrying two cell phones. In the rural areas, it was just much, much more intense. That’s why now I’m shifting towards urban governance. It’s a conscious decision.

But again, I’m studying COVID-19, which is supposedly one of the most sensitive, taboo again. And I don’t know digital technologies any better. So I think until you do it, you never know what the limit is. And I also think right now it’s becoming even more important because of the disengagement or the separation between China and the US. I don’t think people here– I always have this belief is whenever you’re on the field, on the ground, you are not as afraid. But when you’re in the United States, with all the media, with all the newspapers, there’s just nothing– it’s just sounds like a horrendous monster.

China is just a monster. And I think it’s becoming even more imperative for us to do work. And I actually do think foreigners and Chinese native have very different advantages and disadvantages. Usually does not work free there. And I think the perspective and the closeness and sadness you can also achieve is just a different route. So I still think it’s possible. It’s just more strategic and in terms of how to do it and in what kinds of ways. That’s probably my response to the fieldwork.

But that is also because I appreciate what you guys were talking about, the humanly perspective. I consciously chose that perspective. But to be honest, I am very afraid. I am afraid what people would say. Would the activists push back? Because I’m not necessarily like, oh, you are the good guy. Or would the government?

There was Authoritarian Absorption. Yes, I would never, ever take this book back. And just with retiring, the term itself, I think it’s just not acceptable, even on social media. I posted it, and people asked me to take it down. It’s just not allowed. That’s actually why I insisted on using the authoritarian term, is especially because it is such a taboo in China right now, and also because of, in the United States, the change of the politics.

I think the authoritarian expansion is not just in authoritarian states but also in the whole world. Before 2010, we were talking about authoritarian expansion. But right now, we’re talking about right here, you see the democratic and authoritarian battle. So I think that is still very, very important. But I totally get what you’re saying is the implications.

I think some of my colleagues in political science would use autocracy instead of authoritarianism. So now that’s where I stand. I do not want to go into the autocracy, but authoritarianism, that’s where I stand. On the sharing of finding, I would say, yes, it’s a guilty confession. I feel really horrible about writing this book because it’s based on people’s suffering and misery.

And there is no way I can– some of the people, many of them have passed away. I probably will never see many of them ever again. And I can’t really share, especially in the rural areas. And also, the sad part is when I present the book, I realize people are far more interested in the urban gay man rather than the rural areas because it resonates much better here. People understand it. They have assumptions.

But they don’t understand the rural areas, all the histories. It’s a long, long, long story that feels very strange and foreign to the US audience. So in some ways, I want to tell this story in the book. I think that’s the thing. For me, I want to tell their stories, even if they’re not of theoretical significance to the academic audience here.

But also, not to demonize the state is very important for me. That’s a funny thing. I mean, everybody asked me what’s going to happen after I publish the book. I don’t know. I don’t know. Maybe I can’t go back. I don’t know. But I’m just like, if they read the book, then they will realize it’s not just about politics and power, but also– I also what Rachel was talking about. It’s about humans and their personal desire and ambition, and also a lot of the inequalities, the unequal relationship between Chinese officials, the bureaucrats and technocrats, and their Western counterparts. That is also very real.

And so that’s partially what you were talking about, the status and ambition, because there is the– I don’t like the term postcolonial because it doesn’t apply in China. But there is certainly the idea of suddenly, you have a country of agents. Suddenly, they are rising on the world stage, but then they don’t get the same recognition and the same respect.

So in these areas, Tom was completely right. If I work on a different area, like trafficking, human trafficking, that would be very different because public health is a very technocratic area. Technocratic, knowledge-oriented epidemic, that epidemiology– for authoritarian state or any Global South country, that are considered as really important to boost their status and their reputation.

So in that sense, I think law is actually the same thing. I think that’s also one of the major reasons why an international organization can have a huge impact in China, because it’s not morality driven. It is actually technology driven. So in that sense, it is the different sides of the same sword.

[THOMAS GOLD] Time is running away.

[YAN LONG] OK, I’ll just stop here then.

Yeah.

Yes.

Then you can continue.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thank you very much. My name is Rosy Hsieh, and I’m a Berkeley PhD that’s visiting on campus this semester– or this year, actually, and also, like Rachel, a political scientist and really, very much appreciate the fact that this– just also based on the comments, too, this is a fascinating book, and I cannot wait to pick it up.

I see synergies between– I really like what appears to be the mid-level theorizing, connecting the micro-level developments with your ambition of speaking to macro-level IR kind of issues. And I’m thinking two political scientists. One in China studies is Diana Fu’s work. And you probably know about her work on her book Mobilizing Without the Masses.

And so one argument that she makes is that because of the nature of authoritarianism in China, activists have to adopt different types of methods. And those methods that they have to adopt to work within the environment, in her argument is that it actually is, in fact, empowering, whereas it appears here, you’re showing that, actually– then it actually gets co-opted by the state.

And her work is mainly on labor activists. So I’m wondering if you think your findings could actually travel to other issue areas, or is it really just about public health, and this is where the authoritarian state co-opts some of the practices of international level? And then really quickly, the other one is an IR specialist who I met at Temple University, and she used to be one of my colleagues, Sarah Bush. And she/her book is called Taming of Democracy Assistance.

And she argues that it’s actually because of authoritarian governments you see IOs or INGOs where they operate in, in her context, the Middle East, they become tamed because they cannot actually do democracy assistance. They have to do things that could actually work in the authoritarian context. So is the causal arrow here the IOs changing? I mean, so I see co-optation here, but maybe it’s the authoritarian governments that’s actually changing IOs or NGOs. Anyway, yeah, fascinating. And I very much look forward to reading your book. Thank you.

[OTHER AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thanks.

Yeah. Thank you so much for this very interesting presentation, and I’m looking forward to reading the book. And I find, actually, the title of the book is pretty powerful. The term of authoritarian absorption actually reminds us some other similar notions, such as Professor King– actually, Professor Karman also touched on it. Professor King Ambrose, administrative absorption of politics in Hong Kong under the British governance, and as well as, like Professor Chin Lee’s legal bureaucratic absorption of the grass root protests in China.

So these are some similar notions talking about China. And you are actually showing us how this term, absorption, could be more powerful and fruitful when we are talking about China. So actually, I was curious if you have done some conceptual comparison in this book, or if you could give us a brief interpretation about the conceptualization by this term. Thanks.

[THIRD AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thank you. My name is Min Li, and I’m from Anthropology Department, Medical Anthropology. And I also did field work in China. So I was comparing your book with Katherine Mason’s Infectious Change on SARS. And I was just wondering, since I didn’t read your book yet, if there’s any connection with the SARS system, the systematic change after SARS as well, reflected in your book.

And also, since the timeline ends in 2018– and I know that a lot of civil activists that I met in China. They say that the most critical changes happened between 2016 to 2018, and everything changed into the system of government buying the service like [INAUDIBLE] from all the organizations. And according to that standard, there are the organizations that can cooperate with the government and who are totally out of China.

So I was wondering if your concept of absorption reflects that situation afterwards, 2018? Yeah, thank you for your presentation. And I’m looking forward to your book.

[YAN LONG] Thank you very much for your questions. Those are pretty big questions. I’m just going to give a very simplistic answer. Yes, first is Diana Fu’s book. Yes, I’m very familiar with that book. And I would say that kind of competition, like you were describing, that does happen in different areas. I actually did shadow comparison across different issue areas. So I would see there are certainly similarities.

Secondly is the term democratic assistance. What is the causal link? I would probably also provide a different point of view, that is that China is not just internet nowadays in global health. China is World Health Organization and UNAID’s darling. And there is a reason, not because China bought them off, but because China really played its game really well.

And who set up the game? It was international organizations. So in many ways, from the IO perspective, international organizations nowadays– I’m not talking about NGOs, but really intergovernmental organizations. They’re changing the rule of the game into the expertise. They don’t want to be this just moral authority, exactly like you said, because it doesn’t really work in authoritarian context.

So they shifted their role into a consultant. And they emphasize technocratic innovation. And it’s that kind of game trying to really thrive. OK, different authoritarian regimes might play really well. I would say, yes, it’s the government, but also the international organizations, both ends. The interactions within that kind of way, that’s the causal. I would say, it goes both ways.

My concept, I would say, yes, absorption happens, actually, also in the United States. Administrators always try to absorb different rebellion forces. But the difference, I think here, I emphasize [INAUDIBLE] is just really the moderators because it’s more about the transnational liberal rules, because I wanted to go in against the idea that social movements must be democratic, social movements must be liberal. No, social movements have very dark, dark sides to it.

So from that idea, my absorption is really more about how the Western world influences. So that might be slightly different compared to others. Yes, Mason’s book. We have some similar argument in terms of the bureaucrats, how Chinese bureaucrats position themselves and their interactions with outside the bureaucratic world. I think in that sense, it’s quite similar.

And the SARS did play a huge role in terms of helping to push the health into the world political landscape. That was the beginning. That actually goes back to Rachel’s question, why the timing? The period, for me, is more about the world political changes rather than the leadership change in China. What happens with Trump is never just starts with Trump in that sense.

And I would just say, the contracting model, I think, of my book probably pushes back even further by talking about, where did the outsourcing contracting model started? That was not a Chinese invention. That actually came from nobody else but the United States. So new managerial reform played a huge role in this process. So I wanted to identify that as a source rather– and then the consequences, and it comes. Yes. So you’re definitely right in that. Yes.

[THOMAS GOLD] Great. Well, this has been really fascinating. So I want to thank Matt and Rachel and, of course, Jen for leading us through this really great discussion. And the book is– we don’t have it for sale outside here, do we?

[YAN LONG] No. I got 20 copies.

[THOMAS GOLD] Book talks, there was Cody’s blessed memory.

[YAN LONG] Oh, wow

[THOMAS GOLD] –sell books. Anyway, thanks again and thanks to the audience for participating.

[YAN LONG] Thank you so very much.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

 

Matrix On Point

Shifting Alignments in the 2024 Election

Recorded on October 25, 2024, this panel examined the shifting demographic and political forces that are redefining the traditional bases of the Democratic and Republican parties and their efforts to build new electoral coalitions. Panelists analyzed voter trends and realignment along key dimensions, including gender, age, race and ethnicity, and explored how issues like the economy, abortion, immigration, and threats to democracy are motivating different segments of the electorate.

The panel featured Ian Haney López, Chief Justice Earl Warren Professor of Public Law at UC Berkeley; David Hollinger, the Preston Hotchkis Professor Emeritus of History at UC Berkeley; and Omar Wasow, Assistant Professor in Department of Political Science. The panel was moderated by G. Cristina Mora, Associate Professor of Sociology and Chicano/Latino Studies (by courtesy), and Co-Director of the Institute of Governmental Studies at UC Berkeley. The event was co-sponsored by the UC Berkeley Travers Department of Political Science, the Institute of Governmental Studies, and the Center for Right-Wing Studies.

Matrix on Point is a discussion series promoting focused, cross-disciplinary conversations on today’s most pressing issues. Offering opportunities for scholarly exchange and interaction, each Matrix On Point features the perspectives of leading scholars and specialists from different disciplines, followed by an open conversation. These thought-provoking events are free and open to the public.

Watch the video above or on YouTube.

Listen to the podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

Podcast Transcript

[AUDIO LOGO]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[MARION FOURCADE] Hello, everyone. Welcome to this new panel on the 2024 election. My name is Marion Fourcade. I’m the director of Social Science Matrix. So we’re just a few days away from the election, and the date looms not as just another quadrennial ritual, but as a potential turning point in the nation’s story.

We have assembled, I think, an amazing panel to help us map the fault lines of this historic moment and what it may mean for America’s future. In an age where assumptions are upended almost on a daily basis, we will explore how both Democrats and Republicans are scrambling to mobilize their base while also working to forge fresh electoral alliances.

We will dissect how kitchen table concerns about inflation and job insecurity collide with existential fears about Democratic erosion and status loss, and whether emerging demographic divisions should be read as potentially durable realignments, which is the title of the panel.

So, this event is co-sponsored by the UC Berkeley Traverse Department of Political Science, the Institute of Governmental Studies and the Berkeley Center for Right-Wing studies.

Before I turn it over to the panelists, let me just give you, as I always do, a preview of a few upcoming events, we will have two– actually three with mine– book panels in November– Yan Long’s, Stephanie Canizales, and myself. And then on December 3rd– sorry, on November 21st, we have another election event, but this time will be more of a postmortem trying to figure out what it all means if things are settled, which of course is not clear at all.

Let me now introduce our moderator, Cristina Mora. Cristina Mora is an associate professor of sociology and Chicano and Latino studies by courtesy and the co-director of the Institute of Governmental Studies here at Berkeley. Her research focuses mainly on questions of census, racial classification, immigration, and racial politics in the US and Europe.

Her book, Making Hispanics, was published by the University of Chicago Press, and provides the first historical account of the rise of the Hispanic-Latino panethnic category in the US. And she is currently working on two new book projects, both funded by the Russell Sage Foundation. The first one, entitled California Colorlines, with Tianna Paschel, examines the contradictions of racial politics in the nation’s most diverse and seemingly progressive state.

The second book, Race in the Politics of Trust in an Age of Government Cynicism, with J. Dowling and Michael Rodriguez-Muniz, provides a first mixed method examination of race and political trust in the US. So without further ado, I will turn it over to Cristina and our panelists. Thank you all for being here.

[APPLAUSE]

[CRISTINA MORA] Great. Thank you very much. Is this on? Yeah. Certainly, a pleasure to be here with you all today. And it’s certainly a great pleasure to be on this table with this esteemed panel. I guess we’ll start from my left to my right. We first have Ian Haney Lopez, who is the Chief Justice and Earl Warren Professor of public law here at UC Berkeley.

We then have David Hollinger, the Preston Hotchkis Professor Emeritus of History. And then we also have Omar Wasow, the assistant professor of political science here at UC Berkeley. And from what I understand, we’ll have three different presentations, about 15 minutes long each, and then we’ll open it up to some conversation and Q&A. So I guess we’ll start with Ian first.

[IAN HANEY LÓPEZ] Thank you. Thank you, Cristina, and thank you all. Really delighted to speak with you all. Just by way of background. So I’m a law professor at UC Berkeley. My main focus is on race and racism. For years, I wrote about race and law, and then race and constitutional law, until it became clear somewhere around 2008 after sort of intensive study of what the Supreme Court was doing, that the Supreme Court’s race jurisprudence made no sense as law, but made perfect sense as politics.

And in particular as electoral politics, a sort of electoral politics in which presidents campaigned for support by mobilizing stories of a Supreme Court out of control in the area of race, and the area of gender, and the area of abortion, that this was an activist court that needed to be reined in. That shifted my focus.

So from that point forward, I started looking at presidential politics and the exploitation of coded racial narratives. Dog Whistle Politics, so that’s my 2014 book, which then told a story of race as a class strategy. That is to say, it was the Republican Party, formally the party of big business that was using culture war politics, family, friendly policies, and opposition to affirmative action and integration, in order to win support for voters who thought they were getting populism but instead were getting support for oligarchy.

This approach ended up was attractive to unions, and with the encouragement of unions and support from AFL-CIO and SEIU, I then launched another big project to think about how to respond to dog whistle politics, including working with pollsters, working with communication specialists, working with nonprofits and unions. And that was merge left fusing race and class. So that’s 2019.

In 2020, I did a project that specifically focused on Latino voters. So I want to talk a little bit about Latino voters. Latino voters are part of the hot counterintuitive story, like the press, the media needs counterintuitive stories. Why else would anybody read the newspaper? They seem to think, so they’re constantly latching on to these counterintuitive stories. And one of the recent ones is Kamala Harris is losing support from Latinos and African-Americans.

And shockingly, majority of Latinos support mass deportation. What the F. So that. So I want to talk a little bit about that story. Here’s how I want to begin. This is a message I tested in 2020. This is around 15 focus groups with Latinos across the country. And then based on that, created a poll and then polled 145 Latinos, 400 African-Americans, and 400 whites.

All right. So here’s part of the message we tested. And the question is, then imagine you’re taking the poll. You would have a little dial. You can turn it up if you feel warmly towards the message. You can turn it down if you feel negatively about the message.

Our leaders must prioritize keeping us safe and ensuring that hard working Americans have the freedom to prosper. Leaders who build a strong economy once can do it again. Taking a second look at China or illegal immigration from places overrun with drugs and criminal gangs is just common sense. And so is fully funding the police. So our communities are not threatened by people who refuse to follow our laws.

We need to make sure we take care of our own people first, especially the people who politicians have cast aside for too long to cater to whatever special interest groups yell the loudest or riot in the streets. Obviously, I ripped that message off from the Republican talking points.

The question I have is, if you’re thinking of yourself, how persuasive is that message? Think about whites as a category. Dial up, dial down, where would they be. Essentially, whites on average dialed to 60 on a 0 to 100 range, anything above 50 is positive.

Where did African-Americans dial to? 60. Where did Latino style to? 61. We think– and this is, Trump learned this lesson. We think that a message that’s rooted in scare stories based on racist stereotypes about China, about dark-skinned illegals, that these racist manipulations are evident to the majority of voters. They’re not. They’re evident to those of us who are paying attention, who are critical and who are highly engaged.

What most voters here in the context of dog whistle politics is a basic story about good people, who are hard working and deserving and bad people, who are pathologically violent and undeserving and flooding into our country. And when people hear a story about good people versus bad people, most want to be with the good people, most.

So that’s what we’re up against in terms of dog whistle politics. Now, the question is, obviously the voting patterns are very different between whites, African-Americans and Latinos. So what explains the difference? Well, there’s more than just one story out there. There are these countervailing stories and the stories among African-Americans about hostility from the Republican Party and also about the salience of race are much more powerful and act to compensate for the basic attractiveness of this dog whistle narrative.

What about among Latinos? In terms of Latino receptivity to this dog whistle message. The single most important factor that I found was how Latinos conceptualized Latino group identity. I’m actually saying something surprising there. We’re often told it’s a matter of how they– it’s a matter of gender. It’s a matter of age. It’s a matter of national origin– Mexican-American or Cuban, like particular to their identity. Or maybe we’re told it’s a matter of their race. What race they think they are.

I’m not saying any of those. I’m saying it’s a matter of how they conceptualize the group position of Latinos. So that’s slightly different. I can say more about these other gaps, the gender gap, the age gap, national origin gap, maybe in Q&A if we want to go into it a little bit more, we can. I have my suspicions about the gender gap. I think that’s one of those stories that’s fun for the press to tell because it correlates with Latino machismo and da-da-da.

So I’m skeptical of it. But I’m going to set that aside for a moment. There is one gap that I didn’t study that does seem to be really important. So I want to flag it. Don’t have much more to say on it. Recent polling suggests that there’s an enormous gap among Latinos in terms of whether they’re a Protestant versus Catholic versus religiously non-affiliated.

Religiously non-affiliated Latinos are about half of all Latinos. And they are– let me see my gap. So religiously non-affiliated Latinos compared to Protestants are 69% more likely to support Harris. That’s an enormous gap. Catholic Latinos compared to Protestant Latinos are 39% more likely to support Harris versus Trump. These are really big gaps. I didn’t study.

I studied religiosity, but I didn’t study the Catholic Protestant. So my bad. This seems to be a really important factor. With that caveat in mind, I want to come back to this idea of racial group conception.

Here’s the way I did it. I gave respondents three choices. I asked them, are Hispanics like African-Americans destined to remain distinct over generations? Option one. Option two, are Hispanics a group that, like European Americans over generations, become part of the mainstream? That was option two. Option three, are Hispanics a group that over generations can get ahead simply through hard work, with no racial identity there.

OK, so three options. Basically, are we people of color, are we white, are we outside of race? Almost all Latino activists, almost all of our students, almost all of our faculty, say we’re people of color. Great and we have the support of one out of four Latinos. 25% of Latinos say we’re people of color, 32% say Latinos are essentially like other European immigrant groups going to join the mainstream, 28% essentially saying we stand outside of race.

What’s going on here? First, it’s not skin color. The Latinos who say we are people of color are also the Latinos who say others are most likely to think they’re white. And again, if you think about your students, you think about me, I’m biracial, half white, half Latino. I identify as Latino. I identify as a person of color. I’m sure a lot of people think I’m white, especially passing me on the street. What’s going on?

I have adopted through education and through analysis of political conception of Latinidad as a person of color. And I think that’s the story of a lot of our students. So it’s not necessarily that we’re dark. In fact, the group with the darkest skinned Latinos is that third group who say race doesn’t matter, I’m just going to get ahead through hard work, with the exception of Afro-Latinos.

Afro-Latinos are going to say that there are people of color, but otherwise, this is not a skin color dynamic, nor is it a dynamic of self-hatred. Interestingly, the group that expressed the highest level of pride in being Latino, we’re the group that said that Latinos were joining the mainstream similarly to Euro Americans. So this isn’t, like there’s a story among Latinos that either you think you’re a person of color or you’re engaged in self-hatred.

Or there’s another story that says you’re engaged in passing. You’re trying to leave Latinos behind. Levels of a sense of linked fate were the same across all three groups. So something else is going on. What is this other thing that’s going on? Racial status anxiety. Where are we as a people? Where do we fit in a society in which there’s a very strong white, Black hierarchy?

Are we able to join the mainstream? Will we be regarded as full citizens instead? Are we and our children doomed to be part of a denigrated caste? Does none of this apply to us? And to really think about this, think about this in terms of immigrant parents asking this about, why they immigrated to this country, and what the racial caste system in the United States means for their children.

Or shorthand version of this, my mother thinks of herself as a Spanish lady, even though she’s a dark-skinned immigrant from El Salvador. And she’s super bummed that I study race and think of myself as a racial minority. Because that’s not what she wanted. That’s not why she came here. So where do people fit?

Next up. If it turns out, as it does, that 60% of Latinos reject the idea that were people of color. How do you think a sort of a left Democratic message that responds to dog whistle politics by saying they’re racists is going to perform. And that’s about how it performs. Because the left denounce white supremacy message is a message that asks Latinos to suppose that are people of color, and most don’t want to do that.

At the same time, the standard left alternative to that, more centrist alternative to that is to say, let’s not talk about race at all. Let’s just focus on economic issues because these people don’t think there are people of color. That message doesn’t perform very well, either and why not. Because the community is shot through with anxiety about whether we’re good people or not, and an economic message doesn’t address that. What does address that? A dog whistle story.

And so when I was running these focus groups, one of my throwaway questions is was– I thought of as an icebreaker. I was like, what does Trump say about Latinos? I figured icebreaker. They’re going to say, he says, we’re rapists. And people were saying things like, well, he says that they’re gangbangers and illegals and I know them, they’re my neighbors. Like, they were willing to punch down themselves in order to say there are bad ones.

I know them, but I’m not one of the bad ones. I’m one of the good ones. So that message doesn’t work either. What does work well, a race class fusion message. I’m going to transition here and wrap up here really quickly. I want to do that in terms of the mass deportation message.

There is a lot of support among Latinos for mass deportation. But I think a lot of what’s happening here is that people don’t understand what the question is that’s being asked. When you look at recent data, for example, in The New York Times. Latinos are split 45 through 48 in support of mass deportation. But in the same poll, Latinos support a path to citizenship by 67% to 29%.

That is. If you just say mass deportation in the context of Trump’s rhetoric, people think they’re going to deport the illegals. They’re going to deport the gangbangers. They’re going to deport the racists, without them listening to Stephen Miller and taking a look at Steve Bannon and what their plans are, in which they claim they’re going to deport 12 to 20 million people.

That they’re going to end birthright citizenship, that they’re going to build concentration camps, that they’re going to use the military. Like none of that is being communicated to the Latino population, it’s a huge mistake, I think, on the part of the Democratic Party. We can talk more about the immigration messaging.

But in addition, here’s a message on immigration that I tested. This message was the most single most popular message with Latinos and also performed really well with whites and more importantly, performed really well with African-Americans who are susceptible to a message that immigrants are coming in and taking as Trump puts it now, “Black jobs.”

So I’ll just read you this message. Whether it’s from another town or another country, most of us move for the same reason, to build a better life for our families. But certain politicians are insulting immigrants while billions are going to a handful of corporations. The richest 1% benefit when politicians blame immigrants for the hard times regular people face.

We need to recognize the contributions of immigrants in our communities and states, and embrace people with the courage to move. When we come together, we can elect new leaders who will put fairness back into our immigration laws and make this a country that provides a better life for everyone, whether we’re brown, Black, or white.

I’m going to close with an emphasis on that phrase. We need a message of cross-racial solidarity as an antidote to intentional class-driven, oligarchy-driven divide and conquer. And the message of racial solidarity should not presuppose that this is a message of cross racial solidarity that only applies to people of color. Instead, it’s a message of cross-racial solidarity that says that white people too have an equal interest in building bridges along racial lines in order to stand up to class warfare.

And notice, that sort of message doesn’t ask anybody, and it certainly doesn’t ask Latinos to specify whether they think they are brown, or white, or Black, or standing outside of race. That is we, whatever you think you are, we all have an interest in seeing clearly the way in which race is being used as an intentional strategy of divide and conquer and responding with an ethos of uniting across racial differences to build the country we want. And I’ll stop.

[APPLAUSE]

 

[CRISTINA MORA] Thank you very much. Professor Hollinger.

[DAVID HOLLINGER] The shifting alignment I’m going to talk about is the capture of the Republican Party by its evangelical client, with among other results, the loss on the part of the Republican Party of a capacity to treat the opposition Democrats as co-stewards in running a pluralist democracy.

When the Christian supremacist Senator Josh Hawley asserted in 2017, that the ultimate authority of Jesus Christ has to be established in every aspect of life, including the government of the United States. There was nothing the least bit novel about this. Generations of preachers have encouraged the faithful to see themselves as a morally superior community required by God to either stand apart from a sinful society or to take control of it.

Harold Ockenga opened the first meeting of the National Association of Evangelicals in 1942, with a call for tribal solidarity to confront a threatening panorama of liberal iniquity. I see on the horizon ominous clouds of battle which spell annihilation unless we are willing to run as a pack. All of us Christians must go on the offensive, Ockenga said, against political liberalism, theological modernism, secularism, and the new deal’s pernicious legacy of a nation being run by the government rather than by private interest.

The notorious Manichaean and dominionist claims of the new apostolic Reformation, which we read about all the time, are not new, and they were developed in their current form by the ostensibly, a respectable institution Fuller Theological Seminary in Pasadena.

Here’s a recent utterance of Donald Trump delivered to a convention of evangelicals. [CLEARS THROAT] This is the final battle. Well, we know where that comes from. This is the final battle, so he begins his speech. With you at my side, we will demolish the deep state. We will expel the warmongers from our government. We will drive out the globalist. We will cast out the communists. We will throw off the sick political class that hates us. We will root the fake news media and we will liberate America from these villains once and for all.

In speeches parallel to this, Trump has promised Christians that if they vote him in, they will never have to vote again because he will establish Christian hegemony in the government of the United States.

Now, theologically, liberal versions of the faith have never paid much attention to the Manichaean and dominionist themes of the Bible. But the Republicans, by developing evangelicals as clients, catapulted evangelical ideas from the margins of American public life to its center. And in a historic juxtaposition, a historic juxtaposition often missed.

The Republicans did this during the same late 20th century decades when the mainline Protestants declined, depriving the society of a countervailing power against evangelicalism. Just at the time that the Republicans were bringing evangelicals into greater prominence, the rival ecumenical, mainline Protestants, were losing what had long been their major role in American society.

Secular critics could talk about racism, sexism, homophobia, and the bad readings of the constitution common among evangelicals. But these secular critics almost never contested the religious foundations of Christian nationalism, thus entirely missing the actually operating justifications for evangelical political behavior.

As Linda Greenhouse charged in The New York Review of Books, secularists don’t know how to talk back to evangelicals. They don’t even know how to frame the questions. The Manichean existential conflict between a good and evil is an enduring element in the inventory of the Christian project, even if downplayed by the ecumenical theologians.

Extreme sectarianism finds ample scriptural warrant, not only in the resoundingly apocalyptic book of Revelation, but scattered here and there among the 30,000 verses of the Bible from which preachers can choose. So we take captive every thought and make it obedient to Christ 2 Corinthians 10:5 or Matthew 12:30, this is Jesus himself. Whoever is not with me is against me. Galatians 1:28, where he grants dominion over all things on the Earth.

Now the mainline leader like Reinhold Niebuhr and Paul Tillich could debate this stuff, including Isaiah 4:5, where Cyrus is anointed, which is a scriptural warrant. We see invoked almost every day by evangelicals to justify the demonstrably immoral Trump as their champion. Thus, an ironic consequence of the secularization process, more and more people leaving religion, more and more nones, as we say, the mainline churches in decline.

A ironic consequence of all of that was the loss of what had been the nation’s most formidable obstacle to evangelical influence in American life. The Manichaean and dominionist strains of evangelical Protestantism, whatever their claims under subspecies analysis. Our constitute, a deeper, more structural problem for democracy than the Christian nationalism that these doctrines facilitate.

To be sure, sectarianism is not– Republican sectarianism is not exclusively a consequence of evangelical influence. In the 1990s, Newt Gingrich and Pat Buchanan, urged Republicans to demonize Democrats and to stop working with them on collegial terms. Gingrich famously asked Republican office seekers to get nasty, and demanded that Republicans in both houses of Congress blow up bipartisan projects and run the tables their own way.

Buchanan made his reputation by insisting that Reagan had betrayed his revolutionary potential and become a conventional, compromising politician. Gingrich and Buchanan did not need evangelical inspiration to turn their party in more polarizing directions, but they understood that Ronald Reagan had delivered to them a voting constituency ready to go with their florid flow.

Reagan, you’ll remember, began his 1980 campaign for the presidency by telling the National Association of evangelicals that he endorsed them. Immediately after praising states’ rights, while standing virtually on the graves of the Neshoba County martyrs from 1964, Reagan linked his government is the problem mantra to his appeal to white southerners unhappy with federal support of civil rights for African-Americans.

And he offered both of these as being fully in harmony with his celebration of evangelical Protestantism.

The Republican political dependence on evangelical voters is more intimately connected to the southern strategy than is usually recognized. That strategy developed as early as the Nixon years, was unashamedly aimed at the white population, uncomfortable with school integration and federally guaranteed civil rights for African-Americans.

But the culture of Southern whites in the former slave states was already the most thoroughly evangelical regional culture in the nation. The Southern strategy was, from the start, an evangelical strategy. There were implications for education. It helps to remember that as late as 1970, nearly one fifth of the ministers of congregations affiliated with the Southern Baptist Convention had no schooling beyond high school.

Historically, Republicans had long enjoyed the support of the bulk of the upper middle-class and in many states had given more support to public higher education than the Democrats. But by prioritizing white Southern evangelicals and their counterparts in the Midwest, the Republican Party gradually abandoned most of the states with highly educated electorates that had once produced Republican presidents and senators of real stature.

In neither 2016 or 2020, did Trump make a serious effort to win any state in the entire eastern corridor, from Maine to Virginia, with the sole exception of Pennsylvania, nor did he try to get the Pacific states of California, Oregon, Washington, and Hawaii. Already, by 2014, before Trump, the GOPs abandonment of those 16 coastal states was so pronounced that of the 32 senators then representing those states, only Susan Collins of Maine and Patrick Toomey of Pennsylvania were Republicans.

The party located its power base in the States and the Congressional districts with the fewest college graduates. For the first time in American history then, one of our two major political parties has a vested interest, a vested interest in maintaining a relatively uneducated electorate. The study of history, sociology, political science, philosophy and literature might call into question, what was learned in church or in kinship networks?

Technical and vocational education are not problematic. When JD Vance the other day declared that professors are the enemy, echoing Nixon, he was not talking about professors of electrical engineering or nursing.

A liberal arts education makes individuals more likely to appreciate the value of vaccines, to recognize how much of human life opens up for women when they have reproductive choice, to respect scientific indicators of global warming, to understand the past disabling legacy for descendants of enslaved Americans, to grasp the evidence that Joe Biden won the 2020 election, to distinguish large scale economic indicators from the price of eggs, to understand what project 2025 means for the country if Trump becomes president, and to accept a host of other realities that low information voters, as the press calls them, often deny, especially when encouraged to do so by confident voices claiming to speak from or on behalf of their identity group.

When Republican governors try to take over the higher education system of their states, they know exactly what they are doing. They know who their enemy is, it is us. Evangelicalism changed little during this Republican sponsored rise other than being corrupted by a new proximity to power, bringing dominionism to greater prominence as evangelicals began to take seriously for the very first time that they might actually run the country.

But evangelicalism’s patron, the Republican Party, was changed profoundly. Republicans of yore were not so fanatically eager to police the bodies of women, to prevent public school children from learning unappealing truths about history and society, to shut down rather than to carefully manage the regulatory state, and to collapse the separation of church and state.

Today’s Republicans know how dependent they are on evangelical voters, who function as a kind of tar baby sticking to the hands of even those Republicans whose interest in evangelicalism was always more opportunistic than principled. Once you grab onto it, it’s very hard to get rid of. It’s hard to get rid of because it is so deeply embedded.

A recent flood of disillusioned autobiographies bear eloquent witness to the sticking power of this historic theological burden. Sarah McCammon, The Exevangicals, and Tim Alberta’s, The Kingdom, The Power, and The Glory, mixed autobiography with reportage, recounting the experience of trying to live a non-sectarian life under evangelical authority. A complementary shelf of books by historians document the depth and extent not only of manicheanism, but also misogyny and racism.

Kristin Kobes Du Mez, Jesus and John Wayne, is the most compelling one volume testimony to the challenges faced by those who wish to remain evangelicals while participating in a pluralist democracy. Yet a revealing sign of how challenging it can be to reform evangelicalism rather than simply to abandon it, is the frequency with which anti-Trump evangelicals depart from the standard evangelical talking points to draw from the theological inventory of the long, scorned mainline liberal Protestants.

I’m here thinking especially of the op ed columnist, David French, Peter Wehner, Russell Moore, and David Brooks. Their writings, the writings of these pundits in The Times, The Post, and The Atlantic, show a striking pattern of appropriation and effacement. Priorities of the religious liberals that were long castigated as substituting politics for religion. That was basically the line you heard all the time from evangelicals about ecumenical substituting politics for religion.

All of those priorities are now appropriated, while the congregationalist, Episcopalians, and Methodists, who liberalized Protestantism are effaced from public memory. Staples of ecumenical sermons and Sunday schools are now used by the anti-Trump evangelicals as representative of Christianity. Matthew 25:40 I was naked and you clothed me and so forth. And if you do this to the least of these, my brother, you have done it to me. Or Luke 10:25, the good Samaritan story.

Galatians 3:28 and Christ, there is no Gentile or Jew, no male or female, so forth. All these things are straight out of the liberal Sunday schools, and then suddenly you find David French, writing them. I wonder how many more columns I could read by David French, where he goes into an evangelical church and he sees people that are mean spirited and he’s shocked, shocked to find these people.

So readers of the discussions of religion in The Times, The Post, and The Atlantic might suppose that the essence of evangelicalism had always been a species wide movement for love, service, and brotherhood, tragically twisted in the era of Trump. This is an egregious misrepresentation of American religious history.

The notorious Manichaean, and dominionist, New Apostolic Reformation would not attract so many of today’s individuals had not generations of preachers made its doctrines plausible and its style appealing. The Republican Party will not regain its historic role as a responsible participant in the nation’s two party system until it faces up to the damage done by its uncritical embrace of bad religion.

[APPLAUSE]

 

[CRISTINA MORA] Professor Wasow.

[OMAR WASOW] I want to begin by thanking the Matrix and the panel for inviting me. So I was interested in thinking about realignment, particularly around what has been observed both in recent polling and in the 2020 election around what sometimes called racial polarization. So one of the more striking findings in the 2020 election is that Trump outperformed sort of Republican presidential candidates among African-Americans, Latinos, Asian-Americans.

And that was shocking for a variety of reasons to people who study politics partly, Trump’s rhetoric has often been quite alienating to members of those groups. And so it was sort of thought if anybody would have the reverse, it would be Trump and yet that’s not what happened. Some of this was picked up on already by Professor Haney-Lopez.

And I think there are at least a couple of things that might be specific to 2020 that I’m not going to go into in that much detail, but where some of it may be COVID effects, might if you were somebody who had a job that was hit heavily by COVID restrictions, that might make you more hostile to the party associated with COVID restrictions. And so there’s a class and education divide there that overlaps with race.

I think there’s some evidence, my primary research is on protest movements. I think there’s some evidence that among Asian-Americans and Latinos, there was some disaffection from the Democratic Party in response to Black Lives Matter protests in that period.

But again, those are the 2020 election. And I’m interested in thinking a little bit about some of the present moment. And in particular, I want to take the most provocative version of the question, which is to think about people like Enrique Tarrio, who is a Cuban– Afro-Cuban, was a former head of the Proud Boys, now convicted, who is very explicit about his enthusiasm for this, what was called like, I forget the term now, it was like European chauvinist group.

But it was also very clear that he was raised in a Black Cuban community and was like not anti-Black, and at least his conception of it. Nick Fuentes is an avowed neo-Nazi of Mexican-American ancestry. Mark Robinson, candidate for governor in North Carolina. I mean, a bit of a crackpot, but it’s not as easy to just say, oh, nobody of color would take these extreme positions because in fact, we have lots and lots of examples.

So I think it raises a puzzle that– to be clear, this is not research I’ve done. It’s something I’m kind of thinking about and speculating about and so I’m processing with you now in public. So these are speculations, some may be more grounded in evidence than others.

So what could be going on– and I think to be clear, I also want to say that the Enrique Tarrio’s of the world are extreme cases, but I think are leading indicators of this broader pattern we saw in 2020. And so we should think of them as worth at least considering even as their extreme of a broader set of trends in maybe a new kind of alignment around racial depolarization.

So one of the very common polling results that we’ve gotten in the last few months is that there is this particularly among Black and Latino young men, some shift away from the Democratic Party. And I want to begin with two kind of significant caveats. And I actually welcome your feedback on this as well.

First is it’s entirely plausible that a significant chunk of that story is polling error. And I don’t mean polling error in the sense of people are doing polls badly or there’s some kind of malfeasance or something. But it’s just when you are getting subgroups of subgroups, you have noisier estimates. And it’s entirely possible that we’re getting fairly noisy estimates that are somewhat over representing the disaffected than the affected, or maybe not the right way to put it.

And I think in that also, it’s important to say that among African-Americans, typical presidential election, 90% of African-Americans will vote for the Democratic Party. So if 80% of African-American men vote for the Democratic Party, that’s both a significant shift in the sense that you’ve gone from one in 10 voting Republican to two in 10.

But the overwhelming majority of African-American men are still voting for the Democratic Party. And some of the more recent polls suggest it might be 85%. So how big a transition are we talking about? I think that’s an open question we’ll hopefully know more shortly.

A second caveat is that this should be entirely unsurprising. That in a society where we are bathed in narratives of racial hierarchy that some of the people who are lower status strive to be a part of the higher status group and adopt the ideologies of the higher status group and behave in ways that are essentially about a kind of acculturating to the norms of a dominant group.

So at some level, we should think of this as– of course, this is happening. It’s been happening throughout American history. It’s been happening throughout the history of the world, that people in one form or another in the Black community would call passing are doing that in part as a way to gain status or income or other kinds of opportunities.

So with those two kind of caveats aside, let me add one other subtle one, which is that it’s also unclear to what degree this is a phenomenon that reflects broad trends that we’re going to see for years to come, or something idiosyncratic about Donald Trump.

So to go a little off script, I was staying at a hotel in Long Island. There was a visiting a hospital and the check in counter at this motel was a young African-American man wearing– this is, I think, around 2018– he’s wearing a MAGA cap. And I’m a political scientist. It’s like it’s just me and him. And so I’m like trying in a very nonjudgmental way to say, so don’t see a lot of brothers wearing MAGA caps. What’s going on?

He’s like, yeah, the sisters hate it, and he kind of pauses and he says, I just love Home Alone 2.

[LAUGHTER]

Which I did not see coming, right? But it’s like Trump is a celebrity. Trump has a level of celebrity that is exceptional. And not just a level of celebrity, but he has for– I don’t know how many years The Apprentice was on air, but a decade and a half, there was a level of marketing that he is a great businessman. And if you read the profiles of the production of The Apprentice, it turns out, in fact, he’s making all kinds of capricious decisions that the editors have to reverse engineer the show to make it look like a good decision was made.

And that, in fact, when– I’m forgetting the name of the producer, Mark– the person who oversaw the apprentice said when they first went to pitch Trump, he was very down on his luck. His office had lots of furniture with chipped wood and it’s an act of– it is theater that he is to the world, not a guy with six banks or six bankruptcies, but a great businessman.

So there’s something potentially idiosyncratic about Trump that will not translate to other candidates or the party. And I just don’t know. I mean, I think some of the stuff you brought up clearly is at play, but Trump is idiosyncratic. So now to get a little bit more into things that I think might be structural deeper.

I think one mistake that people make a lot when they hear this rhetoric, and again, this was touched on earlier, Mexico is not sending their best, they’re sending criminals and so on and so on. We assume that the reaction is going to be one of rejection by people targeted by that hateful language. And what we see again and again across many different groups is that when people are stigmatized, there are two different reactions.

In simple terms, one is a kind of rejection, but another is a distancing from the group. So to draw on some research by a scholar at Stanford who looked at German Americans following World War I, there was a rise of anti-German sentiment. And there are a bunch of things that German Americans do essentially to distance themselves from being identified as German.

So she looks at data, for example, at how they name their kids. And the prototypically German names for boys become– they go for more German names to more kind of quintessentially American names. So that act of distancing should not surprise us. This is like a human adaptation under conditions of discrimination, stigmatization to try and contort yourself to be less a target of that discrimination.

And so echoing exactly what was said earlier. If you’re associated with a group that’s being demonized, like an obvious strategy is to try and not be part of the group or to distance yourself from the group. And so I think on a range of dimensions, we’re watching distancing patterns play out that are, again, fundamentally very typical processes of accommodation to discrimination, to processes of being demonized.

Second, another idea. This is now– let’s see, so polling error, we raised in a bath of racial hierarchy, celebrity, response to stigmatization. So that’s four. So a fifth one is very speculative, which is that we’re in the middle of a kind of second realignment.

Well, so a classic term, there’s lots of debate about what is realignment, but in the 1960s, there’s this passage of landmark civil rights legislation. The two parties become more explicitly, the Democratic Party becomes expli– in the– let me, just because this may seem, it may not be obvious.

In 1962, there’s a Civil Rights Act that’s passed, and it gets more Republican support than Democratic support. Why is that? The Democratic Party is a group of northern, more liberal racial liberals, and southern segregationists. And so it’s not obvious that Democrats are going to be the party of racial liberalism more broadly. By ’64, the Civil Rights Act passes, Democrats are the party of African-American interests, and the Republican Party becomes more explicitly, the party aligned against civil rights.

And that split, sort of unfolds over decades to some of what we think of as now the racial realignment. So what would a second realignment look like? Marc Hetherington, who’s a scholar, a leading scholar of authoritarianism, although he’s now refining that, gave a presentation of a new book he was working on here yesterday as part of the Citron Center and the Matrix.

And I think he spelled out a more fine grained idea of conservatism that included things, like a taste for traditionalism, sometimes people being hypercompetitive. So that’s some of the Trump energy of just like this. And he got surveys that are teasing apart, disaggregating some of what we might call conservatism, a strong taste for personal responsibility over more systemic models of accountability.

And what I mean in this idea of a second realignment is that there’s this moment of possibility for now more fine grained sorting. So we’ve had one big sort around, how do you feel at some core level about equality for African-Americans. And now there’s this opportunity to yourself on more subtle things.

Well, I’m more of a traditionalist. And what people want to do with, say, transwomen in sports upsets my sense of traditionalism, and that that’s going to show up, not cleanly aligned with party. Let’s give another example that maybe is easier to grasp. He talked about these measures of hypercompetitiveness. What do we mean by hypercompetitiveness?

The questions on these surveys were like walking. You should never walk away from a fight. Walking away from a fight is a sign of weakness. Basically, questions that get at, do you think the world is defined by winners and losers? And it turned out that hypercompetitiveness shows up pretty evenly distributed across both parties.

But now you’ve got a candidate who is a hypercompetitive candidate. So if you’re somebody who has a taste for that, that’s potentially going to pull you out of what had been your historical home by party. So that’s what I mean by this more. We’ve gone from a big sort to maybe a more fine grained sort.

And that over time, we’re going to see these other kinds of traits leading to people who are cross-pressured. By which I mean, they may have a profile in The Times yesterday about Latino kid whose parents are for Harris and he’s for Trump and he’s got competing motives and instincts. But maybe he’s somebody who is a traditionalist in some way that makes it hard to align with these new ideas that the Democratic Party is associated with.

And I think it’s important to say that in order to have maybe this more fine grained sort, you need another thing. And so this is now the last potential thing that maybe is changing that I think is more structural, which is that we should think of identity as importantly downstream of institutions. And what I mean by that, I just taught a class this morning, where we were reading Anderson’s Imagined Communities, and it’s like you can think of the emergence of the nation state as non-trivially, a function of the emergence of print media, which gives people a sense of common identity across distance and even time that wasn’t there possible.

So media, as this very powerful institution shaping people’s sense of self, is one of those institutions. We read another piece about schools, which is, you can think of as almost another kind of media. But schools as a powerful institution shaping people’s sense of national identity.

And in the present era, we’ve got– I mean, the list of institutions goes on, churches, so on. There’s an unmooring for a lot of young people from a lot of those institutions. I grew up reading newspapers, that is clearly like now, like using a fountain pen. It is increasingly archaic.

And so what does it mean to be a young African-American kid coming of age, getting a sense of self from TikTok. Religious institutions in the Black community have been a very powerful part of the kind of baton pass of institutions of racial political identity. We’re seeing increasingly on this trend about secularization, like young African-Americans much less engaged in the church. So that we should assume there is some unmooring associated with that, too.

And linked to that, we might also imagine that there are these new identities. Maybe I am really into anime, and my sense of self is defined by the global community of anime enthusiasts, not by my local Black community. So this is speculative, but almost certainly there is some media and other ways in which these formerly central institutions that are now in some ways being decentered is having effects on giving people more latitude to move by party.

So where does that leave us? Just to wrap very quickly, I think we don’t have as social scientists, and maybe more generally in the public discourse, a good model for what I think of as an increasingly multiethnic, still overwhelmingly white Republican Party, but a multiethnic far-right. And that’s something new and interesting that we need to get our heads around.

[CRISTINA MORA] Great.

[APPLAUSE]

Great. Well, Eva has the mic. We’ll take questions from the audience. We’ll start right here and then right here. Thank you so much.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thanks for the points made. I guess, one question. I have a couple of questions. One is, what is a Democratic Party to do in terms of– we’re trying to reach out to all these subgroups also evangelical, but also white, male, uneducated is a group diversity of the Hispanic group. And it’s just like the Republican Party has been very effective in capturing the far-right. What’s the message? What kind of leadership is required? Because I think it’s a combination of message as well as leader.

And then, it seems to me like a centrist policy with the right communication, the inclusive message you talked about is really critical. Because imagine, if the immigration– like, the border was not an issue. If the executive order was done the first year versus the third year. And you take that off. I always say don’t give the other side ammunition.

So what is the Democratic Party to do, run a more centrist model because the Republicans have captured the far-right, is a centrist in the left, a bigger group, but is that effective? And how do we avoid letting the Republicans have these ammunition points?

[LÓPEZ] So I would respond by saying the counterfactual in which strong border controls are enacted, that’s the wrong way to think about it. Like, Obama, the Obama administration deported more people than any other prior administration in the history of the country and nevertheless was dinged as weak on the border and open borders. What the Republicans are engaged in doing is bamboozling the public by lying to them consistently, egregiously, repeatedly, echoed through two large megaphones– three, I guess Fox and other media, social media, and the evangelical church.

And if that’s the case, then Democrats can’t win by enacting effective policy that responds to the complaints. And even– listen, to some of the language that David provided. We’re going to route out the communists and the friends like. The stories are telling aren’t connected to reality. And so don’t respond to reality. That means that Democrats need a powerful countervailing story.

Democrats have struggled to articulate a powerful countervailing story because they’ve been caught by two different forces. One, they’re being pushed in a sort of splintered identitarian direction, and that actually makes things worse. So if we tell a story to the American public in which we are indeed locked into conflict between different communities of color and white people, or we are indeed locked into conflict between the feminists and the rest, or between a gay identity movement and straight.

Like, if that’s the sort of political language we use, that’s going to backfire, and so Democrats stay away from it. What do they replace it with? Policy, which is about the worst thing you can replace it with. It’s like one channel is showing Scream 2. And then the Democrats are like, we know. Well, let’s get them to watch Washington Week in review. It’s like nobody’s turning from Scream 2 to Washington Week in review.

So Democrats really need a story. I actually think Harris and Walz are doing pretty good with that story. It’s a story of inclusion. It’s a story of working together. It’s a story of a shared vision. It’s a big tent. I think that they could do better in naming– well, I actually think one of the things that they’re weakest on is immigration. Because their record on immigration is kind of what you’re saying. We had a strong policy. It’s like, that’s not going to do it.

I think that they do better if they said, all those terrible lies about people in Springfield eating pets, those are lies of the worst sort designed to tear us apart. We know better. Let’s come together. This is just billionaires tech money, crypto money funding lies about poor people. We’re on to this. They could be much better on that. But I think that that’s the core insight here. And it goes to Omar’s conversation. All politics is identity politics.

Republicans have done incredibly well because they’ve mastered identity politics and really leaned into it and will say whatever they need to say to mobilize people around identity. Democrats as a party have run away from identity politics, and they’ve run away from it under pressure from different identity groups. And they’ve also run away from the sort of natural identity politics that they should lean into, which is identity as class or class as identity.

Democrats are unwilling to tell a story of working people beset by corporations and by billionaires, with notable exceptions like Bernie and AOC. And then you look at how popular they are and say Democrats really need to lean into this. Why are Democrats doing so poorly among working people? Because they no longer articulate a story of a class war, in which working people broadly defined or under threat from malefactors of great wealth to recover a New Deal type language.

So Democrats for 50 years have been trying to contest elections with very little recourse to identity. The two big exceptions, Bill Clinton, who mobilized white identity as the new Democrat, and Obama, who mobilized an identity of the post-racial America even as he evaded discussion of race. But that’s I think, the crux. Democrats need an identity story because they’re up against an identity story, and politics is fundamentally about identity.

[MORA] Don’t you think in some ways, though, if you see the polls and folks are asking, what’s the most important issue to you? Without question, the economy, the economy, the economy, across all groups. And so don’t you think some of this is also talking so much about identity and not enough about trying to understand how different groups are understanding what the economy is in the first place and what it is at all.

[LÓPEZ] I mean, the polling super interesting. People’s view of the economy tracks their partisan affiliation. The economy is too complex. And the policies are too complex, most people don’t understand it. So what do we see? How do you feel? How optimistic are you about the economy? Well, the Democrats are in power, so I’m down. Wait, a Republican just got elected. Now I’m super optimistic.

And then it flips with the Democrats. It’s following more than generating partisan affiliation. If people cannot answer the question, what sorts of policies are good for me. They can answer the question, who respects me, who esteems me, who’s like me, who will fight for me. Identity, identity, identity, identity.

And I think that, yes, the economy has to be part of the conversation, but nobody should make the mistake of thinking we’re going to talk economy in ways that cuts through identity. It doesn’t because there’s so much noise out there. Like the Republicans are saying, we’re the party of working people, which for any of us who are paying attention is the biggest hoot ever.

And the Democrats are saying sometimes we are the party of working people and we’ve got these policies, but most people can’t make sense of that. What can they make sense of, who esteems me, who will fight for me, who respects me. And they’re going to use identity markers to answer what is going to be good for me economically, which is deeply frustrating that people are saying– I mean, Trump has more credibility than Harris on whether he’ll be good for working Americans.

Because of his policies? Hell, no, because of identity. And so it would be a big mistake to say, no, we need to talk about the economy more, or at least– or maybe let me modify that answer. Talk about the economy in identity terms. There are rich bastards out there who are rigging the system for themselves, and all the rest of us are in trouble.

We, the American people, believe in hard work and believe in, let’s say, an opportunity economy, in which through hard work we can get ahead. And that requires that we stand up to these scheming strategic crypto billionaires who want to buy the presidency. That’s sort of economy, but it’s mainly identity.

[HOLLINGER] A while ago you were mentioning that you thought that Harris and Walz were sort of stepping in the right direction, even if they haven’t got altogether where they should be. And I was wondering how you would characterize their line as identity.

[LÓPEZ] It’s identity in the sense that they’re saying they’re trying to divide us, we’re in this together, we want to take care of each other. They’re weirdos. We’re not weirdos, we’re regular people. This is common sense. Like, these are really strong stories about what it means to be American.

[HOLLINGER] One way to put that. And I’m just wondering whether you would go along with this, is that they’re affirming national identity.

[LÓPEZ] I think so, but not in a nationalistic sense. Not in that America first and not with a heavy emphasis on America, America, America, like this that sort of patriotism. But in a national identity, in the sort of decency, and pluralistic, and diverse.

[HOLLINGER] And we’re all in it together democracy. Yeah. That’s good.

[WASOW] So let me make one friendly amendment to the comment earlier, which is I think that I agree. I talked about Trump as a performer, as a businessman rather than an actual businessman. In part because, yes, like the stories matter and can often Trump reality. The soundbite version of it is not that seeing is believing, but believing is seeing.

But I do think, at least in my experience and my own research, but also I think some degree with immigration and the present, some degree with the economy, it’s not entirely fiction also. People did have an experience of inflation. There have been cities like New York that we’re dealing with this influx of immigrants.

And so there’s kind of two things going on. One is it’s wildly overhyped. Like, why are people in Vermont concerned about the border? And we see a lot of this some of the most concerned Republicans are on the Canadian border. And it’s not quite clear what’s going on there. That’s downstream of a kind of fiction, I think, more than it is reality. But it’s not that there’s nothing.

The economy is doing extremely well by most measures, but there was this peak in inflation and people are very sensitive to that.

[MORA] Especially the working class is a real sense in which the Democratic Party continues to say the economy is doing so well. And then you’ve got a good group of people who are seeing– I mean, this is why JD Vance is in front of prices of eggs and things like that and so–

[WASOW] But I actually think, I think the Democrats, a year I think, for a long time, if you look at the history of deficits, for example, deficits go up under Republican administrations and down under Democratic administrations, and yet Democrats have done a terrible job of saying we’re the party of fiscal discipline, in part because I think it conflicts with their own sense of, no, we’re the party that fights for the poor, but we’re also the– it’s like you can be too empathetic sometimes and not have good message discipline.

So I think there’s actually a story to be told about the economy under Biden that has some amount of empathy and also says we’ve outperformed all of our peer countries and inflation is down–

[MORA] I think it’s divorced from reality, I think it’s what people are feeling and thinking, which is not necessarily what’s objectively true. And I think–

[INTERPOSING VOICES]

Yes, I’ll take that as a–

But I think what you’re saying about the message, which I find really fascinating, is the message about economic inequality, which is what you’re saying. It’s like economic inequality as a bridger. Understanding economic inequality as a bridger of all of these different identities. We’re all in the same boat–

[LÓPEZ] Let me sharpen that.

–In this stratified system.

Let me sharpen that. I think you’re absolutely right that people are feeling economic pain. They’re feeling it post-COVID. But in the larger context, over the last 50 years since the inception of dog whistle politics and the sort of hegemony of a Republican Party that’s got itself elected over and over again through culture, war, politics, there has been a massive transfer of wealth from the American middle up to the economic stratosphere. Of course, people are feeling pain. The pain is real. I’m not downplaying that.

But I’m saying what people really want to know is who’s to blame and who will help. Those are identity questions. If instead you just say the pain is real. They know the pain is real. That’s not what’s important. And here are the policies that will solve it, too hard to understand. I don’t know who to trust. You need a concise story, who did this to me? Who’s going to fight for me? And those are identity stories.

[WASOW] The one other thing just on patriotism was, I think part of what we saw that was remarkable in the Democratic National Convention was a kind of liberal nationalism, a liberal patriotism that was a vision of an America that’s exceptional in its being pioneering on marriage equality was Buddha story. It’s an America that had an Americana where prince is like at the heart of like American Americana.

And so it was multiethnic and it was inclusive and it was at the same time, I think, speaking to some of the ways– or Senator Warnock talking about, my mother went from picking cotton to voting for her son for the Senate. Those are stories that are in some ways speak to a certain kind of American exceptionalism but from a liberal perspective.

[LÓPEZ] What I would highlight is the way Democrats have used patriotism to connect patriotism to defense of democracy. One of the most striking lines that they’ve developed is, if you vote for Harris, that doesn’t necessarily make you a Democrat, it makes you a patriot. That was a really powerful line to try and talk to co-opt patriotism from Republicans.

[MORA] We got questions in the audience that will take. Go ahead.

[MARION FOURCADE] Thank you so much. That was truly wonderful. I wanted to go to a topic that none of you really mentioned very much, which is the gender divide. I mean, you sort of said, well, I don’t really believe in it. But if you actually look at the data, it actually cuts across ethnoracial groups. It’s absolutely not unique to Latinos. And in fact, it is worldwide. We are seeing this divide increase worldwide.

So, how does it matter for David, the women are leaving church in droves and in actually just saw data that in Gen Z women are less likely to go to church than men. I mean, that’s historically, that’s a major transformation. And then to Omar, the far-right also, it’s also been very much about gender, but through a different line, mostly through the question of demographic anxiety, which, of course, ties it to control of women’s bodies, but also to immigration. So I don’t know. I just wanted to put that out there and see.

[LÓPEZ] I think that’s a fabulous question. I’ll just be very quick. A really important corrective. I think gender is enormously important in 2024 and may be more important than race. Like, it’s a huge, huge issue, both on terms of equality for women, and abortion issues, and also in competing conceptions of masculinity. Divisions in terms of conception of masculinity on the right, I think is enormously important.

What I was skeptical of was the idea that there’s a particular gender divide among Latinos and African-Americans that’s connected to a mythology of machismo or aggressive masculinity, particular to Latino and African-American men. That is the storyline that has purchased because it dovetails with this pernicious stereotype.

I don’t think is borne out by the data. But I don’t want to be understood to say gender is irrelevant. I actually think it’s enormously, enormously important, more important globally. I think, than in the United States what’s happening, I think there’s a dynamic of demagoguery that seizes on status anxiety in the United States, race is available, but now too, anxiety about gender. I think globally, gender is more readily available as a static anxiety that can be used to whip up Democratic masses. So I think it’s hugely, hugely important.

[HOLLINGER] Yeah, with regard to Protestantism. The exit of women from evangelical churches is very recent, and it’s especially because of what the court did with abortion and the stance that evangelical churches are making. Protestantism is still overwhelmingly female, and that’s been the case for quite a long time. Males are much more likely to have left the churches and not come back.

Most of the Protestant churches are actually increasingly run by women, and that’s also the case with a lot of Catholic parishes. So I’m not saying that gender is not important, but it’s functions differently in a religious context. And I think with these evangelical pro-Trump types, it’s important to know that there are a lot of very prominent women that lead this.

Paula White was the spiritual advisor to the White House throughout Trump’s term. And she led him from five or six years before he asked her basically to help him win the evangelicals. And she did. And so there are millions of people that follow her, and three or four other charismatic Pentecostal women that continue to have enormous support.

Now, whether or not the trend that you’ve referred to, which is genuinely true. Whether that will continue, I don’t know. But it’s definitely a new thing. And I don’t see anything in the overall picture about Protestantism and Catholicism in the United States to change the overwhelmingly gendered character of it. If you go into seminaries now, like you go up here to the Pacific School of Religion, GTU, go to Union or Chicago Div, it’s women that are there, not men.

[WASOW] I would add and I realize this is a weird referral is a total tangent. But I mentioned Home Alone 2 earlier, without clarifying that Donald Trump has a cameo in this film and that might not have been obvious, so I apologize.

[LAUGHS]

On gender, I think this is– actually, a really central point in getting at something that, again, I’m still sort of trying to process, but a lot of how we’ve thought of race politics in America is that they’re defined by white supremacy. And increasingly, a model that organizes a certain far-right politics around that misses all of the other contributing factors. So first, I think it’s important to note that the KKK was also anti-Catholic and anti-Jewish.

So it’s always been more multiethnic than just say anti-Black, and that’s an important factor. It’s also been steeped in all kinds of notions of men’s roles and women’s roles. So it’s not that that’s these other factors are entirely new. But I think– how does Enrique Tarrio fit into the Proud Boys? Well, it’s partly that he’s a chauvinist.

And so the crude way I think about this, is it’s almost like we could imagine a point system, where there are a set of things, where, are you Christian? Well, that’s a point. Are you a chauvinist? That’s a point. Are you anti-trans? That’s a point. Are you white? That might be a point. But it’s only one in a kind of consortium of attitudes and commitments that allow you to have status on the far-right.

And so being a male chauvinist, as the Proud Boys explicitly are, is part of what gives him access, maybe even as somebody who’s Afro-Cuban. And I think it works in other dimensions too, again, to pull away from the far-right, it’s someone like Bobby Jindal or Nikki Haley sits in an interesting place in the Republican Party, where they on the one hand, have converted religion. They’ve sort of anglicized names. There are these ways in which you, again, kind of acculturate into the party, but it’s not as organized around race as it might have been in an earlier era.

I mean, you said gender might be more important than race. And so I think, it’s like we want to think about an issues like transgender issues, don’t easily just shoehorn into our conceptions of race politics. And so I guess the way I am thinking about how some of the right-wing politics are organized is that, as a scholar of race and ethnic politics, that race is in some ways has less purchase. It’s not still central, but that gender, sexuality issues.

And to come back to the status threat idea, that there’s a simple model, which is, do you believe in a world where men should have status above women? Where straight people should have status above LGBTQ folk? Where white should have status over Black? And all of those– to the extent that any of those are part of your framework, like you are more going to find a home, but you don’t have to commit to all of them.

And so you might be four out of five on some, and that allows you to then have membership. And Nikki Haley might never be the nominee, but she can be the number two in a primary.

[HOLLINGER] There’s a column in The Post this morning arguing that gender is important, race is important. But the big thing in realignment, and this is a column that follows very much the language of our session is education. And that’s come up a couple of times here, and I appreciated the comments that Ian and Omar both made about that. I would say, with religion, education is just massively important and a better identifier if you want to choose people out on why they’re going this way or that way.

Education more than gender, more than race, more than class is the chief differentiator. So there’s something to it, anyway.

[MORA] Well, with that provocative comment, at the end, we’re at time now.

[WASOW] Join me in thanking the panel.

[LAUGHTER]

[APPLAUSE]

Thank you.

[AUDIO LOGO]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

Matrix On Point

Matrix on Point: Voices from the Heartland

Patriotic display of American flags waving on white picket fence. Typical small town Americana Fourth of July Independence Day decorations.

Over the past few years, Arlie Hochschild has been in conversation with citizens of Pikeville, Kentucky, in the heart of Appalachia; Jenny Reardon has been biking through her home state of Kansas, talking to farmers, ranchers and other denizens of the prairie; and Lisa Pruitt has straddled the rural-urban divide over the course of her life in Arkansas and California and as a scholar of rural legal access.

As the nation braced for a decisive election, this conversation — recorded on October 21 — sought to illuminate the frequently overlooked yet politically potent voices emanating from America’s rural heartlands and small towns. The panel was moderated by Cihan Tuğal, Professor of Sociology at UC Berkeley, and co-sponsored by the UC Berkeley Department of Sociology, the Institute of Governmental Studies (IGS), and the Berkeley Center for Right Wing Studies.

About the Speakers

Arlie R. Hochschild is Professor Emerita in the Department of Sociology at UC Berkeley. Her 2016 book, Strangers in Their Own Land: Anger and Mourning on the American Right, details rise of the right. Her latest book, ‘Stolen Pride: loss, shame and the rise of the right’ is based on six years of field work in eastern Kentucky and focuses on the politics of pride and shame. In particular, it focuses on the distress caused by “structural shaming” in an era of post-70s economic decline, a shame which enhances the appeal of Trump’s politics of displacement.

Lisa Pruitt is Distinguished Professor of Law at UC Davis. Pruitt’s work reveals how the economic, spatial, and social features of rural locales, (e.g., material spatiality, lack of anonymity) profoundly shape the lives of residents, including the junctures at which they encounter the law. This work also considers how rurality inflects dimensions of gender, race, and ethnicity, including through a lens of whiteness studies and critical race theory.

Jenny Reardon is a Professor of Sociology and the Founding Director of the Science and Justice Research Center at UC Santa Cruz. Her research draws into focus questions about identity, justice and democracy that are often silently embedded in scientific ideas and practices, particularly in modern genomic research. She is the author of Race to the Finish: Identity and Governance in an Age of Genomics (Princeton University Press, 2005) and The Postgenomic Condition: Ethics, Justice, Knowledge After the Genome (Chicago University Press, Fall 2017). Recently, she started a project to bike over one thousand miles through her home state of Kansas to learn from farmers, ranchers and other denizens of the high plains about how best to know and care for the prairie.

Cihan Tuğal (moderator) studies social movements, populism, capitalism, democracy, and religion. In his recent publications, he discusses the far right, neoliberalization, state capitalism, and populist performativity in Turkey, the United States, Hungary, Poland, India, and the Philippines. Tuğal is currently working on a book that will incorporate these case studies, along with an analysis of populism in Brazil. He has also initiated a team project to study the ecological crisis of capitalism, with special emphasis on the role of labor and community struggles in developing sustainable energy.

Watch the panel above or on YouTube.

Listen to the panel as a podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[MARION FOURCADE] Hello, everybody. My name is Marion Fourcade. I’m the Director of Social Science Matrix. I am absolutely delighted to welcome you to this event today. So this week actually is very special because we have not one but two Matrix On Point events. So that’s a bit unusual. But of course, we live in pretty unusual times.

So the reason for this convergence of activity right before the end of October is, of course, that we are bracing for yet another momentous presidential election, perhaps the most momentous election in our lifetime. So in today’s panel, we wanted to gain insight into the frequently overlooked, yet politically potent voices emanating from America’s rural heartlands and small towns.

And we found the absolutely perfect trio of voices to talk about it. And I am so proud that we are bringing them together. Not only because they are all brilliant scholars, but because they showcase a vibrancy of the research that is being done across the UC system. So we have Davis, Berkeley, and Santa Cruz right there. And then Berkeley again.

So for the past few years, Arlie Hochschild has been in conversation with the citizens of Pikeville, Kentucky in the heart of Appalachia. Jenny Reardon has been biking through her home state of Kansas talking to farmers and ranchers and other denizens of the prairie. And Lisa Pruitt has straddled the urban rural divide over the course of her life in Arkansas and California and as a scholar of Rural Legal Access.

So this is a very exciting panel. It is co-sponsored by the Department of Sociology here at Berkeley, the Institute of Governmental Studies, and the Berkeley Center for Right Wing Studies. Note that the panel that we will have on Friday is called– is titled Shifting Alignments, and that panel will present research on political scientists and legal– from political scientists and legal scholars about the changing demographic dynamics within the Democratic and Republican parties. So please come for that too. And then we have a bunch of author meets critics events in late November and December.

But now it is time to hear about the voices from the heartland. And it is time for me to introduce our moderator, Cihan Tuğal, who has also been working on related issues. Cihan needs barely any introduction. He’s a fixture here at matrix. comes here often. He’s professor of sociology at Berkeley. He’s the author of three books and countless articles.

He studies social movements populism, capitalism, democracy, and religion. In his recent publications, he discusses the far right, neoliberalization, state capitalism, and populist performativity in Turkey, the United States, Hungary, Poland, India, and the Philippines. All right? He’s currently working on a book that will incorporate all of these case studies, along with an analysis of populism in Brazil, as if the other ones were not enough.

[LAUGHTER]

He has also initiated a team project to study the ecological crisis of capitalism with special emphasis on the role of labor and community struggles in developing sustainable energy. So without further ado, welcome. And I turn it over to Cihan.

[APPLAUSE]

[CIHAN TUĞAL] OK. Thank you, Marion. I’m not thrilled to be facing this election season, but I am very excited to be here to discussing it with these esteemed colleagues. So we’ll go in this order. Arlie, Lisa, and then Jenny. So first, I want to introduce Arlie Hochschild. I mean, she’s a real person who doesn’t need any introduction, but I’ll say a few words on her.

So she’s a Professor Emerita in the Department of Sociology here at this University, and it was really painful to lose her. I was so sad when she left us. It’s not the same without her, and that’s an additional reason I’m so happy to see her here. So her 2016 book, Strangers in their Own Land, Anger and Mourning on the American Right details the rise of the right in the United States.

And her latest book is Stolen Pride, Lost Shame, and the Rise of the Right is based on six years of fieldwork in Eastern Kentucky and focuses on the politics of pride and shame. In particular, it focuses on the distress caused by structural shaming, as she calls it, in an era of post ’70s economic decline, a shame which enhances the appeal of Trump’s politics of displacement.

And even though not immediately related to this topic, we also know her as the primary sociologist of emotions and one of the foremost sociologists of gender and culture in the United States and worldwide. So next, we’ll have Lisa Pruitt, who is distinguished professor of law at UC Davis.

And her work reveals how the economic spatial and social futures of rural locales, for example, material spatiality and lack of anonymity, profoundly shaped the lives of residents, including the junctures at which they encounter the law. This work also considers how rurality inflects dimensions of gender, race, and ethnicity, including through a lens of whiteness studies and critical race theory.

And last but not least, we’ll hear from Jenny Reardon, a professor of sociology and the founding director of the Science and Justice Research Center at UC Santa Cruz. Her research draws into focus questions about identity, justice, and democracy that are often silently embedded in scientific ideas and practices, particularly in modern genomic research.

She is the author of Race to the Finish, Identity and Governance in an Age of Genomics, published by Princeton University Press, The Post Genomics Condition, Ethics, Justice, Knowledge after the Genome published by Chicago University Press. And recently she started a project to bike over 1,000 miles– oh my god, through her home state of Kansas to learn from farmers, ranchers, and other denizens of the high plains about how best to know and care for the prairie.

And it’s really, really important, I think, to hear all of these voices from the heartland, as the title of the panel calls it, because we are in a bubble. And we really need to bring in these voices through critical lenses, of course. So join me in welcoming the panelists–

[ARLIE HOCHSCHILD] Great. It’s wonderful to be here and I share Cihan’s dread of the moment we’re in, but very much welcome the chance to explore that conceptual space between talk talking to people, fieldwork, hanging out, and what you go home and think about. So what I thought I’d do in my 12 to 15 minutes, hold me to that, is talk about first a kind of a larger story that all of our projects may have in common. And then to take you with me on a journey into Pike County, Kentucky.

And this is– I’m theorizing. I’m not sure of this. But it seems to me that the story begins three decades ago with the turn to neoliberal policies, NAFTA, and offshoring, and automation– that’s not government, but automation– and migration flows. These are all external to the particular places we’re looking at. And in my case, the declining price of coal.

So those are all external factors, but they cause, over time, prosperity divides that were there before but got exacerbated. And that’s between classes, between blue collar and white collar. And blue collar being defined increasingly by whether you have a BA or not, and rural and urban exacerbated prosperity divides.

I think there have been exacerbating effects 2008 hit the middle class in urban areas, but it hit rural areas in blue collars harder. COVID, for many reasons we know about, hit the middle class and urban areas hard, but it hit rural areas and blue collar areas harder. And 2008, Did I mention that? That hit harder. Even climate events, if you don’t have insurance on your home, is a harder hit.

So there’s more– and I’m looking at emotions– more anxiety in the classes that are at the bottom side of the prosperity divide. Now, I think all of this sets the stage, creates a kind of a culture of predisposition to charismatic leadership. We know from Max Weber, there’s bureaucratic rational leadership.

And that’s kind of like Biden. He said, oh, don’t look at my face. Look at what I’ve done. Look at my accomplishments. Look at the policies. That’s bureaucratic, rational leadership. Whereas Donald Trump offers us, look at me, all charismatic leaders do that. And my relationship to you, that’s where it’s at. That’s what my power is, and it’s what– you have to look at my signal.

So it gives us– I think, it calls for us to be more attuned than we ordinarily would be to the play of emotion, both what these strains cause people to feel, and I’m going to argue it’s shame, and the power of a charismatic leader to appeal to shame. So let me now take you on a brief journey to Pike County. Little green light. OK. How’s that.

Good.

Can you hear me OK?

Yeah.

Yeah All right. So here we are. And all right. This is what I saw a lot of. And where we are is in Kentucky. Not just Kentucky, but the light green part of it that’s Eastern Kentucky. This is congressional district Kentucky 5, which is the whitest and second poorest congressional district in the country.

It used to be– how beautiful the place is. Honestly, you wouldn’t think there was any problem. And this occurred to me driving around, what could be the problem? It’s just such a beautiful place. And these are kinds of the scenes you would see driving in from Charleston, West Virginia. And this is Pikeville itself.

This whole area used to be 80% for FDR New Deal Democrats. They were 80% for Bill Clinton. Not Hillary, but bill. And now in this– Kentucky 5 is 80%, the last two elections, for Donald Trump. And I went there and I’m taking you there because I wanted to know why. Why that switch?

So quickly, this is how it is. Pikeville seemed like a gem of a little town. But outside it, these are the hollers. And people in the hollers say Pikeville, that’s where the rich people live. And we live in the hollers. There’s always a dog in the road. It’s–

[LAUGHTER]

Somehow, sort of an ownership thing. And by the way, there’s often a single lane. And what I wondered happens when you have a car going up the mountain and a car going down. It turns out, people there know the terrain so well that they know how far back up the one driver would have to back up in order to make way for the second car, or the other driver would have to do. And they adjudicate that. All this local knowledge makes it, you’re a stayer. And suddenly, you’re going to have to be a leaver. But this is the kind of feeling you have about a place and the knowledge you have.

So OK. This is the look. I’m just sharing with you the look of the place. I know the guy who grew that corn. OK. But it’s not just any old place. And this isn’t coal, but it’s what the coal is inside of. This used to be a place of enormous pride and coal. We kept the lights on. We won World War I. We won World War II. We produced the energy.

And it isn’t just national pride, local pride and having coal. But these are coal miners who are locally seen, as you might imagine, a vet coming home from World War II, a great pride. And they’re proud of their blackened faces. We worked for our wage. And they have a–

[LAUGHTER]

–a little edge about their pride of coal. Like if they’re used to being told, now that’s just dirty energy. We need clean energy. Don’t you care about climate? This is an industry organization, friends of coal, as you can imagine. All right. This is the mayor of Coal Run. And he described his district, well, I’m mayor of two malls on each side of Route 23.

And he said, coal hasn’t really disappeared. And he’s in front of a mile-long coal train that was filled with coal. And this is paradox 1. My favorite word, paradox. Under Donald Trump, the big promise was, I’m going to bring back coal. Me, me, my powerful self will bring back coal. And I’ll also bring other well-paid jobs in. And you’ll be happy.

In the four years of Donald Trump’s presidency, he did not bring back coal, continued to decline, and new jobs– none of them came into the area. He offered them tax cuts, but how’s that going to help the second poorest district in the country? Not at all. So they got nothing economically out of Trump’s four years.

But this train is carrying coal because under Biden, who promised to cut coal, it actually went up because of the Ukraine paradox 1. So when coal jobs went out, people, especially the young and the educated, left for the Midwest industrial towns. And when coal went out, something else came in, and that was a crisis in drugs.

You’ve heard of the term deaths of despair. This is a center of that. Kentucky and West Virginia are the epicenter of Purdue Pharma’s marketing focus. In two states that don’t believe in regulation. Oh, big, bad government, deep state, you don’t want to regulate anything. And so the government didn’t know that Purdue had sent 75 salesmen. This just to Kentucky alone. And Oxycontin.

So I saw a lot of graves of young men. They were rural. They were blue collar. And in the Appalachian Morning News, you would see the death notice. But it would never give the cause. Shame. OK. All of this, I’m making this quick, I think, has led to a desire for charismatic leader, and that would be Donald Trump. These are faces of people that [INAUDIBLE].

And this is a neo-Nazi who brought a white supremacist March to town. And that’s what I did. I said, this is a perfect storm. Jobs are gone. Opiates are in. And now a bad answer to a real problem. But let me just, in the two minutes I have, say what I think it came down to.

This is a very proud region. And they– high on feeling individual responsibility for their fate. They were what I call a pride paradox. They would blame themselves for failure, and they were in an economic district that required them to fail in essence. Meanwhile, in blue states, happier economic circumstances in a more circumstantial culture of pride. So they were blaming themselves for a lot that was going on, that was structural.

And I believe that Donald Trump is a shamed man for his own reasons, which would be neither here nor there for us. Except that I think it gave him an acute understanding of the power of shame. And I believe that he’s put us through what I would call a four-moment antishaming ritual. It goes like this.

Moment one, he says something transgressive– all immigrants are poisoning the blood of America or they’re eating your pet cat and dog. OK. Moment two, the punditry shames Donald Trump. You can’t say that we’re an immigrant society. You can’t say that. That’s a lie. You can’t repeat lies.

Moment three, Donald Trump becomes the victim of the shaming. Oh, that hurt. Have you been shamed like I’ve been shamed. It hurts. I mean, look what they’re doing. They’re beating up on me. And he becomes the victim, and he talks to his followers as fellow victims. And then in moment four comes the great roar back. Out of victimhood, he becomes the rescuer of the shamed.

I believe that America, the Democratic part of America, has been listening to moment one and moment two, where he makes a provocative statement and the punditry shames him. And that the Republican part of America has been listening to moment 3 and moment 4, where he’s the victim and he and he roars back.

So I think we need to become bilingual. We need to understand what is said rationally, but we need to understand what is said emotionally. And then talk in a language they can– others understand whatever we have to say about real solutions to their real problems. Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

[CIHAN TUĞAL] Thank you very much. So, Lisa.

[LISA PRUITT] All right. Well, it’s great to be in Berkeley today. What a lovely weather day you arranged for us. And I am probably the odd person out on this panel, because the field work that I’m going to report on isn’t field work in a typical sense. I grew up working class in a community very much like the one where Arlie has spent several years.

I grew up in the Ozark Mountains of Arkansas and a persistent poverty county. One major difference from what Arlie described is that it was not a coal County. But my father was a long haul truck driver, and my mother was a teacher’s aide. So I am a dual national of bright blue California where I have lived for 26 years teaching at UC Davis. And I left Arkansas more than 35 years ago.

But I still have family living in Arkansas, including my mother. And so to some extent, the conclusions that I have come to about this political moment are really informed much more, shall we say, informally by my community of origin. And also, what I see in the community where I live and work now and the excesses of the bright blue bubble.

So the talk I’m going to give today is really critical of this bright blue bubble, and the role that all of us play in this unfortunate political moment in which we have been living for almost a decade. So I start with a tweet by an SNL guy the night that Trump was elected, “Rural = so stupid.” And then a photo of a bumper sticker I took in the northern neck of Virginia in 2011.

So this was Obama’s first term, a very rural area that is literally in the northern neck of Virginia. And so someone had made bumper stickers that said, we’re rural, not stupid. So there has been this long standing awareness by rural people of how they are viewed outside their communities.

So the Trump moment, yes, it is accentuating, it is aggravating, but this is not a new phenomenon in terms of how rural people feel and how they know they are perceived. All right. There we go. Oh, I was in Iowa two days ago, so I don’t have as many nice photos as Arlie does. But rather than bring you photos of my hometown, which would look very much like the ones that Arlie showed you, I thought I’d show you a little bit out of rural Iowa from Saturday, where I was driving through Boone County, Marshall County, Story County.

And so here’s the Republican office. Here’s the Republican headquarters in Boone County, which has a population of about 30,000. And the County seat has, I think, about 15,000. It’s really a very vibrant downtown, a little bit like Pikeville. Looked very vibrant. I’m always surprised when I go into a community like that and it is doing so well. It is actually quite a vibrant main street.

Now, just a few miles away from where the GOP headquarters was in Boone County, I took this photo. And so the Democrats are there too, and look at the issue that they’re leveraging. And if I have time, I’ll circle back to this. What we don’t do enough of is look for the common ground.

Many states, Iowa, Arkansas, Oklahoma, among them are going voucher crazy– well, we don’t really talk about vouchers anymore. We talk about school choice. This is going to have a huge impact on rural communities. And so there are ways that progressives can build bridges and find issues that rural communities also care about. And I would submit that we’re not doing that nearly enough.

And this one– this photo, I’m going to share because it really illustrates what Arlie was just saying. This was just down the road in Madrid, Iowa, also in Boone County. And I had never seen this particular sign before. I suspect that this homeowner had this sign made. And it perfectly reflects what Charlie was saying. They are coming after me because I am fighting for you.

So you and I are one and the same, and I’m going to protect you. Remember this absurd comment that he made a few weeks ago about how he was going to protect women? Yeah. Anyway. So I think the overarching point, again, of my rather admittedly disjointed talk is this. We have seen the enemy, and he is us. In other words, we are part of the problem.

We are in this unfortunate feedback loop with rural America. They hear what we say. And I studied some of the language out of the 2008 election. Let me see if I’ve got that. There’s a few– we had this acute polarization along the rural or urban axis in the 2008 election. Obama was cast, as Uber urban, and Sarah Palin took on the mantle of Main Street.

And The New York Times and lots of media of that ilk took this up, and they engaged in merciless rural bashing. And at the time, I thought, well, it’s a good thing that my rural friends don’t read The New York Times. But what happened shortly after that? We all fell into our media silos, and social media gave people the ability to take nasty things that were said about rural people and serve them right up in those people’s newsfeeds. And that is what has been happening.

So let me go back to where I wanted to go with this. And really, I’m just building off what Arlie was saying. We have failed to see rural America. I’m talking about, again, we bright blue Californians living in our bubble. And when we do see them, we talk about them– we talk about flyover states and yeah, whatever. We talk about them as the idiots who vote against their own interests, as if we think this is going to help convince them to listen to what we have to say that might bring them into our political camp.

When we do see them, we tend not to see their complexity. And that’s one reason I’m a fan of Arlie’s work. Is she’s going into these communities, like the one that she depicted in Louisiana and now in Kentucky, and she’s showing us nuance. We malign them. We call them names. I just want to give one example of how, again, there’s this talking past each other.

So color blindness, this is one that comes up in my community of origin. And it’s what I was raised with. My mother was so proud to raise me to be colorblind, because she knew what the predecessor to color blindness was in the South. And so this was– she wears her color blindness like a badge of virtue. And a lot of people there do, because that was the successor to open racial discrimination.

I didn’t realize until I was in a conversation with her, I think it was 2012 in the run up to Obama’s re-election, and she declared herself colorblind. She was put off by Obama. She voted for him in 2008. But my mother was a lifelong Democrat, very active in Democratic Party politics.

And suddenly, she’s saying she’s not going to– she doesn’t know if she’s going to vote for Obama again, because he said that thing about people who have a small business, they didn’t build it. And I said, no, what he meant was, right. you know the Commonwealth and yada, yada, yada, and so forth. And she said, well, I’m colorblind.

And I was flummoxed, because I’ve been living the life of the mind for a couple of decades. And I know that you don’t say you’re colorblind. We understand racial disadvantage. We’re not playing this colorblind game. And that was the first moment when I realized that we really are talking different languages. And Arlie mentioned a couple times, she’s focused on the working class people, those without a BA. Where do we learn things like colorblindness is not realistic? It’s per se. It’s not the thing. We learn them in institutions of higher education.

So there is all this information that has not been shared, and it’s not that easy. The Southern Poverty Law Center published a study a few years ago that showed that every public school in the country had done a bad job of teaching about the realities of slavery. So at what point is this information going to come through to people who didn’t have the benefit of a BA?

So they say they’re colorblind, for example, we call– am I at five ish? OK. They say they’re colorblind. We say, well, that’s racist. What? It’s like the Louisianans. These are people who see themselves as virtuous. And we don’t take the time to say, oh, well, here’s what I mean. Let’s talk about the history of racial disadvantage. Let’s talk about the legacy of this. It’s just like, you’re an idiot.

I mean, I see it. I see it among my extremely confident students at the University of California at Davis. They are very, very certain that they know everything. We are very certain. We are very certain as liberal elites that we know everything, that we have the right answers. And not only that, we say, oh, white privilege. You idiot, can’t you see your white privilege?

Those coal miners and those people who are living very disadvantaged lives are like, what on Earth are you talking about? So we are undermining our ability to have a meaningful conversation with people who don’t share our educational foundation. What I see is a lot of progressives who would rather be right than build cross-racial coalitions. We are so self-satisfied.

I love that little bit of marital advice, do you want to be right or do you want to stay married? We would rather be right than have tough conversations that bring people along to our understanding. And you know what, we might find out that we’re not absolutely right about everything. So we’d rather be right than build– than do the hard work of building cross-racial coalitions.

Is persuasion dead? What do we talk about? We don’t talk much about persuading the persuadables, although I am hearing it more these last few weeks of the election. Mostly, we talk about turning out the base. So we’re not having those conversations that we need to be having to persuade people that our way of doing things is the right way of doing things.

So back to Arlie. We need to be asking questions. We need to be seeking a basis for empathy. So here’s an example. This is David Brooks column from a few days ago, which I actually thought was very good. He’s talking about Trump, is a nightmare. Why is it that Harris isn’t running away with it? Why isn’t she running away with this election? Why are we told, every morning we get up, oh my God, it’s gotten even closer.

Very painful for we progressives. I know we’re scared. We’ve all admitted up here that we’re scared of what’s coming down the pike. But look at this example. A 2022 USC survey found that 92% of respondents agreed with this statement. Our goal as a society should be to treat all people the same without regard to the color of their skin, which is why only a third of Americans in a recent Pew Research Center survey said they supported using race as a factor in college admissions.

And I bet everybody in this room is in favor of using race in college admissions. So how do we have the conversations with people that would share this foundational understanding of racial disadvantage, and how do we balance that and maybe work with the sense of– this belief in colorblindness, this deeply, deeply held belief that so many people still embrace?

So I’ve written a couple of pieces that have been published in Politico. I’m highlighting them here. This was published in 2022 before JD Vance was elected Senator. I was one of the earliest people to criticize JD Vance’s book when it came out, and all the liberals were going, oh my gosh, this is amazing.

But you know what my observation was. He is throwing poor white people that raised me under the bus. And as Sonia Sotomayor wrote the book and she threw her Latina and Latino colleagues under the bus, we would not be praising her. If Barack Obama In Dreams for My Father had said these lazy people that I worked with in Chicago, we would not have eaten it up.

But when he put down working class white people, the initial reaction was almost universal positive. And I wrote a response to that, which was, I’m happy to say, well-received. The New York Times called it perceptive. And here we are. Look where JD Vance is now, where the left finally woke up. But it goes back to what Arlie was saying, we don’t see white class disadvantage. And that’s what led to this sort of beautiful embrace of Hillbilly Elegy by the left when it was initially published.

All right. I’ll just close with this, another political column. What is the Democrats– what has to be the progressives goal right now in the run up to the election? Lose by less. Fetterman was a great role model in getting out and visiting every state in Pennsylvania twice when he ran for Senate. And that’s what I wrote this piece about.

The Democrats have committed malpractice in the extent to which they have neglected rural communities and the investment that it takes to garner rural votes. Remember Chuck Schumer saying in 2016, for every vote– for every blue collar vote, we lose in Western Pennsylvania, don’t worry, we’re going to pick up two Republican women in the Philadelphia suburbs. And it didn’t work out. You can’t just leave rural voters unattended to. It’s another way of seeing them to have infrastructure, to have organizers in those communities. All right. Thank you so much.

[APPLAUSE]

 

[CIHAN TUĞAL] Thank you very much, Lisa. And finally, we hear from Jenny Reardon.

[JENNY REARDON] OK. So now for Kansas. You’ll hear a lot resonances with the previous talks, but you’ll also, I think, hear some new things. OK. So usually, it so goes California, so goes the nation. That’s what I heard growing up in Kansas and my friends who are here just don’t know yet because you’re not in California yet. So anyway.

But so I have recently gone back to my home state of Kansas in the wake of– actually, now it’s been a few years. In the wake of the 2017 election, decided to bike across the state– actually, I’m not biking across. I’m biking around like an idiot. If I really wanted to bike across, I would have done that four times by now.

And as I’ve done this– I teach at UC Santa Cruz in the sociology department, and I have put Frank’s book, What’s the Matter With Kansas, on my syllabus for issues and problems in American society that I had to start teaching on January 10, 2017. I was pretty sure none of my students would know anything about Kansas. So I decided when I went home to see my mom, I would go on my own little what’s the matter with Kansas tour and take some photos to put my PowerPoint. And that was going to just be it. But that’s not what happened.

And as I did this, I found things that Frank would have predicted. Like, there’s a lot of very conservative fundamentalist Christian signs that you will encounter, like this one here. But there was also a lot of things that I would not have expected. So as part– and I had learned that by cycling, I had decided right after Brexit to bike from London to Berlin. And I realized that that was like the best thing I’d ever done to learn about politics and my entire life.

And so I decided, what have I biked around Kansas? And I asked my friends, what do you think is more difficult, London to Berlin or Kansas? They were like, definitely Kansas. Anyway. OK. I won’t go into all the things I can say there. But as part of my tour– it’s a digital tour, I stopped at my best friend from college’s family farm, and she now lives in a home that she converted from the school house, the one room school house that her uncle and father went to school in.

And so this home continued its school functions that evening and served as a base for my personal What’s the Matter With Kansas discussion, and which I wanted to ask her family. So why was it that folks in Kansas voted for Trump? Why don’t most Kansans believe in climate change and why do they hate the EPA?

So there was a lot I learned from that conversation. One thing I want to throw in here real quick, I’m going to focus on what Uncle D said to me. But Aunt Amy– the family was totally split on who they voted for. But aunt Amy voted for Trump, and partly because– her argument was, and I’m hearing this about the San Francisco election right now, because he’s rich, so he doesn’t have any interest in it. He’s going to be neutral, because he already has money. So that’s what we’re hearing in San Francisco right now, too. So I thought I’d say that.

But I want to focus on Uncle D. So Uncle D, I’ve known for a long time. I went out to the farm when I was in college. I was one of these science nerds, and Uncle D would say, you know nothing up there on the hill to learn about the land. You need to be here. So we went out and we learned about the land.

And I dug out. I did a bunch of hard stuff and worked on tractors and whatever. So he and I have a long history of talking about a number of things, and so I’ve been looking forward to resuming the conversation. So I had some questions for him. And first I led by saying, so what are– what’s accounting for the deeper forces that have led to the increased challenges that face family farms? And this is a family farm.

And I asked him if the problem is big Ag? And he responds, what is big Ag? He’s like, what are you even talking about? The decline in family farms, he explained, had not been caused by big corporate farms taking over, so-called big Ag. Rather, improvements in agriculture created by mechanization and automation, so-called precision agriculture allow fewer farmers to control more land.

And this is something I’m hearing a lot about, is the role of technology and forcing people off the land. And how much it costs to be in agriculture now. And I’ve been thinking about to talk about whiteness, and which I have been talking about actually explicitly with people and finding ways to talk about it, which is an interesting thing we could talk about here.

That it’s hard– that the farmers and ranchers, by and large, in Kansas are all white. And that is partly the problem of getting into it now. As diversity, DEI, things of efforts have affected all kinds of other areas, it has made very little inroads into farming and ranching. And I think it’s important to think about why.

So anyway, so I then move on. I ask Uncle D about another perceived threat to farming, the EPA. Why do his fellow farmers hate the EPA? Because, he tells me, they want to regulate cow flatulence. So my tactic all along is to press people about details of where they are, where we stand, like, this ground.

And I said, so how is that working here? I pressed for details. And I say, this sounds like an apocryphal story, the government wants to regulate cow farts. It’s not the same problem as the one created by my use of the term big Ag. It is powerful symbolically, but what power does it have to really describe what is going on?

Although its votes rarely have the power, at least recently, to shift national elections, Kansas long has been a place where powerful symbols that shape national political discourse are made. Even the very question, what’s the matter with Kansas, which far preceded Thomas Frank By about 100– I don’t, 75 years.

But I’m interested in what is going on in Kansas, on this farm? So what’s the matter here? So in the same evenhanded, quiet way that I’ve come to expect from Uncle D, he accepts my point. So I ask again, what is the problem with EPA? What had this federal agency done that had directly impacted his farm? So he cites a few examples.

He said, it used to be that the food and drug administration regulations– first h said, new food and drug regulations of antibiotics. He said, it used to be that farmers could mix in their own antibiotics into the feed for their animals. Now, because of renewed concerns about their environmental and health effects, they will need certification from a vet.

Now, this example made sense to me because I had just earlier that day been to this amazing store, Bluestem, where you can– was kind of a Walmart for farmers where you can get anything, including all kinds of things– not anything, but all kinds of things, including plastic cow heads to practice your roping to medications for your livestock. These are vaccines to give to your cattle right here. So this ability to walk in and purchase these drugs is under threat without having to go to some vet.

So his second example is the Farm Service agency, the FSA. During the AG depression of the ’80s, he explains to me, the FSA provided subsidies intended to create a safety net for farmers, yet it did so too late after rural banks began to fail. Now, what struck me in both of these examples is that they do not involve the EPA.

The FDA and the FSA, yes. The EPA, no. So my thought there was, the problem with the ETA is not the problem with the EPA, but the problem with government regulation more generally. And the problem with government regulation is not a problem with government regulation, but the deeper problem of alienation. The feeling that the problems one is dealing with are not seen or understood.

The problem is not that the people in Kansas are ignorant, stupid– I think we should just eliminate that language from our political discourse– or fail to understand the truth, but that the truths produced by the population centers, which is Uncle D’s language, fail to map onto their realities and frequently threaten their ways of life that they have given all but their life for. And I can’t go into the health statistics of farming, but they are stark.

Although unseen by many scientists and federal agencies, which I study science in my other– most of the time, the roots of these ways of life run deep in this nation. They are those of the people of these prairies formed in, and I will stumble over the next words, white settler imaginaries, should we be using that language here, who are formed to understand themselves as rugged, free, hardworking, and God loving and know who know how to grow food and get on with the practical work of living. A lot more to say right there, but I only have a few minutes.

Yet, God and freedom and hard work fail to train our eyes on the action in these prairies that easily eludes but nonetheless creates the conditions of life and death. The ways of life of the family farm are under threat, and all the charisma and power of a billionaire, all the blustery invocations of greatness, of God, of country will not change the deeper forces at work, what my best friend’s uncle describes simply as mechanization.

In the name of progress and efficient, Tyson– all the photographs here are ones that I took on the bike ride, by the way– Tyson took cattle to the semi-arid plains of Western Kansas, and the planet’s largest underground aquifer is now being drained to sustain agricultural industrial meat production. In the name of precision, the machines grow more powerful, while the lives of too many become marginal or locked up. This is Leavenworth, which I just biked by two weeks ago. Leavenworth Federal Prison.

In the name of progress, God, and country, we don’t sully our commitment to hard work with too much talk of race or other forms of discrimination, to get to your point, Lisa. But sully we must for machines, God, truth, and hard work will not keep the water from running out, schools from closing, and towns from folding. How can we see the land anew?

So in my own small effort to forge the vision needed to live at ecological and social breaking points on the still, it has to be admitted, heartbreakingly beautiful plains and prairies of Kansas, in the fall of 2017, I decided to start biking around the state. In a time of media and tech-accelerated clickbait, I decided what I wanted to cultivate was a slow, don’t go fast on the bike, situated, ground up view of what’s happening. And what I have found is a state in transition.

In 2010, the deeply conservative Sam Brownback became governor and became a leader of the Tea Party backlash against Obama. He mobilized social conservatives by acting to severely restrict abortion and rejected federal funding for public health care. He also made such deep cuts that huge– tax cuts that budget deficits resulted.

This is my bike. This is whiskey, by the way. In response, Moody’s downgraded Kansas bonds, making it harder for Kansas to pay for things. This led to spiraling problems. School funding was cut to such a degree that the state Supreme Court ruled it unconstitutional. Job growth fell to a fraction of the national average.

Things got so bad in Kansas that in February of 2017, the Republican Kansas State house acted to repeal, acted against their Republican governor, to repeal Brownback state tax cuts and to implement tax increases. In July of 2017, Trump announced Brownback’s nomination to the newly created US ambassador at large for International Religious Freedom.

And Brownback went off to DC in January of 2018, taking his culture, war politics with him and leaving the state in ruin. My biking in Kansas began at this moment. And what I have discovered is a state eager to leave behind its what is the matter with Kansas reputation, and to get to work solving urgent, complex problems. The popularity of the Democratic Governor Laura Kelly– has anyone heard of her?

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Yeah.

[JENNY REARDON] Two people, but most of you have not. That’s interesting. It may seem remarkable in itself that there is a Democratic Governor of this deeply red state where registered Republicans outnumber Democrats almost 2 to 1. But it is even more remarkable that Kelly is deeply popular, 62% approval rating, making her the second most popular Democratic Governor and the eighth most popular governor overall.

Bucking what’s the matter with Kansas thesis, Kelly has been popular partly because she has focused on jobs and the economy, and she has delivered. Walmart, for example, chose to build its first case ready beef facility, I know you’re all not cheering about this, but in the part of Kansas Olathe, where my mom lived, and creating 667 new jobs.

Overall, the Kelly administration has brought 60,000 new jobs to Kansas, and this includes dairies– where are my dairy cows. OK. This includes dairies that are leaving California for Kansas, which has attracted the cheese industry to invest. Remarkably, during this period, the state also has witnessed what I would have thought, what I’ve said would have been impossible seven years ago, passage of major water law designed to conserve water.

Through silty land, these all were taken two weeks ago, once known as the dust bowl, course electric cables to power pumps to pull up water to feed the corn and milo that feeds the cattle that feeds the machines that process is one third of the beef produced in the US.

Wow.

This is partly because this region sits atop the nation’s largest underground aquifer. However, now that water in the aquifer is running out. It’s highly variegated conditions combined with a deep tradition of privatized land management has made it tough to address this issue, what many now recognize is a crisis. And this, I took, in the district water management. This red represents 80% decline. So you can see it really is declining.

But the fact that Kansas collects more data about water than any other state, a fact that goes against this reputation as anti-science, along with the astute leadership of a new generation of women leaders, this is changing. Lindsey Vonn, who is from my district, elected, yeah, who worked as a field organizer for Sharice Davids, also in my district, the first openly LGBT Native American voted to the house, was elected to the Kansas House of Representatives in November 2020.

In 2022, she worked across the aisle with Republican Jim Minix to try to pass an omnibus water bill. They got clobbered. They were opposed by agricultural interest groups. But the next year they succeeded. And when I was out in this region two weeks ago, I heard a lot of praise for Vonn, who was credited for coming to the district. And it is a long way, 400 miles from the Capitol. This is the third most remote place in America. And listening and learning.

Now through a variety of legal mechanisms, the producers, those who own water rights and use it to produce agricultural products, now are agreeing to work together to reduce water use. Now, granted, important questions remain like, who should be voting on who decides what to do with the water?

But the difference between now and five years ago when I was first out in Western Kansas is that those questions are on the table and being discussed. And one thing that unites these dynamic new women leaders in Kansas is that they have not been baited by the culture wars. There are many who have tried to make denying transgender rights a big issue in Kansas. This is heartbreaking, and it is maddening.

But Governor Kelly’s response has been effective. She has not made it a campaign issue. But when the time comes, she vetoes everything that comes across her table that would infringe upon those rights. And even though Kansans came out in full force, yes, to vote against a change to the state Constitution that would have changed its language about bodily autonomy and opened up a route for the state legislature to all but ban abortion, Kelly did not make this a campaign issue either. She stuck to the issues she knew would win rural votes in Republican Kansas– jobs, keeping towns from rolling away at the Ogallala Aquifer depletes, keeping schools from closing.

This is not to say that Frank’s what’s the matter with Kansas thesis is entirely wrong. One of the most significant votes to take place in Kansas in two weeks will be for the school board– state school board. Most of the positions are open, and it could become deeply conservative and return Kansas to its fate 20 years ago when members of that body declared evolution is a false doctrine and mandated the teaching of intelligent design. But that aside, I think we might learn more in this moment if we stopped asking, what’s the matter with Kansas and start looking at what’s going right?

[APPLAUSE]

 

[[CIHAN TUĞAL] OK. Thank you so much. Thank you so much, Jenny. That was really mind opening. So we have ample time for questions from the audience, and somebody will be passing around the mic. So if you could raise your hand, I’ll stack the questions. OK. Yes.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hello. Sorry, I’ve never used a mic. So keeping with this insight that rural and Republican does not equal stupid, can you guys theorize the anti-vaccination sentiments?

[JENNY REARDON] OK. So the anti-vaccination sentiments. So one of the– I think vaccinations come along with public health, come along with government. It’s a part of that more general critique of government, of people who are far away from us who don’t understand my children, their health needs.

Right now, interestingly, this is also affecting the transgender rights issue. There’s a big– the government doesn’t understand biology. That’s part of the critique happening right now. The thing that I was most struck by was a– I didn’t put up any signs I saw. By the way, there are not many signs in Kansas. People aren’t putting up signs, and I have more to say about that.

But one was one that struck me was save women’s sports with two X’s. And so I think– and there’s this embrace of the whole truth discourse, science discourse, and turning it back on people. So I think it’s gotten caught up in all of that. I think that’s what all the anti-vaxxer– it’s a much longer conversation to have about that, but that’s only two seconds about it.

[ARLIE HOCHSCHILD] I think that says a lot from what I saw as well. Interesting, in Kentucky, similarly, there is a Democratic Governor who’s very popular because he’s doing great things. He’s brought a lot of economic opportunity in, and it’s interesting to study how he talks about COVID and about vaccinations. It is not from on top, and scientists tell us– he begins by saying– at 5 o’clock, he came on every day. He’s kind of– I’m with you, is what it said.

He said, we’ve never had to face something exactly like this, so we’re not quite sure. Our scientists are working around the clock to help us. But we’re going to have to go with the best information we have. And then he took it from there. And that is, we should get vaccinations. And you know, where Kentucky, team Kentucky.

He would always appeal to state pride, which he then put together with a muted– science doesn’t go with an insult. It doesn’t go with shaming you for not having a BA. He gave it to you. He didn’t take away your pride. Well, we scientists know because we’re educated. You country bumpkins don’t know. It undid that. There was something healing that we have to look at. We need to learn to talk that talk.

Yeah.

[LISA PRUITT] Yeah. Andy Beshear is– I love following him on Twitter. He is a master communicator. If you don’t follow him, follow him. I really hoped that Kamala would pick him as her running mate, because he is– he does this so well. He does the humility. It’s Team Kentucky. Love Kentucky. Kentucky people are so great. We know how to get things done. Amazing, amazing communicator.

But back to your question. I think things are getting worse by the moment in terms of this feedback loop that I’ve described and that we’re in. Five years ago. I had hope. But I see things happening where we are closer and closer to the precipice where we cannot– I don’t know how we step back because of the level of distrust that exists.

And so I think if the pandemic had happened pre-Trump, we wouldn’t have had all this pushback against the vaccines. We wouldn’t have had all this pushback against masking. But everything got politicized after Trump did his, as you say, this dance, this shaming. So sorry to be so negative. The upside is Andy Beshear. The downside is, I’m not sure how we get out of this mess.

[JENNY REARDON] And Laura Kelly.

Laura, I love Laura.

[LAUGHTER]

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Yeah. Thank you so much for this panel. I had a question that plays into some of what you’ve been discussing right there, which is, there’s a panel last week, I think, at matrix where the long held contention that all politics is local was then, well, maybe now all politics is national. We’ve got national media, national social media, national existential questions that are going to be answered by nationally held bodies, such as the Supreme Court, maybe through these mechanisms that are national, the Electoral College.

But what you’re pointing to, especially with this perhaps contradiction between a Democratic governor of a deeply red state, you’re drawing on really the staying power of the local, of the decline of coal, of the aquifer. Very local processes, geological processes might be affecting these national questions. So just testing out that question of have we moved from all politics is local to all politics is national, where do you find yourself responding to these kinds of contentions?

[ARLIE HOCHSCHILD] I’ll take that one. It’s fascinating to me, the local how different the discourse is about coal, what the locals say about it, what nationals think locals are saying is completely different. The most extreme group that I came to know– Eastern Kentucky Patriots, sent a group to Washington in 2020, and we’re very interested in renewables.

They’d look at some of– there are 300 sawed off mountains in Kentucky where– just mountaintop removal. And they’re saying, hey, be good to have solar panels up there. Be good to have wind turbines. That could give us good jobs. So the locals are looking for solutions and for local leaders and the national– So the circumstances, and we began with that, there are external factors that are at play. But the solutions, I think, are local to– and people who can hear locally.

Let me say one more thing, which is that there’s a whole literature, which I’d love students to do more on, that indicates that the left is less good at reaching out across the aisle than the right is. There’s a study, Pew study, my research assistant, Kirsten’s, who’s half of my book is really thanks to her digging here.

A Pew study that showed that a higher proportion of liberals are likely answer yes to the question, I break off contact with people who say something that I disagree with. Liberal Democrats do that a lot more than conservative Republicans. And the paradox, again, is that another finding shows that conservative Republicans are more likely to feel better about you and accept you if they sit down across the table from you, if they get to look at you and see how you smile and what is it you say. How do you blow your nose? A kind of more personal. So what a paradox. The very thing the left is too snooty to do is what the right is waiting for. That’s an opportunity.

Yeah.

[JENNY REARDON] I think it’s interesting because the thing about biking is, my friends and partners have been worried about, as a queer woman biking across the straight, this could be a problem for you. But the reality is that the bike actually– having an adventure to share with them. Also, you have ridden the roads that they navigate. You understand the conditions. And there’s always real curiosity about–

Basically, I have not found, who the hell are you? I’m like, well, how did you get here?

[LAUGHTER]

What did you eat? Why are you doing this. And think that– I think there’s been a lot of real interest– I doubt I’ve been would be able to talk to the people in the way that I have except that–

That we see you.

And also, I share a love of the land. And I think that really helps. Like, I care about the place. I always think that Donna Haraway’s point about, you have to have some skin in the game. You’ve got to– you can’t just come in with your critique. I did an interview last week with the head of GMD 3, the general– so one of the general– the Water Management District folks.

And he said, I really appreciate that you didn’t come in here with an angle. We’ve been burned. So yeah, I think because I really come into this with a real curiosity and love for land, I think that really helps. And on the national local thing, of course, it’s both. I mean, I– when I was driving the 400 miles, because I didn’t drive 400 miles from– I was at the prison, the federal prison in Leavenworth, which is far east as you could get all the way to far west.

But so I got a rental car and drove and dropped it off, and then bike from there. And anyway, I listened to a lot of talk radio. And that is national. The corporation that bought up all the local radio stations, like– and so people are imbibing national discourse. But it lands locally–

Yes.

–OK? And so I think there is this– there’s a real dialectic relationship between those things. And I find it fascinating watching how it lands differently in these different places. I was thinking a lot about that. That’s great.

[INAUDIBLE]

[CIHAN TUĞAL] I think Lisa wanted to say something.

That’s OK.

Go ahead. Go ahead.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] A favorite concept of mine is Daniel Patrick Moynihan’s famous statement, in politics, you’re entitled to your own opinion, but not to your own facts. It seems to me that we have– we not only have a disconnect between how we hear things, how we receive truths, or the blue commentary on the red truth, but it seems to me that there is a fire hose of misinformation that is coming at people. And if they are unable to parse it, then their truth is not necessarily truthful, but it’s the product of this fire hose of misinformation.

I’m not saying that people who go to college automatically become expert at parsing bullshit. We may become experts at making it and disseminating it even. But we recognize that certain things are and certain things aren’t. We recognize that creationism is a fanciful construction of a religious minority. We recognize that evolution is a truth.

In a world in which people cannot recognize the fanciful and the artificial and the completely nonsensical and the crazy from the truth, how are we to– when you’re sitting across the table, it seems to me you can’t make much progress in the conversation until you can get them to get away from the nonsense.

I think if you went to the people of Eastern Kentucky or the people of rural Kansas and said– talk to them about federal funds transfers, they would be stunned to discover that they are paying out a small amount of taxes and receiving a ton of money from, guess who? California. So they better shut up or we may stop sending the money. I think they have no clue that they’re living on federal funds and federal programs, and we’re the ones that are paying for them.

And they would be– I think they would be stunned to discover some of the truths that we to be truthful because of the way they hear these things constantly, whether it’s Fox News, whether it’s social media, whether it’s Donald Trump, whether it’s the local politicians. What do we do about that? How do we get over that? How we get past that?

[LISA PRUITT] So first of all, I just wanted to speak to the assertion that California’s subsidizing Kansas. There’s actually a lot of sophisticated work on that. I’d be happy to send you some. It depends on how you count things. So it’s not as simple as is often asserted by Krugman, who loves to do his white rural rage thing about every three months in The New York Times.

So it is actually more complicated. It depends on what you count. We would say the same thing– I mean, when we talk about the would be state of Jefferson up North, these people, don’t they know– Siskiyou County is getting a lot more from us than the other way around and so forth.

But, look, I don’t think any of us know how we’re going to– how we’re going to solve the disinformation– misinformation problem. I mean, if someone’s got a good idea. But the only thing I to do is to try to chip– is to try to have conversations with people and try to chip away and educate about where you are getting your information. Because there’s a lot more egregious examples of misinformation than Kansas being subsidized by California. And again, the nuances of that. I’m much more concerned about other types of misinformation than the subtleties of income transfers.

[ARLIE HOCHSCHILD] I would say that income transfers are a matter of shame to the people that get transferred to. They don’t like being on welfare. They depend on it. And they admit it. But they want to be– their pride system has them looking to be contributors, looking to be workers.

And I’ve talked to unemployed coal miners, a daughter of one, who said, as soon as dad was laid off, we went with our food stamps to another store out of the community. Didn’t want people to see it. There’s a whole hierarchy, oh, we’re not like them, them being people who are reliant on– so that’s fact. That’s a fact too. It’s feelings, but feelings are part of the factual world, I guess, as I think it is.

And I guess the second thing I would say is we need to know more about denial. How does denial Happen I think there are structures of plausibility that shift and make it more likely that you’re going to go into a fictional world, and doesn’t have to do with intelligence. And doesn’t even have to do entirely with education. It has to do with feelings. And we have to get rational about feelings.

In other words, got to really grok how they work and what’s going on. And finally, I would say that the left has been in denial about a whole bubbling trend for the last two decades, and especially since Trump, who’s lit the match, has come on the scene. So we’ve not been factual. We’ve not really looked at what’s going on. We’ve been in denial too.

[CIHAN TUĞAL] We’re past 1:30. Maybe the last words from Jenny, if you want to speak to that last question. [JENNY REARDON] Well, I’ll just say briefly. I think we all have a lot to learn about mis- and disinformation. I think in terms of the civic capacity of this nation to think about knowledge, science, and truth is so small. And it’s not that all of us in the room are enlightened either. I think there’s a lot to learn. And I think the more we can be open to that mutual empathy and learning and not being in denial, the better off we’ll be.

[LISA PRUITT] I’ve thought a lot about stubbornness and emotion or how do we characterize stubbornness? Because I think there’s a lot of stubbornness that is keeping both sides from having the conversations and reaching the places that they need to– where they need to be so we can move forward more constructively. Because it just seems like once somebody has dug in their heels, that– I mean, whatever Trump says is helpful and good and right. Then there’s all this shame about having to back up and say, oh, right? So I think stubbornness on both sides plays a huge role in what’s happening.

[CIHAN TUĞAL] Thanks again to all the panelists and to the audience.

[APPLAUSE]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

 

Authors Meet Critics

Authors Meet Critics: “Partisan Nation: The Dangerous New Logic of American Politics in a Nationalized Era”

Recorded on October 9, 2024, this video features an Authors Meet Critics panel on the book Partisan Nation: The Dangerous New Logic of American Politics in a Nationalized Era, by Paul Pierson, the John Gross Distinguished Professor of Political Science at UC Berkeley, and Eric Schickler, the Jeffrey & Ashley McDermott Professor of Political Science and co-director of the Institute of Governmental Studies at UC Berkeley.

The authors were joined in conversation by Francis Fukuyama, the Olivier Nomellini Senior Fellow at Stanford University’s Freeman Spogli Institute for International Studies (FSI) and a faculty member of FSI’s Center on Democracy, Development and the Rule of Law (CDDRL), and Didi Kuo, a Center Fellow at the Freeman Spogli Institute for International Studies (FSI) at Stanford University. Mark Danner, Professor at the UC Berkeley School of Journalism, moderated.

The Social Science Matrix Authors Meet Critics event series features lively discussions about recently published books authored by social scientists at UC Berkeley. For each event, the author discusses the key arguments of their book with fellow scholars. These events are free and open to the public.

About Partisan Nation

The ground beneath American political institutions has moved, with national politics subsuming and transforming the local. As a result, American democracy is in trouble. In this paradigm-shifting book, political scientists Paul Pierson and Eric Schickler bring a sharp new perspective to today’s challenges. Attentive to the different coalitions, interests, and incentives that define the Democratic and Republican parties, they show how contemporary polarization emerged in a rapidly nationalizing country and how it differs from polarization in past eras.

In earlier periods, three key features of the political landscape—state parties, interest groups, and media—varied locally and reinforced the nation’s stark regional diversity. But this began to change in the 1960s as the two parties assumed clearer ideological identities and the power of the national government expanded, raising the stakes of conflict. Together with technological and economic change, these developments have reconfigured state parties, interest groups, and media in self-reinforcing ways. The result is that today’s polarization is self-perpetuating—and intensifying.

Partisan Nation offers a powerful caution. As a result of this polarization, America’s political system is distinctly and acutely vulnerable to an authoritarian movement emerging in the contemporary Republican Party, which has both the motive and the means to exploit America’s unusual Constitutional design. Combining the precision and acuity characteristic of their earlier work, Pierson and Schickler explain what these developments mean for American governance and democracy.

Watch the video above or on YouTube.

Listen to the panel as a podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

Podcast Transcript

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[MARION FOURCADE] All right. Hello. I think it is Berkeley time. So thank you very much for being here. Welcome My name is Marion Fourcade. I’m the Director of Social Science Matrix. And I am absolutely delighted to welcome you to today’s panel on Partisan Nation: The Dangerous New Logic of American Politics in a Nationalized Era, just published book by our very own Paul Pierson and Eric Schickler.

I’m very excited about this book panel, not only because the topic is so urgent, but also because we have an all-star lineup to present, to discuss, and to moderate. So today’s event is part of our Author Meets Critics series, and it is co-sponsored by UC Berkeley’s Institute of Governmental Studies.

Before I turn it over to our panelists, let me briefly mention a few other upcoming events for the fall semester at Matrix. Tomorrow, we are hosting a talk by Ann Washington from NYU about the limits of predictive algorithms.

And then later in October, we will have two Matrix on point panel on the election. One that’s called Voices from the Heartland with Berkeley’s Arlie Hochschild. And then late in October, Shifting Alignments in the 2024 Election, looking at the changing electorates across the US.

And then in November and December, we will have our last two AMC Authors Meets Critics of the calendar year, a book on authoritarianism in China and health politics in China, and then another book on children without paper– migrant children without paper.

But before I leave the floor to our distinguished panelists, let me introduce our also distinguished moderator, Mark Danner. Mark Danner is a writer, reporter, and educator who, for more than three decades has written on war, politics, and conflict.

He has covered Central America, Haiti, the Balkans, Iraq, and the Middle East. And written extensively on American politics from Reagan to Trump. Danner holds the class of 1961 distinguished chair in undergraduate education at UC Berkeley, and he is the James Clark Chace professor of Foreign Affairs and the Humanities at Bard College.

Among his books are the Massacre at El Mozote, Torture and Truth, The Secret Way to War, Stripping Bare the Body, and Spiral– Trapped in the Forever War.

Danner was a longtime staff writer at The New Yorker and is a frequent contributor to the New York Review of Books. His work has appeared in Harper’s, The New York Times, Aperture, and many other newspapers and magazines.

He has written and co-produced two-hour long ABC News documentaries and an eight-part documentary series on US foreign policy and genocide. And he has received a very long list of honors for his work too long to cite them all, but including a MacArthur Fellowship in 1999. So welcome, all. Welcome, Mark. And the floor is yours.

[MARK DANNER] So we’re a month less a day from the election. And I wonder how many of you, like me, feel like you’re going crazy with election news and can’t really even take it anymore. I wonder how many are desperate that it all be over.

And I wonder how many think that if the election goes in a certain way, the country will be irremediably altered, will be changed into something different, something unrecognizable. Can people raise their hands?

Well, that means that you fit right into this book, Partisan Nation– The Dangerous New Logic of American Politics in a Nationalized Era. Polarization has been written about a lot, but this is by far the finest study and the clearest study and the most convincing study I’ve ever read about the subject.

Not only is it clear and convincing, it comes at an absolutely perfect time because, though it’s a work of respectable political science, it’s also very open to the general reader who is taking a very deep interest in what’s going on in our country during the next 30 days.

And it seems to me, situates some very critical questions and delves into them. One in particular is, have we reached this level of polarization before in the United States? Has it ever happened before?

It examines that question in a very interesting way. It also examines the question of the context that is the relationship of polarization of the political parties to political interests, to state parties, to the media.

And it makes, I think, an extremely convincing case that we are on a bit of territory the United States has never found itself on before. That this particular moment we’re in is unprecedented.

And the word dangerous, the dangerous new logic of American politics is very much, it seems to me, justified by the text of the book, which is, depending on the results of this election and then the future, we could be in a place where the defects in the United States constitutional system could become absolutely critical.

And in effect, the entire system could– they don’t say this in the book, but I’m going to infer it, begin to collapse. So that’s the good news. Having said all this, the book is a fascinating read. It’s bright, it’s smart, it’s completely up to date, and it is thoroughly convincing.

And I’m hoping today we can have a discussion that will take account, not only of the book, but of the election that’s looming over us. It’s hard to avoid it. It seems to me that the coterminous nature of this is completely unavoidable. Here we are.

So I hope I’m asking our panelists, both our co-authors and our respondents, to take account to some degree of the election in their remarks. What we’re going to do is everybody is going to have 8 to 10 minutes. We’ll then have the authors respond for a few minutes. Then we’ll have an open discussion here. And we will then throw it open to the audience.

And I’m going to introduce panelists as they speak. They have many books. They have many honors. I’m going to give you a slightly shortened version of these introductions. And we’re going to start immediately to my left with Paul Pierson, who’s the John Gross distinguished professor of political science at Berkeley, where he also directs the newly established Berkeley Economy and Society Initiative.

He’s the author or the co-author of six books. And I’ll mention in particular, Winner-Take-All-Politics, which is a remarkable, extremely convincing study and dovetails very well with this book. It’s called Winner-Take-All-Politics– How Washington Made the Rich Richer and Turned its Back on the Middle Class. I guess I’ll ask you to start out with 8 to 10 minutes

[PAUL PIERSON] I think maybe I will do that. Thanks, Mark. And thanks to this panel of brilliant and busy people for sparing us some time and sharing their thoughts with us today. And thanks to everybody at Matrix for putting this event together.

I’m going to- I only have eight minutes or so. So I knew that Mark was going to start by talking about the election a little bit. And so I was reaching for the obvious metaphor that I think leads into a discussion of the book, which is right now, there is a storm heading directly towards the coast of the United States, a massive storm, which people will pay a lot of attention to and is going to have massive consequences.

But I think what we’re trying to do in the book is to say why so many storms? Why so intense over such a long period of time? And seeming to grow in intensity over time, which calls for a somewhat different kind of conversation.

And just in thinking about what’s happened with growing polarization in the United States, I think it’s worth just like taking a second to realize that Newt Gingrich, the Gingrich Revolution contract with America, which was seen as a startling intensification of political conflict– partisan political conflict in the United States. That was 30 years ago.

So this has been building for almost half a century now. And so what Eric and I try to do in this book is to figure out why is it so much more intense and seemingly so much harder to dislodge now than at other periods in American political history?

And we do spend a lot of time thinking about the constitution. The constitution was long thought to limit the prospects for intense, durable polarization. We refer in the book frequently to the idea of a Madisonian framework for politics.

And there’s a big asterisk there because those of you who know about the Constitutional Convention, Madison actually lost most of the big battles at the Constitutional Convention. He came away from it distraught.

But also thought that the Constitution was a big improvement over the lamentable articles of Confederation. And so he wrote these brilliant papers and Federalist Papers to explain how this new political system might work and what some of its virtues were, most famously, federalism 10 and federalism 51.

And so in there, he develops ideas about checks and balances, separation of power. Famous idea that ambition must be made to counter ambition. That’s the famous line. But also his ideas about the extended republic.

This really brilliant political theory movie in which he says we used to think you could only have democracy in like a city-state, but it’s actually much better if you have a far flung country where there’s an enormous diversity of interests, so that no single faction is likely to become dominant.

So you combine separation of powers with federalism in a large and highly diverse nation. And a lot of the– if you think about the system of representation that existed in the Constitution, it really emphasizes localism. People are elected from a particular geographic location in the United States, except for the presidency. Politics was to be grounded in localism.

Tip O’Neill’s famous line that all politics is local, a line that you don’t hear people quoting about contemporary politics very much for good reason, but that grew out of key features of the structure of the constitution.

And the result of this in Madison’s thinking was you’re going to get shifting coalitions. There’s not going to be any majority. And so the parties themselves are going to be relatively plastic, open to various kinds of groups. And there are going to be new issues coming up from below constantly.

Think about– you could use as an image like plate tectonics, and the way in which the Earth’s crust is being constantly recycled and reoriented in ways by things that are coming up from below. And it’s going to be impossible to sustain a single clean division in politics.

And we argue in the book that opened to roughly the 1960s, this basic logic was borne out. Doesn’t mean that there weren’t times of intense polarization. There were. I was telling my undergrads, Hamilton, the show Hamilton is basically a story of political polarization, of intense political polarization. There are other stories in there too.

But that’s part of what it is, the formation of that first intense partisan rift. But as we show in the book, it didn’t last very long. Even the worst case of intense partisan polarization, the Civil War, horrific as that conflict was, the partisan nature of it dissipates pretty quickly after the Civil War. Lasted roughly 15 years. And we go through that story as well in the book. So one could look at that and say, OK, the Madisonian logic of the constitution works.

But what we also try to show in the book is that this was not simply an automatic result from the Constitution, that it depended instead on what we call a constitutional order, which includes key intermediary institutions. And the ones we talk about in the book are state and local parties, interest groups, and media. And through most of political history, these have also been highly decentralized.

And just a side note for the political scientists in the room, I think one thing that we’re trying to do in this work, is to suggest a need for a thicker view of politics that thinks about this kind of meso level of social organizations and institutions as being really critical in political life rather than a more stripped down model which has voters, politicians, and a set of rules.

And that’s what makes politics work. And what we’re suggesting is you really need to think about these intermediary institutions to understand how things work. But through most of American history, these intermediary institutions were quite decentralized.

And as a result, they reinforced the centrifugal tendencies encouraged by the constitution, so that local things, there’s a lot of diversity in what’s happening in different localities. And the parties become pretty loose holding companies.

Always shifting and maybe with different messages and different parts of the country. Will Rogers famously said in the 1920s, I think, I’m a member of no organized political party. I’m a Democrat. And there was a powerful logic leading to that.

Over the course of the 1960s and 1970s, all of these intermediary institutions nationalized in the United States. They become part of a national system more tightly connected to the two parties. We have two chapters in the book where we talk about how and why this happens. I’m not going to say a word about it.

Instead, I’m going to finish by noting a critical political event that happened just as this old constitutional order, relatively decentralized constitutional order, was drawing to a close. So just a couple of months more than 50 years ago, Richard Nixon resigned from the presidency.

And there’s actually– by coincidence, there was the cover article in the New Issue of the Atlantic by Tom Nichols, which starts by talking about what a wonderful presidential character George Washington had. But it goes on to say, like most American presidents have had character, except for the former guy.

And in the course of this actually, interesting article about presidential character and about Washington, Nichols says even Nixon resigns at the end. But I think what Eric and I would suggest is that what’s changed is not the character of the president, but the political context in which all politicians are operating.

So back in 1972– and remember, really striking, like Nixon had just won in a landslide. And he was an extremely popular president, unlike Donald Trump, who had won without actually winning a popular majority at all.

But what happened? What happened was that Republicans at that point were a loose team. They were a team, but with enormous amounts of diversity that were being generated by that old constitutional order.

Many Republicans in Congress were eager to protect the powers of Congress. They cared about an executive that was usurping important powers that belonged to the Congress. Many of them hailed from states with moderate electorates.

Organized interests created crosscutting rather than stacking cleavages one on top of another, and most organized interests were only weakly aligned or not aligned at all with political parties. So you were not getting the message if you were a politician from organized interests that you have to stick with the team. You have to stick with the party team.

And these state electorates operated in information environments, decentralized media, largely non-partisan media. They were open to negative news about politicians from the party that they favored. So the informational environment, radically different.

So in that context, some national Republicans could and did break from Nixon. And that in turn created a self-reinforcing cycle, which ultimately undermined his presidency. Support for him gradually weakened across the board.

The investigations went forward. There were lots of prominent Republicans who said that the investigations were serious. You got the same message from the media. And so strikingly as these dynamics unfold, Nixon’s popularity starts to go down, not just among Democrats, not just among independents, but among Republicans.

It’s still much higher among Republicans than it is for Democrats. But it falls dramatically as Watergate continues to unfold. So by the end of that period– by the end of this process, Barry Goldwater goes to the White House and says there may be 8 or 10 Republicans who will vote not to convict you in the Senate, 8 or 10. And Nixon resigned.

Maybe that says something about his character. I’m not so convinced. You could just ask yourself, hypothetically, if Richard Nixon had been president, accused of the same things in today’s political environment where the pressures to maintain your connection to a nationalized team are much, much stronger, would he have resigned?

As we know, much worse actions by a president January 6 did not lead to anything like this kind of self-reinforcing cycle. So that suggests to us that we’re really in a very, very different political setting than the one that existed 50 years ago, and that the constitution does not function the same way in a system in which there are these intensely bound, nationalized partisan teams.

So today’s Republicans operating as in the language that Levitsky and Ziblatt used in their recent book, is semi-loyalists. They’re fair weather friends of the Constitution, but they’re willing to desert it if that’s where the political incentives arise. This may have less to do with their character than it does with the fact that they operate in a very different, more nationalized constitutional order. And Eric is now going to tell you more about that.

[MARK DANNER] Thank you, Paul. Eric Schickler is the Jeffrey and Ashley McDermott, professor of political science, and he’s co-director of the Institute of Governmental Studies here at Berkeley. I’ll mention a couple of his books. Disjointed Pluralism– Institutional Innovation and Development of the US Congress. And Filibuster– Obstruction and Lawmaking in the United States Senate. Eric.

[ERIC SCHICKLER] I want to echo Paul’s thanks to Matrix for putting this event together and for our terrific panelists for sharing their reactions to the book. And so just to pick up in a sense where Paul left off, our argument is we retain the same formal constitutional rules of the game as before, but it’s now surrounded by a nationalized set of mediating institutions that are tied to each national party.

So state parties are now integrated elements of nationalized networks of ideological activists, campaign donors, and policy demanders. They no longer offer a distinctive, regionally-based input into party politics.

And I think a key part of the historical story in the book is that repeatedly when we have had polarization in the past, these state parties provided a kind of entry point for new interests to enter into party politics that cross-cut the parties. And that was a key part of how polarization basically eroded over time in these earlier eras.

Now that there are parts of these nationalized networks, instead of providing that kind of entry point, instead they tend to reinforce polarization. Similarly, interest groups are much more nationally focused and more closely tied to one or the other party.

And we have a more nationalized partisan media environment, especially on the right with the rise of Fox News and Talk Radio that send consistent messages to partisans across the US, in contrast to the decentralized press of the first 150 years.

In other words, we’ve had partisan press before, but it was largely a locally rooted partisan press that allowed different kinds of messages within a party across areas, whereas now it’s much nationalized.

And our argument basically is that our constitution is a poor match for this new political configuration. And that, that has major implications both for the quality of governance and the durability of Democratic institutions. I think I’m going to bracket the point about discussion of governance for the Q&A so that we have get to our discussions more quickly.

But I do just maybe want to flag the one point that if you think about the policy agendas of the two parties legislatively, there are distinctive kinds of opportunities and challenges posed by polarization and the associated legislative gridlock for Democrats as compared to the Republican agenda, which can rely more greatly on executive authority as well as judicial authority.

I want to spend most of the time talking about the impact on Democratic institutions. And we see two main threats arising. First is an entrenchment of minoritarian rule. And I guess here, it’s important to note that while much of the language of polarization is presented in the literature in a way that’s kind of symmetric about both parties, and we do argue in the book that there are important dynamics that are common to both parties.

There are also important asymmetries. And one of those asymmetries is rooted in the extent to which party coalitions now map onto urban rural divides in the US politics and our constitution gives decisive advantage to the more rurally-based interests and especially smaller states.

And so this is actually– and the first period in US history in during period where a party can consistently win a minority of votes for the Senate nationally and win a majority and control that institution, which if you think about our normal logic of what leads to moderation, if you can’t win power without moderating, then a party has to moderate.

But Republicans are able to win a consistent majority in the Senate without necessarily needing a majority. And there are similar dynamics in many state legislatures. And then crucially, they’re able to entrench these advantages.

So, for example, think about through domination of the Supreme Court, where Democrats have won the popular vote for President in seven of the last eight elections, but six of the nine Supreme Court justices are conservative Republicans.

And you can think about this ability to have a majority in the Senate and a majority on the court as allowing deck stacking to take place in a systematic way for favored interests, making regulation much harder, disempowering unions against campaign finance limits, allowing voting laws that are intended to make it harder for Democratic constituencies to vote.

Essentially, hacking the constitution, using hardball tactics that are allowed under the constitution or the court says are allowed to further tilt the playing field in their favor and entrench power. And so you can think about a gradual process of entrenchment that limits Democratic responsiveness.

Second main threat, which Paul talked about with respect to Watergate, is the threat of executive dominance and abuses of power. And I think that the key historical point here is Congress has played a key role in the past in checking presidential abuses. But the checks in the system are undermined by strong party teams operating across institutions.

And so one way to think about this is that these checks rely– its implicit parties are teams. Teamsmanship is consistent with how US institutions have always operated. But at the same time, it’s always counted on members of Congress having incentives. Where you sit determines where you stand and where you’re from determines where you stand.

And what we have now is a situation where party often trumps that. And as a result, that undercuts how ambition counters ambition. All right, so I don’t want to go– I was into too much depth.

But the thought experiment of thinking about what will– in a second Trump administration, the ability of these checks and balances to be exerted through Congress, we’re deeply skeptical of it because of this teamsmanship that will allow any investigation– would essentially prevent investigations under unified party control and undercut their effectiveness under divided party control.

So you might ask, well, is it kind of dismal portrait what can be done about this? And I want to note, we’re not confident about any specific solutions. This is not a book that says, here’s the silver bullet. This is what will solve this problem.

We do suggest some reforms that we think might help at the margins. And part of that has to do with trying to empower centrist factions that cross-cut the parties. So institutional innovations like fusion voting that might give some politicians in, say, swing states the ability to build these kinds of cross-party coalitions, undermining some of the self-reinforcing dynamics we talk about.

But given the serious threats posed by entrenchment by a conservative minority, we also think one of the main implications of our analysis is that if Democrats were to have a window of opportunity to enact policy changes, that they would need to use that window of opportunity to push in particular on democracy related issues.

So there are going to be a number of demands for that were to happen either soon or in four years or at some point in the future to their key policy demands that are urgently felt by their coalition. And in the past, Democrats have tended to prioritize those over political reforms, I think for good reason.

But I think the implication of our argument is that if the political playing field is being steadily tilted in a direction– in a contrary direction, they need to– if they have this kind of opportunity, they would need to think seriously about things that limit the rural urban bias, whether that’s new statehood admissions, about limits on gerrymandering, voting rights– legislation on voting rights, voter suppression to at least take a set of strategies off the table.

And to do any of this, of course, they would need to end the filibuster. And glad to talk about the logic of that. And our basic point is none of these are easy and none of these on their own are sufficient. But the implication of our argument is that a democracy agenda has to be a priority. It’s not going to be sufficient, but it’s essential. Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

[MARK DANNER] Thank you, Eric. Francis Fukuyama is the Olivier Nomellini senior fellow at Stanford University’s Freeman Spogli Institute for International Studies, and a faculty member of FSI’s Center on Democracy, Development, and the Rule of Law.

We all remember his 1992 book, The End of History and the Last Man, an international bestseller. His most recent books are Identity– The Demand for Dignity and the Politics of Resentment, and Liberalism and its Discontents. Professor Fukuyama.

[FRANCIS FUKUYAMA] OK, thank you. I’m going to– can you hear me? I’m going to stay seated. So Didi and I are here to represent the other side of the Bay. We don’t want the East Bay to have control of American political science. So we’re performing a very important function here.

So I really like the book, and I want to congratulate Paul and Eric for it. It really brings together– polarization has been the focus of a lot of people in recent years. But I think you do a really good job of using the Madisonian constitutional framework as a way of understanding what’s really happening under the surface. So very good work on that.

As a comparativist, I must say that the problem that you describe is actually familiar in a lot of other countries. So for example, Latin America, unfortunately, copied our presidential system. Many Latin American parliaments are very divided and polarized and they cannot pass legislation.

And that leads to what they describe in this book happening in the United States, where actually policy is made by other parts of the government, by presidents or by the courts. And so polarization does not mean gridlock. It means that the real action simply moves to another part of the government.

And that’s Argentina, for example, presidents pass budgets by executive order. I mean, it’s really crazy that Congress doesn’t actually have any input into the basic function of government. But I wanted to make three comments about the different parts of the discussion in the book.

So the first is about media. You talk about how media has fallen into the same polarization that characterizes the political parties and so forth. I think that actually that media landscape has changed even since you wrote the book.

Like me and a lot of other people, we’ve been saying for the last eight years, yes, there’s polarization. There’s all these causes of polarization and there’s social media and the internet. And I just think that that’s become a much more important part of the explanation. And it’s partly qualitative.

I mean, the DW-NOMINATE scores can tell you about voting in Congress, but our polarization has this really very disturbing undercurrent of just complete fantasy. The Democrats are controlling a hurricane and sending it against Republican voting areas in red states.

I mean, stuff that had been completely– conspiracy theories that were completely outside the Overton window of normal political discourse are now inside that window. And I don’t think that, that would have happened if you only had Fox News.

And, in fact, I think Fox News has 1.2 million regular listeners. It’s not very big. Joe Rogan has 12 million, just by himself. And there are other influencers that I think are actually shaping the national conversation and permitting the kind of extreme forms of reality perception that really characterize, especially views on the left.

Now, the second thing I want to bring up is the discussion of the courts and the court’s relationship to the executive branch. So one of the sources of diversity that continues to exist in this country is the bureaucracy, both on a federal and a state level.

You have many commissions, multi-member commissions that by law, have to have bipartisan control. You have different parts of the bureaucracy that have become bastions sometimes of resistance against other executive branch policies.

Republicans are completely aware of this. And they’ve been claiming that the bureaucracy is captured by the left and doesn’t respond to the will of the people. But it depends on which part of the bureaucracy you look at.

The border agents and policemen and parts of the military are not captured by the left. And so it depends on what part of it you’re looking at. But it is a separate area where the dominant party really does not exercise full control. And they’ve got plans to fix this.

So one of the things I personally been very worried about is the stuff that’s contained in the now discredited project 2025, which I think still actually remains a living part of what a Republican administration would seek to do.

At the end of the first Trump administration, they had this executive order creating Schedule F that would allow them to fire basically any federal bureaucrat. You think about some of the positions that are currently for cause positions where it’s very difficult to remove people like the head of the IRS.

Richard Nixon actually wanted to get the IRS to audit his enemies. And you can imagine if you had a Trump loyalist in that position what that person would be able to do. And I fully expect that even though Trump himself has disavowed Project 2025, that this is so core to the thinking of so many people on the right, that they have to get control of the administrative state, that some version of this is going to be put in place.

And that’s why think that a second Trump term is not going to look like the first Trump term because they understand that personnel is their big weakness. They just didn’t have the people to execute or implement the policies that they wanted. And they’re going to try to fix that from the get go.

The other thing is they’re getting a lot of help from the Supreme Court. You didn’t go in great detail into, for example, Chevron deference, the decision– the Loper Bright decision that was taken at the end of the last term of the Supreme Court.

So conservatives will tell you that ending Chevron deference was really simply returning control to Congress and taking that authority away from bureaucrats that never should have had it in the first place. That’s a bunch of BS.

Because Congress is not capable of issuing mandates that can really direct the bureaucracy because of the polarization and other factors. So what it means is it’s a transfer of influence from the bureaucracy to the courts. And all of that stuff is now going to go back to the courts.

The original Chevron decision back in 1984, basically the court argued that the courts do not have the capacity to make decisions on how many parts per million constitutes a dangerous toxin. And therefore, the expert agencies had to have that power. But if you read the decision, they’re taking it back a little bit dishonestly. But that’s what’s happening.

There are other things that are going on. I’m amazed that more attention has not been paid to the Jarkesy decision, which also came at the end of the current– of the term that’s just concluded. This is a really powerful blow against the administrative state because the case underlying it was the SEC imposing a penalty on, basically, a fraudulent financial firm.

And the court in Jarkesy said, you can only do this with a jury trial, which basically just completely undermines the administrative cloud of the administrative state. And we’re going to see the consequences of this where you can’t even find a fraudster without basically taking this thing through a whole expensive long judicial process.

So between all of these things, there is an effort to move a lot of bureaucratic authority, reduce its diversity, and the checks that it presents and put it under the control of a conservative controlled court.

So then the final thing I’d like to say is that this whole book made me reflect on that Madisonian system as a whole. And it wasn’t that great a system in many respects. You could say that there are good forms of diversity and bad forms.

So the good forms, in the economy, some people fish salmon, other people grow cotton, other people do other sorts of things. And so that’s OK. But some of the forms of diversity that existed under the fully functioning Madisonian system were like a bunch of racists running segregated school systems in the South.

I was particularly amused since I care about good government that you mentioned that one of the things that has nationalized politics is the end of big city political machines and civil service reforms that required people being hired on the basis of merit rather than as political payoffs.

So you didn’t have local bosses that needed to be courted by the national parties in order to get anything passed. And in my view, that’s a good thing. But I think you’re right that it did have that effect.

The one thing I would like to raise as a question is that this Madisonian system really does– it’s required because of our electoral system. You say that I think in one of the concluding chapters, that if you didn’t have a first past the post electoral system, Duverger’s law wouldn’t kick in and you wouldn’t have a two-party system that then requires all this diversity within the two parties.

If you went to a European proportional representation or ranked choice voting, maybe you would have actually the diversity represented in separate political parties rather than in this big mush of diverse interests within these big tent parties.

That seems to me a pretty good argument for at least ranked choice voting. I mean, we should at least be experimenting with whether we can modify our electoral system to allow the diversity to actually be made explicit and explicitly represented within the party system rather than this old, very complicated, in a way very non-transparent Madisonian system. So those are my comments.

[MARK DANNER] Thank you, Frank. Finally, I’d like to introduce Didi Kuo, who’s a center fellow at the Freeman Spogli Institute for International Studies at Stanford. She’s a scholar of comparative politics with a focus on democratization, corruption, and clientelism, political parties, and institutions, and political reform.

Of her books, I’ll mention the forthcoming one, which is The Great Retreat– How Political Parties Should Behave and Why They Don’t.

[DIDI KUO] Great well, first of all, Thank you so much– can everyone hear me? For having us today. It was really such an honor and pleasure to read this book. And I want to congratulate Eric and Paul on yet another major contribution to the study of American politics and democracy. The hits just keep on coming.

And I wanted to focus on two reactions that I had while reading this. The first is, as a political scientist, I think the book does a really good job walking this narrow tightrope of having a really clear argument that is theoretically and conceptually robust, that gives us a really clear research agenda for the future, but that is also really broad in its historical scope and in the integration of a lot of what we would call variables that discuss polarization into a coherent analytical framework.

So that was really satisfying to read. But the other perspective I had was, as a citizen reading this book, it was really depressing because I am holding on to the hope that if Kamala Harris trounces Trump in four weeks time that maybe he’ll disappear, the Republican Party will reconstitute itself, and that will have just been an eight-year fever dream.

And this book disabuses you of the notion that that’s even remotely possible. So I’m going to focus these comments on the scholarly implications of the book so that I don’t depress us further, although I will note that I think the most relevant personal fact, to this discussion is, I grew up in Newt Gingrich’s congressional district outside Atlanta.

And at the time when I was a teenager, I thought it was so cool that he was a political science professor, which turned out not to be cool. He did a lot of bad things in our politics. But maybe the real answer to all of this is one of you should become the next Speaker of the House. And you can ride this ship.

So I wanted to focus on three contributions of the book that I think lend us a lot of food for thought. The first has to do with this meso level institutionalism that Paul already mentioned. The book does a really good job explaining why we can’t look at formal institutions alone, but in fact have to look at them alongside the mediating institutions that exist.

Now we have a lot of examples from the literature on Democratic backsliding and the real life examples of democratic backsliding that the sequencing of this is usually an illiberal leader is elected to power and then quickly dismantles the formal institutions.

So sometimes this happens secretly because it turns out institutions are just individuals who can be replaced, but also they very actively go after the media or the opposition as well. Whereas the sequencing and partisan nation is a little bit different.

Paul and Eric argue that the systematic weakening of the meso level institutions, the mediating institutions, happened through a process of nationalization. So they weren’t really under direct assault by an illiberal leader. But instead, there was this structural change over time, beginning in the 1960s that lent them sort of a vulnerability by the time you get intense partisan polarization.

And I kind of wonder about, first of all, whether or not nationalization is always weakening. If we look at the 19th century United States, the process of nationalization that integrated really disparate rural and urban areas through the railways and that led to national communications fostered democracy.

And this is a story of modernization theory and comparative politics as well. You need to have some national interest that can be clearly delineated in order to create political demands. And the progressive movement was a national movement that went after corruption.

We know that federal authority administratively expanded in the 19th century as well, which led to a sort of modernization of governance. So I’m wondering if there are thresholds when nationalization is a problem versus when it’s not, or if we would know ex-ante that nationalization is going to be a problem.

And to return to this question of backsliding, I also wonder if nationalization is a necessary condition for backsliding to be effective, because we know that in a bunch of countries that have experienced backsliding, sometimes their institutions were strong and sometimes they were weak.

But if you have a really ambitious and entrepreneurial, illiberal leader, they can undermine those institutions no matter what. So I wonder if there’s just something about formal institutions that is more prone to attack these days because democratic publics are just losing faith in them to begin with.

A second point that I think is raised by the book that provides a lot of food for thought is this localism point. I think that the book is really compelling and pointing out why to have the kind of pluralism that fosters the Madisonian constitutional vision, you need a really distinct local element.

And it needs to be able to be translated into our political parties and our national governing institutions. And in the 1960s, Eric and Paul argued that the managed advocacy revolution and the kind of nationalization of interest group representation made it much more difficult to have this kind of localism.

But localism hasn’t gone away. And one thing that is absent from the book is a mention of people and how they are participating in politics. And there are two trends that I’d be curious about your thoughts on.

The first is there has been massive protest in the past few years. In 2020, for example, many Americans participated in the largest protests for racial justice in the nation’s history. And this mirrors a trend globally of massive protest where citizens are increasingly taking to the streets because, according to some analysis, they maybe can’t achieve systematic change at the ballot box.

And usually, protest politics ends up manifesting itself in your national politics somehow. But we don’t necessarily see that happening in the narrative of the book. And I’m wondering why. And the second trend is that localism exists, like we all live in local communities.

We know from Eitan Hirsch’s work on political hobbyism that the worst kinds of partisans are the ones who don’t participate at all in politics, but are instead kind of liking partisan messages on social media. But he finds that when people do get involved in their communities, particularly when working on small bore solutions to problems, they can build and sustain a political momentum.

And if we think about the 1990s literature on social capital, we know that the practice of community engagement can create more trust interpersonally and also institutionally. It can create a sense of political efficacy.

So are there promising examples of civil society activism or local politics that you see maybe having resonance or are our mediating institutions just too weak to be able to effectively absorb them?

And I did want to go back to the democratic backsliding conversation, which is in a few examples from the past two years, Brazil re-election of Bolsonaro, France’s re-election– well, I guess she made it to the final round again, Marine Le Pen, and also Poland’s election in which the Law and Justice Party was once again competing.

You had these coalitions of pro-democracy, civil society, and opposition groups that came together, set aside their political differences, which sometimes were quite significant, to say that our number one goal is to block the anti-democratic leader.

We also saw a huge, massive uprising against Bibi Netanyahu’s judicial reforms prior to October 7th of last year. And I’m wondering what it might take in the United States to get the same kind of uprising or kind of crosscutting movement in support of democracy, or if you think that’s possible.

And the final thing to note is about political reform, which Eric spoke about. I urge everyone to read the chapter in their book on political reform because there are so many reform options on the table. And one thing that’s promising but also perilous about this moment in American democracy is there’s more interest in appetite for political reform than there has been, I think, in my lifetime.

And there are just so many options on the table, ranging from your colleague Chemerinsky saying that we should just rip up the constitution and start anew, to Lee Drutman arguing for proportional representation in Congress, which seems very unlikely to happen, as you note, to really smaller things like small donors in elections and ranked choice voting, that kind of thing.

I think that the peril of reform is that there is an enormous amount of time, energy, and money going into these reform efforts. And there’s a real shiny object problem, where every two years, you have a lot of people backing the one reform to rule them all.

And Eric, you say there’s no silver bullet, but the fact is that these resources are being spent. So if you had to pick a reform that you think would have the most effect, which is a really annoying question and I can never answer it when it’s posed to me, what would you say?

And maybe institutional reform has less of an effect than something that would reform the mediating institutions that you talk about, like something like supporting local journalism or a liberal federalist society is something that people have also talked about for the judiciary.

So what is the relationship between all of the energy that’s going into reform, but the very disparate kinds of things that are on the table and the things that will have the most impact? But I just wanted to conclude by thanking you for this book, which was so fun to read, and everybody should read it. And it’s going to start so many really productive conversations about the state of our democracy.

[MARK DANNER] Thank you. Thank you, Didi. Thanks, everybody. I’m going to please–

[APPLAUSE]

I’m going to ask our authors to take a couple of minutes to respond. But I want to say– take the privilege of the chair here and say that I was struck by something Frank said, which is the role of fantasy. I’ve been covering this election and spending some time at Trump rallies.

And I’m struck– I was at one in Las Vegas the other day, and I’m struck by the degree to which I’m supposed to be a journalist. And this entire rally is floating on a sea, not of lies, lies don’t capture it, but fantasies.

And we are seeing a press, whether regional or national, now it’s almost entirely national, utterly unable to cope with this. It simply is faced with social media. Faced with the stovepiping of the current media. It’s unable to cope with these things.

And as we speak, as Paul began with the great image of the hurricane coming ashore, that hurricane is becoming the main issue on the Republican side and the complete failure of the state to do anything to help those who have been hurt by the previous one and will be hurt by this one.

And all that is a complete fantasy. And it’s remarkable to me that, that in the last several weeks of this election can essentially be taking over the information war. And I’m not sure, the remarks in the book about nationalization of the media are melancholy and persuasive.

But I agree with Frank that they don’t necessarily go far enough. There seems to be a difference in kind rather than just a difference in scale. So I hope we can talk about that. Please why don’t you each take three or four minutes to respond, and then we’ll open this up?

[PAUL PIERSON] OK, can you hear that? I’ll try to be brief because that allows me to duck a lot of issues and save some others’ for Eric. Great comments, really. And I appreciate the nice things you said about the work too.

I’ll just maybe pick up on a couple of things that Frank said and focus on one of the many interesting issues that Didi raise. I mean, I think, Frank, I think we agree with you on all these points. And the media is really hard– is hard for social scientists to study, to try to really measure the impact of it.

We’ve had David Brockman here who’s done a great job on that recently. So I think social science has lagged behind the rapid change in media. But I think– and we try to convey this in the book. And I think there is growing evidence about the powerful impact of Fox and other forces on the right, just how important they have. And as you guys say, that’s only been amplified recently.

There’s an article in The Times this morning, the big thing in Republican campaign ads now in national elections is trans athletes, trans athletes. they’re letting trans people compete in women’s sports. And that’s like the thing that is in most, including ads, ads about Kamala Harris in negative ads about Kamala Harris.

And so that plays into this is like the big national issue that we’re going to argue about. But of course, Fox News has been beating that drum for a long time. It doesn’t actually rely on social media to get it out there.

So I agree that social media seems to be just turning the dial to 11. But the dial has been at 10 for quite a long time. The point about the courts, we completely agree with that. I mean, it is and we actually– I mean, book is covering a huge amount of ground, but we say like the most powerful policy maker in the United States now is the Supreme Court. It’s close.

And just if you think about that for a second, do you want to code the United States as a democracy? When that is the case and Democrats have won the popular vote in 7 out of the last 8, it’s almost certainly going to be 8 out of 9 presidential elections, but they only have three seats on the Supreme Court, there is no way to remove these people.

They can be on the court for 40 years. They can do whatever they want, pretty much. I mean, that is– and including lots of decisions like the ones that you mentioned, that to the extent that people are aware of them, they’re extremely unpopular.

So if elected officials did things like that, they would run the risk of not being continuing to be elected officials. But the Supreme Court really doesn’t have to worry about that very much. So I agree with you. That’s just a huge thing.

So Didi, there’s so much there. I want to pick up on this point about the comparative– thinking about this comparatively. And one of the things that we do try to do in this book when we were trying to do too much. So again, very wide ranging.

We are trying to connect the discussion of what’s going on in the United States to this broader conversation about Democratic backsliding. And the kinds of things that make countries vulnerable.

And, of course, it’s not just one thing. It’s not just one story. But we draw in a lot of ways on that literature. So I’ll just give one example that’s very germane to what we’re doing, which draws on Guillermo O’Donnell’s work, in which he talks about how democracies have a system of vertical accountability and a system of horizontal accountability.

Horizontal accountability means basically checks and balances. Vertical accountability means the people hold the government accountable. And what we suggest in the book is that in the United States, the system of vertical accountability, of electoral accountability rests in significant part on horizontal accountability, because that is where voters can see that something has gone wrong, that somebody is behaving like an authoritarian.

So that was the Nixon story. You start to see this division at the national level, the politicians, and that sends messages to voters amplified by nonpartisan media that everybody is consuming. That world does not exist anymore. So no horizontal accountability means it is much harder to get vertical accountability.

So I think we’re not saying that the process of democratic backsliding looks exactly the same in the United States. There are other ways in which you can get into trouble. And there were some people, when we did a book workshop around this book, very smart, prominent political scientists said, this is happening everywhere.

We don’t really need a story about the United States. We need a story about the rise of right wing populism. And we do think you need a story about the global rise of right wing populism. But it’s also true that a lot of comparative work suggests that the two biggest protections for a democracy, if you just want to say, what are the variables that if you mark– if you score high on them, you’re not going to get democratic backsliding?

How wealthy are you? And how long have your institutions been in place? So that makes the US– the fact that the US is in the company of countries like Hungary and Brazil actually makes the US a huge outlier when you think about the fact that we’ve had our institutions for so long and we’re very wealthy country.

And we think this nationalization, combined with the constitution, really helps us to understand why the United States is more vulnerable to what’s happening in a lot of poorer, less, well, institutionalized countries.

[ERIC SCHICKLER] Yeah. Thanks so much for both of those sets of comments. Super helpful. I think maybe build a little bit off of Paul’s comments, we thought about– I think in terms of the backsliding comparative point, one of the– and I think this connects to Frank’s point about well, our electoral system, the two partyism, are institutions giving rise to this two-party system effects the ability to counter an anti-democratic leader?

The coalition in France that get against is a cross party– multipartyism is crucial to it. Prior– for much of US history, while we had an ostensibly two-party system at the national level, there were important openings– initially in the 19th century for third parties that were locally rooted or regionally based to force issues onto the table that the national parties didn’t want to deal with.

You could think about the progressive movement as a kind of cross-party, often used third-party strategies to influence. And those, partly due to changes in electoral rules, banning things like fusion voting, as well as nationalization of our politics, those are gone. You don’t have that Avenue for regionally-based third party movements that could play that brokerage role.

So one of the key reform questions is, are there ways to create functional equivalence of that? And so that’s where reforms like ranked choice voting and fusion voting come in as at least the potential to create those kinds of coalitions.

Because one way to think about it is the Madisonian system survived for so long because, as Nelson Polsby put it, we had 100-party system. Now we have a two. That was always an exaggeration, but it captured an element of truth.

Now that we have this two-party system, these kind of rickety machinery becomes really problematic. And I guess just the one other point I’d want to make in response to actually one of Frank’s comments is one of– the Madisonian system, you’re right.

This book is not a celebration of the Madisonian system as it used to be. We go to great lengths to think about the systematic problems with it. Our claim is that the problems for democracy that we had before were different from the problems we have now.

Not that they were in one sense benign and now they’re not. But I just want to point that it’s easy to get lost in these discussions of polarization. It used to be this well-functioning democracy. Now, it’s not. That’s not our argument at all. But our current configuration has distinctive vulnerabilities that we haven’t had before.

[MARK DANNER] Well, I’ve been thinking about vulnerabilities as you’ve been talking, and a word I would use is apocalypse. I’ve been going to these rallies. And one of the things that strikes me is the degree to which the rhetoric is about the end of time.

On the Democratic side, if this election goes a certain way, there will be the end of democracy. The system, as we know it, will be extirpated. It will be something beyond that. And the interesting thing, which I think not many of my friends know is that the other side is saying exactly the same thing.

That if you go to a Trump rally, he simply says, if you don’t vote and vote in a certain way, we’re not going to have a country anymore. Our country is going to be destroyed. Kamala Harris is dumb as a rock. She’s going to– but it’s not just that she’s dumb, I mean, this incredible, just incredible language.

And it makes me think A, whether that is completely historically unique, whether we’ve ever been in a situation like this or whether you could compare it to 1876 or some other election, number one.

And number 2, what are we looking at after the apocalypse? I mean, obviously, when we’re talking about Democratic backsliding, we’re talking about, for example, the night of the election, counting the votes. What happens in the following days. The election going into the courts, the advantages, as Frank and Paul both pointed out, of certain Republican judges in the court system, what comes after the apocalypse.

[ERIC SCHICKLER] I mean, just real quickly on that point, we’ve had elections in the past where both sides thought the stakes were existential. And in some cases were. Well, I think what’s unusual now is having the sequence of elections.

Basically, if you go back to 2000, pretty much each election has felt that if you look at the rhetoric and it’s just been increasing and mounting. And so I don’t think it’s distinctive to– this particular election feels and is distinctive.

I don’t want to deny that. But the idea of both sides saying the stakes here are 1800, that was the case. 1876, that was the case. 1860, that is the case. 1896, that is the case. But it’s not– you wouldn’t see that for 20 years with it just ratcheting up.

[MARK DANNER] But how do you account for the degree of fear that’s being expressed? And obviously, this fear, it isn’t just as it were, academic question. I mean, there have been two assassination attempts on Trump. I mean, many people are expecting violence at the polls. Who knows whether this will happen.

But how do you account– I mean, I’m struck at the Trump rally by how frightened people seem, how incredibly threatened they seem. I suppose part of that, you could talk about what Frank said about fantasies. But is that all we’re talking about?

[ERIC SCHICKLER] I think we have not talked– I mean, as much in our presentation about the asymmetries between the parties. But certainly, if you think about the media structure, there’s an important asymmetry there.

And so I don’t want not to oversimplify, but on the right, the media structure has fed various narratives, some of which are rooted in actual things Democrats want to do, many of which have no relation and have created that sense of existential stakes.

I think my own view is that– or our view, I think, is that on the stakes of what Trump would do is rooted in actual experience. Like one could make the argument that– if you think about Mitt Romney in 2012, one might say that the rhetoric outpaced– the rhetoric on the left about what it meant outpaced the reality. I think that’s a reasonable claim to make. I think by the time we get to 2020 and 2024, I don’t think that’s the case.

[PAUL PIERSON] One thing– we didn’t have time to talk about this. I mean, I do actually think these chapters about what changed are cool. They draw a lot on Eric’s wonderful racial realignment book, and the critical role of the Civil Rights movement and kind of pivoting American politics to a system in which it was clear which was the Liberal Party and which was the more Conservative Party.

And a lot of things feed on that. But over time, what happens is the stakes in American elections grow. How different the world is going to be if one side wins or the other side grows. And you start to see– and that feeds on itself in various ways. It feeds on itself with interest groups.

So you see interest groups picking a side, because if you care about abortion, whichever side of that issue you are on, it becomes increasingly clear that which party controls the presidency and controls the US Senate is going to determine which party, not the individual politician, which party.

And so the groups start to join sides, and that just reinforces it. It just creates this more– so we say in the book the things that used to create breaks, things about this more decentralized system of intermediary institutions that used to create breaks on polarization. Now actually they become engines of polarization.

So the stakes have grown in ways that really are very real. And, I guess, the other thing like fear sells. Fear sells. It certainly sells on the right. And I think it’s interesting to actually think about the differences between the right and the left.

And of course, I have my own, like, yeah, January 6. That’s something to be fearful about. That’s like a real thing. That’s not a fantasy. But, Harris is actually, I would say not selling fear. They actually made a– Biden was to a fair extent. But I think they made a conscious decision that actually that wasn’t what they wanted, even though I think they probably do think that the effects are– that the stakes are.

Turning the page is actually an appeal to get out.

Yeah. And you want to sell– you want to offer hope and stuff like that. But on the right, and certainly, and again, I think media is much more of a driver of what’s been happening on the right. I think that whole– the media environment is just very different on the Democratic side.

And so I do think one thing that we struggled with in the book was we did want to talk about polarization because we do think the development of these two parties as teams all the way down is extremely important.

But the danger in any discussion about polarization is you start to act as if the two parties are the same. It’s just mirror images. And we know there are lots of– a lot of journalists want to talk that way. It allows them to be objective, to think of themselves as being– a lot of political scientists want to talk that way because it allows them to appear to be objective.

But the differences between the two parties, they’re both affected by this nationalization, but they’re affected in quite different ways. And actually thinking about these mediating institutions, I think helps us to understand the ways in which they’re different.

The appeal of a minoritarian strategy is just much greater on the right than it is on the left. The idea that democracy, true democracy in which majorities are making the decisions, that is a threat on the right in a way that it is not a threat.

[MARK DANNER] Frank, Didi, do you want to comment on that, the issue of fear or the– Didi. No. I think I will– since we have 10 minutes left, why don’t I throw this open to our audience. Yes, sir there.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] I think this analysis is very convincing. I’m not quarreling with it at all. But one thing that hasn’t been mentioned specifically, I’d really be interested in whether you guys think that this has played a role in the polarization that you’re talking about.

And what I have in mind is the decision of the Republican Party in the 1960s and ’70s to develop the Southern strategy, which is also a religious strategy because of the overwhelmingly evangelical character of Southern Whites.

And what I kept thinking about when you were talking about this is the overwhelmingly Manichaean understanding of the world characteristic of this evangelical culture. And until the Republican Party catapulted them from the margins of public life to its center, that manicheanism, which you can see, I mean, throughout, all through the ’30s, ’40s, and ’50s, it’s really there.

But these guys, the leaders of the evangelicals, didn’t imagine that they would ever really run the country. So suddenly, they’re there and a lot of the fantasy, a lot of the apocalypticism, a lot of the manicheanism of the extreme polarization.

At least it looks to me like it has something of an evangelical base. And therefore, the decision of the Republicans, I was struck by 2015, all 32 senators representing the coastal states, only two were Republicans, because by that time, the Republicans had decided not to try to appeal to an educated electorate. So they stopped going after those states, so that you have a very distinctive voter base. And anyway, isn’t that decision central to what happened?

[MARK DANNER] Thank you. I think we’ll collect a couple of questions. And I want to mention in response to that question that if you look back at George Wallace’s speeches in ’68, it’s remarkable to what degree they foreshadow Trump. Quite remarkable. Should we collect another couple of questions. Sure.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Just a quick comment. In the 1950s, the American Political Science Association had– all right, all knows what I’m talking about. They bemoaned the fact that we had Tweedle Dee and Tweedle Dum parties. Don’t be sorry for what you wish for. One thing that didn’t come up, primaries, the McGovern rules. Do you have any–

[MARK DANNER] Yeah, that’s in the book. It did come up in the book. How about one more? Right back there. Yeah.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thank you. I’m curious if you think that the legal class and if you want to call that the bar or the legal academic class should be also considered a mediating institution because the Powell Memo and the rise of the Federalist Society could arguably be considered a nationalization along partisan lines that maybe wasn’t nearly as explicit prior to that.

And they also temporally overlap with that process that you identify in so many of your other meso institutions. So I’d love to hear if you think that should be considered such an institution as well.

[MARK DANNER] OK. Paul, do you want to start on that?

[PAUL PIERSON] I’m going to let Eric. I think a lot of these are right in his wheelhouse.

[ERIC SCHICKLER] All right. So first, a question about evangelicals, yes, that is– and the way you frame it is a little bit differently from how we discuss it in a useful way, I think. Our argument, though, is that the racial realignment is pivotal because of unleashing the entry of the Southern White conservatives into the Republican Party, which then meant, as each new social issue came up–

Think about abortion, guns, sexuality, gay rights, The base of the Republican Party increasingly included that constituency. And at the same time, driving away gradually from the Republican Party, the northeastern establishment moderate wing.

And so we see the racial realignment as the kind of essential first step in that process. And we talk about why Republicans had an incentive to capitalize on that, that basically, they had the opportunity they saw to create a conservative majority or a powerful electoral.

At the time, it seemed like it may well be an electoral majority, and for moments, it was, by appealing to that. But the Manichaean point as an element of that, I think, is something we don’t develop. But that’s quite useful.

[MARK DANNER] It’s worth noting that Lyndon Johnson was aware of this right after the Voting Rights Act passed. He predicted it.

[ERIC SCHICKLER] Yeah. No. So we view that as the critical first moment. On the point about the legal class, I think we– so we do talk about the Federalist Society. We thought about it in terms of basically policy demanding group.

So in other words, as part of the group realignment story, the Federalist Society bringing together kind of pro-business interests and over time, religious conservatives and bundling them together in through this legal strategy.

So we don’t necessarily think about the legal system as a separate mediating institution. But that’s not to say that that’s not a super useful move to think about, and especially going back to Tocqueville, the role of the legal class that is, yes, sound extremely promising to think about.

Then the point about primaries, yes. And political scientists have wrestled with estimating the impact of primaries on polarization. But we think that one of the key points is that having voters pick candidates through direct primaries in an era of sorted parties is very different from an era of unsorted parties.

So when primaries are first introduced, it didn’t promote polarization, because if you looked at the constituencies of both parties, it spanned ideologically. Like direct primaries for Congress existed from 1910s, 1906, and it didn’t create polarization, we would argue.

But primaries plus this into this sorted electorate, which is what happened in the wake of McGovern Frazier certainly, we think, changes the incentives of politicians where the concern on the right, especially has been about being primaried.

And so the way to avoid that is to be a loyal team player and be as conservative. Up until recently, it was– and still to basically now, be as conservative as possible so you don’t get primaried. And that obviously overlaps with geographic sorting, redistricting strategy. If you worry more about– if you have less worry about a general election, the primary looms more large– looms largely.

[MARK DANNER] Didi or Frank, do you want to comment on any of these?

[DIDI KUO] I want to weigh in with something Paul has written about, which is this– so one thing that someone mentioned is how the Republican Party mobilizes the working class or non-educated voters.

And this educational realignment has happened in the United States, but also in most of the advanced democracies of Western Europe, where you used to have an identifiably social Democratic Party on the left that had an overwhelming economic ideology that was supposed to be cross-cutting, like across racial and ethnic and religious cleavages, because it was about class instead.

And now, as you’ve had parties that are a little bit more similar economically since the 1990s, in particular, the working class has been more up for grabs. And Paul has written really persuasively about the nature of plutocratic populism, whereby the right has to wrangle together a difficult coalition of plutocrats and business, which is its loyal group.

But also has to use a lot of appeals based on fear and grievance to make sure that working class voters also give them the numbers to be able to win elections. And I think that, as the parties of the left become the parties of the educated urban professionals, that’s going to be problematic as well.

[MARK DANNER] Trump has been really most successful– and Lindsey Graham, when he said Trump is the only one who can build our party, he meant that he was the one who could most sufficiently scare people by this vision of hordes of Black and Brown people coming in to build up its non-college educated White base, mostly male. And you see that at the rallies very much so, that he’s a real artist at this.

[PAUL PIERSON] Maybe I’ll use that as an entry to say one slightly optimistic thing at the end of this. So when Eric and I were writing the conclusion, you’re supposed to say like, OK, now how do we fix all this.

And we gave a general public talk books Inc. And one of my neighbors was there and it was like I’d planted him there to ask this question. He said, well, when a chemist or a physicist describes something complicated, we don’t expect them to come up with some solution. Like it’s enough. You’ve done your job. And I said thank you. And we all went home.

But we do have this thing in the conclusion where it’s the kinds of reforms we’re talking about don’t really feel like they’re up to the scale of the challenge, though I do think have to think small things can feed on themselves. We believe in feedback loops.

And at the margins, they can make a difference. And that can make a difference. So they’re definitely worth doing. But I think something where I think there’s some grounds for optimism, though, maybe I have less optimism than I did a few years ago is demographic change.

So Lindsey Graham before he jumped on board the bandwagon, the Trump bandwagon said the problem with this whole strategy is we’re just not– they’re just not producing enough old, angry White guys. That’s not the demography of the country. Our supporters are dying off and the new supporters are different.

And I do think even though one of the most interesting developments, actually, I think in recent electoral politics is Harris is holding support among White voters overall. It’s not at all clear that she’s going to come close to matching the level of support that she has with Latinos and Blacks. And that could be the difference in the election.

So the idea that as the country becomes more diverse, that will make the coalition– this revanchist coalition, too small to be electorally competitive. I still think that, that may turn out to be right. I think there’s good reason to think that time is not on the side of this right wing populist movement. I’m less confident in that than I was a few years ago.

[MARK DANNER] I hate to think it’s my job to quash any optimism at the end. But I have to say that if Harris gets her current polling among Latinos and Blacks, she will lose. And we’ll have to– obviously, we’ll have to see what happens. But those numbers are distinctly worrying. And Trump’s penetration of those groups has been quite remarkable. And it’s a big story all by itself.

It’s 5:30. This could go on for a very long time. I implore you all to vote and think of the election and not go crazy. And I would ask you, I would thank our sponsors very much. Praise this book. You all should go out and buy it. And at least now join me to thank our authors and our respondents.

[APPLAUSE]

[MUSIC PLAYING]

 

Matrix On Point

Matrix on Point: War is Back

War is back. Open military operations in Europe and the Middle East have driven an escalation of geopolitical tensions in those regions. The conduct of warfare is changing, too, fueled by the deployment and sometimes live-testing of new technologies. Meanwhile, a new cold war seems to be settling in. The growth of China’s economic power and worldwide influence has triggered proliferating sovereignty disputes and defensive trade and security policies.

In this Matrix on Point panel, UC Berkeley experts discussed these and other transformations, and offered their views on what to expect in the short to medium term.

Recorded on September 30, 2024, the panel featured Michaela Mattes, Associate Professor in the Charles and Louise Travers Department of Political Science at UC Berkeley; Andrew W. Reddie, Associate Research Professor at UC Berkeley’s Goldman School of Public Policy, and Founder of the Berkeley Risk and Security Lab; and Daniel Sargent, Associate Professor of History and Public Policy at UC Berkeley, and Co-Director for the Institute of International Studies.

Co-sponsored by the Berkeley Institute of International Studies, the panel was moderated by Vinod Aggarwal, Distinguished Professor and Alann P. Bedford Endowed Chair in Asian Studies, in the Charles and Louise Travers Department of Political Science; Affiliated Professor at the Haas School of Business; Director of the Berkeley Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation Study Center (BASC); and Fellow in the Public Law and Policy Center at Berkeley Law School, all at UC Berkeley.

Matrix on Point is a discussion series promoting focused, cross-disciplinary conversations on today’s most pressing issues. Offering opportunities for scholarly exchange and interaction, each Matrix On Point features the perspectives of leading scholars and specialists from different disciplines, followed by an open conversation. These thought-provoking events are free and open to the public. Learn more at https://matrix.berkeley.edu.

Podcast Transcript

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[MARION FOURCADE] Hello, everybody. Welcome. Thank you for coming to our first Matrix On Point of the ’24 ’25 academic year. My name is Marion Fourcade. You know me. I’m the director of Social Science Matrix here. So when we planned this panel with Julia Sizek, I should give her kudos because she really helped organize this back in the spring, we decided to call it War is Back.

And of course, it’s always a challenge to plan an event months ahead because you don’t know how things will evolve. But sadly, the panel and its title are more appropriate than ever. Ongoing military operations in Ukraine and the Middle East have expanded further. New technologies continue to be deployed to deadly and sometimes unprecedented uses, for instance, very recently in Lebanon.

And meanwhile, a new Cold War seems to be settling in. The growth of China’s economic power and worldwide influence has triggered proliferating sovereignty disputes and defensive trade and security policies. So to help us grapple with these issues, we have assembled a fantastic panel of Berkeley faculty. Note that today’s event is co-sponsored by the Berkeley Institute of International Studies.

Now, before I turn it over to the panelists, let me just give you a preview of what we have in stock for you the next few weeks. Tomorrow, we have a presentation by Bradley Onishi on Project 25 and Christian Nationalism. On October 9, our next Author Meets Critics will feature Paul Pierson and Eric Schickler for their most recent book, Partisan Nation.

And then the next two Matrix On Point will be about the election, Voices From The Heartland with our own Arlie Hochschild next October 21, and then shifting alignment in later that same week actually. But right now, our topic is war. So let me introduce our moderator, Vinny Aggarwal.

Vinny Aggarwal is distinguished professor and holds the Allan P. Bedford endowed chair in Asian studies in the Travers Department of Political Science. He’s also an affiliated professor at the Haas School of Business, the director of the Berkeley Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation Study Center, and a fellow in the Public Law and Policy Center at Berkeley Law School. His authored books include, among many titles, Liberal Protectionism, International Debt Threat, and Debt Games.

And he has not one but two forthcoming books, Great Power Competition and Middle Power Strategies and the Oxford Handbook on Geoeconomics and Economic Statecraft. His current research examines comparative regionalism in Europe, North America, and Asia, industrial policy and the political economy of high technology economic statecraft. So without further ado, let me now turn it over to Vinny. Thank you.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Should I come up there.

[MARION FOURCADE] Don’t have to.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK, well, I have a mic, so I will just sit down and introduce my colleagues here. So it’s a great pleasure for me to moderate this panel. I think you were optimistic. You said the panel might be obsolete. Unfortunately, I don’t think this panel will ever be obsolete. I think war will be with us for a long time. So even if there’s not war involving the United States, there’s clearly wars going on around the world. And there has been since eternity. I think so, unfortunately, or fortunately for those of us who study war, there’s lots of room to do research.

So without further ado, I’m just going to introduce Michaela Mattes, who’s an associate professor in the Political Science Department. Michaela’s research looks at cooperation and conflict issues, alliance formation, and things like that. Andrew Reddie, who’s at the Goldman School of Public Policy, with whom I work a lot on high technology conflict, looking at quantum computing, AI, synthetic biology, and cybersecurity. And he will be talking about the technological aspects of international conflict.

And Daniel Sargent, my co-conspirator in the academic freedoms seminar series that we run, who is a professor, both in history and public policy. I think beyond that, you can go look at their bios online. So I’m not going to waste too much time. And I’m just going to start in order. Michaela, why don’t you take the floor and you can begin?

[MICHAELA MATTES] OK, so I wanted to start a little bit by interrogating the title of this event. That war’s back, which assumes that war was gone at some point. And certainly, my colleagues who study Civil War would heavily disagree with that. I mean, civil wars have been active and alive and well, you could say, in the 21st century. Thinking of Syria, Yemen, Ethiopia, North Sudan, and then also Myanmar, Burma.

I think when the claim about more being gone maybe is a little bit more applicable to interstate war. And so that’s where my commentary is actually going to focus on, so wars between recognized state members of the international system. And here, of course, there was a time about 15 years ago or so, like in the 2010s, where scholars and observers were very optimistic that war is in decline. So very famously, there was Steven Pinker’s Better Angels of our Nature argument that war is in decline.

In general, we’ve seen this decrease in violence over centuries. We’ve moved away from things like chattel slavery and human sacrifice, some of the more extreme types of torture. And so war will also decline as a result of our ability of humans to use our reason or reasoning skills, in order to create mechanisms to constrain war. And there will, of course, also other scholars such as Joshua Goldstein and John Mueller, who formulated similar arguments. They pointed more to maybe peacekeeping and the strengthening of norms around the constraining the use of force as mechanism for why war should have declined and will continue to decline.

And to be fair, they had a point because after 2003, there was no inter-state war until 2022 when Armenia and Azerbaijan fought each other. And then, of course, the Ukraine war in 2020. Sorry, 2020, Armenia, Azerbaijan, 2022 in Ukraine. And also, there was a very long period of great power peace, really, since World War II, which is arguably the longest period of in centuries. So there was a lot of optimism there.

That being said, some of us were always a little skeptical. I remember being asked in 2010s at my former workplace by a colleague, why do you even still study inter-state conflict? It’s not a topic anymore. And I didn’t quite agree with it, and nor did others. And so some people took this up much more systematically, and I think provided some good evidentiary basis that there really is not a decline in war, even inter-state war.

So I think important there is Bear Braumoeller’s work on Only The Dead, where he shows using data on violent conflict between states, not just wars, but generally, also lower level sorts of violent conflict between states. That there may have been a bit of a decline since 1990, but that there have been other ebbs and flows in history, right? So that war has gone up and down in history over centuries. And so that there is nothing particular or special in this decline that we saw then, and that there’s no reason to believe that it won’t go up again.

He also did some interesting analysis looking at the correlation between various factors that we to be associated with the likelihood of war or violent conflict between states such as alliances, arms, races, territorial disputes, democracy, trade. And so what he found is that the pattern of association between these factors and conflict has not changed over time. So it’s not that the factors that increase the likelihood of conflict have now a weaker association. The ones that increase the likelihood of peace have a stronger association. We’re not seeing that.

Another I think really interesting argument also that questions this decline in war came from Tanisha Fazal, who suggested that scholars often use this operational criterion of 1,000 battle fatalities to define what war is. And so this is problematic because our battlefield medicine has gotten so much better than it was in the past. And so now soldiers can be rescued from the battlefield when they’re injured within this golden hour, right?

The first hour after injury, which really increases their prospects of survival. There are antibiotics, antiseptics, all kinds of other innovations. So that even if fighting actually has the same intensity as it had 100, 200 years ago, we will see fewer soldiers die in these conflicts. In fact, over long periods of time, the ratio of casualty to killed was 3 to 1.

And for the United States, in Iraq, Afghanistan, it was more like 10 to 1. So what this means is that it may look like there is a decline in inter-state war, but that’s an artifact of this criterion that we often use to identify what inter-state wars are, which is these 1,000 battle fatalities. And really, the intensity of conflict is no less than it has been in the past.

Now, I feel like, given what’s happened recently, I think people are more skeptical about this argument in general. There are also other points that one could make, not just addressing that the decline in wars, maybe not quite what others have suggested, but there are other factors that suggest that it’s not clear that war is in decline or has ever been in decline or will go into decline. I mean, for one, the International system remains anarchical, meaning that there is no enforcer that can enforce any kind of peaceful deals between states or that can punish an aggressor.

Furthermore, states remain heavily armed. In fact, when we look at data of the Stockholm International. Peace Research Institute, or SIPRI, and their latest data is for 2023, we’ve seen yet another increase in worldwide defense spending. It’s actually the ninth consecutive year of increase. It’s the biggest jump, in fact, since 2009. And 2023 had the highest military defense expenditures in the world of any year that is recorded by SIPRI, and that even adjusts for inflation, right? So we have anarchy. We have states armed to the teeth.

And we still have plenty of pairs of states or as we call them, dyads, that have significant disagreements between them. I’m sure we all can come up with them, right? They’re the perennials of North and South Korea, India and Pakistan, China and India, Iran and Israel. And then there are some new conflicts to pay attention to such as Somalia and Ethiopia, and Ethiopia and Egypt as well. So there is clearly conflicts between states still.

Furthermore, there is reason to expect that maybe conflict is intensifying. I mean, the great power rivalries were already mentioned, right? So the US and China in particular, that rivalry has intensified using all kinds of economic tools of warfare that Vinny could certainly talk to. I would say that the US, Russia is probably weaker now given that Russia has been so weakened in the Ukraine war. So that’s a very good investment of the US to weaken Russia as a rival by helping Ukraine fight Russia. So that’s maybe less of a threat at this point than China is.

Furthermore, we aside from this great power rivalry, also have other new issues that come up to the table. So in particular, climate change is going to bring up some new potential conflicts. A very, I think high profile one is the Arctic. Once the ice melts in the Arctic, that means there’s going to be major competition over what our significant gas and oil reserves there, and also really important trade routes. So we’re already seeing countries positioning themselves in the Arctic and starting to compete over there, including non-arctic nations like China is.

And then, of course, when areas become uninhabitable, we will see population movements and refugees and migration that can create further tension, that can lead both to civil conflicts and to inter-state conflicts as well. I think another argument to make that conflict is not in decline, we shouldn’t really expect it to be in decline, especially in the future, is that some of the factors that those optimists pointed to that were constraining warfare between states are not things that are permanent. These are things that can change and actually sort of fade away over time.

So some of the arguments were, for instance, about the role of trade in containing conflict, right? Once countries trade heavily, then there is an opportunity cost to conflict, which makes it even less desirable. Well, we have seen in part, as a result of the pandemic, but also in part of a result of great power competition that some of this trade has plateaued and even declined in parts, although there’s a little bit, I think, an increase very recently.

But again, there is no guarantee that this very high trade ties will continue into the future that could constrain conflict. Furthermore, I’m sure most of you or all of you have heard of the Democratic Peace idea, that democracies are less likely to fight each other. And so, yes, after 1990, right, we saw an emergence of more democracies, but that’s been in decline, too. So if we look at Freedom House, the 2024 report, they find that there has been the 18th consecutive year of decline in global freedom scores. So democracy is also weakening.

A third pillar, arguably, of peace in post World War II period and after 1990, was the United States as the hegemon. That would ensure peaceful relations, especially in its areas of zones of influence in Europe and Latin America and some of Asia, and this Pax Americana as a feature that ensured a more peaceful world. Well, I mean, US dominance has declined relative to its closest competitors.

But maybe even more importantly, there is also a lot of hesitation domestically within the US of allowing the United States to be a policeman of the world in the future. So I actually looked it up and it turns out that fewer and fewer Americans are willing to support the US playing a leading or major role in World politics. The last I saw was still 2/3 of Americans. So I think it’s not completely gone at that point. But to the extent that those trends become stronger and the US becomes less willing to become involved in conflicts, that is an important factor.

Another pillar of peace arguably was the strength of norms, such as the norm of territorial integrity. Well, that took a really big hit, of course, with Russia’s attack on Ukraine. And so whether that norm remains intact or maybe even strengthened is very much a function of what will happen with Ukraine in the long run.

So if Russia is allowed to win and take parts of Ukraine, then that will have really Weakened the norm of territorial integrity, and other countries with similar territorial aspirations might just think, OK, we can tolerate some international opprobrium and sanctions in the short run. We just have to wait it out and then we will be able to get that piece of territory, right? So in a way, war holds the key to war here, to future wars is one way to think about it.

Finally, just two concluding comments, both building on Bear Braumoeller’s work that I think are important to highlight. One is that fundamentally, war has a big random component, right? So as scholars, we can identify the correlates that increase the risk of war or decrease the risk of war. But whether war occurs, there’s randomness to this. Whether a particular event is the event that suddenly people think is worth fighting over is something that we cannot easily predict.

So it’s very possible that we see actually no wars happening, even though the risk of war is just as high as it has been in the past. And so that’s something important to keep in mind, that even if we haven’t seen war, it doesn’t mean that the risk of war isn’t high, and that there isn’t this potential for some event that we cannot foresee entirely to really spiral out of control and not just lead to war, but also lead to major war.

And so a second related consideration is that I think it’s dangerous to be too complacent about war. So I think we all sleep better if we think that there’s not going to be much war. But at the same time, I think it is important to remember that it is a possibility in many parts of the world and that the step from war to escalating in a large war may not be a huge step. And so by not being complacent, right, we can more quickly act if disputes seem to be spiraling out of control.

And so just as a mini example of that, I mean, thinking back to the beginning of the Ukraine war when President Biden alerted the various allies that Russia is planning aggression, they didn’t believe it. So I’m European, and German in particular, in the first initial originally. And in Germany, decision makers did not believe that Russia was going to attack Ukraine. I mean, to Germans, it seemed like Russia had integrated into the economic order. It was benefiting from things. It was a partner.

And so there was a lot of reluctance and hesitation to recognize this, and therefore also, delayed action. So maybe if people had not been too complacent about it and had taken stronger measures to really signal to Russia this was unacceptable, maybe deterrence could have worked in this particular setting. And so that’s just important. I think, as we move forward, maybe and I feel like I sound very pessimistic here, though I hear my co-panelists have similar pessimism, so I don’t want to panic everyone, but I think it is there’s some value to being watchful of what is going on.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Thank you, Michaela. I’ll remember that next time we’ll have you go last, not first, so that everyone won’t be depressed. But brilliant. I think a brilliant discussion of all of the key factors that suggest that war is still with us, unfortunately. So Andrew, are you going to say some really warm, positive, fuzzy things?

[ANDREW REDDIE] Oh, absolutely. Yes indeed, about the AI among other things. No, thanks, Vinny, for corralling us. Many thanks, Marion, for having me. It’s a privilege to be back at the Social Science Matrix. I received support from Matrix as a graduate student. So graduate students, there is a future, I promise. It’s a privilege to be here. So you’ve already heard from Michaela the premise war is back. Maybe troubling, but there’s also a debate that we’re having about whether and how technology is reshaping warfare as well. So that’s where I’m going to end up focusing my remarks.

And I’ll start with a rhetorical question. So what do senators, military leaders, and authors of science fiction have in common? And the answer is more than perhaps you might think. So they have visions of the future of warfare involving technologies, fundamentally different from the present, from super soldiers with biological or robotic enhancements. Have you seen this in The New York Times. It’s there if you look for it, to drone swarms using biometric data. I submit to you the future of life video called slaughterbots. To maneuverable missiles that travel to the target over 6000km/h. Those are hypersonic capabilities.

And I’m more than happy to talk about each of these during the Q&A. That said, my concerns, as you’ll see, are perhaps a little bit more prosaic than some of those headline grabbing technologies. And I’ll do my best to name check each of the ones that you might expect me to talk about. So nuclear capabilities, AI, military integration, advances in ISR, intelligence surveillance reconnaissance capabilities. But before we begin, any given any time that I’m asked to give a talk on emerging technologies, I also want to talk to you about the boring stuff, because the boring stuff is also not going terribly well.

So first, there’s various non emerging technologies, and perhaps mundane concerns that deserve the attention of all of us in the scholarly community and also our policymakers. We have a major challenge inside the defense industrial base. We no longer produce enough bullets and shells to take up what we’re sending overseas to the likes of Ukraine and Israel. We are not currently able to produce a plutonium pit for our nuclear weapons, and that’s despite our nuclear posture review calling for an increase in the number of plutonium pits to be created in order to keep the nuclear deterrent exactly where it lies today.

Moreover, no technology or widget exists in a vacuum. So any time that you see individuals, whether it be scholars or policymakers, talking about hypersonic weapons, for example, the end widget, it’s the very end of the product cycle. We have all sorts of the supply chain risks to worry about as well. So in another life, the National Labs before it came back to the Academy, that was what we were really focused on.

There are a variety of different individual technologies that all go inside any particular capability, each of which are vulnerable to cyber attack. The example that we were talking about up here before. You also have the headlines about the pagers in Lebanon. That’s exactly the kind of thing we’re worried about in the context of our nuclear weapons. For example, our cyber satellites used for reconnaissance capabilities. And so there’s all sorts of things to worry about at this technology meets war intersection.

Second, what constitutes emerging technology as it pertains to warfare is at best, a fuzzy concept. Indeed, in my class on war question mark emerging tech, we spend a lot of time problematizing the concept itself. And ultimately, we have lots of technologies that we overestimate in terms of their proximity. So for example, you’re seeing probably a lot of headlines about Terminator and Skynet and artificial general intelligence.

On the flip side, we also have technologies that always appear 10 years away and then all of a sudden they arrive. How many of you use ChatGPT? And nobody saw that coming. And then all of a sudden, all of our students are writing their essays using it, and we all have to adjust. The invention of a given technology is also the only first step to being fielded by a military.

One need only look at the early years of aviation for lots of examples of problematized use cases. So we were dropping bombs out of hot air balloons and we’re using flammable airships to drop ordnance. Not a good combination. And so it takes time to figure out what strategies and doctrines, and also institutional characteristics go into actually deploying a particular technology in war.

And Michaela gave you lots of readings. So I’ll just point to Mike Horowitz, recently out of DOD and back to Penn, where he runs the Perry World House. He talks a lot about the degree to which the governments and militaries need the institutional capacity to actually come up with the appropriate combinations of technology and how they might be used on the battlefield.

And then finally, we should be skeptical of claims that any particular technology is a game changer. Indeed, that’s one of the things that really annoys me as an academic in this space. What I’m interested in is how each characteristic of a weapon system, whether it be its range, its precision, its blast effects, its radiation effects, how do those characteristics actually end up altering what a country is likely to be able to do with it vis a vis an adversary, by the way.

One of the major challenges we have analytically in this space is it’s not just the creation of a technology in a vacuum. It’s the United States developing a capability, the Chinese developing a capability, the Russians, the Europeans, et cetera. And the ways in which countries around the world think about these technologies looks very, very different. If I were to say AI to all of you, you immediately think of LLMs. In Russia. If I say, they think about robotics and robotic applications.

So if any of you have seen the Boston Dynamics, little robot, it looks like a little dog, that’s what they’re thinking of when we say AI, that’s different for us. So ultimately, we have to be really careful when we talk about what’s actually changing inside of this space.

And I spend a lot of my time thinking about first strike stability concerns and the degree to which deterrence might hold or not hold in a new technological environment, the degree to which technology impacts crisis stability, so how likely I am to escalate a conflict or not. And then also arms race, behavior. And I think Mikayla did a nice job of showing you that that arms racing is actually happening as we speak. So when I’m studying an emerging tech, I want to see how things are actually changing as these various different countries move against one another.

With that said, you probably expected me to talk about the sexy stuff. So here we go. All right, so in the nuclear state of play, are things changing? The answer there is it depends. So to a large extent, we have the Chinese developing new capabilities, both quantitatively and qualitatively. So all of a sudden, US Defense planners have to think about what happens when China has 1,000 nuclear warheads rather than their current 300 to 500.

And also, what happens when they start to have ICBM silos, and a submarine launch deterrent rather than their land-based mobile missiles? And so that impacts all sorts of things. For example, the amount of time that it might take for them to fuel rockets and launch them, which obviously gives us time to respond, and also change the types of risks we might be worried about the Chinese actually bringing upon themselves. So I’ll point to you the fact that it took us more or less two decades to build the nuclear triad that we live with today, right? So the combination of submarine launch forces, ICBMs, and bombers.

And subsequently, we made all sorts of institutional decisions that tried to address this, what we call an always never dilemma. I always want my nuclear weapon to work when I ask it to. I never want it to go off unless I ask it to. Eric Schlosser’s Command and Control does a really good job of pointing out to where that always never dilemma has failed. But if you’ve got a country like China who’s rapidly creating new legs to its triad, all of a sudden you drive up the potential for accidents. And that’s something that we worry about quite a lot.

Also too, I’ll point out that one of the things that senators want to do as soon as they hear that China are increasing the number of nuclear weapons, is that they want the number of nuclear weapons in our arsenal that matches what the Chinese have and the Russians have together, OK? Is that a good idea? Is that not a good idea. For what it’s worth, I’m a fan of offsetting capabilities, not matching capabilities. There’s a tendency in our Congress, bless them, to see an adversary deploying a capability and then saying we need that too.

And so that’s actually traveled to, for example, the Russian development of, and let’s get this right, in orbit nuclear tipped anti-satellite weapon. You saw this in March Time. So the Russians have developed a new capability that would effectively make entire swathes of orbit uninhabitable for our satellite systems, which is a good thing to do if you’re Russia because we rely on our space assets for pretty much darn near everything in terms of our military command and control assets.

And so immediately in response, we had various members of Congress saying we should have that too. Well, the Russians don’t rely on space for command and control nearly as much as we do. So what we should be really thinking about is offsetting capabilities. And so all sorts of different questions about what the Chinese are up to. The Russians, Putin’s never seen a nuclear weapon he doesn’t like. So they’re deploying nuclear torpedoes, you might have heard.

And there’s also renewed conversations about dead hand nuclear systems. So there, you have some of the autonomy concerns matched with nuclear capabilities. So don’t move to Seattle, and perhaps thinking about don’t live don’t live in San Francisco. He also wants to develop and is tested a nuclear powered nuclear tipped missile, which is a terrible idea. You don’t want that to go boom. And indeed, he ended up irradiating part of Finland during one of the tests. So at the same time as you have the Chinese doing their quantitative increase and qualitative breadth, you’ve also got Russia qualitatively moving things as well.

At the same time, you’ve got the End of Arms control as we know it. So various different agreements have collapsed from the INF Treaty to new start more recently. And so there’s real questions about whether we might end up finding ourselves on a period in which we really do increase the number of nuclear weapons again moving forward. And this, of course, happens in the United States at the same time as we’re undergoing our own modernization effort.

And I should be very clear, the program of record does not say that the United States is increasing or broadening capability. It’s the Obama administration’s modernization plan that effectively tries to take type for type the triad. So we’re moving from the Minuteman III, ICBM, to GBSD Sentinel, ICBM. We’re moving from the Ohio class to the Columbia class of submarines. And we’re moving away from the B-2 to the B-21 bomber force. And we’re just doing it on a one for one basis.

But of course, we have conversations about how much that is costing, whether we need ICBMs moving forward, where it is what we might actually spend money, increasing capability. And of course, on the back end, you worry that the incremental increase in nuclear numbers might subsequently increase the likelihood of use. And one of the major debates is taking part in the field, and that I do some of the wargaming that my team does around is really on this low yield nuclear weapons question.

So the idea being that you might want to have low yield nuclear weapons in the US arsenal to match what the Russians have by way of non strategic nuclear weapons. But of course, how do we think about low yield nuclear weapons? Does that make them more usable? Is it more palatable if I’m causing small amounts of damage rather than large amounts of damage? And so that conversation is getting played out right now in terms of the submarine launched cruise missile with the nuclear tip, and specifically whether to deploy that on attack submarines or not.

Of course, the response to that potential development has been met with some of our colleagues, like Vipin Narang at MIT with derision, because obviously, the problem is that if I have a submarine surfacing, launching a cruise missile, and we have nuclear tipped capabilities in the arsenal, now our adversaries no longer know whether they have a nuke coming at them or a conventional asset coming at them. And of course, if it were me, I would assume the worst. And our fear is that our adversaries would too. And so you get escalation spirals from there.

OK, so that was the nuclear weapons. I mean, I guess I brought it up very briefly when I was talking about the plutonium pits. But things are also not going very well in the mundane side of the nuclear enterprise. So the recent congressional Strategic Posture commission report suggests that less than half of our facilities are fit for purpose in terms of the facilities at Lawrence Livermore, National Lab, Los Alamos, Oak Ridge National Laboratory. And so there are real pressures here in terms of us being able to actually feel the deterrent that we’ve come to rely on, let alone think about increases.

When it comes to the AI, hot take time. I’m a bit skeptical about whether AI changes a great deal. We’ve had AI capabilities inside of the military for a long time, nigh on six decades. And traditionally, we’ve used it for things like early warning systems, so signal detection algorithms, anomaly detection algorithms to figure out when adversaries are launching something hot at speed coming from a particular place, and/or to figure out whether they’re doing something unusual.

That said, even in the run up to the Russia, Ukraine crisis that Michaela mentioned, it was actually the blood movement, not the military exercises that was the smoking gun in the data that led to ODNI saying the Russians are going in. So we’ve had these capabilities for a long time. And ultimately, they’ve proved fairly effective.

We also use a lot of the tools that were developed in the Valley to manage supply chains in the military space, too. So predictive maintenance, predictive logistics, right? Moving my maintainers and materiality around the world, such that I have a probabilistic rate of failure in my F-35s, for example. It’s higher than the military would want. And so we use algorithms that help move things around. So in the same way that Tim Cook justifies being CEO of Apple, our military planners, right, also are moving things around the chessboard based on various different algorithms.

But what all of these applications have in common is that the failure modes are fairly mundane. So ultimately, if my engineers and my material are missing one another in Okinawa by three days, I’ll get yelled at, but nobody’s going to die, OK? So one of the applications that does start to worry people is on the decision support side. So the use of various different AI tools to actually help militaries around the world make decisions about what it is they ought to be developing, when they be they ought to be deploying capability, and when they should go, go, go.

And again, there’s a really good video by the Future of Life Institute called TLDR that you can go and watch, that really makes that risk salient. One of my bugbears with that particular video that really pushes on automation bias concerns where members of the military getting an algorithm saying, “You must escalate, you must escalate,” and the human operator is effectively saying, “Yes, yes, yes, yes, yes,” because they’re getting service by the model so quickly. So that’s an automation bias problem.

The issue is what’s the data that actually goes into these algos? So we’re all care carrying, right, academics in this field. And we know data sets like correlates of war, Vinny may have coded it once upon a time. Are we comfortable using correlates of war or MIDS and other data set in the field to make decisions about war and peace? Or even some of the work that I do. Are we comfortable with my synthetic data generating war games to be used to make decisions about war and peace.

I see people saying, no, not really, right? And so can we imagine a world where militaries were overestimate the capability of what you’re able to get here. So there’s massive training data concerns. So altogether, given the failure modes and the potential deleterious consequences of deploying the assets, there’s a lot to be reticent about in terms of how AI is going to be changing warfare, at least any time soon.

Where things actually are moving the needle is actually, again, somewhere where we don’t spend enough attention. But intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance capabilities. Here at Berkeley, we’re developing all sorts of new, different types of sensing, whether it’s synthetic aperture radar, or hyper and multispectral imagery tools, new IR imagery tools. And all of those are getting deployed on increasingly interesting delivery platforms.

From micro satellite systems to pseudo satellite systems, such that we have a pretty good sense of everything that’s actually happening on the Earth’s crust, more or less in real time if you really want to spend the resources to get it. And that has use cases in all sorts of different places from finance, but also in war. And so that really has moved the needle. Indeed, in my view, the Chinese have actually changed their nuclear posture because of these capabilities, and because they feel that we know where their land based mobile missiles are, rightly or wrongly, given these areas, different types of assets.

So will these technologies ultimately change the game? When I say drone to my students, they often think of things like the MQ 9 Reaper, right? Massive systems, 60-foot wingspan, top speed of 300 miles an hour, right? Really sexy system, OK? But the ways that drones are actually being used in the battlefield today are DJI quadcopters coming out of China. That people are throwing over the horizon and looking at the trench next to them.

Indeed, the war in Ukraine has a lot in common with World War I, right? At the same time, as I talked to you about AI, new types of nuclear systems, et cetera. And so that’s something that we really need to square. So right, ultimately, be wary of the science fiction of it all, and really think hard about how things are shifting. So we’re really looking for the discussion to follow, happy to pull on any of these particular technological threads. Looking forward to this session. Cheers.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Thank you, Andrew. I’m going to ask you later whether AI will kill us all. That’s a different issue.

A different question.

Use against the Russians or the Chinese. OK, next, we have Daniel. Thank you, Daniel. Sargent.

[DANIEL SARGENT] All right, Andrew has talked about the future, so I’m going to talk about the past. And I’m going to lead off with a set piece juxtaposition of classical political theorists. And the problem that I want to use these theorists to interrogate is the political nature of man. To speak to this transcendent question, I’m going to summons two venerable authorities, Thomas Hobbes and Jean-Jacques Rousseau. These canonical theorists of politics, as most of you know, proceed from opposing premises.

For Hobbes, of course, the political nature of man is malignant to the marrow. Avarice, fear, and strife are for Thomas Hobbes, are primordial political condition. It is, of course, to emancipate ourselves from the primordial violence of this pre political condition, Hobbes argued, that we build political institutions. We created a political hierarchy, Hobbes speculated, in order to escape from the primordial violence that Hobbes calls the war with a double R E, of all against all.

This entirely speculative anthropology is, of course, the point of departure for a great deal of modern theorizing about international relations. The familiar premise that world politics are defined by the condition of anarchy, by the dearth of superior authority, that is endures in the writings of canonical theorists from Machiavelli to Morgenthau and beyond.

Inter-state war in the Hobbesian paradigm is both rooted in our fundamental political natures as human beings, and a consequence of institutions that have evolved over time to constrain substate violence, but have failed in the containment of violence at the inter-state level. Wherein, the war of all against all endures, much as Michaela observed in her opening remarks.

Let’s turn from Hobbes to my counterpoint, Rousseau. Jean-Jacques Rousseau’s founding premise is, of course, the reverse of Hobbes’s. For Rousseau, the political nature of man is inherently benign. For Rousseau, what creates conflict and strife is the historical advent of political complexity. The invention of private property, Rousseau argued, thrust men and women into a new era of exploitation and history, into a new era of violence and war. War, in short, is for Rousseau, a result of political institutions, flawed institutions, not of inherent human nature.

Now, back in the early modern period, the conflict between these opposing views of man’s political nature was, in essence, a normative dialogue, a normative conversation for the simple reason that theorists lacked hard evidence upon which to predicate their conclusions. The political nature of pre-political man varieties in the 17th and 18th century was inherently unknowable. Today, we are happily able to bring a little bit more evidence to bear on the question.

Archeological, surviving, anthropological, and even zoological reasoning deployed by way of analogy, points to an overwhelming conclusion. Hobbes was right. War is hardwired into human nature. This, I believe, is a crucial premise from which to interrogate the proposition that war is today back. If war is inherent to human nature, if it’s part of who we are as human beings, we’re going to have to proceed in recognition of the reality that war never went away. The propensity to initiate and to escalate war is part of who we are as humans.

And yet, the historical record nonetheless records a measurable reduction in the incidence of war over the very long term. Conclusions derived from the skeletal remains of hunting gathering peoples indicate, in the pre-political condition, a propensity to violent death far beyond what even the most violent modern societies record. Put simply, we are far less likely to perish at the hands of our fellow human beings today than was the case for our pre-political forebears, say, 10,000 years ago.

How should we explain the macro historical reduction in the incidence of violent death, in the incidence of war? Two hypotheses seem to me plausible. One is moral evolution. I should be clear. Here, I am not talking about changes in our biological natures. Such evolution occurs only at timescales far vaster than the horizons of human history. Rather, I am talking about the possibility of evolution in our normative or cultural precepts.

The second possible explanation for the long term decline of organized violence involves institutions. Perhaps we might contemplate. We have succeeded in building institutions capable of restraining, at least to a degree, are immense and amply demonstrated propensity to violence. In the minutes that remain, I would like to contemplate the utility of each of these explanatory hypotheses with regard to the problem of war in the contemporary era, and I’m going to focus first upon the institutional hypotheses.

Utopians in the modern era have recurrently conceived institutional solutions as a necessary, inevitable response to the problem of war. The examples range from Immanuel Kant’s Federation of Republics, a possibility, of course, discussed in Kant’s famous essay on perpetual peace, to Woodrow Wilson’s League of Nations.

What such frameworks have sought to accomplish in the end is the submission, at least to degrees, of the decision making sovereignty of states to some kind of superior political authority. World government at some level has always situated at the heart of institutionalist solutions to the problem of war. Such solutions, I would argue, have for the most part, achieved little of any real consequence in the modern era, except perhaps at the regional scale.

European integration is probably the outstanding example of a Kantian or institutionalist solution to the problem of war. Elsewhere, whatever institutional solutions human beings have devised to the problem of war have been far more provisional, far more ad hoc in nature than those that Immanuel Kant and Woodrow Wilson envisioned.

The interlude of great power, peace that occurred during the second half of the 20th century, I would argue, owed far less to the institutional accomplishments of the United Nations than it owed to the accidental geopolitical equipoise, the nuclear standoff that we call the Cold War. Put bluntly, the immense power of nuclear deterrence functioned for a time as a meaningful disincentive to the initiation and escalation of great power war.

What this means, I think, is that we have achieved no meaningful institutional solution to the problem of war. Rather, the operative question for today is whether the ad hoc solutions that were improvised in the aftermath of the Cold War– sorry, in the aftermath of the Second World War, in the era of the Cold War, that is, retain the power that they manifested in the classical Cold War era. I would argue that they do not.

Nuclear deterrence has shown itself to be incapable of restraining conventional aggression, as we see in the case of Ukraine. Similarly, alliance relationships have also demonstrated themselves incapable of constraining military escalation by subordinate allies, as we see in the Biden administration’s demonstrated incapacity to constrain the war that Israel is today waging against Hezbollah in Lebanon. In short, the limited ad hoc solutions to the problem of war that emerged during the second half of the 20th century are today demonstrating themselves to be wholly unequal to the awesome and eternal task of war prevention.

Let’s turn then to the problem of culture. To what degree has cultural or moral evolution meaningfully constrained our propensity to wage war? The first point that I want to make is that we should not underestimate the power of culture to exercise a pacifying influence on the affairs of states. This is the point at which I may part company with my colleagues in political science. I would argue that during the medieval era, Europe lacked meaningful institutional solutions to the problem of war.

But the ideological power of the universal church nonetheless functioned as a potent cultural discouragement to the initiation and escalation of inter-state violence. My colleague in the history department, Jeff Koziol, has actually written recently about this medieval experience in his excellent book, The Peace of God. Conversely, I would argue that the erosion in the 19th and 20th centuries of the pacifying force of Christian ideology in Europe led to the rise of secular ideologies unconstrained by the kinds of normative commitment that Christianity had once affirmed.

The result was, of course, the 20th century, probably the most violent century in the long and torrid history of complex human civilization. Here, we might also reflect on the secular ideology of human rights, an ideology that in our times has sought to present itself as a universal and general solution to the problem of war.

Does the ideology of human rights not affirm, after all, the unique and singular value of all human life? Does it not affirm the universality of rights, perhaps including the right to be free from premature and violent death? Unfortunately, the secular ideology of human rights are modernity’s alternative to the secular constraints that Christendom once imposed upon European states, has demonstrated itself in the absence of effective enforcement mechanisms to be, essentially, incapable of constraining war, as the torrid history of substate war in the second half of the 20th century amply showcases.

To the extent that culture has exercised any meaningful, constraining effect on our propensity to engage in violent conflict, I would argue that the operative cultural constraints in our times have originated, not in metahistorical commitments, whether secular or Christian, but rather, in the lived experience of the recent past, in recent historical memory. that is.

On this concluding point, I’m going to offer you just one piece of suggestive evidence. In the summer of 1972, the Soviet Communist Party General Secretary, Leonid Brezhnev, hosted Richard Nixon for a summer meeting. It was held just outside of Moscow in a luxurious dacha. During the course of this conversation, Brezhnev at one point turned to Nixon and declared, of course, a war between us would be wholly unthinkable. We can all agree on that. Both men, it hardly needs to be said, were veterans of the Second World War. Brezhnev, of the Eastern Front, Nixon of the Pacific Theater.

Today, their generation has passed from the scene, and we as a result, no longer possess the tangible human connection to the horrors of past wars that their lived experience provided. The kind of historical reconstruction that writers like me produce, I would suggest, is a poor substitute for that lived experience.

As a result, I would conjecture, the cultural constraints on the initiation and escalation of warfare that we initiated from the Second World War are today fraying. In the absence of effective institutional constraints, constraints that we have failed to devise over the past 70 or 80 years, we must see the inevitable progression of cultural and historical memory as a source for grave concern.

Our problem, I will conclude, is not that war is back, at least not yet. Rather, our problem is that our experience of war has faded, especially in the West, and it is perhaps in the depleted soil of our cultural memory. A cultural memory from which war is all too absent that the seeds of new cataclysms may be germinating. That’s my optimistic conclusion.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Well, it’s been a real fun day so far, so maybe I should just stayed home. Yes, so I think I’m not going to ask questions. I’m going to actually open it up to the audience. And if the audience doesn’t have any questions, I have about 25 questions to ask you, but I will refrain from doing that. So why don’t I just ask for questions? Just introduce yourself if you can. And please try to ask questions, not make statements if you can. Yes, sir. Just introduce yourself.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Yeah, I wasn’t– hoping I wouldn’t be first. Hi, I’m Damian Shanks Dumont. I’m a PhD candidate and Berkeley Law’s jurisprudence in social policy program, where I study international legal history. With respect to, it seemed all of you were struggling with this idea that war is back, and the idea that it was ever gone in the first place. And it strikes me as– and I promise this is in a statement, we’ll get to a question, but it’s background. With respect to Professor Mattes’s point that there’s the threshold that’s written into the formalistic criterion in the Geneva Conventions of 1,000 deaths.

But there’s a secondary criteria on as between the first and the second additional protocols between international armed conflict and non-international armed conflict. And it seems non-international conflict, or what we would colloquially call Civil War, has been a constant presence this entire time. And that still, that rhetoric of non-international conflict still plays a big role in the wars that we’re seeing today.

Putin discussed the invasion of Ukraine as a police action, and today, the denial of Palestinian sovereignty is a big part of the retributivist flavor of the actions with respect to Gaza and now the extenuation of the war against Hezbollah, and the Houthi rebels, these use of indiscriminate weapons that would be blatantly a violation of international humanitarian law, and yet are done and justified through this idea of the criminal law corollary of what Bush’s war on terror was, right? Non-state enemy combatants.

So I would like, I guess, the ruminations of all of you on what role, retribution, and the way that the wars are being played out now in the popular consciousness, in the rhetoric of state officials, and in the media as not actually interstate war, but some third thing that has the flavor of criminal law and yet has these effects of being international war.

[AGGARWAL] Start with you?

[MICHAELA MATTES] I was hoping to get some more time to think about it. I mean, there was a lot in your question, so I’m– can you just state it really succinctly?

[AUDIENCE MEMBERS] How important is it that today, most of the wars, that the wars that we’re seeing are not justified and spoken about as if they’re interstate wars, i.e., World War II, but rather as police actions or war against terrorists, or the inherent right of self-defense as against non-state actors?

[MICHAELA MATTES] I guess one, it’s not directly in answer to your question, but a thing to think about. So there’s some interesting work in international politics about why it is that we have seen a decline in formal declarations of war. It used to be the case that countries would formally declare war, and they don’t anymore. And so there’s some debate about why that is. And some would say that it is actually to try to circumvent some of the constraints of international law that have become much stronger, of course, in the aftermath of World War II. And so we’re not seeing that as much anymore.

Other arguments are more that you don’t want to be seen as an aggressor, right? So I think that, so in part, that maybe would be one way to think about it. The reason there are these statements that what Russia is doing is a police action, or that emphasizes the not inter-state nature, is a way to try to minimize the appearance of international aggression, which I think there are strong norms against that at this point in the world. And the more countries do that, the weaker though, those norms are going to be.

[VINNIE AGGARWAL] Andrew, do you want to add something?

[ANDREW REDDIE] Yeah no, I mean, I think Michaela is spot on. And also too, obviously, there’s a reputation benefit from using that type of language, but there’s also a material benefit. So if you’re Russia, you get to– I’ll turn this back on again. You get to escape the sanctions regime, because you’re able to convince some number of countries that the US action is inappropriate, given the language that you’re using.

To give you a tech flavor on the question, militaries have long been entirely agnostic as to whether it’s a Civil War or a state-based war in terms of the lessons that they’re learning. So the historical example, often, is the Spanish Civil War that effectively created the conditions for blitzkrieg from the Germans. So the Germans were effectively learning from the Spanish Civil War and then subsequently using that. And again, we have all of this conversation today about, well, what is it that the Chinese are learning vis a vis a Taiwan Straits contingency from the war in Ukraine?

And are we learning, potentially, the– ignoring the lessons from the Ukraine in terms of how we should be retooling the US military, given that we tend to like large programs that are incredibly expensive, where the cost of force exchange ratios are never going to be in our favor. And should we be moving more toward attritable systems, for example? And so we’re having that debate as well. And so for the military planning perspective, war is war. I don’t care what you call it. I’m going to learn my lessons from it either way.

[AGGARWAL] Daniel.

[DANIEL SARGENT] I’ll be succinct. Look, I don’t know that the phenomenon you describe is especially novel. The US wages wars in the 19th century against the Spanish empire, against Mexico on the pretext that these states are unable to constrain transnational acts of aggression against the United States. So I think what you’re describing is an old theme.

I don’t see, I’m afraid, international law as a institution that has demonstrated a particularly robust capacity to protect the inhabitants of weak and failing states against acts of warfare by better organized neighbors. I think the only meaningful defense that we have seen to such acts of warfare is the organization of a more effective state.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK, Jack. I know who you are, Jack. Just introduce yourself.

[JACK CITRIN] Yeah, I want to say that these were fabulous presentations. Really brilliant. Since I retired a few years ago, I’ve avoided as much as possible political science discussions, but I’m really happy I came to this. I just want to ask one very question. The underlying premise may be unspoken, is that war is a bad thing. Avoiding war is really [INAUDIBLE]. Maybe war is the right thing for a particular state to do at a particular time.

And sure, there can be costs, but if you take the example of Polk initiating a phony war with Mexico, certainly, if you think about the long run benefit, to the US is quite clear, maybe not morally, but in terms of all kinds of material. And I think that’s often the case. And so sometimes, you take in the case of Israel, preemption has often been their strategy, given that they’re surrounded by people who don’t accept their existence. So maybe in terms of war is back, it’s one-sided. The question never went away. I think you’ve convinced us all.

No.

But the particular instances can sometimes, I would think from the perspective of the actor, be rational choice. Just a simple, rational choice. This is to our benefit, and to hell with the UN and to hell with everyone.

[MICHAELA MATTES] No. That one, I’m happy to go first on. When I teach my students in conflict management class, I often struggle with this because they think all conflict is bad. And my reaction is like, no. I mean, sometimes it’s conflict or a really terrible piece. And so that it’s not necessarily a bad thing, I think, is it rational from an individual state actors? Well, our series would suggest it does not. But I think the question more is that normatively always bad or good?

And I don’t think it is normatively always bad to go to war. I mean, I am happy as a German that the US decided to go to war with Germany in World War II. I mean, that was the right thing to do. It was the better thing to do. So certainly, think an interesting extension here is pressing for a ceasefire. That may actually be a bad idea, sometimes to press for a ceasefire fire.

We know from research in international relations, both civil wars and inter-state conflict, if the parties are pushed to a ceasefire too quickly before beliefs have converged about who will likely win at what cost, those types of peace deals do not last very long. So, yes, you’re saving people in the moment, but you’re actually risking a recurrence of conflict later and you may be overall worse off than that. So I totally agree that war is not normatively undesirable under all circumstances.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Good. Andrew.

[ANDREW REDDIE] Yeah, I mean, one of the things that Fearon’s bargaining model really struggles with the productive aspects of war as well. So I’m going to take this in a tech direction. No surprise there. I mean, despite the fact that the Valley likes to ignore it, a lot of the inventions that came out of the surrounding 100 miles or so were funded ultimately by DOD. So with thanks to the US military for GPS, the internet, semiconductors, or even prior to that, right? Research that happened in military contexts leading to nuclear energy and nuclear medicine, et cetera. And so there is a productive side of it. Now, right, do you necessarily want that, right? Probably not. But you do get all of these externalities out of it as well.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Daniel.

[DANIEL SARGENT] Sure. Look, I agree with the premise of the question, and I actually agree with the historical case that you invoke. But I think risk assessment always involves two dimensions. One is probabilistic, the other involves the impact that the eventuality would produce. And I do think when you think about those two dimensions of risk impact, you have to think about great power war or systemic war in the nuclear age as an eventuality that would be unambiguous and unacceptably atrocious.

And that’s a reality that I think does bear powerfully on any conversation about war in the contemporary era, and especially on any efforts to assess the risks and prospects of war in relation to historical experience. So I would very much align with historians and political scientists who take seriously the transformative impact of the nuclear revolution for our discussion about war. And I think it has to be reflected upon in the relation to the question that you posed, Jack.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Thank you, Daniel. So next question. Yes, in the back. Could you introduce yourself? Oh, you have the mic. Did you have a question?

I do.

OK, we’ll ask you and then we’ll go back.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] And thank you for your presentation. I have actually three sets of questions. My name is Julian, I’m a visiting scholar in sociology. Sorry, my three sets of questions. The first is about the role of church in designing mechanisms of governance, then the distribution of the experience of war, and then the space for moral in today’s war. And I’ll try to connect them together. So you say that during the middle age, church was some sort of coping mechanism for waging war.

I would say also that historians are sure that the peace of God were also the war against the others. It was very common for church leaders to go to war. It was very common to go to war for the formation of knights and the whole hierarchy. So I’m wondering, which type of regulating mechanisms do you really see at work during that time that would inform today’s war?

Second, you mentioned that there was the first said experience of war was fading right now in the West. I’m quite surprised to hear that because I see also the amount of veterans in the United States. And I’m wondering as well, what the other scholars here make of the fact that perhaps there is a professionalization of war in the West, but the firsthand experience of war and conflicts around the world is certainly rising through refugees, migrations, and conflicts.

So what to make of the distributary between the professional of wars in the West and a civil society is increasingly enrolled into violent conflicts. And third, about moral. That may be more to Andrew, but is there a space for moral discussions in AI wars? And what is it today? Thanks.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK, lots of questions. Short answers, please. Start with you, Daniel.

[DANIEL SARGENT] Great. Look, I don’t want to take too long on the question. It’s difficult to make statistically well-founded comparisons between medieval and modern international politics. And I’m not presuming to deny that crusades occurred or that they were violent. But when you look at the scale of medieval European warfare and compare it to the scale of modern warfare, or for that matter of pre medieval Roman era warfare, you’re looking at a more marginal phenomenon in the life of the society. And I think that does reflect, to a degree, the power of cultural or normative constraints upon state behavior.

Your second question about– it’s a good question, and I actually hope that more robust representation of veterans in our Congress can exercise a pacifying effect on our statecraft as a society. But if you compare veteran representation among members of Congress, it’s a very easy metric to deploy. The evidence is unambiguous. Our lived experience of total warfare as a society is today minuscule by comparison with what it was for the post World War II generation.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK Michaela, do you want to add anything?

[MICHAELA MATTES] I guess just a couple of thoughts on the war fatigue argument. I mean, my first reaction, and this is not a really good one to Daniel was like, well, I mean, in World War II, they should have learned from World War I and they didn’t, right? But I mean, of course, I don’t believe the one case ever shows something to be incorrect. I think there is– I do agree, though, with the argument that, yes, there are many, of course, soldiers in the US who served in Afghanistan and Iraq, but they’re professional military, and they’re professional soldiers.

And so most people, I don’t think, engage with them very much, right? So it’s not a shared experience among us in the same way that World War II would have been or World War I would have been. And in terms of the experience of individuals in war, there’s some interesting work in international relations where actually, politicians who served in the military but did not fight tend to be more war prone or conflict prone, more willing to use force, than even ones that never served.

And the ones who are the most– sorry, the most warped– sorry, the most conflict prones are the ones who served but didn’t fight, and the ones who served but did fight tend to be actually quite avoidant of conflict. So that it’s a little bit of a mixed pattern.

[ANDREW REDDIE] Yeah, really good question. I mean, as you can imagine, there is a massive moral discussion around AI and military integration here on campus. Stuart Russell in engineering school, is a major driver behind the campaign to stop killer robots, which you might have heard of. He’s also fairly high up in the Future of Life Institute that I name checked a couple of times that are producing various different videos to try to drive some public sentiment around these moral concerns.

Toby Ord and Ewen MacAskill, the longtermism movement, you might have heard of. So for them, AI, climate, and nuclear are the three things that we need to be focused on when you’re thinking about risk over the centuries type term. And then more prosaically, right, we have inside of the UN, a group of government experts focused on lethal autonomous weapons issues. Although there, I’ll point to the clashing of realpolitik on the one hand and normative concerns on the other.

And so lots of discussion inside of that framework about the degree to which lethal autonomous weapons are distinct from chemical weapons, or landmines, or cluster munitions. And there’s something of an argument that ultimately, we get agreements like those because they’re no longer militarily useful. And indeed, where they are military useful, like here in the US, we don’t sign the agreements. And so given the lack of certainty around where and under what conditions these capabilities will actually be useful, it strikes me as very unlikely we’re likely to see anything fairly strong coming out of that loss process.

And what we usually tend to find is that the Russians and the Chinese will back one particular international governance conversation, and the Americans and the Europeans will back another one. So, for example, in the cyber domain, we’ve got the GGEs, the group of government experts that are now led by Russia, China. And we the OEWG, the open ended working group, and they actually can’t even come up with a list of common definitions around cyberspace. And so we’ve got the same problem happening in lethal autonomous weapons. That said, I still got to go to Geneva and have the conversation, so that’s fun. But yeah, it’s alive.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Good. We had somebody in the back. Do you have a mic there?

Yeah.

That’s great. Can you just introduce yourself?

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hi, I’m Cat Smith. I’m a fourth year undergraduate studying political science and legal studies. And my question is more specifically for Professor Reddie, but the rest of you are more than welcome to answer. Also, thank you for being here. It’s been an awesome panel to listen to. You talked a lot about the great powers of Russia and China specifically, and the development of nuclear programs. Is there a US agenda for the proliferation of programs for more minor powers such as North Korea, India, Pakistan, and Iran are also programs that are talked about as potentially developing? And how is that being addressed? And then curious if surveillance might be the answer for that, because as you said, China is changing its posture. So how could that work potentially for minor powers?

[ANDREW REDDIE] Yeah, good questions all. So with regards to North Korea, ultimately, that’s what our missile defense capability is supposed to be addressing. Missile defense, by the way, being an autonomous weapon that’s already deployed and would not work if you put a human on the loop. So that’s what that’s for. Obviously, we fear about Iranian proliferation. And also, too, you would fear other countries in the region also responding. So, for example, it’s very unlikely that if Iran were to get the bomb, that Saudi Arabia wouldn’t follow immediately.

Just one note there. When Iran produces its first weapon, it will not announce it. Like the North Koreans before them, you’ll want to have an arsenal that you think is large enough to give you some semblance of survivability. So you’re not likely to know that Iran has a weapon until they have on the order of 30, 50, et cetera, and have figured out how to deploy them, so some sort of delivery system.

India, Pakistan, super interesting. Traditionally, Pakistan was our ally. The war on terror got a little bit icky. Now, we look to India and try to use India as a counterbalance to China. And so we brought them into an arrangement called the quad. The problem with the Indians, of course, is that they still actually buy military equipment from who? Moscow, and have long ties to Russia. And so we have the enemy of my enemy is my friend dynamic, but everybody’s not on the same side.

And so that’s one of the major bugbears that I have with Cold War 2.0, as the way of describing this reality. In some ways, our reality is far more complicated. So I’m just back from Omaha and STRATCOM, and they talk about the 2 plus peer problem. It’s the fact that you’ve got to get this, right, videos where it talks about spaghetti or noodle bowls. It’s noodle bowls of alliance frameworks, and it’s terribly complicated.

On our side, for what it’s worth, the South Koreans are fairly nuclear latent. They can probably produce a capability pretty fast. The Japanese, the same, the Germans the same. And it was obviously here in this building where Walt said, “Give nuclear weapons to everybody, the world would be safer.” I’m not so sure he’s right. But I think that whether we still have the same number of proliferated states in 2030 as we do in 2024, I don’t feel terribly good about it. Not to be even more pessimistic than we’ve been the rest of the time.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Michaela, do you want to add anything?

[MICHAELA MATTES] I wanted to add something pessimistic. Same here. I mean, looking at Iran, right? Just took a big hit to its axis of evil with the decimation of Hezbollah and Hamas. So what are they going to do, right? I mean, it seems to me like shifting more towards nuclear is one way of trying to bolster up. So whatever that will lead to, we don’t know. But just making things a little bit more pessimistic.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] I think we have enough pessimism. Does anybody have anything optimistic? All right, let’s take more questions. Oh yeah, Rosy.

Hi.

Introduce yourself.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] A professor of political science at Temple University, and visiting scholar at the Berkeley Economy and Society Initiative. This is a really fascinating conversation. Just a couple, I guess a question based on a few things have been said. So [INAUDIBLE] mentioned rationality around war. And then Julian mentioned the crusades, right? And I’m just thinking about, Daniel Sargent, what you mentioned about the universal ideological power of the church. How about just war? And the idea of there may be some morality to go to war to defend certain ideas and powers, interests, and so forth. So I thought if you have some thoughts about that, and welcome the other panelists too. Thanks.

[DANIEL SARGENT] Absolutely. No, I think that’s a great question. And of course, just war theory, beginning really with Augustine, is the foundational step on the genealogical progression that takes us to the modern Geneva and Hague Conventions, to the institutionalization of rules of war. What we should make of such rules, I think in the end, that’s a normative question.

I think that the effort to institutionalize rules of war entails a recognition of the legitimacy of the premise of Jack’s question, that war can sometimes be just a necessary. It probably also concedes the permanence of war. It may have what we consider to be a normative benefit insofar as it meaningfully constrains the brutality with which war is waged.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Anybody else want to add or should we continue?

Hey.

Yes, sir.

Hi, so I’m TK.

Please introduce yourself.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hi, I’m TK. I’m a graduate of history PEIS here from Berkeley. I work in the higher education field. I won’t go specifically into it. So we know in the 1960s and ’70s, there were major militant movements on student campuses. They took direct action, violent and non-violent, like People’s Park, right? Black Panther Party. And if you look at the US diplomatic cables around the world at that time, they’re saying like, “Hey, this is making us look bad, right? The intensity of the fighting internally, right? We better loosen up, right? We better scale down, right?

There were talks like this, both the way they treated people here and abroad. But during the Iraq war protests, they said, these were the largest anti-war protests in history and was just ignored, right? It was just ignored because they were very calm, orderly. So I’m just wondering if you think that the lack of– the more pacifist approach to, or the lack of more direct action contributes to the kind of wars we are engaged in right now, and what seems to me to be a disregard for protest movements in general.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK, who wants to start?

[ANDREW REDDIE] I’ll give a crack at it. I mean, ultimately, the salience of national security issues and the body politic, particularly in the US, is relatively low, and always has been. I mean, you can see that in the polling around the election, for example. National security ranks well behind everyone else. Everything else you could possibly be worried about from the economy, which is usually number one, to abortion issues, et cetera. And so the degree to which you’re going to agitate for any particular national security concern is going to be low, all else equal anyway, despite the fact that, of course, that’s the only place where the executive actually has privileged access to policymaking. Terribly ironic. They don’t control the Fed. So I would note that.

I mean, a recent event that sounds similar was Project Maven. So we had in the Project Maven episode in 2017, a group of Google engineers that said we’re not going to complete a DOD contract, which was focused on bringing autonomy into DOD operations, entirely not kinetic, right? So not war facing capabilities. And that was something of a black eye for the government. And they had to think really seriously about who to use in the future because, of course, DOD bringing in Google was their attempt to bring in the next generation of company that wasn’t Lockheed, Raytheon, Honeywell, et cetera. And that was something of a black eye.

Now, of course, after Russia, Ukraine, a lot of the tech companies are now very much in line with the US government. And so Microsoft, for example, provide much of the cyber backbone to Ukraine. And you also have various luminaries in business like Eric Schmidt actually writing the drone policy in terms of thinking who they should be procuring from for Ukraine as well. And so that relationship is very different in 2017 to 2024. So it can turn quite quickly.

[DANIEL SARGENT] Yeah, can I just push back a little bit of the premise. For all of the scale and volume of the anti-war movement, Nixon wins the ’68 election and then escalates the war. And then in ’72, he trounces McGovern, who runs as a peace candidate. So I’m not sure that protest does have such a powerful, constraining effect on domestic politics, as your question presumes. But I do think that you’re right to suggest that domestic politics can be a powerful source of constraint on this country’s, or for that matter, any Democratic country’s participation in war.

That’s the premise of the Democratic peace theory, which has shown itself to be quite robust when tested against the empirical evidence. And I think the historical evidence also affirms the point. The US is slow to get involved in World War II because of the power of domestic politics. Congress in 1938 comes close to passing a pacifist amendment to the Constitution. Voters can and do restrain state behavior, but I’m not convinced that violent protest is the most effective means for domestic politics to exercise that constraining effect.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Michaela, you work on these issues a little bit.

[MICHAELA MATTES] Well, yeah. So I was going to say that I think that probably a bit more optimistic about the role of public opinion in constraining leaders, and although you sound like it, too. I mean, I’m thinking for one, the US is a special case, right? The US doesn’t have to care. Americans don’t have to care that much about the rest of the world, right? They tend to be safe from other conflicts. If you are Israel, or if you are in Taiwan, or if you’re Japan, or if you’re Germany, international politics matters a lot more to you in those countries.

And I think we’re certainly seeing in Israel, right, that there’s quite a bit of support for going after Hezbollah. And in fact, it’s strengthening Netanyahu’s government. But even in the US, right, probably one of the reasons we’re not seeing President Biden be stricter with Israel and trying to constrain their war against Hamas and now about Hezbollah, is to worry about what that will do to the election, right? I mean, Michigan is a swing state and there’s real concern about, yeah, what progressives might think, what Arab American voters might think. So I think we are seeing these things matter in some ways.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK we have time for one last question.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hi, my name is Juno and I’m a PhD student in the political science department. And my question is about the role of private industries in the grand scheme of war. Because if we’re looking from a overtime perspective, I guess, one of another pole or another factor that has maybe has not received a lot of attention in today’s discussion is the premise that private industries have had a overtime increase across history. And I’m just curious to the extent to which the accessibility of new emerging technologies could these firms have. Or for example, maybe Tesla can have space capabilities on its own.

And I’m wondering if these increasing involvement and the capacity for firms to do so may have impacts on the interest of inter-state war in terms of firms that may benefit from great power competition, for example, maybe middle power, private industries might benefit from increased competition. And I was just like to hear more about what would be the role of these firms, whether they would be deterring war or whether they would complicate war or things like that. Thank you.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] So maybe quick last responses, and you can make general comments if you’d like to since there’s one minute left.

[ANDREW REDDIE] Perfect. Give me an hour. Yeah, so I mean, Starlink’s the obvious example, and we’ve seen it play a role in Ukraine. And indeed, you can look at any number of the companies that we have newly created here in the US, whether it’s Anduril, Vannevar Labs, et cetera, that are at that intersection of industry and the role it’s supposed to be playing. I mentioned Microsoft before.

That said, though, it’s not a new phenomenon. So we’ve had your Lockheed, your Raytheons, et cetera, for a long period of time. And also too, BMW’s badge, right, is blue and white. Why is it blue and white? That was the propeller, right, on the Messerschmitts. So ultimately, private Mitsubishi, Toshiba, right? A lot of them came out of World War II as well. And so you’ve always had that private industry role inside of war making. So yeah, it’s a dissertation, for sure.

[AGGARWAL] Michaela, [MICHAELA MATTES] I don’t really have any profound thoughts. I also thought that it’s not new, right? The military industrial complex, we have talking for a long, long time about the role in conflict. It seems to me that there are competing interests, right? Different industries have different preferences. And what I’m not sure is what that aggregates up into.

[AGGARWAL] Finally, Daniel.

[DANIEL SARGENT] I’m going to go out on a limb and say that there has been real change. It’s interesting. You’re taking the position a historian would take. Nothing changes. And I sound more like a political scientist. Thomas Jefferson, when he’s minister to Paris, visits the Paris arsenal and reports back. “They have interchangeable parts for muskets. We need to emulate this.” And it’s interesting because what Jefferson is doing is engaging in industrial espionage against France for the benefit of the United States. But the espionage is conducted against a state-run arms manufacturing facility for the benefit of the state-run arms manufacturing facility.

And I think the episode is a powerful reminder of the centrality of state activity in early modern military fiscal states. Today, I think the relationship of the state to cutting edge military production is very, very different. The state has the power to initiate contracts and to set production priorities, but the state is not engaged in the work of manufacturing in the way that early modern states were. So I do think that there’s been real change. And the result may have been to subject state power somewhat more to the whims of private industry than was the case in the early modern world.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] All right, well, our time is up, but thank you all for your wonderful questions and thank you to the panelists.

[CLAPPING]

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

Authors Meet Critics

Authors Meet Critics: Puta Life: Seeing Latinas, Working Sex

Puta Life book cover

On Sept. 16, 2024, Social Science Matrix hosted an Authors Meet Critics panel focused on the book Puta Life: Seeing Latinas, Working Sex, by Juana María Rodríguez, Professor in the Department of Ethnic Studies at UC Berkeley.

In Puta Life, Juana María Rodríguez probes the ways that sexual labor and Latina sexuality become visual phenomena. Drawing on state archives, illustrated biographies, documentary films, photojournalistic essays, graphic novels, and digital spaces, she focuses on the figure of the puta—the whore, that phantasmatic figure of Latinized feminine excess.

Rodríguez’s eclectic archive features the faces and stories of women whose lives have been mediated by sex work’s stigmatization and criminalization—washerwomen and masked wrestlers, porn stars and sexiles. Rodríguez examines how visual tropes of racial and sexual deviance expose feminine subjects to misogyny and violence, attuning our gaze to how visual documentation shapes perceptions of sexual labor.

For this panel, Professor Rodriguez was joined in conversation by Clarissa Rojas, Associate Professor of Chicana/o Studies at UC Davis, and Courtney Desiree Morris, Associate Professor of Gender and Women’s Studies at UC Berkeley. The discussion was moderated by Alberto Ledesma, Assistant Dean for Diversity, Inclusion, and Equity in the Division of Arts & Humanities at UC Berkeley.

The Social Science Matrix Authors Meet Critics book series features lively discussions about recently published books authored by social scientists at UC Berkeley. For each event, the author discusses the key arguments of their book with fellow scholars. The panel was co-sponsored by the Center for Latin American and Caribbean Studies, the Center for Race and Gender (CRG), the UC Berkeley Department of Gender and Women’s Studies, and the UC Berkeley Department of Ethnic Studies.

Watch the video on YouTube.

Listen to the panel as a podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

 

PODCAST TRANSCRIPT

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[MARION FOURCADE] Hello, everyone. My name is Marion Fourcade, and I am the Director of Social Science Matrix. So if you don’t know us, Matrix is the flagship institute for the social sciences at Berkeley. Our purpose is to foster and to support exciting interdisciplinary collaborations and exchanges across the social sciences, like the exchange that you are about to hear today.

And for those of you who know us, you know that we have a lot of exciting stuff in store for you. So whether you’re interested in book panels, lectures, or conversations on today’s pressing issues, we have it.

I am especially delighted to open this semester with a panel discussion of Juana María Rodríguez’s book, published in 2023 by Duke University Press. Puta Life Seeing Latinas, Working Sex probes the visual representation of the figure of the “puta,” and how these representations have shaped the criminalization and stigmatization faced by sex workers. Juana María offers a masterful intersectional understanding of sexuality and sex work.

Today’s event is part of our Author Meets Critics series, which features critically engaged discussions about recent books by faculty and alumni in UC Berkeley’s Social Science Division. And I would be remiss not to mention that the talk today has a lot of co-sponsors. So I will list them all: the Center for Latin American and Caribbean Studies, the Center for Race and Gender, the UC Berkeley Department of Gender and Women’s Studies, and the UC Berkeley Department of Ethnic Studies.

Now before I turn it over to our panelists, let me briefly mention our upcoming events for the fall semester. I cannot go over the entire program. We will be there for a long time. But I will mention a few immediate highlights. Tomorrow, we are hosting sociologist Jacob Faber for a talk on racial inequality in mortgage access as part of our collaboration with the NSF-funded working group on Computational Research for Equity in the Legal System.

On September 30, we’ll open our Matrix on Point series with a panel on hidden wars and open wars and geopolitical tensions in the world today. And that panel, which is very exciting, is titled “War is Back,” ominously.

And know that we will host three more Author Meets Critics panels this semester, featuring books by Paul Pierson and Eric Schickler, that’s October; Yan Long, in November; and Stephanie Canizales, in December. So we have much more. So please sign up for our newsletter.

But it is now time for me to introduce our moderator, Alberto. So Alberto Ledesma grew up in East Oakland and received his undergraduate and graduate degrees from Berkeley. He earned a PhD in Ethnic Studies in 1996, and is a former faculty member at California State University, Monterey Bay, and also a lecturer in Ethnic Studies at US Berkeley.

He has held several staff positions at Berkeley, including Director of Admissions at the School of Optometry, and Writing Program Coordinator at the Student Learning Center. He’s the author of the award-winning illustrated autobiography, Diary of a Reluctant Dreamer.

He is currently the Assistant Dean for Diversity, Inclusion, and Equity for the Division of Arts and Humanities here at Berkeley. So without further ado, I’ll turn it over to Alberto. Thank you all for being here.

[APPLAUSE]

[ALBERTO LEDESMA] Thank you. Thank you so much. And it’s really a pleasure to be here, everyone. It is great to be here in this Author Meets Critics panel on Puta Life: Seeing Latinas, Working Sex, by Professor Juana María Rodríguez.

As someone who has explored the themes of identity, marginalization, and the immigrant experience in my own work, I’m particularly excited to moderate this discussion. Professor Rodríguez’s book resonates with me deeply as it delves into the complex visual representations of Latina sexuality and labor, themes that intersect with my own explorations of undocumented experiences and cultural identity.

Like my illustrated work, Diary of a Reluctant Dreamer, Puta Life uses visual media to examine how marginalized communities are perceived and portrayed. Both of our works grapple with the ways in which societal perceptions and legal structures impact the lives of Latinx individuals.

While my focus has been on undocumented experiences, Professor Rodríguez turns the lens to the often stigmatized work of sex work and Latina sexuality. In doing so, she challenges dominant narratives and seeks to humanize those who are frequently dehumanized by society.

Puta Life draws from an impressively diverse array of sources. This interdisciplinary approach allows for a nuanced examination of how visual culture shapes our understanding of race, gender, and sexuality.

I am particularly intrigued by Professor Rodríguez’s exploration of how visual documentation influences perceptions of sexual labor. As we begin our discussion, I encourage all of us to consider how Puta Life pushes us to reconsider our perceptions, and opens up new avenues for more ethical forms of relation and care.

And so I am thrilled to introduce now the distinguished panel. Juana María Rodríguez is a cultural critic, public speaker, and award-winning author who writes about sexual cultures, racial politics, and the many tangled expressions of Latina identity.

As a professor of ethnic studies, gender and women’s studies, and performance studies at UC Berkeley, she is author of Puta Life Latinas, Working Sex, Sexual Futures, Queer Gestures, and other Latina Longings, and Queer Latinidad: Identity Practices, Discursive Spaces. Dr. Rodríguez was honored by the Center for Gay and Lesbian studies with the prestigious Kessler award in recognition of her significant lifelong contributions to the field of LGBT studies.

Courtney Desiree Morris is a visual, conceptual artist and associate professor of gender and women’s studies at UC Berkeley. She is a social anthropologist and author of To Defend this Sunrise, Black Women’s Activism and the Authoritarian Turn in Nicaragua, which examines how Black women activists have resisted historical and contemporary patterns of racialized state violence, economic exclusion, territorial dispossession, and political repression from the 19th century to the present.

Her work has been published in American Anthropologist, the Bulletin of Latin American Research, the Journal of Women, Gender, and Families of Color, Makeshift, Feminisms in Motion and Asterisk. She is a regular contributing writer and editor at large for Strangers Guide and ASME award winning magazine about place.

Clarissa Rojas is a scholar, activist, poet, mama, and movement maker. Her mother’s Indigenous lineages in the Americas root her in the Arizona Sonora Desert. Clarissa grew up in Mexicali, Calexico and San Diego, Chula Vista, where her family migrated.

She lives in Oakland, in unceded Huichin, and is faculty in Chicanx studies, cultural studies, and gender and sexuality studies at UC Davis. Clarissa co-founded Insight, and has authored and co-edited multiple articles, special issues, and books on violence and transformation of violence, including color of violence, the inside anthology, community accountability, emerging movements to transform violence, and most recently, her writing appears in the Journal of Lesbian Studies and Abolition Feminisms.

So with that, I want to invite Professor Rodríguez. Would you please start by sharing your insights and the genesis of the arguments in your book, please.

[JUANA MARIA RODRIGUEZ] OK. Again, thank you so much for coming. And especially to my interlocutors, it really — I chose wonderful people. Like so many other feminine subjects, by the time I became a teenager, I had already been warned about not dressing like a puta by my mother, hailed as a Spic slut by my schoolmates, ogled, pinched, groped, and treated as an object for somebody else’s pleasure by the adult men in my life.

In other words, I had already been assigned the category of puta by the world, and only had to decide my relationship to it.

As an academic who has created a reputation for herself as a scholar of sexuality, I’ve been rewarded in unexpected ways for writing, quite explicitly sometimes, about my own erotic archive, even as I have also been dismissed or excluded from other opportunities.

These two might be considered forms of sex work, ways of working sex that are pleasurable, profitable, and dangerous in different ways and to different degrees. The differences matter. While this project is invested in probing the slippery boundaries that define what constitutes both sex and labor, it is also committed to challenging the moral and legal hierarchies that are assigned to those differences.

Because while we might consider all the ways that sex could be exchanged for social status, dinner, citizenship, or domestic harmony and a good night’s sleep, exchanging sex for money remains illegal.

Illegal means you can be arrested just for doing your job — denied employment, housing, citizenship, and a host of other state benefits. A criminalized occupation means you can be more easily blackmailed or have your educational and career accomplishments tarnished, something that happens all the time.

It can jeopardize the custody of your child, or worse, your adult children can be arrested and charged with procurement or pimping if they benefit economically from your labor. It means you can have your assets seized or have your social media accounts shut down if you’re even suspected of engaging in illicit activities.

Today, the shadow bans and bank seizures being leveled against Palestinian activists were all first enacted on sex worker communities and their advocates. These are some of the current realities faced by sex workers in the United States, made even more obscene through laws such as SESTA-FOSTA.

Now as a project of intellectual inquiry poised between Saidiya Hartman’s ideas of critical fabulation and Glissant’s right to opacity, Puta Life tracks the figure of the Latina sex worker across a range of visual surfaces to consider how stigma sticks to skin. So after an introduction, I offer two historical chapters, and the first is focused on this singular text, Registro de Mujeres Publicas: registry of public women.

In 1865, Maximilian Archduke of Austria, established a public policy aimed at regulating sex work, which required them to have their name and photograph entered into this single bound folio. And already in this image, we can see that the photo in the top-left has been purposefully lifted out of the record by whoever had the access, audacity, or means.

This is Guadalupe Romero playfully offering the camera just the slightest hint of a coquettish smile, pose lifting the hem of her elegantly styled dress just enough to offer a visual clue of her vocation. So that gesture sort of gets repeated multiple times, but no one else does it quite as well as Lupita.

This is my tocaya, my namesake, Juana María, and she just looks sad. Here’s another Juana, Juana Rivera: 20 years old, seamstress. I found 19 Juanas and two Juana Marías. Her biography states that on the 22nd of April, she returned her booklet because she was leaving the profession.

And the police department is advised to keep her under surveillance, mandase vigilar. Juana Rivera was being kept under surveillance to ensure that she was not continuing to profit from her own sexual labor while trying to evade these new systems of control.

Several times, I find the phrases “se fugo,” she escaped, marking all the ways these women were sexual fugitives who tried to elude capture, tried to escape not sex work, but the state’s systems of sexual control.

Within the pages of Registro, I find another figure that sparks my queer curiosity, a name and a face that appears just a little different from all the others. Their name is Felix. As I continue to stare at this photograph, my eye settles on the stain, the punctum, the open wound where the surface of the photograph has been scratched away.

Felix’s dark wide hand rests gently next to that spot, touching it tenderly. I too wish to touch the open wounds these archives pry open to lovingly tend for the lives held within these bounded pages.

I also discover another queer gem in the archive. It seems that in 1888, in nearby Havana, Cuba, another metropolis, there existed a briefly lived political party of sex workers. They called themselves “las horizontales,” the horizontal ones.

And they used their newspaper, La Cebolla, to call out the sexual and economic extortion they experienced at the hands of the police and to demand their rights as taxpaying workers, the same demands being made by sex workers today.

And even in these four short issues, there are two references to homosexuality, including a heartwarming lesbian poem. Maybe I’ll read it at the end. But again, speaking to the way sex work and queerness have always sort of been bound together.

If that chapter is focused on a singular tome, the next historical chapter presents a broad, far-reaching set of images to reflect about on the visual motifs that get attached to sex workers, as well as to think about the different ways that sex workers appear in the visual record.

I start with Felix Jacques Antoine Moulin, who earned a month in jail and a fine of 100 francs for producing obscene images, like this one. Nevertheless, a few short years later, the same photographer was sent to colonial Algeria to document the queer practices of the new French colony. He spent quite a bit of time in brothels there.

This 1853 image, L’odalisque á l’esclave, exemplifies many of the visual elements that will continue to be associated with sex work. An attachment to ideas of the foreign and exotic, primitive opulence – that tiger print – forms of queerness, and a proximity to Blackness.

These images are from the Storyville archive in New Orleans. The woman on the left is Lulu White, one of Storyville’s most storied Madams. She specialized in octoroon beauties, like herself, at a time when miscegenation was still illegal and scandalous, demonstrating how race itself functioned as a sexual category.

But sex workers are all over the archives of street photography, travel photography, and what would become art photography. Frequently, images would be marked with a street location as a kind of geotracker pointing you to a foreign location or perhaps a distant, exotic neighborhood in your own city.

Because they were out in the street, photographers viewed sex workers as free models, public women they didn’t have to pay for, but whose images they felt entitled to capture. In fact, sex workers show up in the camera rolls of almost every noted photographer, male and female.

This is an image from Eve Arnold. And it initially appeared in Esquire Magazine in an article titled “Havana, the Sexiest City in the World.” But it also marks the moment when photographers could begin to own and label their own photographs, which Arnold renamed as “Bargirl in a Brothel in the Red Light District.” So Cuba actually falls out of that scene.

Part of what I started to notice is that whenever Black sex workers are depicted, they are almost always framed within the terms of tragedy, regardless of class. She’s beautifully dressed. Here’s an image from the series titled simply “Séríe Prostitutas” by the Colombian photography Fresnel Franco.

And we get a series of images that are supposed to register sadness and despair. The photographer here can’t imagine that she might have a life outside of her work. She might have kids she plays with, or a husband she goes to the beach with. It’s about reducing her to the space and place of her labor. It is intended to represent only and always despair.

However, this project started with a very different text. It started in the porn archive, with an as-told-to-memoir that depicts the life, sexuality, and philosophical musings of one of my most cherished Puta icons, Vanessa Del Rio. She follows me on Twitter. The most famous person, yes.

Half Cuban, half Puerto Rican, and fully a New Yorker, Vanessa Del Rio was the first non-White porn star during the golden age of porn. She appeared in hundreds of films, frequently playing the maid, the hoochie mama, the stereotypic over-the-top Latina spitfire.

Her memoir, unique in both form and content, is a huge tome, it weighs about 7 pounds, that comes complete with a DVD made up of equal parts hardcore pornographic images, and titillating and terrifying life stories, many about police violence.

But if you want the porn, you have to sit through the stories. And if you want the stories, you have to sit through the porn. And unlike the silent presence of the women in El Registro, here we have the vibrant voice of one of the most celebrated Latina sex symbols, providing her own musings on Puta Life.

I grew up watching Vanessa’s films. And her birth name, Ana Maria, is a sonic echo of my own. While the rest of the book is full of glossy movie posters and professional stills from her many films and colorful magazine spreads, the photographs that intrigued me the most were the ones from the collection of amateur photographs that she produced with her lover, an S&M aficionado, Reb Stout, pictured here in a blonde wig.

Del Rio describes her initial coming together with Stout saying, it was like you like to wear makeup and women’s clothes and stick dildos up your ass and jerk off and take pictures. OK. Yeah. Many of these images are quite playful and queer, and depict the spirit of endless sexual experimentation that their brief affair was founded upon.

Several portray enactments of the S&M fantasies that Stout and Del Rio explored and performed together. As an actor, Vanessa was involved in many hardcore S&M themed movies, “roughies” as they were called. And she describes enjoying the emotional intensity and physical stamina that they required.

This scene is from the film Top Secret, in which she plays a secret agent named Juanita, who is being tortured, yet her makeup flawless. But the scenes she shared with Stout were something else altogether, and the images that they produced have a wholly different quality. That chapter also includes this quite extraordinary image, one that manages to convey the terror, vulnerability, and ecstasy of sexual submission.

Vanessa tells us that this is her favorite image in the book. It’s also my favorite image in her book. This too is Puta Life, a moment where the everyday pressures associated with living your sexuality in public are transformed into private experiments with the sensorial possibilities found at the limits of subjection.

If Vanessa’s life as an international pornstar offers a view of sex work that seems full of fiery agency and verve, the following chapter returns us to the streets of Mexico City to visit with the extraordinary women of Casa Xochiquetzal, a house for elderly sex workers, some retired, most not, to think about the relationship between the stories we tell and the affects they generate.

The residents of Casa Xochiquetzal are the subject of two books of photography, numerous photo exhibits and magazine spreads, and at least three documentaries, illustrating the fascination with the decidedly queer juxtaposition between advanced age and overt sexuality.

The first book, Las Amorosas Mas Bravas, was a collaboration between French photographer Benedict de Ruz and Mexican journalist Celia Gomez Ramos. That project took about seven years to complete, and as viewers, we get an almost voyeuristic glimpse into this house and their lives.

This is Canela. We’re introduced to Canela’s story, and the journalist reveals that she has Downs Syndrome. Quote, “She’s a little slow, but the girls never talk about that,” end quote. And we’re told that she’s just returned to Casa Xochiquetzal after trying to give love one more chance at 72.

Like her age, Canela’s cognitive difference is supposed to make her an unimaginable subject of love, sex, or indeed of any future worth desiring. But where exactly might we locate the tragedy that is represented as surrounding Canela’s life? In her lifelong disability, in the innumerable ways that precarity brought about by poverty has informed her life choices, or in trying to give love one more chance at 72?

Moreover, how might the narrative emphasis on tragedy obscure the moments of pleasure — sexual, romantic, and otherwise – that might also constitute her life? What are the effective impacts of these different sorts of details, and whose interests do they serve?

This is another resident, Norma, and pages later, she recounts the story of her life through the scars left behind: The stab wounds from knife fights, the scars from suicide attempts, a bite mark, a souvenir from her lover, Rosa.

Norma tells us that she’s a womanizer, a mujeriega, and that she once worked as a lucha libre wrestler, that the father of her firstborn was a travesti named Arturo, also known as Erica. She lists off a long list of female lovers, including Rosa, who was her girlfriend for 13 years and who she would pimp and protect when they both worked the streets. Norma says she’s too tired for women these days. Is Norma who we picture when we think of sex workers or pimps?

There’s a second book of photography that pairs a foreign photographer and a Mexican journalist. This is British photographer Malcolm Venville’s book, The Women of Casa X, that similarly provide brief first person narratives composed by Mexican journalist Amanda de La Rosa.

That book was produced in a single month, and frequently features the women in various states of undress, unsettling the conventions around erotic photography. In both books, these women talk about their lives, including the violence, exploitation, and abuse that they’ve lived through.

But what their stories make abundantly clear is that the harms associated with sex work cannot be separated from the violence of patriarchy, global capitalism, the church, the state, the police, the family.

I also consider several documentaries about the house. This is La Munéca Fea. I just love this cover image. But I focus on a truly delightful film by Mexican photographer and filmmaker Maya Goded that registers a wholly different energy, not of misery and despair, although that comes through, but the felt force of friendship. The film is called La Plaza de la Soledad. And we see the kind of mutual aid and kinship that sex workers have always formed.

The woman on the right is Carmen Lopez, the original founder of the house. And in this scene, she spots one of her clients and is joking about what she’s going to do with her little finger once they get together.

Goded’s relationship with Carmen spans over 20 years. Goded helped Carmen activate the feminist community in Mexico City to fund Casa Xochiquetzal. The film also features a lesbian relationship between Esther, an Indigenous woman and healer, and her lover, Angeles.

Esther often delivers these very touching monologues about what is unseen in the lives of these women. But thankfully, neither Goded nor Esther seems particularly invested in peddling a romantic narrative about idealized lesbian relationships.

In a later scene, the couple are playfully bickering over money and drugs. And Esther positions herself in front of Goded’s camera, while Angeles finishes getting dressed nearby to tell us what their lover squabble was really about.

[NON-ENGLISH]. Yesterday she hit me. She took my money. And later, we ended up fucking. Esther, always pedagogical in her addresses, adds to the camera, but I enjoyed it very much sexually. Everyone is laughing, including Goded, whose image is now captured in the mirror along with a glimpse of Angeles getting dressed nearby.

These moments where the director enters the scene aurally or visually serve to dislodge the imagined distance between the filmmaker and her subject. But what also becomes dislodged are more sanitized ideas about lesbian sexuality, Indigenous identity, sex worker lives, and feminist politics.

So while my work in this book is about sex work and all of the ways that it’s wrapped through the contours of queer life, it’s also about representation, about the perilous ways it can carry our desire for recognition and connection across the vast expanses between us.

Because even if we know that images and stories are mediated and constructed, we know they do things in the world. And while I have never met most of the women that I feature in Puta Life, in the final chapter, I turn to someone quite dear to me, Adela Vazquez, a real living person with a style, a scent, and an amazing past.

I begin by considering the text Sexile, Sexilio, an extraordinary bilingual graphic novel by Jaime Cortez that tells the story of Adela’s life of being assigned male at birth in Cuba, forming part of the Mariel boatlift, and working briefly as a sex worker, later becoming a sexual health educator and transgender advocate in San Francisco.

As is the case for most people, Vasquez worked as a sex worker only briefly, although the different narratives circulating around her life make clear she’s been working sex all her life. In this top panel, we actually see the actual ad that Adela used to promote her sexual services.

But by the time we sort of reach the bottom-right panel, Cortez draws her, rolling her eyes and we glimpse her boredom and frustration at performing the tired narrative of racialized transgender exoticism.

Now, Sexilio is not the only graphic account of Adela’s life. I first met Adela when we worked together at Proyecto ContraSIDA Por Vida, a Latinx HIV Prevention Agency in San Francisco. And I featured her in my first book, Queer Latinidad. A year later, she appeared in the documentary, Documenting Difference, in 2004.

Adela’s trans godchild and my former student here at Berkeley, Juliana Delgado Lopera, published an oral history of Adela, first in the SF Weekly and later in the Collection Cuéntamelo. Here, the arch of her eyebrow is performing its own singular drama.

She’s also featured in the collection Queer Brown Voices, personal narratives of Latinx LGBT activists. And in one class I taught, students read Sexilio and created a Wikipedia page for Adela because nothing says notable like having a Wikipedia page.

But despite these numerous efforts at representing her extraordinary life, Adela, like many of us, is also deeply invested in self-representation. And what better place to share ourselves these days than social media. Adela’s Facebook page does not disappoint.

While her feed is cluttered with the usual collection of political rants and raves, Adela also maintains a photo album there that she’s entitled, The Amazing Past, a visual archive of her larger than life history. Here she is, strutting her stuff for the camera and her audience.

This is Esta Noche, a broke down dive queer Latinx bar, the last queer Latinx bar to close in San Francisco. Some images like these have been digitized from actual printed photographs, and some include captions added through the haze of memory.

All of these efforts at curating her life, serve as a testament to her impulse to give her memories, material substance, even if that substance is digital. Yet even in the presence of the biographical subject, even if Adela was here with us now representing herself, we wouldn’t really know her. Not really.

And that’s as it should be. As we refuse the understandings of representation as knowledge production, a lingering and feeling in friendship, in the fantasy of another world, might point us to other affective pathways of care.

Let me conclude by sharing another photograph from Facebook, a candid photo of Adela from her days at Proyecto ContraSIDA smiling at whoever stopped by with the camera to interrupt her day. Adela was very good at her job, and is rightfully proud of the life changing work she did at Proyecto, recruiting other trans Latinas, many former sex workers like herself to protect themselves against HIV.

But also inviting them to form part of a community dedicated to living to self and community empowerment. But this photo of Adela also makes another point undeniably clear. Trans women, particularly trans women of color, need more than representation.

They need jobs that provide health insurance and employment protection, sick days, and vacation times. Indeed, a job like my own that offers a pension so that one day they can stop working. Similarly, sex workers and former sex workers don’t need rescue. They need rights to live free from stigma, surveillance, and criminalization.

In the absence of these most basic forms of care, our new gender studies colleague, Dora– the brazilianist, Dora Santana, describes the practices of survival and community formed within Black trans femme spaces of impossibility, a practice she calls mais viva, more alive. Mais viva, quote, “the strategies we as trans and Black people use to not be broken at the end of the ” end quote.

But mais viva also demands mass viva, more life. Santana’s invocation of mais viva serves to remind us that survival is always more than protection from physical harm. It is about attending to the weight of a world intent on denying the beauty of your humanity and the psychic scars that stigma leaves behind.

Today, sex workers face a worldwide epidemic of violence and murder. Sex workers are routinely hunted and harmed by those who understand that the value of their lives is deemed negligible, insufficient to warrant concern, let alone protection or justice.

Therefore, my work in this new book also harbors another meaning for Puta Life as a response to Puta viva, a fucking life, a life defined by condemnation, violence, and stigmatized contempt, I offer the possibility of Puta Life, an affirmation of the beauty, value and spirit of Putas everywhere. Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

[ALBERTO LEDESMA] Thank you so much, Professor Rodríguez. Now I invite Professor Morris, please, to share your comments.

[COURTNEY DESIREE MORRIS] Thank you for that. That was fantastic. It’s so good to be here. It’s rare to enjoy reading an academic book as much as I enjoyed reading this book. And don’t get me wrong, I love theory for the same reason. I love couture.

But this is really an extraordinarily powerful work. And so brilliant that it left me kind of speechless. And one of the things that Clarissa and I were talking about was how the text really, it didn’t raise questions for me about the way you approach the work, but it did raise questions for me about myself as a reader, as a scholar, as an artist, as an erotic subject that I really was not prepared for.

So I just wanted to talk more about that. But I’m going to get into my comments here, and I’m looking forward to being in conversation with you about this work that really is just such a triumph. Congratulations. Yeah.

So I’m going to begin by saying in Puta Life, Seeing Latinas Working Sex, Juana Rodríguez invites us to examine the contentious and fraught production of visual representations of the Puta, sexual labor, and Latina sexuality.

Centering the modes of self-fashioning of Latina sex workers across visual cultures, Rodríguez illustrates how insurgent Puta lives are made in the interstices of quote, “crimanalizing states and the judgments of petit publics, ” end quote.

Telling a different story about Puta Life requires different modes of relationality and methodology than the traditional Western mono disciplines can provide. Thus, Puta Life employs an interdisciplinary methodology ranging from exploring the role of photography as a tool of 19th century colonial statecraft to close textual readings of sex workers’ visual and narrative biographical accounts of themselves to, quote, “explore the creation of sexual meaning and what might lie beyond it,” end quote.

Drawing from state archives, historical and contemporary documentary film and photography, biography, visual art, and graphic novels, Rodriguez creates a promiscuous archive of pouteria that is born out of a deep identification with the figure of the Puta, and that also reflects her own erotic subjectivity as much as that of her research subjects, which I thought was the best part.

The analytical objects that she selects from this archive are varied and wide ranging, selected not for the authoritative power that they confer to render a grand narrative of Puta Life, but rather for the haptic resonances that they present to Rodríguez as both researcher and subject.

The politics of identification that structure the text are felt in Rodríguez’s careful and effective handling of the subjects that she encounters in the archive. And so I won’t rehash the discussion of the Registro, but I was really struck by the way that you talk about and you examine how the Maximilian state mobilized photography as an emerging visual technology of state surveillance, criminalization, and labor regulation.

She sifts through this visual archive, attempting to understand how women navigated this hierarchical system of organizing sexual labor, and how the politics of race, class, and nation shaped the state’s management of sex workers.

And I was particularly moved in the portions of the chapter where you talk about encountering women who bear your name in the Registro, your [NON-ENGLISH] and this experience of encountering your name over and over in the archive. Rodríguez writes tenderly of her, tokayas asking, quote, “did Juana María also dream of adventure and freedom? Did my tokaya taste joy.”

This kind of speculative narrative, what Saidiya Hartman refers to as critical fabulation, the attempt to read beyond what the photograph or the archive itself can yield, the attempt to touch an unknowable past that wears your face or bears your name unsettles historical narratives of the Puta that mark her as unknowable political subject, and calls for rigorous forms of care and archival inquiry.

This is also apparent in the treatment of Félix, who I love this figure, and I just sat staring at this photo for what felt like forever. And so looking at Félix and their ambiguous gender presentation, which is left unaddressed and unresolved in the archive, right? It doesn’t offer you a clear answer of who this person is. And so rather than rush to claim Félix as a trans ancestor, a move that I think probably would have been really satisfying for many of us.

Instead, you embrace the incompleteness and indeterminacy of the image itself, and the space that it allows for, quote, “an imagined queer futurity,” end quote, where Félix and all of the subjects of the Registro are able to, quote, “escape the vice grip of representation to become fugitive traces of the images left behind to no care.” So beautiful.

In this way, I see Rodríguez performing a kind of radical feminist self-reflexivity rooted in an ethics of accountability and answerability to her subjects, past and present. In addition to its analytical function, Juana frames Puta Life as a pedagogical text that invites us to take seriously what the Puta can teach us, not just about our own erotic desires and selves, but also about the larger structures of power that police and discipline are desires.

It reveals the ways that we are all implicated and implicated in Puta Life, often in ways that we may be reluctant to explore because they compel us to reckon with the complexities of our own lives and the exploitative sense. Deal with your own fucking life.

This kind of analytical humility, a willingness to approach the Puta, a figure that we think we know from a place of beginner’s mind and embodied experience, opens a range of complex and contradictory possibilities for how we might sense the Puta in a different register. And it certainly did that for me as an artist.

And I’d love to have more of a conversation about this as a kind of embodied text, as a thinking about the ways that you tap into the body as a way of beginning to sense the Puta. And you talk about the importance of sensing knowledge rather than thinking, which I found really interesting.

I found this to be a work of profound vulnerability and beauty, characterized by, as Judith Butler writes, a willingness to be undone by the encounter with the research subjects, with the Puta within and without.

This is especially apparent in Rodríguez’s reflection on aging and the labor of sex work. And I thought about this a lot in the chapters on Vanessa Del Rio with Adela and with the women of the [NON-ENGLISH], and how Latina sex workers of many kinds navigate the challenges of working in a sexualized economy of value and desire that privileges youth beauty in class while obscuring the labors, the sexual labors of elderly and retired sex workers.

And I was really struck by the way that you write so movingly about seeing yourself reflected in these aging sex workers and how you and all of us, we’re all getting older, how we navigate the tensions between our ageless desires, as you say, and getting older in a social order that disappears the sexual lives, labors, and subjectivity of elders.

Another indication of your practices as a kind of vulnerable observer, as Ruth Bejar might say, is the way that you assume an intentionally ambivalent sort of narrative orientation towards both yourself as researcher and subject, as well as your research subject, and the contradictions inherent in any attempt to render a subject legible.

As you argue, quote, “whether as a photographer or a writer, to think about representation is to think about the granting of permission, the stated or unstated permission to look, to linger, to record, to circulate, and to transform the meanings that images might convey.”

These tensions over who has the power to narrate, which we’re going to talk a little bit more about in a second, form a central preoccupation in the text that I really think adds to its analytical force. Nowhere is this felt more clearly than in the chapter on the mighty Vanessa Del Rio, one of my longtime heroes.

I’ve been fascinated with her for years. And your treatment of how she narrates her Puta Life on and off screen demonstrates how a more textured and complex rendering of Puta Life, quote, “requires that we wrestle with the ability of speaking subjects to narrate their own complex realities even and especially when their interpretations unsettle the preexisting logics we might wish to impose.”

You offer a model for meaningfully engaging with research subjects who dazzle us, who confound us, who baffle us. Writing that, quote, “this is a lesson that bears repeating. Not everything makes sense.” End quote.

And indeed, as you argue, the truth of our erotic lives often does not make sense. And yet it is precisely in our illegible desires that the future conditions for queer horizons of possibility that have not yet been borne may materialize.

And I was thinking a lot as I was preparing for this talk, I listened to a really terrific interview that you gave about the book on the LA Review of Books podcast, and I thought i it was a really thoughtful and interesting interview.

But nevertheless, I was struck by what seemed to me to be a kind of moral uneasiness or discomfort or kind of squeamishness about the attempt to narrate Puta Lives at all. And the implication seems to be that Puta Life is so complex and so overdetermined and so distorted as to be fundamentally unrepresentable, or that all acts of representation do a kind of inherent violence to these lives.

And that kind of pushback that I’ve certainly had that experience in my own attempts to teach sex work in the classroom. And it seems like you have encountered some of this in the reception of the book as well. And so I’d love to hear you talk more about that.

But they illustrate how Puta Lives are obscured not only by official state discourse that marks sex workers as moral or social threat or hapless victims, but also by ostensibly progressive or radical feminist frameworks that are so weary of the punitive uses to which narrative can be put that they refuse the work of narration altogether.

And so, as you demonstrate, this is really an untenable position that in effect ends up relegating Puta Life to the criminal margins in ways that threaten sex workers and make the conditions of their labor precarious.

And so I think you really definitely negotiate that critique with a keen awareness of the dangers and challenges of representation, and how visual regimes of racialized sex and gender, knowing that render the lives and labors of sex workers illegible in the public sphere operate.

And so instead of making a claim to epistemic transparency, you follow the work of the Martinican philosopher Edouard Glissant by insisting on the right of sex workers to their own forms of opacity. And as a scholar, you refuse the kind of will to knowledge that underwrites normative representations of the Puta, while insisting on the need for these lives to be seen and narrated.

And then the last thing I’ll say is I was really struck by– throughout the book, there’s this kind of thread of queer femme friendship that for me really is kind of the condition of possibility for the work. And I felt that so clearly in the chapters on Vanessa and on Adela.

And it made me think of Michel Foucault’s interview, friendship as a way of life, in which he talks about sexuality functioning as quote, “a means not to discover the truth of one’s sex, but rather to use one’s sexuality to arrive at a multiplicity of relationships.” And so friendship here functions as both a method of seeing and being in the world.

And so following Foucault, I see Puta Life as countering the refusal to explore, quote, “everything that can be troubling and affection, tenderness, fidelity, camaraderie, and companionship, things that a rather sanitized society can’t allow a place for without fearing the formation of new alliances and the tying together of unseen lines of force.” So I see all unseen lines of force kind of cohering in the text and these really beautiful ways.

These unruly and promiscuous forms of relationality reveal a different mode of life, as Foucault argues, or a different mode of relationality cultivated through sexual practice that brings us into organic forms of what Samuel Delaney terms contact and exchange, both those that are tied to the market and others that exceed the market, which are constrained under heteronormative regimes of marriage, domesticity, family, and the rule of the father.

And so I was touched very deeply by Adela’s response to that chapter where she says very simply, [NON-ENGLISH]. It is a very sweet, deeply affecting, and instructive moment. For while, Rodríguez powerfully makes the case for the singular importance of Adela’s trans everything life. We also understand that this is one interpretation of her life among many others.

There could never be enough to say about Adela’s complex biography, and no one could ever transparently know Adela. But that is no less true of all of us. And the extension of what Avery Gordon terms complex personhood to our inscrutable research interlocutors is the first step in telling stories about Puta Life that might take us closer to an embodied affective sense of the multitudinous cells that are contained within Puta biographies of all kinds, including our own.

[ALBERTO LEDESMA] Thank you so much. Professor Morris, that’s fantastic. So now I invite Professor Rojas to please offer your notes.

[CLARISSA ROJAS] I enjoyed this so much. Thank you both. This is just so, so lovely. And obviously, the text, I agree, moved me in ways that I was not ready for nor expected from an academic text. And I think some of that has to do with the methods you choose, the style of writing. And so I’ll speak to some of that as well. And it engaged a kind of playful engagement that I think in some ways my remarks will also engage that or reflect.

So dear Juana, if your plight in Puta Life was that we fall in love with, that we see the life in the Puta in you, the Puta in ourselves and Putas everywhere, then you have succeeded because Puta Life, testament of a visual and historical archive of Puta Life, living and legacy against a script of erasure, victimization, and exoticized exteriority inspires just that.

How lovingly your writing, and I guess we all concur here, made me see perhaps my ancestor Felix Rojas. The details of Felix’s life in a portrait, the subject leaps from the abject captivity of the two dimensional springing forth, a deep curiosity in life worth knowing. Who was Felix Rojas?

A subject like the others, like the author herself, with a quest to be loved, touched, adored. it is in these moments of candid, introspective memoir that the author reveals her vulnerability, dislodging academic treatise and methods returning to intimate aspirations.

Quote, “these women speak to me because I know they have something to teach me about the realities of my Puta Life. Their faces and their stories obligate me to sit with emotions that I might wish to expel, to ponder my own relationship, to living and aging, desire, and rejection, loneliness, and heartbreak. To dwell in the dusk of my own archives of feeling.” End quote.

After all, at the heart of this book is a quest to make Puta Life more livable for all of us. And to do just that Juana shapeshifts method, Puta Life asserts a knowledge production that is at ease and unknowing and a methodological reckoning with unruly practices of sensation, memory, and imagination.

The sensory drives after all this, the project of a struggle for corporal autonomy. The social transformation beckoned by Puta Life. Against the grain of a historical subject that is stigmatized, criminalized, controlled, disappeared, despised as much for their race and poverty as their sex work, in quote, “their humanity obliterated.”

So the word Puta, writes Juana, quote, “I add life, the possibility of a life that will exceed the word and remake it.” End quote. Juana invites the reader to reach for the traces of felt possibility that might inspire more ethical forms of relation and care.

And today is [NON-ENGLISH]. No school or work, a holiday in Mi Patria Natal in Mexico. A day to remember the call to revolutionary struggle that upended the Spanish colonial regime and imagined a new republic and the masses flocked to El Zocalo and city squares everywhere to memorialize El Cura Criollo Hidalgo’s call once made in 1810 in the town of Dolores.

Yes, it is in the genealogy of this memorialization that the park marking queer beach and Dyke and trans marches in San Francisco gets its name, Dolores Park. And as the call for liberation imagines anew the republic anchored in the patriarch of the nation, forgotten feminicidios, unnamed just this once, the Traidora Puta Malinche reclaimed by Chicana feminists as lover, mother, freedom seeker, once enslaved, brilliant translator.

Instead today, the nation invokes yet again a future promise of the Mexican nation as liberated from Spain by Spain, the Criollo masculine subject of Hidalgo, a rendering of the neocolonial patriarchal Mexican imaginary.

Not the reference I prefer of thousands of feminists descending in 2019 in El Zocalo to the cadence of [NON-ENGLISH], the oppressive state is a sexist pig.

So it is fitting that we address the subject of the Puta today. After all, what the Puta [NON-ENGLISH] invoking, of course, Frederick Douglass’ interrogation. And further, what the Palestinian [NON-ENGLISH].

So I walk with Palestine at the center. The recent massacre [NON-ENGLISH] last week, beloved land I visited over 20 years ago, amidst yesterday’s death of a brilliant scholar and writer, Elias Khoury, who mapped the future of Palestinian freedom in his epic [NON-ENGLISH], gate of the sun, which he brought to UC Berkeley in this very building 18 years ago when I had the chance to meet and learn from him and his work.

As a daily death counts persist, how can we not center Palestine? And what I ask can be learned from and about Puta Life, about the liberation of both Putas and Palestine in conversation.

How does mapping, writing, imagining Puta Libre accompany mapping, writing, imagining, and struggling for Palestine Libre. Juana invites us to consider “que todos/todas somos putas” . The Zapatistas once invited us to proclaim [NON-ENGLISH] Zapatistas to return the dislodged expelled Indian in us as Chicanas and Mexicanas.

To commit to a futurity that liberated the Indigenous from the continual colonial claws of the neocolonial Mexican Republic [NON-ENGLISH] Palestines. So [NON-ENGLISH] Juana, I offer some excerpts of Puta Life in conversation with Noura Erekat’s justice for some law and the question of Palestine. And Edward Said’s the question of Palestine, among other Palestinian voices.

And why Noura Erekat’s text so centrally? Because the National Leadership of Faculty for Justice in Palestine recommends it as one of the five essential texts to read this fall to inform the Palestinian struggle across college campuses. You can join one of the 125 FJP chapters across the US to further engage this text. And Noura is no less also a UC Berkeley alumni from the Bay.

Long-term sister organizer, now professor of law at Rutgers, a foundational member to the originating second formation of Students for Justice in Palestine here at Cal, where SJP was born some 30 years ago. And organizer of the first National Student Conference of the Palestine Solidarity Movement in the United States, which I attended also here 22 years ago during the Second Intifada.

One, Puta Life. In their ongoing demands for love, respect, and care, these women of [NON-ENGLISH] remind us all the ways we are entangled in the radiance of the universe, united in our stubborn insistence to live on. Stigma, conditions, the life, and death of sex workers.

Three, the call for self-determination upends the eliminatory logic that for so long has marked the Palestinian as a site of expendability. Justice for some. Puta Life. Native presence, survival as resistance, acknowledge presence in the face of social demands to disappear.

Five, Puta Life. Vanessa Del Rio and Adela Vasquez turned victimization into expansive narratives of sexual prowess. Quote, “Venessa Del Rio is invested in asserting more than her agency, wants to describe her pleasure, the joy and satisfaction of sexual escapades. Del Rio refuses to vanish to either feminist narratives of exploitation, shamelessly relishes the dirty sensory Puta Life.

Six, justice for some. Palestinian self-determination signifies an ability to pursue a future collectively and individually as a condition of possibility and not as a form of resistance to the condition of social death.

Seven. Against the script of erasure, various forms of attempts at captivity, the abject rises up, insists upon living. Hartman. Puta Life. Eight. Quote, “recover the insurgent.” state punishment and juridical violence, doling out shame as technique of biopolitical control.

Nine, October 7. Do you condemn Hamas? 10, Rafeef Ziadah. We teach life, sir. But still, he asked me and Ms. Zaidah, don’t you think that everything would be resolved if you would just stop teaching so much hatred to your children? Pause. I look inside of me for strength to be patient. But patience is not at the tip of my tongue as the bombs drop over Gaza.

Today, my body was a TV massacre made to fit into soundbites and word limits and move those that are desensitized to terrorist blood. And between that war crime and massacre, I vent out words and smile. Not exotic, not terrorist.

And I recount. I recount 100 dead, 200 dead, 1,000 dead. We teach life, sir. We Palestinians teach life after they have occupied the last sky. We teach life after they have built their settlements and apartheid walls after the last skies. We teach life, sir. We Palestinians wake up every morning to teach the rest of the world life, sir.

11, Puta Life. The negligible value of the Puta’s life at most negligible. At worst, hunted, denied the value of life. The violence committed against them is to be expected, if not deserved.

12, Puta Life. Connection to sex work must be minimized to humanize the subject. 13, Said. The question of Palestine. The plight for Palestinian self-determination enters official discourse in the United States as terrorism. Do you condemn Hamas?

14, Said. The Palestinian struggle is overwhelmingly penalized, defamed, subjected to disproportionate retaliation. 15, Puta Life. My hope is that we will care more about the sex workers’ life enough to reimagine the psychic and material conditions of their lives.

16, Puta Life. Sex workers as feminist insurgents on a magnitude of scales. 17, Said. The Intifada is a blueprint for Palestinian political and social life. Palestinians as feminist insurgents on a magnitude of scales.

18, justice for some. Freedom is a metaphysical aspiration transcended, embodied corporal sensate and beyond. 19, Puta Life. In their ongoing demands for love, respect, and care, these women of [NON-ENGLISH] remind us of all the ways we are entangled in the radiance of the universe, united in our stubborn insistence to live on.

20, Puta Life. The felt sense as infinitely unfolding possibility that inspires greater and deeper relations of care. 21, by taking up the name, they refuse the stigma. Puta is [NON-ENGLISH]

[APPLAUSE]

[ALBERTO LEDESMA] Thank you so much. So this has been an amazing, very powerful, rich, and evocative conversation. And the book certainly deserves this kind of attention. But that means that we’re a little behind time.

And so I wanted to invite you, Professor Rodríguez, just to give a brief response to what you’ve heard. And maybe we do have about 10 minutes, maybe leave some time for at least one question.

[JUANA MARIA RODRIGUEZ] I’m really happy to– I’ve spoken enough, happy to open it to the floor.

[LEDESMA] Here we have a question here.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Were you able to– oh, thank you. Were you able to look at this movement to honor or at least honor the pain experienced by comfort women and other women in its– I think there’s six court cases right now all over the world of about statues that are controversial.

And I was wondering, did you have a chance to talk to the comfort women– I mean, excuse me, the women of your book about spiritual practices, whether it’s honoring– I think it’s [NON-ENGLISH]? Were you able to get into that at all?

[JUANA MARIA RODRIGUEZ] What I think is curious is people always assume that I did interviews, that I did oral histories, that this is generally what we do. And so much of the scholarship on sex workers is either about law or policy or that

My focus was on representation. I was looking at what was already documented. But I think it’s interesting that, that move to ask the question was precisely the move that I was not wanting to make. There are sex workers all over the world. I understand what’s happening with the comfort women and career right now. There’s just everywhere.

And everywhere I speak, people will freak, oh, this archive, because there are also archives everywhere, including here in the Bay area, such a rich sex worker history. So in terms of the question, I think it was less about asking women some kind of verifiable truth and looking at forms of representation. But I appreciate the question. Yes.

Maybe one quick more question before we wrap up. Does anybody have another question? I did have one question. I think I began asking you– oh, great. We’ll end with that question.

I really loved in here the very opening of your remarks that you framed it as like Puta had already been assigned to you, but it was up to you to decide your relationship to it. And I was wondering, at what point you knew that you would one day write about Vanessa specifically or about– yeah, the way that Puta shaped the ways that you navigate your life too?

[JUANA MARIA RODRIGUEZ] That’s a really good question. And it also speaks to the Academy. So in my dissertation, which became my first book, Sexual Queer Latinidad, I was writing about identity in cyberspace. And the name of the chapter was called Welcome to the Global Stage– Confessions of a Cyber slut, I think was the subtitle.

So in my dissertation, I sort of outed myself, claimed this term. And I don’t think I quite realized what perhaps the implications for that. I did get a job. I still have a job. So I guess that– yeah, so that was sort of putting it into the academic sphere.

One of the reasons why I care so much about this is I work on a college campus where so many people are supplementing their incomes by doing work that sometimes is illegal. Other things like OnlyFans, not illegal, but totally stigmatized.

There are stories– one story of a doctoral student who her dissertation advisor refused to write her letters of recommendation after she came out as having worked as a sex worker. So the fact that sex workers are stigmatized, that there’s an afterlife for that, questions of technology, certainly be important to that.

But that stigma has very real material consequences. And so, yes, I have written about that. And in some ways, I don’t know what jobs or grants I haven’t gotten because of that. But for other people, those consequences are incredibly real and profound.

Thank you.

[ALBERTO LEDESMA] So thank you all for joining us today for this insightful discussion of an amazing book by Professor Juana María Rodríguez. It’s been a privilege to witness the rich exchange of ideas among all of our panelists– Dr. Rojas, Dr. Morris, as well as engaging in some dialogue.

Throughout our conversation, we explored the complex intersections of race, gender, and sexuality, and how visual representation shapes our understanding of Latino experiences, particularly in the context of sex work.

We touched on the importance of challenging dominant narratives and the potential for more ethical forms of relation and care. Themes that resonate deeply in both Professor Rodríguez’s work, and our broader discussions in the fields of ethnic studies and gender studies.

I want to thank or offer my heartfelt thanks particularly to the Social Science Matrix, to Marian, to Chuck for helping us with the technology. And let’s not forget Julia Sizek, who had organized this panel, and we couldn’t do it last term, for all they did.

I also want to thank all of you for attending today and for being here and hearing this powerful presentation. Your engagement and thoughtful questions have certainly enriched this dialogue. Thank you again for coming. And we look forward to seeing you at future events.

[APPLAUSE]

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

Article

Faculty, Staff Celebrate Social Sciences Fest 2024

On April 18, faculty and staff from the Division of Social Sciences — along with their families — convened at the Faculty Club for Social Sciences Fest, the annual celebration of the social sciences at UC Berkeley. The gathering provided an opportunity for members of the UC Berkeley social sciences community to connect over food and drinks. Several children in attendance enjoyed balloon animals, coloring, and other fun activities.

Dean Raka Ray
Dean Raka Ray

Raka Ray, Dean of the Division of Social Sciences, expressed gratitude for how the division’s members have weathered a tumultuous year. “I want to acknowledge with pride the way the departments in the social sciences, and in particular the chairs, have worked so hard to repair frayed relations and always to do the right thing to keep the community together in circumstances that haven’t always been easy,” Ray said.

Ray also shared her optimism for the division’s future, noting that incoming chancellor Richard Lyons is a social scientist. “My job is to remind him that he is a social scientist,” Ray said. “But although the Provost has been helping to resource us, we are still under-resourced. In spite of that, all of you nurture your students, you produce research that matters, and you do massive amounts of service, not just in the department, but for all of campus. It makes me amazingly proud to be able to represent you.”

A Year of Highlights

Ray listed a variety of highlights from the past academic year, including the creation of a comprehensive internship program that aims to help prepare students from the Division of Social Sciences for meaningful careers.

“I noticed there wasn’t really a structured way in which social science students could get internships at all,” Ray said. “Through our donors, we’ve been able to not only find paid internships, but also money so that people who want to follow their heart and do internships that are unpaid are able to earn minimum wage at least.”

Ray also noted the Fall 2023 creation of the one-year Master of Computational Social Science program, which has already accepted a cohort of 25 students selected from hundreds of applicants. “That shows how much it was needed, so that’s very exciting,” Ray said.

Other highlights included public recognition for UC Berkeley social science graduate programs. Several of the division’s graduate programs received top rankings from U.S. News and World Report, Ray said: the Departments of Sociology, Psychology, and History ranked #1 in the nation, while the Departments of Political Science and Economics ranked 4th best.

Other points of celebration included awards won and books published by faculty, as well as the Matrix Faculty Fellows Program, which supports assistant- and associate-level faculty members from the division for continuing work on research that has a significant impact across multiple disciplines. “We have supported eight faculty thus far and we’re going to support for more next year,” Ray said.

Divisional Awards

Raka Ray and Chris Walters
Raka Ray and Chris Walters

The Division of Social Sciences’ Distinguished Teaching Award was established to encourage and reward faculty members who have been exceptionally generous and effective in both undergraduate and graduate teaching.

This year’s Distinguished Teaching Award was given to Chris Walters, Associate Professor in the UC Berkeley Department of Economics. “Chris does the hard job of teaching popular core and required classes, but he inspires his students tremendously,” Ray said. “He’s also an exceptional advisor to graduate students, and has done a lot to bring in diversity and inclusion into his syllabi to reflect new criticisms of more conventional studies.”

Upon receiving the award, Walters thanked his wife, his colleagues, as well as Berkeley students. “I’ve had the pleasure of working with a lot of really talented undergraduate and graduate students since I’ve been here,” Walters said. “I teach classes in labor economics, which cover potentially difficult, broad topics like minimum wages, the economic impacts of immigration, market discrimination, and so on. In my experience, our students approach those topics with a lot of maturity and intellectual seriousness, and it makes them a real pleasure to teach.”

The Distinguished Service Award, established to recognize a staff member who has made extraordinary service contributions to their department and to the campus, was given to Harumi Quinones, Student Services Director in the UC Berkeley Department of Psychology.

Quinones “has done so much work in not only keeping the morale of the staff and department up, but she’s also been doing incredible work to make psychology even more inclusive,” Ray said. “She really led the effort to remove unnecessary barriers that were preventing people from coming into psychology. Once she did that, the number of psychology majors went up by 50%. But it is still the number one program in the country. Good things happened, as opposed to people’s fear that bad things would happen.”

Harumi Quinones
Harumi Quinones

“I feel so blessed to have had so many faculty supporters who listen to me, and who really were thought partners in thinking about how we can better support students who are interested in psychology,” Quinones said. “I just want to thank this whole wonderful room of supporters and the phenomenal colleagues I have on this campus for helping make wonderful things happen.”

Panel

Storytelling and the Climate Crisis

Contemporary writers and activists have described the climate crisis as, in part, a crisis of the imagination, of culture, and of storytelling. Recorded on March 11, 2024, this panel featured a group of authors and scholars of different genres — science fiction, journalism, history, literary fiction, and comedy — discussing how the climate crisis has impacted their craft and what practices of storytelling have to offer us at this pivotal moment in human history. This panel was co-sponsored by the UC Berkeley Department of English, the Department of History, and the Berkeley School of Journalism.

Panelists

Daniel Gumbiner is a novelist and editor based in Oakland. His first book, The Boatbuilder, was nominated for the National Book Award. His new novel, Fire in the Canyon, was published by Astra House in 2023. He is the Editor of The Believer.

 

Annalee NewitzAnnalee Newitz is a science fiction writer and science journalist. They are the author of nine books including, most recently, the science fiction novel The Terraformers. They are a contributing opinion writer at the New York Times, a columnist in the The New Scientist, and the co-host of an award-winning podcast, Our Opinions Are Correct.

 

Aaron Sachs is a professor of History and American Studies at Cornell University. He is the author of several books, most recently, Stay Cool: Why Dark Comedy Matters in the Fight against Climate Change (NYU Press, 2023).

 

Rebecca SolnitRebecca Solnit is a writer, historian, and activist, and a graduate of the Berkeley School of Journalism. She has written more than twenty books, including Orwell’s RosesHope in the DarkMen Explain Things to MeA Paradise Built in Hell: The Extraordinary Communities that Arise in Disaster; and A Field Guide to Getting Lost. Together with Thelma Young Lutunatabua, Solnit edited the 2023 collection Not too Late: Changing the Climate Story from Despair to Possibility.

 

Rebecca Herman (moderator) is associate professor in the History Department at UC Berkeley and author of Cooperating with the Colossus (Oxford University Press, 2022). She is currently working on a book about the unlikely ban on mining in Antarctica, told through the stories of the military wives and children, artists, writers, activists, soldiers, and scientists who traveled South in growing numbers during the 1970s and 80s.

 

Podcast and Transcript

Listen to this event below, or on Google Podcasts or Apple Podcasts.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[JULIA SIZEK] Hello, everyone. Welcome. I’m Julia Sizek. I am the postdoc here at Social Science Matrix. And it is my pleasure to welcome you all today for this lovely panel that we are about to have on storytelling and climate change, which is perhaps not as lovely as a topic as I think the panel will be. So our lovely panelists will hopefully bring us some redeeming hope in this time that is not always as optimistic as we would like.

And on this optimistic note, we would love for you to support our panelists and the books all of them have written. So we have a sampling of some of them up here, if you want to just peruse, but we also have put some QR codes up if you want to support independent bookstores and purchase the books.

Since we are here at Matrix, it is my obligation to tell you about some of our upcoming events that we will be having in the next couple of weeks. So if you are interested in California issues, on Monday we will be having an event about the conservatorship system in California, which as you may know, is a system through which people are conserved and put under court order to basically get their lives together.

But this system is both coercive for many and can also work to help people with issues like drug addiction. For those of you interested in climate change issues, next week we will also be having an event on Greening infrastructure that will be featuring the work of some of our most promising graduate students here.

It’s always a pleasure to have graduate students be an important part of these conversations that we have. And then on next Thursday, the Berkeley journalism school will be hosting an event that will also feature one of our panelists here Rebecca Solnit, on Thursday, March 21.

So those are just some of the upcoming events. You can also find more at our website, which is Matrix.berkeley.edu

So now, without any further ado, I’m going to introduce Rebecca Herman who is one of our Matrix 2023-2024 faculty Fellows, and also an excellent writer in her own right. Her first book Cooperating with the Colossus was published by Oxford University just in 2022 the book is really an interesting look at a topic that we don’t view as being a communitbased History Project, which is about the process of US military basing around Latin America.

More relevant to our topic today, Rebecca is currently working on some environmental issues in Antarctica, and I invite you to ask her about them. They’re very interesting. And so with that, I will hand it over to Rebecca and eventually to our panelists.

[APPLAUSE]

[REBECCA HERMAN] Thanks. All right. Thank you all for joining us, especially on this spectacularly sunny day. I always wonder how the sun might impact turnout at an event, no matter how compelling the event is. Thanks also to my panelists for being here. I’ve been really looking forward to this for months.

So in recent years, prominent writers, scholars and activists like Amitav Ghosh, Adrienne Maree Brown, Mary Hegler and Rebecca Solnit, among others, have been calling our attention to the work that storytelling can do in the face of the climate crisis.

If for a long time writers and activists were focused much of their energy on convincing the public that human made climate change was happening, now that they’ve mostly succeeded in that task, narrative and story are freed up to do all sorts of other things. And so part of the question that I’m eager to hear from the writers on this panel about is, what can and should they do?

The panel brings together four writers who work in and across different genres. We’ve got comedy, history, science fiction, science journalism, literary fiction and nonfiction essays, to share with us concretely how climate change has impacted their work and the particular promise and strengths the different narrative forms present for connecting with people around climate.

So the format of today’s event– bless you –will be pretty straightforward. I’ve asked each of the panelists to come up and speak casually for about 10 minutes, and then we’re going to open things up to the question, two questions from the audience. And before we kick off, I’m going to briefly introduce all four of them so that they can come up in succession.

Did my mic just do something? It’s sort of in and out. OK. All right.

So I was saying the format. All right. And then I’m going to introduce them all at once, that’s right. So between the four of them they’ve published over 40 books. So if I gave a really comprehensive introduction, you will be here listening to me all day.

So I’m going to say a little bit about them and then all four of them had a new book come out in 2023 that are all relevant to this topic. So I’m going to say a few words about each of the 2023 books, which you can link to through the QR code up here, and then we also have copies of them that you can check out up here after the panel.

And we decided you’re going to go in the order that you’re sitting right. First up we’re going to have Aaron Sachs, who’s a professor of History and American Studies at Cornell University. And his 2023 book is Stay Cool, Why Dark Comedy Matters in the Fight Against Climate Change. And I suspect we’ll hear more about this book in a minute.

But in the book he observes that the environmental movement has been, quote, “the least funny social movement that’s ever existed,” and he draws on the historical importance of dark comedy for other communities that have faced horrific oppression and dark times, to make a case for why comedy can contribute to the fight against climate change.

After Aaron, we’re going to hear from Rebecca Solnit, who is a writer, historian and activist and a graduate of Berkeley’s Journalism School. She has written more than 20 books, so she did a lot of heavy lifting with that overall book count, including Orwell’s Roses, Hope in the Dark, Men Explain Things to me, A Field Guide to Getting Lost.

Her 2023 book is a co-edited volume with Thelma Young Lutunatabua. Is that correct? Called Not Too Late, Changing the Climate Story From Despair to Possibility, which brings contributions from a number of important voices in this space, including several that I mentioned at the beginning.

Then we’ll have Annalee Newitz, who’s a graduate of Berkeley as well of the English department, a science fiction writer, a science journalist and co-host of the podcast Our Opinions are Correct.

Their the author of nine books. The Four on the website is an unforgivable typo and I publicly apologized. Most recently, the science fiction novel The Terraformers, which is the 2023 book, although they have a book coming out imminently also, but not on display. Not currently on display.

The Terraformers came out in 2023, and that book takes readers to the year 59,006 and beyond, to the planet of Sask-E where the novel’s protagonists are preparing the planet for settlement when the book begins.

My own anxiety about climate change has required me to eliminate dystopian books from my diet. And so The Terraformers is a really, for me was a breath of fresh air to read and a great example of the way science fiction can engage with climate questions.

And then we have Daniel Gumbiner, who’s a novelist based in Oakland and the editor of the magazine The Believer, also a Berkeley grad from the English department. His first book The Boat Builder was nominated for the National Book Award, and his new novel Fire in the Canyon came out in 2023 with Astra House.

The book is about a California family living in the foothills dealing with all sorts of things that California families deal with, including now the ravages of, and perpetual anxiety created by wildfire. So I’m really so thrilled to have these four panelists with us. And I’ll turn it over to Aaron. You’re up first.

[AARON SACHS] Well, thank you so much, Becca, for the invitation and for organizing this. And thanks also to the other panelists. It’s really a privilege to be here with you. I’ve also been very excited about this for months. And thank you all for being here.

So in dark times like I think we’re living through right now, I feel as though we need to draw on all the different coping strategies that human beings have developed over the millennia. I think I’m on this panel and that was just confirmed, because of the work that I’ve done on comedy and I promise that I will get to that.

But first I actually wanted to mention a couple of other forms of storytelling that have been important through the ages and that I have found myself turning to quite a bit over the last several years of my ongoing midlife crisis. And those are music and religion.

I’m very lucky to have been married to someone for almost 25 years now, who is, among other things, a semi-professional singer and for the last decade or so she’s been part of a multiracial choir called The Dorothy Cotton Jubilee Singers.

Some of you probably know Dorothy Cotton. She was a civil rights activist and educator, worked very closely with Dr. King, and wound up spending the last few decades of her life in Ithaca, where I live. The Jubilee Singers specialize in Negro spirituals and also do some gospel.

And I feel like I can testify, having gone to dozens of their shows at this point, that their audiences and I really think this is true, no matter what is going on in the world or if it’s not too presumptuous to say, no matter what’s going on in their personal lives, they leave the auditorium visibly uplifted.

And this happens to me as well, and it’s kind of shocking every time because I’m a Jew from Boston and never in a million years could I have predicted that I would eventually find solace in songs that are almost entirely about Jesus.

I should acknowledge that I was raised as a reform Jew, which is basically the same as Unitarian. Religion was always somewhat important to me, but really for what I would call secular reasons.

So for instance, Passover was my favorite holiday because it really it was an excuse for our extended family to get together and have a giant feast, and also because it is a holiday that is largely about storytelling.

The Passover Seder exists in order for Jews to take time out every year and repeat, retell the story of the escape from slavery in Egypt. And I found that quite moving, and over time extremely comforting.

And there’s one particular passage. This is from Exodus, chapter 14, for those of you keeping track, that has become particularly important to me in recent times. And I thought– it’s very short, I thought I would just share it with you since it’s almost spring, almost the season of Passover and I really find it to be very powerful storytelling. It goes like this.

“And so in the middle of the night the Jews arose and fled with their unleavened bread and whatever else they could carry. And they continued all the next day and into the night, and began to feel it was safe to rest. But then they came to the shore of the Red Sea and it ran high and fast and they could not cross.

And they looked behind them and saw Pharaoh’s army bearing down for the Lord had hardened Pharaoh’s heart. And then the leaders of the Jews looked up at the heavens and said, seriously?” This is the King James version.

“Seriously? What was the point of helping us escape if we were just going to die here in the wilderness. Were there not enough grave sites in Egypt?” that’s actually in the Bible, you can check. Serious.

And of course, the amazing thing as you all know, is that the Lord appreciated the joke, parted the waters and the Jews crossed to safety, which just goes to show, if you’re really good at Gallows humor, you can control sea levels, which could come in handy.

  1. So now we’re at the Comedy part. I started thinking about comedy in connection to climate change mostly because I was depressed and all of my students were depressed. And this was true from the moment I started teaching Environmental History, which is back in 2005.

I had to grapple with the question of how to present this rather difficult material without making all of us in the room feel worse. At the time, my main strategy was to focus on hope. I actually assigned Rebecca Solnit’s book Hope in the Dark, which had just come out in 2004. On display.

And I talked a lot, as Rebecca also often talks a lot, about the uncertainty and contingency of history, how history shows that nothing is predictable, nothing is inevitable. It all depends on how people choose to act, which means that we always have the power to reshape society through our collective action.

That helped for a little while. Then after a few years, this is when my midlife crisis really kicked in, I really felt I was losing hope, in part because I was dealing with both parents getting Alzheimer’s disease. This is when I really started to appreciate comedy.

Because when you start to lose the people best to something like brain damage, you have to laugh at the ridiculous things that they say. And I think I can say, from my own experience, that your loved ones will respond much better if you laugh than if you look horrified, which you are often tempted to do unfortunately.

It was my friend Jenny Price– and if you don’t know Jenny’s work, she has a book called Stop Saving the Planet! Exclamation Point, which is very fun to check out I would recommend it. Jenny helped me connect the personal and the political in this case and see that the kind of comedy I was relying on to cope with what was happening with my parents could actually also help in the context of the climate crisis.

Her main approach had to do with communication. We could get our message across better if we delivered it with a smile, instead of a sneer or a grimace. And I agreed completely, as did a number of social scientists who were just then beginning to publish studies suggesting that humor was more activating to people than, say, fear mongering. Not a shock, but the studies helped.

These social scientists also tended to emphasize that we should use what they referred to sometimes as good natured humor, so jokes that felt relatively safe and cheerful. And that also made sense to me. Although, I personally felt that what I needed was something a little bit darker.

And in addition to that, by, let’s say the mid-20 teens, it started feeling to me like the real challenge for environmentalists was no longer convincing people that climate change was coming for us, but rather dealing with the overwhelming despair that many people were starting to feel because it had become clear to them that climate change was already here.

So that’s when I started looking more deeply into the history of dark comedy and started realizing how apt gallows humor could be for this current moment. It turns out, and Becca referred to this at the beginning, that people in the Western world have been relying on jokes, and especially people who have experienced oppression, have been relying on jokes for thousands of years to gain some purchase, just a little purchase on their horrifying realities.

One of the great scholars of gallows humor named Antonin Obrdlik, wrote in 1942 that gallows humor should be understood in his words as an index of strength or morale on the part of oppressed peoples. So this was 1942. Maybe you could tell from his last name, which has four consecutive syllables that he’s Czech, so he’s writing as he put it based largely on experiences in Czechoslovakia following the advent of Hitler.

There is actually quite a lot of Holocaust humor, meaning humor from during the Holocaust, which some people today have a hard time fathoming or accepting, but I think it’s a really important thing to know about. And there’s quite a lot in the book. Prisoners in concentration camps organized variety shows and circuses and cabarets.

There was a group of friends at Treblinka who used to say to each other, hey, don’t eat so much because we’re the ones who are going to have to carry your body out of here, which was a very dark joke because, of course, they had hardly anything to eat at all. It’s also well documented that enslaved African-Americans had a very rich dark comedy tradition.

I’ll just quickly give you one of my favorite examples. So Ike comes into the master bedroom with breakfast one morning and the master says, Ike, I had the strangest dream last night. I went to Black person heaven and I found that the buildings were crumbling and the streets were full of potholes and the people were starving, even though it was heaven.

And Ike says, yeah, that is strange. But I’ll tell you, I had an even stranger dream last night. I dreamed that I went to white person heaven and the buildings were beautiful and the streets were paved with gold, but there wasn’t a single person there. Imagine that, nobody made it to white person heaven.

So it makes perfect sense to me that young people are starting to hold up signs at climate marches saying things like “I was hoping for a cooler death.” And elderly celebrities are doing climate comedy videos where they stare at the camera and say my grandkids are spoiled, anyway. They could use a little hardship.

And stand up comedians are coming up with lines like “bringing kids into this world is scary, so I’m thinking about buying my boys a kayak.” I actually bought two kayaks for my family during the pandemic, as many people did, but honestly, they did not really help. I thought my midlife crisis was bad when my parents were in decline, but now I have three teenagers and that turns out to be even worse.

On the plus side, my kids make me so insane that at least I don’t really have time to worry about the climate crisis anymore. Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

[REBECCA SOLNIT] I always feel that break– well, in journalism we were trained to talk about breaking stories, which is always being the first person to tell a story. I also love the phrase in terms of breaking stories that trap us, that stall us out, that point us in the wrong direction, that prevent us from seeing stories that are cages instead of doors.

And I think there’s something on the left that happens a lot, which is the rhetoric, like, “we need to start tomorrow,” which is always assuming it’s not yet– nobody’s doing anything. It’s not happening yet.

We haven’t done a damn thing. And so just because some of you may be slightly left in this crowd, I thought I would just mention that I think my basic premise is we have a lot of new stories that have really evolved in my lifetime, radical transformation from the mainstream stories, even 30 years ago where Indigenous, or 35 years ago, where Indigenous people were almost completely written out.

People used to talk about the nature culture divide, as though there were two co-equal and separate spheres, et cetera. So our new stories are seedlings. They need to be watered and tended and seed collected and promulgated, but they’re here.

Fredric Jameson famously remarked “someone once said it is easier to imagine the end of the world than imagine the end of capitalism.” I’d like to paraphrase that to say that some people find it easier to imagine the end of the world than the end of the fossil fuel industry,” even though the industry is in real dire straits right now, as my friend Antonio Juhasz, one of the country’s most brilliant oil policy analysts, told me last week.

So every crisis is in part a storytelling crisis, and that’s as true of the climate crisis as anything ever. A lot of people, and this is why we produce the book Not Too Late, the website study guide and et cetera, Thelma and I. So a lot of people don’t know the essential things they should, or should have been told, including that we have the solutions, we know what to do.

The climate movement has achieved a lot, which is not the same thing as enough, obviously, and won many victories, including perhaps the most significant victory of all, awakening the public to the nature of the crisis, its urgency and creating a majority population in this country and across much of the world that is eager to see action in response to climate change money spent, et cetera.

The whole idea that nobody cares is not really there. And to break another story, we’re often told that our job is to convert the climate denialists, which is A, a complete waste of time because it doesn’t work. B, they’re not very large or important. And C, I think the real job is always not to convert our enemies but to motivate our allies.

We have what we need. We just need to activate it, at least in terms of people who agree with us. So some of the storytelling problems are specific to climate, some are larger problems of imagination. By problems of the imagination I mean that the ways a lot of people imagine power and change are, well, disempowering.

We all get handed a version in which power resides in a very few people an elite of officials and the wealthy and highly visible, but change often begins in the shadows and the margins, among people who are not yet known or may never who may also be marginalized or dismissed or low status. This is true of every human rights movement and a lot of environmental and climate movements and campaigns.

It’s also true that ideas are very powerful and they almost always– all the good the progressive ideas, the ideas that have made the world better, begin in the margins in the shadows and move towards the center. People in the center are blinded by the spotlights on them. But we don’t have to be.

And so when it comes to this migration of ideas, I think of it as a reminder that ideas are powerful, which should fortify anybody doing work in the Social Sciences and Humanities at a University, despite the fact that so many departments are being dismantled and we’re so often told what we do doesn’t matter.

But back to power, the easy thing to see is the end of a campaign when a president mouths a new value, a court hands down a constructive decision, a legislative body passes a good law. Change ended there. It didn’t begin there and the news stories often forget the long journey of a good idea.

Martin Luther King Jr. famously said that the arc of history is long, but it bends towards justice. But whichever way it bends, because it bends and we’ve seen a lot of bending in the other direction lately, whichever way it bends, you have to be able to see the arc. And I’m pretty sure by arc he meant a gradual curve, not a sudden angle as if history took a sharp left. Although, sometimes it does.

So I’m seeing it as sudden because change has been going on all along, but you finally recognize it. The expectation that change will be swift and the failure to perceive it when it’s not, impacts politics and public culture for the worse. A common source of uninformed despair is when a too brief effort doesn’t bring a desired result or when one loss becomes the basis for someone to decide winning is impossible and just quit.

It says that if you tossed a coin once and decided it always comes up tails, so you shouldn’t bother. The best movie I’ve seen about all this is a 2022 documentary called To the End. It traces the creation of the Sunrise Movement, the US climate organization for people under 30 started in 2018, and their launch of the Green New Deal, showing how it influenced the Biden campaign’s climate platform deserves credit for build back better.

And finally, yes, in reduced and compromised form, but still cross the finish line in August of 2022, after most of us have had given up on it as the Inflation Reduction Act. That is by taking only a five year time frame, it shows what ended up as a huge piece of legislation began as young idealists nobody had ever heard of dreaming of change, and by tracing that trajectory shows that young people grassroots campaigns and good new ideas have power.

The short term version gives you politicians giving us nice things. The long term version shows you movements shifting what’s considered possible, reasonable and necessary, setting the stage and creating the pressure for these events offering a truer analysis of power.

There’s a wonderful scene in To the End in which Alex O’Keefe, then creative director of the Sunrise Movement, declares as he unloads a station wagon, “people who do nothing, people who have not even canvassed or anything, they start critiquing your strategy to win. But how are you going to win? What’s your strategy? Is it realistic? Can we win?

Who cares if we win, man? We’re just unpacking boxes. You do things step by step.” His patient commitment to do what comes next, including unpack the car, the next thing and the next thing and the next thing, because that’s how campaigns work. Reminds me of Greta Thunberg’s famous– I guess I’m only reading famous almost cliched statements in this talk, but I put it together this morning.

–of Greta Thunberg’s famous 2019 declaration “avoiding climate breakdown will require cathedral thinking. We must lay the foundation while we may not know exactly how to build the ceiling.” And that encodes a story that tells us two really beautiful important things, as I understand it. One is that addressing the climate crisis is a long term project calling for many kinds of labor, as building a cathedral was. You may only have one brick to contribute to it, but a million people with one brick is a pretty big structure.

The other is that we must work towards a post-fossil fuel world, knowing that the solutions are continuing to evolve. For example, solar and wind were expensive, utterly inadequate technologies at the beginning of this Millennium, but are now cheap, effective and being implemented at a dizzying rate while battery storage and materials are also evolving at an astonishing speed.

A lot of people are still kind of stuck in the early Climate Movement Era where we didn’t really have any solutions, except austerity, energy conservation, fucking compact, fucking fluorescent light bulbs, et cetera. We’ve moved beyond them, thank God.

So people often imagine the future as a version of the present in which something already obvious expands, rather than one in which wholly new actors, movements, ideas, technologies values, may change the rules.

I spent a lot of last year saying that, while it is very hard to imagine the year 2073– and I have to update this, but I’m more familiar with 1973 than 1974, so bear with me. Well, it’s very hard to imagine the year 2073 now, nobody in 1973 could imagine 2023 in all its radical difference, both wonderful and horrible, from where we were then.

But all the good things we’ve gained are because people fought for them, campaigned for them, organized for them for enviornmental protection that was inseparable from the radically bigger, deeper, more widespread environmental knowledge intelligence, awareness since then. Fought as the burgeoning Queer Rights Movements, Indigenous Rights, Latinx Rights, Asian-American Rights and Women’s Rights Movements then.

Even as what those goals should be, what the language should be, what the norms should be, continue to evolve. And the Black Civil Rights Movement served as a model for them all and never stopped. Like them, we must work towards a future we can imagine, but cannot know, and learn along the way. That’s what I think cathedral thinking also means.

And we must learn to tell stories in which some loss is inevitable. Some has already happened with climate chaos, but it does not mean we can give up or that we are going to lose everything. Everything we do matters.

How much time do I have left? OK.

I’ve long found that Americans are so unenthused about uncertainty. They often replace the truth of uncertainty with false certainty, declarations about what is going to happen as though they had the gift of prophecy with a tendency towards doom and gloom and negativity. Optimism, pessimism, cynicism and doomerism, all have this in common.

They assume they know what will happen. And if the future is already decided, then nothing is required of us. Frontline communities facing annihilation don’t generally indulge in this kind of passivity, but the comfortable too often do because it gets us off the hook.

If we already know what’s going to happen, we don’t have to do anything. And for those of us who just go sit on the couch, that’s easy to say if it means your children are going to starve or you’re going to be driven out of your ancestral lands. There’s no sofa there that you can kick back on.

So hope, or my version of it, is just the recognition that the future is unknown because it’s being made in the present by what we do or fail to do. And it’s with a commitment to seize the possibilities, because possibility is another term for uncertainty. You risk failure, but doing nothing is another kind of failure, a nothing ventured, nothing gained kind.

I love the prison abolitionist Mariame Kaba’s aphorism “Hope is a discipline,” because likewise people often confuse hope with confidence and feeling good. There’s a lot of confusion between thought and feeling, particularly around climate, between emotions and ideas, which is why I’ve taken to saying I respect despair as an emotion, but it shouldn’t be confused with an analysis.

You can feel terrible and not surrender as people in desperate circumstances often have and often do. There’s some evidence that the fossil fuel industry loves and supports doomerism and defeatism because it serves their ultimate purposes. So I also want a story of defiance in which we don’t give them what we want. And I want stories that make people spit in their eye and refuse to surrender.

I think here of Timothy Snyder’s admonition in his List of 20 Ways to Resist Authoritarianism, right after Trump was elected. “Do not surrender in advance” was one of them. And I think it’s really important for climate too, do not surrender in advance. And while these are not stories per se, they are the preconditions, the mindsets that make some stories possible to tell or send other stories packing.

Two, we don’t just need technological change crucial, though it is. We need imaginative change. I do not believe we will do what the climate needs us to do out of an abstracted rational analysis.

We will do it out of a heartfelt understanding that everything is connected that burning fossil fuel kills places, species, fellow human beings, social systems, that the world itself is made of systems, not isolated individuals. And to believe that not out of a sense of grim responsibility or obligation, the classic white people guilt way of framing things, but of what Robin Wall Kimmerer describes as reciprocity, a sense of giving back out of gratitude towards the beautiful abundance of what has been given.

The good news is that among, at least some of us, this worldview has been steadily growing the past 30 years, thanks in large part to the people who never lost it, the Indigenous communities whose perspectives have been crucial in the most practical, as well as the most imaginative ways to climate action.

Science itself is now offering aligned stories in which nature is largely socialist, not capitalist, by which I mean it’s driven by mutuality, symbiosis, interdependence and cooperation, not the version of competition so popular with the social Darwinists.

I also believe we’re afflicted by a story pushed hard by right wingers and the fossil fuel industry, that we currently live in an age of abundance. And that doing what the climate requires of us means austerity, sacrifice, renunciation. It definitely means fewer hamburgers, but they’re gross anyway. I get to enter some personal bias here. I have not eaten one in this Millennium. Ew!

There’s a better story to tell in which the great majority of the world’s people live in austerity and poverty now and one in which we’re constantly sacrificing lives, cultures, politics to the deadly literal and political poison that is fossil fuels.

We’ve accepted a dirty smoggy polluted world as so normal it’s hardly perceived. I think of that moment in the pandemic when a huge amount of noise stopped from machines and people suddenly heard birds afresh, and when in Northern India a huge amount of pollution stopped and there were cities seeing the Himalayas in the distance for the first time in decades.

Doing what the climate crisis requires of us could assuage the crisis of hopelessness and despair about the future. Redesigning the world could make a world that’s more accommodating of diverse people, young, old, with disabilities, all income levels. We can make it what we want. We have to radically redesign the world.

If we can lead with good stories, we can redesign it to be a better place for a lot more of us and a more that includes other species and other parts of the world, as well as our own species and our own particular corner of the world.

Rethinking what constitutes wealth could mean shifting from the idea of accumulating wealth and possessions to security in our communities, confidence about our future and a wealth of time, because if we’re not consuming so frantically, we don’t have to produce so frantically. A wealth of time for relationships, including not only social relationships, but relationships to our own interior life and to the natural world and other species.

Finally, I think we need news stories that are not lone individual, rugged manly, hero stories when they’re superhero stories and the hero’s relevant quality, that the Ubermensch quality is the ability to endure and inflict tremendous violence. That’s not actually how the world gets changed.

The world gets changed for the better, largely by people who are patient, tenacious, can inspire others, can draw people together, build alliances, solidarity, find common ground and imagine a better future. Thank you all. I rushed through that because there was a lot.

[APPLAUSE]

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] I think the pathway to this podium is part of the dark humor that we’re propagating here. Thank you again for having me. This is really awesome. It’s great to be back in my old academic haunts.

I have kind of a funny career, which requires me to balance between doing science journalism, which is evidence based, where one tries one’s very best to tell the truth and I also write science fiction, where one tries one’s best to lie. And make things up. But I do try to make my science fiction as evidence based as possible as well.

And I want to tell you a little bit about the coming together, but also the clash between those two worlds and the way that we express stories about them. So let me tell you about my summer vacation last summer. I was lucky enough to join a group of environmental scientists at the Marine Biological Laboratory in Woods Hole, which is in Cape Cod, Massachusetts.

There’s a couple of Marine Biological labs there actually, the whole town is kind of overrun by scientists. And what we were doing was a group of journalists like myself were joining a team led by the environmental chemist Anne Giblin whose work is terrific. She’s done a lot of investigation of how chemical changes in the tundra in the Arctic are triggering other kinds of cascading effects.

And she also looks at the area around Woods Hole. There’s a Bay there called Waquoit Bay, which has become the subject of a great deal of study of looking at how nitrogen loading in the water leads to deoxygenation, and that leads to fish die-offs. I’m sure those of you who are familiar with environmental crises have heard about this before.

So I go there and I get to tag along with them while they’re doing things that to me are deeply exciting. Like, we get to put on waders, go into the Bay and dig up chunks of algae, and then we put them into a fricking mass spectrometer. I mean, first, we had to dry them out and do a bunch of stuff, you can’t just like throw algae at a mass spectrometer. But I’d never seen a mass spectrometer before. I’d been writing about them for like decades, OK?

And I’m always, like, mass spectrometer, pretty badass. And I saw it, and I literally was freaking out, and the scientists thought that was very cute and they let me kind of stand next to the mass spectrometer. Do not touch. It has a laser in it, so it’s a little bit dangerous.

And to me all of these things were just incredibly exciting. And I kept kind of gushing at them about how this was really amazing. And then somehow it got out among the scientists that I write science fiction, which I had sort of– I had come into this fellowship being like I’m a very serious science journalist. Here are my books that are all science journalism.

And they got so excited and they were, like, we love science fiction. We want to talk to you all about science fiction. And I’m, like, I’m a little embarrassed. I wrote this novel about building ecosystems. It’s quite silly and it’s not what you guys are doing out there with the algae. And they were, like, no, no. Actually science fiction is incredibly important to us.

And in fact, one of the scientists at EMBL, one of the papers he’d published became the basis for Ray Naylor’s novel The Mountain in the Sea. Highly recommend. Great book about octopus cities. And he was just thrilled. He was, like, did you know my article was cited in a fiction book?

[LAUGHTER]

It’s, like, that’s not going to get you credit for tenure pal. But they I had a couple of theories about why it was that science fiction got these scientists so excited. And I think part of it is these are environmental scientists who are, of course, constantly thinking about the future. They actually are gathering tons of data and trying to use computer simulations to project into the future how these inputs into the environment are going to continue to change the environment.

That’s their entire job. They’re environmental scientists, so they study change over time, change over long periods of time, as Rebecca was kind of pointing out. These are things that happen on massively long time scales. And so I think that they are in fact, in some ways, engaged in extremely evidence-based acts of science fiction. They’re looking at this sort of speculative future.

The other thing I think that makes environmental scientists interested in science fiction is that environmental science is a very collective practice. You cannot just go out by yourself in one lifetime and study an ecosystem. You have to have someone like Anne Giblin, who’s a chemist. We also had someone with us who studies food webs, so looking at biological relationships between life forms and actually not even just life forms, but also kind of the chemical precursors of life.

And of course, at the Institute itself, there are people who are studying everything from inorganic chemistry to communications, how to communicate with the public. So they’re very used to this idea that tons of people have to come together in order to discover anything. But the problem is that, as a science journalist, and for them I think, as scientists trying to curate their careers, they’re really encouraged to think about great individuals.

I can’t tell you how many times I’ve gone to an editor at a major magazine or newspaper and said, I really want to write a story about this group of 10 people who did a thing. And they’re like, yeah, no. Pick a person. There has to be a person who’s like the leader. And hopefully they’ll be hot so we can have a picture of them.

And this is not how anything is done. No such thing as science that’s done by like one hot person and in waders with algae. And so the thing that science fiction can do really well, I think, is actually give us an opportunity to tell stories about collaborations between a number of characters that take place over a long period of time.

And so I want to finish it up in my last couple of minutes here by telling you a tiny bit about my novel The Terraformers, which came out last year, which is about a group of environmental engineers on another planet trying to create novel ecosystems.

There’s a little kink in their plans, which is that they are all, in fact, owned by a interstellar real estate corporation, which develops artisanal handcrafted planets. And they’re developing an Earth like world. So the world is owned by the real estate company, but so are all of the people on the world because they were genetically engineered to be good workers who create these ecosystems.

And the people on this world are not just Homo Sapiens. In fact, Homo Sapiens is kind of a weird identity that you might kind of choose to have, if you have the money. But these are mostly kind of knockoff hominids. And then of course, the major characters in the novel are moose.

There’s a really great moose romance. There’s a romance between a sentient flying train and a cat, who’s an investigative journalist. So this is a world where I did want to have a sense of coziness, cozy humor. It’s not very dark humor, except in some places. But also I wanted to suggest what happens to personhood in the future, if you actually take seriously the idea that our environments and our ecosystems are full of living creatures who all have something to contribute.

And so what I wanted to do with that kind of imaginative world was kind of posed to my reader the question of, what would it look like if you were trying to shepherd an ecosystem and every member of that ecosystem could come to the table and tell you what the fuck they want from you? What if the cows on your farm could say, hey, I’d actually like things to be different?

There is a radical revolutionary cow in my novel, by the way, who does some pretty awesome stuff. And what would happen if we took seriously the requests of moose about where they got to migrate? And so in my novel the basis for this idea of all of these different parts of the ecosystem coming to the table, is a deep seated belief in something that they call the great bargain.

Now remember, this is a novel set in 50,000 years. So there’s a lot of culture that’s happened between now and that future. And the great bargain is the word that they have for the scientific process that has allowed them to speak with non-human animals.

And so there’s all of these non-human animals who are part of this great bargain. And I wanted to allow readers to have that idea in their heads. I mean, I was very deliberate about it. I was like, I want people to think about the great bargain, and how do we get to the great bargain? And how do we think about our relationship with nature or what we call nature? How do we think about our relationship with our ecosystem as a bargain?

Not as us capitulating, not as something capitulating to us, but us entering into a bargain. And it’s a bargain that we keep. And that’s another promise in the novel, is that this bargain is kept, all of the treaties are kept that they make in the book.

And so basically what happens when you write fiction, I’ve found, like The Terraformers, is that I was able to show these communities at work, but also the book takes place over a period of many thousand years. So we’re able to see how an ecosystem evolves, but also how a social movement evolves over time and over the generations, and how the gains made by moose who fall in love in one generation.

How those are passed on to the next generation of people, who set up a fantastic public transit system for the planet and those people pass on their wishes to the next generation, which includes this investigative journalist cay who falls in love with a train and exposes the corruption of the evil corporation that runs their planet.

And maybe that way they’ll have a chance to change things again and seize control of this privately owned nature. Thanks very much for listening.

[APPLAUSE]

[DANIEL GUMBINER] Hi, everyone. I’m Daniel. This is so cool. There are so many– I want to talk about so many different points that my fellow panelists have raised, but I’ll try and keep this short, so you guys can ask some questions too. I wanted to talk a little bit about my book Fire in the Canyon, which came out this year and sort of the origins of it and how it came to be.

There are no moose romances, alas. But it’s a contemporary tale about a family living in the Sierra foothills, who are confronting the threat of wildfire. And what happens essentially is that a wildfire moves through their town and it sort of sets in motion this chain of events for these different members of this family, the Hecht family.

And in the book you follow each member of the family and see the way in which the aftermath of the fire affects them. And I think, obviously wildfires are intensely covered in the moment when they occur. There’s lots of journalism. But then in the aftermath it’s a little bit quieter.

And so that to me seemed like the province of a novel, because the story goes on right. People are still there and the story doesn’t stop in the days after the wildfire. So I wanted to explore the emotional experience of what happens after you go through something like that.

And the inspiration really came from returning to California actually. I grew up here, but I was living in Las Vegas for a little while for a job. And when I came back, even in the years that I had been gone, I felt like the shift in the way that wildfires were affecting my friends and family all over the state was so dramatic compared to even like the last few years that I had been gone.

And I was really struck by that, as someone who had grown up here and how different the Summers felt and the Falls. And so I felt a sort of obligation to bear witness to that. And that’s sort of where the impulse to start the story came from. But then, and this is a panel obviously on storytelling, there were these questions that arose and challenges that arose of telling that kind of story.

And I think one of the most difficult things I wrestled with when working on this book was figuring out the lens of it, figuring out how wide the aperture would be essentially, because obviously climate change is a massive subject. It’s a vast subject. It’s sometimes very difficult to even wrap our heads around how much is implicated.

But humans aren’t usually emotionally moved by a sense of vastness they’re usually moved by the particular. We’re hardwired to relate to each other on a personal level. And so I had to figure out a way to tell the story that felt authentic and moving on a personal level, while not feeling like it was also reductive and not taking in the full scope of what the issue actually is.

And I think that’s one of the biggest challenges about writing on Climate Change in any genre, really. And it can be a challenge in nonfiction, but particularly in fiction where you’re often working to try to move the reader and to have them emotionally connect to a story.

And that’s so essential too in fiction, because that’s the work that fiction does, that’s what makes it powerful, is that ability to grab you and emotionally transport you. And so that was one of the challenges. And what I decided to do was to just really zero in on the particular and work from there, and let that expand out into the broader story.

So there’s a very concentrated story in a lot of ways. It’s looking at a very specific thing, but the hope is that it alludes to everything else through that small specific detail. Another one of the challenges was actually thinking about the political in the work. And obviously Climate Change is a highly politicized topic. And in some ways, when I wrote the first draft actually, it didn’t really engage the political that closely.

And there was something about it that felt off to me, which was something that often happens in the process of writing something. There’s something wrong, you don’t know exactly why, but it’s just not sitting right with. You don’t have the answer, but it’s missing something. And for me, it felt like it was sort of coy, in a way, to not engage this the political dimension of this thing, which was so obviously political.

But it also felt like when I tried experiments with incorporating political threads into the story, that it just overwhelmed the personal aspects of it, and kind of drowned it out. And I think that is a particular challenge of writing about climate change, is that balance between letting the political just kind of subsume everything else and still managing to incorporate it in some way.

And so what I ultimately did with regard to that was to basically try to let the political speak through the characters concerns. And that was a really big turning point for me in revising this book, was basically figuring out a way to through the lived concerns of the characters, to speak to some of these issues. And once I did that, it felt like the key had sort of turned in the book and I was seeing it in a different way and it allowed it to feel more honest to me.

The last thing I’ll say is just that I think in writing fiction one of the most important things it can do is create a sense of communion. And I think that’s something that we really, as many of the panelists have alluded to, we really need that sense of neighborliness in this moment.

And I think there’s a way in which we can sometimes feel alienated from our fellow people and feel like we are sort of suffering in isolation with some of these subjects. And it’s so important, I think, in this moment in particular to identify our shared experience with each other.

And so that’s, I think, one of the other things that storytelling can really play a role in this moment, is kind of opening up those conversations, uniting us. One of the most interesting parts of writing this book actually was I did a lot of research for it and that involved talking to a lot of people who had been through different kinds of experiences with wildfire.

And those conversations were so interesting and really varied. But one of the consistent features of them was that everyone really wanted to talk to me. I had sort of gone into it thinking, oh, it’s going to be hard to get people to open up about this. I don’t know if it’s going to be– this might be a challenging research project.

But really the experience was that once people were invited to share, they just really wanted to talk about it. It was on a lot of people’s minds. They didn’t feel like there was a forum for them to express what they had gone through.

And so I think that is something that’s so important in storytelling, to keep our levels up collectively as a group, whether that’s through your own writing storytelling in that regard or whether that’s through private conversations, groups like this. So I think that’s another thing that’s really important and something that storytelling can kind of uniquely– a way in which it can uniquely serve us in this moment. Thanks.

[APPLAUSE]

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] How to use one of these things? It sounds like a lot of your exploration on story writing is pushing back against despair.

REBECCA SOLNIT] Are you talking to me or to all of us?

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] –a lot of this throughout. No. And I guess I’m thinking of the counterpoint to Aaron’s dark humor, which I love of course. But have we feasted for a long time on stories of despair? Why has despair been our go to disposition? If you have any thoughts on that.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] Do I ever? But I don’t want to hog the time.

That’s a great question.

Say something.

And I think that it serves as status quo, capitalism, commercial culture, et cetera, to tell us we’re consumers, not citizens, that we have very little power, that the power rests in the hands of the mighty, the elite minority to whom we should be very nice to get what we want. I think we don’t have a lot of stuff that familiarizes us with how unpredictable the world is. And I opened with the famous “It’s easier to imagine the end of the world than the end of capitalism.”

And of course, I think, even the end of capitalism frames it as either like everything is capitalism and the only alternative is nothing is capitalism. I think of it more as all of us in our friendships and our passions, if we do volunteer work, donate money to noble causes, et cetera, are doing anti-capitalist things all the time. Gardening is kind of anti-capitalist.

Unless you’re employing a poor person to do it for you. I was just in West Marin where I saw a lot of that. So I think a lot of things work hard against people feeling powerful, confident, relatively at ease with a world. Either people think change is all for the worse or that nothing ever really changes. Usually they believe both of those things at once.

I think, in a sense, it’s like we have bad equipment, equipment that’s poorly adapted to reality and understanding change, understanding power, often understanding how much worse things were. As an old feminist and a longtime climate activist, when Roe versus Wade got overturned, a lot of people were like, oh, feminism is completely rolling backwards.

And it’s like, well, we did have this right for 50 years. I don’t believe we’re never going to get it back. But you broaden the lens to look at Argentina, Mexico, Spain and Ireland, for Catholic countries that all gained abortion rights recently. Or you go back into deep time until the Griswold case came to the Supreme Court and people didn’t have a right to birth control.

The world in which I was born into was so horrifically and brutally unequal for women who were excluded from almost every corridor of power. Marriage was an institution of inequality. So I feel we have a lot of stories where amnesia and despair are closely related, in my view. You can’t know the future, but you can understand patterns and possibilities from the past. So I think that’s a big piece of it.

And the US is a very amnesiac culture. And I read that part of why people are not more anti-Trump, ’cause a lot of them don’t even remember what the world was like 3 and 1/2 years ago. It’s legit for kids who– 18-year-old voters who were 10 when Trump got elected. It’s not so legit for people over 30.

So I think all those things feed despair as well as, when I started talking about hope 20 something years, 21 years ago, I ended up saying “hope is a frilly pink dress nobody wants to show their knees in. Despair is a black leather jacket everyone thinks they look cool in.” So it’s also kind of a style factor.

Those are my top 5,000 explanations. Thank you all.

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] I wanted to add something really quickly because being in the world of science fiction, we think about these things a lot around, whether people are writing dystopian or Utopian or hopeful science fiction. And one of the things that I’ve found, because The Terraformers is quite a hopeful book in a lot of ways, although it has a lot of dark elements to it as well, is that when you write something dystopian people think it’s quite serious.

They take it as being weighty and literary.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] Black leather jacket.

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] Yeah. And actually I thought it was interesting that you described hope as being a frilly pink dress, because I think it is something that is sort of marginalized, feminized, degraded. It’s viewed as unserious. Somebody naive, someone who doesn’t truly understand the world. And so when you try to offer a more hopeful vision, sometimes it can feel like everyone is just shutting you down because it’s just not, it isn’t something that an educated person would believe.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] I heard her.

[REBECCA HERMAN] Yes. I was just saying that this is true in my experience in historical scholarship as well. And certainly was my disposition as a college student, which is when I became more and more interested in history, I wasn’t interested in high school. But it was almost like the more obscene the better. It’s why I study US Foreign Relations in Latin America. It doesn’t get any worse than that.

But this book that I’m working on now is about Antarctica and it ends with a ban on mining. And so of course, that’s not the end of the story. It’s not everything tied up in a bow, but it is weird to be a historian writing a book where the arc actually ends in a place that is sort of a weird happy ending. So I can relate to that across the historical genre as well.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Well, it was a pleasure to listen to you all talk about your work and your books on climate. I have also written a book on climate. So I know how difficult and also how important it is as well. But mine is on artists reimagining the Arctic and Antarctic and it’s called Climate Change and the New Polar Aesthetics.

And it deals with storytelling, but in the context of art and filmmaking specifically on these regions. But I wanted to ask and, I mean, this is something we all grapple with, and I’ve read Rebecca Solnit’s work and had really appreciated it in a lot of ways because, I think, yes, the serious is usually, becomes extremely masculinist and limited.

And I too stay away from the apocalypse and all that kind of fear mongering and thinking in my own writing. But I always have trouble hitting a balance between being furious that we’ve blown through the 1.5 centigrade mark.

But the way people also respond to emergencies in such a sort of short sighted way. And it’s like a balance in our writing in a sense of how to open up conversations and keep the pressure on simultaneously and get people to feel like they can contribute and act as well, and push against passivity.

And so I feel like it’s so interesting how you’re all sort of figuring this out in terms of novel writing. I mean, from my experience, it seems like, once people become part of the first line communities, then they really wake up. And it’s really, to me, depressing that people have to be hit by Hurricane Sandy or Hurricane Maria in order to understand the huge stakes here.

So I was just wondering if you could just speak more to, how you think through these different kind of layers, levels, emotions? Whether it’s humor or horror, as the cases in some of the work I write on, the horror genre. And how do you keep this balance and tension going simultaneously?

[AARON SACHS] It seems like maybe the fire angle. I don’t mean to put you on the spot, but just what you were saying about frontline communities, I don’t know, if you were thinking about that.

[DANIEL GUMBINER] Yeah. I think the first thing that came to mind in terms of just balancing these different waves of emotion around frustration and then wanting to remain hopeful to at the same time, is just sort of trying to be honest about that and look at it soberly and not try and make it other than what it is, which is that it is really frustrating.

And there are also hopeful elements, in both of those things are true. And just trying to acknowledge that and continue to work within that seesaw state of mind, because that allows you to see it most clearly. And I think seeing it most clearly is the best way to act in a wise way around it.

I think– actually thinking about the despair question a little bit too. The thing that came to mind for me is that, well, despair and depression often arise when we feel like we don’t have a voice or we are disempowered or our voice is not allowed. And so I think if we are feeling despair, it’s often because we haven’t found a door through which we can imagine, achieving what we feel like we need to achieve.

But those doors do exist in this moment, like many of the panelists discussed them. And so it’s a matter of seeing that clearly and being like present of mind enough to find the frame of mind that works for you.

So I think acknowledging it and being frank about that helps you chart a path forward.

[AARON SACHS] I guess I would also just add very quickly that, for me, part of it is trying to work on multiple fronts at the same time, in multiple ways. So in my contribution today I was really focused on how we, who are activists or engaged in various ways, need to work on our own mentality or mental health,

But also in the book, I talk about how we can use humor through satire to attack the people who are doing things we disapprove of, and also how we can use humor on ourselves to make ourselves sort of less grim and sanctimonious.

Becca was saying history is often dominated by a tragic metanarrative environmental history even more so. I mean, it’s almost like a full embrace of tragedy and despair and just the sort of teleology, the fate of everything going wrong, everything being despoiled. And I think making fun of that tendency in ourselves could also be a useful strategy.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thank you all. I’ve really enjoyed this. I think each of you have spoken to this a bit but I’m curious whether you can talk more about everyday ways of engaging with storytelling and how we might be more expansive with those.

So specifically for folks who aren’t professional writers where do you see opportunities for us to expand the places in which we’re telling stories the media that we’re using and the ways that we’re engaging with them? Particularly when we live in a culture where often the act of reading is so solitary. I’m curious what your thoughts are on that.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] When I put out Not Too Late, I felt it covers a lot of different aspects of the climate situation, energy, technology, culture, colonialism, et cetera. And then I realized we hadn’t actually given people a practical what-can-I-do guide. So that’s now in the digital book and will be in the next printing, and it’s a free download pinned in my Twitter account.

And on the Not Too Late website and stuff. But I feel like everybody is a storyteller. Some of us have the joy and luck of publishing books. Every conversation is a story conversation. There are stories underlying, oh we’ll never win. Oh, we actually can remember all these times we win.

So I feel like a big part of being a climate activist is just being an informed and constructive participant, whether it means bringing climate up without just being like, oh, I read another really terrible statistic, but kind of like wow, did you know that solar is now the cheapest form of electricity ever known on Earth? Or that.

So I feel like there’s a lot of different pieces as a storyteller. And it’s not necessarily just stories specific to climate. I think our stories about where– as I was saying, I wrote Hope in the Dark 20 years before we put out not too late. Where does power lie? What does change look like? Where do we find our own power?

And again, I think memory is to hope as amnesia is to despair. So I think just equipping yourself to participate in everyday life, because these things– the world really gets changed not by a book, but how a book, whether it’s Silent Spring or whatever becomes how people tell the story about.

Oh, pesticides are not these miracle things that will save us from bad bugs. Pesticides are poisoning us and birds and disrupting the whole system. And so I feel stories need to go, I hate the word viral at this point in history for some reason, but they need to become something that’s everybody’s equipment, not just a few writers.

So that’s how I think about it. I don’t know what the other people here might say.

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] I’ve been thinking a lot about this article that Astra Taylor wrote. Yeah, we love her. She’s a filmmaker and she helped spearhead The Debt Collective, which is a group devoted to relieving people of their debts. And she talks about this idea of the right to listen. So not the right to speak, but the right to listen.

And she describes how the Debt Collective, as a movement, deployed this idea when they would get together in big groups like this or even bigger, and people would just tell stories about their debt. And this is a hugely taboo subject, especially in the United States. People do not like to talk about money, how much they owe, how much they make.

And just the act of sharing how much they owed, what it had done to their lives, was really transformative. And I think that that to me is how storytelling comes into everyday life.

I think any time you get together, even with just a group of friends informally or a group of people on a Discord server, or if you’re on Mastodon or some social media thing that’s not Facebook or X, you have an opportunity to listen to people and hear their stories and share and realize that you’re not alone.

And a lot of what Rebecca was saying, that we are actually working to change things and it’s very easy to feel isolated from that. But in fact, it’s just a conversation away and it doesn’t have to be fancy. It just has to be talking.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hello. Thank you very much for this total panel. I’m a PhD student here in the History Department, and I’ve been trying to grapple with the question of what kind of storyteller I want to be. I’m thinking about the past and the present. And in this process I’ve been told that I need to be eligible to the historians, that I shouldn’t really pay attention to the president.

I should stick to the sources. And so my question is, in your respective fields, either historical scholarship, science journalism or fictional writing, how do you negotiate with your respective fields expectations of what your writing should look like and to bring forth, or perhaps tap into different ways of imagining, different ways of storytelling to get out of this storytelling crisis that Rebecca Solnit highlighted? Thank you.

[REBECCA HERMAN] You’ve thought a lot about this. I wonder if you should.

[AARON SACHS] Sure. I’ll just chime in quickly about that since you are a PhD student, the academic part, I’m glad you already used the word negotiate because that is something you can always do, and that’s in my experience, it’s something that graduate students forget that they have the power to do.

And I think one of the strongest ways you can negotiate, and I mean in the most immediate terms with your advisor or your committee, but also in the broader terms that you were asking about, your intended audience, is to cite models of works that have been successful in your field and do exactly what you most want to do in terms of communicating.

Because I can guarantee that there have been models in whatever field you’re in within history, there have been very, very successful books that have told their stories and including first books, including dissertations, that have told their stories in different ways, that have been published with trade presses, that have appealed to different kinds of audiences, simultaneously academic audiences and, say, activist audiences.

So that’s where I would start.

[REBECCA HERMAN] And I’ll just say in the 40 plus books I didn’t give you summaries of in their entirety, is an edited volume that Aaron co-edited called Artful History. And it is about– it has many, many examples of work that is strong scholarship and beautifully written.

Do any of you want to speak to that, or should we take another question? We have about 10 minutes left.

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] I would just say super briefly, as a recovering academic, I would say also that if the kind of writing and storytelling you want to do takes you beyond the Academy, that’s OK. Like there’s jobs for people like us outside the Academy too and I used to not think that when I was a grad student, and all I wanted was a tenure track job.

But there are ways to be a public intellectual and to do the kind of work that you want to do beyond the Academy. So if you find that you’re butting your head up against those limitations too much, just remember there’s the big world out there too and we’re here and you’ll survive.

[REBECCA HERMAN] Sure. We could do that and then close it that way.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hi. Thank you so much for your talk. I’m an undergrad in both English and Environmental Science, so I really appreciate the grouping of topics, I guess. You mentioned a lot about how all labor is necessary in the climate crisis and working towards addressing these issues. So I guess, how do you reassure yourself that writing is valuable and especially in a society where scientific discovery is much more valued and talked about?

How do you reassure yourself that your writing is worthwhile and has purpose, and especially before you’re well-read and published that that work is contributing in a meaningful way?

[AUDIENCE MEMBER #2] Yeah. My question is surrounding, I think it’s hard for people who– it’s hard to get people to show up for things, even if it is something that those people want to do. I think that the attendance at this event is a testament to how wonderful you all are, so props for that.

I guess I’m wondering if there has been any through line through what you all have seen success in terms of whether it’s something you want people to physically show up for, something that you’re asking people to do, contacting or representative, those sorts of things. When those kind of campaigns have been successful, what through lines have been for that?

[AUDIENCE MEMBER #3] Hi. Sorry. My question is angled towards, being conscious that we have two journalists in the panel, in the context of losing thousands of jobs, journalist jobs in the US right now. How do we tell, where is the space to tell international stories? I just came back from two years in the Brazilian Amazon. I do journalism. And the stories being told here are really different.

And the stories that I hear from traditional Indigenous peoples are not reaching a national or international level. And I myself am struggling to be able to tell the stories because they don’t seem hopeful or like solutions to journalism.

[REBECCA HERMAN] Great. Who wants to speak to those for concluding?

That’s a lot.

[AARON SACHS] I’ll jump in with one thought in response to the very first question from our undergrad. And thank you very much for coming. It doesn’t matter, writing doesn’t matter.

What I mean is there’s no way of knowing if you’re writing is ever going to matter. And Rebecca has said this many times very much more elegantly than I can say it, but I agree and I have very much lived that, and I think that if you want to write, that is enough.

If you feel that it’s important to you in the moment, that is enough. And then you can hold on to the uncertainty of whether it will matter to anyone as a kind of hope. Everything is uncertain. I asked a similar question when I was in undergrad to one of my mentors and my main concern was, well, how do I say something new?

How can my perspective matter when so many people have said all of these things? Look at this bookstore, look at all of these amazing books. And he was, like, that’s not the problem. You are going to say something completely different because there’s nobody else like you in the world.

The rest is just chance. It’s true there are a lot of books out there, but who could have predicted. And one of Rebecca’s examples that I remember very clearly because I teach Thoreau every year in Environmental History, is there is no way that anyone living in Thoreau’s time would have predicted that we would still be reading Thoreau in the 21st century. You just never know.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] I want to jump on what he said, which was so helpful. I taught at art schools for a while, the San Francisco Art Institute and California College of Arts and Crafts back when it still had its full name. And I really struggled. I started in my 20s with “very few of these people are going to make a living as an artist.” What are we teaching them? What are we giving them?

I think when you enter into any creative act, and writing really hones this, you become a producer of meaning rather than a consumer of meaning. You learn to think for yourself, you gain a capacity to analyze, assess, find a point of view, think deeply. Think that is incredibly valuable whether or not other people see it, it reaches other people.

And so it has an inherent value in what it makes you as a person in the world versus being like a passive consumer or somebody who accepts sort of received opinion.

And then also I write a lot, as was mentioned in the intro, I’m also on the board of Oil Change International Third Act, the advisory board of Dayenu, a Jewish Voice for Climate. And I have the Not Too Late project with Thelma. I kind of hedge my bets by donating, joining actions.

My younger brother who lives in Berkeley is a well known Climate and Human Rights organizer, and I’ve been tagging along with him for world– oh, my God, almost 40 years. And he helps organize, I show up.

So I feel like no matter what else you do in your life, you’re always a citizen, and there’s always other– I don’t want that to just, and I don’t mean citizen in the sense that you have legal status, I mean that you’re a member of the community who can show up in different ways, participate in different ways beyond your profession and that never stops, no matter if you’re an incredibly successful writer or dancer or filmmaker or something like that.

And I have always found that activism feeds my work. I come in touch with remarkable people. I feel over and over with Occupy Wall Street, Indigenous Rights Movements I was part of or supporting in the ’90s. The Women’s Movement, et cetera. I’ve literally seen the world change profoundly in ways if I was disengaged, I wouldn’t.

So it’s incredibly worth doing. You’ll find out why. It’s inherently worth doing, but you’ll find out some of the reasons why by doing it. And oh, my God. We have all these other questions. But it’s great, we have all these other panelists. Passing the ball.

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] I mean, I feel like a lot of these questions do come down to, why should we right when everything is on fire and shouldn’t we be like putting our bodies on the line instead of engaging our minds in this uncertain environment, where we’re told every day that journalists are being fired or being laid off or venues that we love disappeared, nuked their websites overnight? That kind of thing.

I mean, of course, at a time like this, if you’re a writer who wants to write about social change or justice, you are going to be discouraged. Dominant culture is going to tell you that what you do is worthless. Thinking is worthless. Writing something down, what if only one person read it? That’s worthless. Well, I don’t think so because I’m a writer, so I am prone to despair.

And it is a rough profession just like teaching, just like any other profession that you’re going to go into, if you’re interested in the sciences or the humanities. But I think about the fact that so many books and articles and just little things that I’ve read, have come to me from someone who’s obscure, who nobody maybe reads or maybe like one person checked the book out in the last 10 years.

And those things matter to me so much. There are books that I think about almost every day that were never bestsellers, that were never taught in some frickin’ English survey class, but they changed me and they live in me. And I think, honestly, if you write something and one person reads it and they’re like, wow, that was badass, you have succeeded.

And fuck capitalism. Fuck the idea that you need to have a fancy job or some credential. The goal is to be heard and to listen to others. And that’s what you do when you write.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] I would just add very quickly to the last question, is we brought in people from all over the South Pacific, somebody from Pakistan, the Philippines, et cetera, and embattled parts of the US, Navajo, New Mexico, New Orleans, Black New Orleans, et cetera, and we don’t need to tell all the stories. And a lot of what you can do as a journalist is be a conduit for other people’s stories, stories from elsewhere.

And I think becoming an amplifier for stories that aren’t being heard enough Is so much what writers try and do, whether they’re people dealing directly with wildfire or cats having romances with trains, but I digress. And so I feel like that’s a big part of the job. And I love that you brought up Astra and deep listening. Yeah, we need to tell stories. We also need to hear stories or hear people in search of a story to know what’s needed out there.

And now I’m like, what about the middle question?

[DANIEL GUMBINER] I would say that it feels like some of this connects to your question too in terms of just finding a community of people who can support your work, even if there are trials and tribulations with getting it published, but finding that audience, no matter what I mean, I think I love this book called Art and Fear that is about just making art, despite its many challenges.

And one of the principles that the authors talk about is this idea of finding an audience no matter what. Building in an audience to your life, no matter what that looks like to just make it so that you can keep producing. And maybe the editorial tides change, and suddenly the kind of work that you’re doing becomes in Vogue and you’re right there.

And you’ve been doing it in the deepest, most meaningful way for the longest and you’re perfectly positioned. But you’re still producing and you’re still doing the thing that’s important to you, if you have that audience in the first place. Because you can’t really control the editorial tides. That’s sort of not in your power.

All you can do is kind of control the work that you’re doing and make sure you put yourself in a position to do something that’s meaningful to yourself.

[REBECCA HERMAN] All right. Well, thank you all for joining us. And I want to thank the panelists again, if you’ll all give them around of applause.

[APPLAUSE]

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

New Directions

New Directions in Greening Infrastructure

 

As the effects of climate change become more obvious, moving away from fossil fuels has only become more urgent. But to do so, new energy sources – and new infrastructure – are desperately needed.

Recorded on March 20, 2024, this panel features three early-career scholars from UC Berkeley presenting their research on the greening infrastructure and the green energy transition. The panel included Johnathan Guy, PhD Candidate in Political Science; Caylee Hong, a PhD candidate in Anthropology, and Andrew Jaeger, PhD Candidate in Sociology. The panel was moderated by Daniel Aldana Cohen, Assistant Professor of Sociology at UC Berkeley. Co-Sponsored by the Socio-Spatial Climate Collaborative, the Berkeley Climate Change Network, and the Berkeley Economy and Society Initiative.

Panelists

Johnathon GuyJohnathan Guy is a PhD candidate at UC Berkeley. He studies the political economy of development in South and Southeast Asia, focusing on the politics of climate change and the energy transition. His ongoing dissertation project, “Selecting for Solar: The Political Incentives Behind Power Generation Project Section,” attempts to understand the diverging trajectories of power sector buildouts in India and Indonesia.

Caylee HongCaylee Hong is an attorney, interdisciplinary researcher, and educator. She is currently a Ph.D. candidate in Anthropology at UC Berkeley, where she researches urban oil production in the Los Angeles Basin. Her dissertation examines the ways that diverse stakeholders navigate the decommissioning and redevelopment of century-old oil fields in the heart of cities, including Los Angeles and Long Beach. She has published research on infrastructure finance, the environment, law, and citizenship in AntipodeAnthropological Theory, and Fieldsights.

Andrew JaegerAndrew Jaeger is a PhD Candidate in Sociology at UC Berkeley. His dissertation analyzes the political economy of climate change in California.

 

Daniel Aldana CohenDaniel Aldana Cohen is Assistant Professor of Sociology at UC Berkeley, where he is Director of the Socio-Spatial Climate Collaborative, or (SC)2, and serves as a faculty affiliate in the graduate program on Political Economy. Cohen works on the intersections of the climate emergency, housing, political economy, social movements, and inequalities of race and class in the United States and Brazil. As Director of (SC)2, he is leading qualitative and quantitative research projects on Whole Community Climate Mapping, green political economy, and eco-apartheid. He is the co-author of A Planet to Win: Why We Need a Green Deal (Verso 2019), and is currently completing a book project called Street Fight: Climate Change and Inequality in the 21st Century City, under contract with Princeton University Press.

Podcast and Transcript

Listen to this event below, or on Google Podcasts or Apple Podcasts.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[JULIA SIZEK] Hello, everyone. We’re going to go ahead and get started. Thank you for coming. My name is Julia Sizek, and I am the postdoc here at Social Science Matrix. And today’s panel, New Directions in Greening Infrastructure, is about a topic that I actually find particularly interesting in my own research, which is this big question of like, if we’re going to switch to greener energy sources, then how are we actually going to create the infrastructure that we need for it?

And in my own research, this has appeared in the guise of, like, a much stranger being, which is the sort of ghost of transcontinental railroad right of ways and how they get used for other purposes, both for infrastructure, as well as for a potentially comically evil water project in the Mojave Desert that I have done a lot of research on.

And here I think we actually have a lot of similar questions, which is how do we take these old fossil fuel infrastructures and these old rules that we have created with fossil fuels in mind and transfer them to a new system that we want that will be, you know, theoretically greener and better for the environment and more sustainable overall? So these, obviously, are not only technical questions, but they’re also social scientific ones. And that is why we have invited our panelists today to speak about them.

So today’s panel is part of this New Direction series here at Matrix. And this is a series that features the work of junior scholars here on Berkeley’s campus. One thing that is particularly great about this series is that it is working with graduate students and people who do not have tenure and are not tenure track people at the university, which I think are an untapped resource in terms of looking at research, and also some of the people who have the most interesting ideas here because they aren’t yet old and stodgy. OK.

And then just to advertise a couple of our– and then part of this is it’s also been co-sponsored by some other centers on campus, which include SC 2, Bessie, and the Berkeley Climate Change Network. OK.

And our upcoming events– we have a couple of exciting events, some of which might be of interest to you all. So on April 1, we have a discussion of the book Nature-Made Economy– Cod, Capital and the Great Economization of the Ocean here for you nature people. On April 4, we’re going to have a discussion of the book The Gender of Capital.

On April 22, we will have an event on caste, education, and social struggle in modern India. And then on May 1, we will have a discussion of the book Puta Life– Seeing Latinas, Working Sex. And you can find out about this and other events that we have here at Matrix on our website, which is matrix.berkeley.edu.

So, with all of that out of the way, I can introduce our lovely moderator Daniel Aldana Cohen. So he is an Assistant Professor of Sociology at the University of California, Berkeley, and Director of the Sociospatial Climate Collaborative, which is one of the co-sponsors of this event. Also is a faculty affiliate in the graduate program on political economy.

Cohen’s work focuses on the intersections of the climate emergency, housing, political economy, social movements, and inequalities of race and class in the United States and Brazil, which is a very broad and also important topic. He is the author– the co-author of A Planet to Win, Why We Need a Green Deal, and is currently completing a book project called Street Fight, Climate Change and Inequality in the 21st Century, which is under contract with Princeton University Press. So without any further ado, I will turn it over to Daniel.

[DANIEL ALDANA COHEN] Am I coming through on the mic. Sorry for the scratchy voice. No?

[INAUDIBLE]

Oh, OK. OK, here we go. All right. Sorry for the scratchy voice. I’ve been on recruitment duties for the last three days talking about how great Berkeley is. OK, I’m thrilled to be here. This couldn’t be a more important topic. Estimates of how much new investment will go into things like greening infrastructure are in the range of $3 to $9 trillion per year for the next 25 to 30 years. So this is arguably the battleground over which many of the big fights over equality, sustainability, democracy, and so on will be fought in the coming decades.

And as you pointed out, Julia, the PhD students here are actually the faculty of the faculty since we run around to meetings, but what we learn we learn from the PhD students. So I’m thrilled to learn from three of them today.

So we’ll be hearing from Jonathan Guy, who is a PhD candidate here at Berkeley. He studies the political economy of development in south and southeast Asia, focusing on the politics of climate change and the energy transition. His ongoing dissertation project– Selecting for Solar, the Political Incentives Behind Power Generation Project Selection– attempts to understand the diverging trajectories of power– of power sector buildouts in India and Indonesia.

Caylee Hong is an attorney, interdisciplinary researcher, and educator. She is currently a PhD candidate in anthropology here at Berkeley, where she researches urban oil production in the Los Angeles basin. There’s a lot of it.

Her dissertation examines the ways that diverse stakeholders navigate the decommissioning and redevelopment of century-old oil fields in the heart of cities, including LA and Long Beach. She’s published research on infrastructure, finance, the environment, law and citizenship, and antipode anthropological theory and field sites.

Finally, Andrew Jaeger is a PhD candidate in sociology– my wonderful department here at Berkeley. His dissertation analyzes the political economy of climate change in California. He’s published in Social Problems and on his dissertation topic in social forces.

So each will speak for about 15 minutes, then I will ask a question or two. We’ll open it up to the audience. We’ll be here till about 1:30– no later than 1:30, I should say. So, um, so thrilled. Jonathan, I think you’ll kick us off. Oh, Caylee. Oh, my apologies. Different orders. Caylee, please come on up.

[CAYLEE HONG] I think I’m properly mic’d up right now. Awesome. Thank you, Daniel, for the introduction. And thank you to the Social Science Matrix for inviting us to be here today. And thank you as well to the co-sponsors, and particularly Chuck and Julia, for organizing today’s discussion.

So I’d like to begin with a basic query, which is, what are the lasting impacts of our 100, 150 year-long experiment with oil and gas? This question prompts a striking observation– that even if we, as Daniel mentioned, rapidly transition, hopefully, away from fossil fuels and move beyond our dependency on oil, we’re still going to be entangled with not just the carbon in the atmosphere and plastics everywhere else, but also with fossil fuel infrastructures, and particularly oil and gas wells.

We have punctured tens of millions of holes into the Earth, some as deep as 40,000 feet. And in order to prevent leaks into the atmosphere, groundwater, soil of, say, explosive methane or noxious hydrogen sulfide, each well must be decommissioned. And that’s technically called, at least here in California, plugging and abandonment. So basically, it’s a process whereby you remove these external infrastructures and contaminated soils and then fill the wellbore with cement.

Yet, across the world, including here in California, we are still without any real plans, regulations or incentives to decommission wells at scale. As a result, wells are often left interminably idle or deserted altogether by their operators. And in the United States alone, there are an estimated 57,000 orphan wells. And this number could be actually as high as 746,000, and I would say probably even higher than that.

So my research focuses on the LA Basin. And with 68 named oil fields and over 12,000 wells, there really is no place on Earth that has so many wells so close to so many people. And here’s a map of LA County that gives you an idea of the massive spread of wells across this whole area.

So most wells in LA County are inactive. And so the yellow dots, again, are those idle wells that I mentioned. So they’re not– they’re not– they’re not active, but they’re not plugged and abandoned. And then the red dots are plugged. The blue you see here are, in fact, the only sites in LA County that are, in fact, today active.

So over the course of 18 months of fieldwork conducted between June, 2021, and January, 2023, I explored how residents of LA County are navigating the decommissioning and redevelopment of urban oil fields. And today, I’m going to focus on one specific field called the Los Angeles City Field. And that is– you can see it up on the map. It’s really in the center, in the heart of LA. It’s a 4 miles-long strip that’s considered the most urbanized oil field in the nation.

And there, I ask how residents living atop of this field, which is just a mile away from downtown LA, are organizing their neighborhood, called Vista Hermosa, to decommission hundreds of deserted oil wells. This organizing, which seeks to make known the persisting risks of wells and to secure their decommissioning, is shaped by and must necessarily confront the invisibility of the problem. And so today, I’m going to focus on just giving you an idea of what I mean by this invisibility in two ways. One is this surface invisibility, and the second is invisibility in regulator well records.

So first, let’s go to the city’s surface. Nearly all the wells in this neighborhood of Vista Hermosa are no longer active. They’ve been deserted by their operators, some over 100 years ago. And so this past, at least on the surface, is invisible.

And this is– these are a series of pictures taken from in and around the neighborhood. And so this is what you’d see if you were to walk around it today– again, a rather everyday scene. Now, the work of residents has been to draw attention to these wells, which, again, as you can see, can’t be seen, yet continue to haunt the landscape and residents’ bodies, including through higher rates of cancer, asthma, and other illnesses that residents have documented.

So if this is what the surface looks like, this is what the subterranean reveals, an absolutely enormous number of wells in this LA field. And the pink dots here are the ones that are idle. So, again, they’re not active, but they’re not actually decommissioned. And the gray dots are plugged. And most people who are living in this area don’t know that they exist at all.

Oil was discovered in the LA City Field in 1890. And for 50 to 60 years, people produced oil, absent any regulations. And when these wells would stop flowing or an operator, for example, would go bankrupt, people would fill the wells with dirt and then build homes beside or on top of wells. And by the time regulations came into place starting not until 1915, there were already thousands of wells that were drilled throughout this area. And then over this time period, the city of LA emerged alongside of and within the LA City Field.

During fieldwork, I saw residents mobilize to raise awareness of these wills– of these wells and their risks. And here is a photo– or here’s two photos of two community organizers, Danny and Rosalinda, who are holding up historical photos from the same spot in their neighborhood. And this discrepancy between the past and the present landscape highlight the persisting effects of this bygone era of oil production.

And then here’s a couple photos of the Vista Hermosa Community Group actions from the last couple of years, including an oil well tour from May, 2021. And that’s the photo on the right with some Sunrise Movement members. And the photo on the left is from an August, 2022, rally which was organized to shame a developer who had allegedly failed to decommission at least two other oil wells that were underneath an affordable housing project in the neighborhood. And the new housing project, you can see is, the large building in the background.

So there’s a second kind of invisibility at work as well. And that is gaps and uncertainties in well records, which are essential to decommissioning work. And here, my research draws upon the records of the California regulator, which nowadays is called CalGEM, the California Geologic Energy Management Division.

And for brevity, I’m going to mention just one specific well called Rogalske 1. both these images are from the CalGEM, so the state regulator’s records. And they show a surface scene, a regular house in this neighborhood, and then the subterranean scene, which is comprising of mostly idle– again, those purple wells– including now Rogalske 1, which I’ve identified with the red circle. And this well is now plugged and abandoned.

But it’s decommissioning history reveals the extraordinarily challenges that the city residents and also regulators faced. This well was drilled sometime in the 1800s, but it actually only became known to CalGEM and residents after new tenants started complaining about a rotten egg smell, which is indicative of hydrogen sulfide.

As you can see from this map, CalGEM’s records actually showed that there was a well present. But according to the regulator, this map and its other documents were, in fact, not reliable. So, therefore, the state didn’t have an obligation to either physically locate it, and therefore to decommission it.

CalGEM rightly points out, however, that the surveying techniques from the 1800s when this was drilled are not dependable, that street names and other markers have changed. So a well can easily be 100 years off or so. And in a densely populated urban neighborhood like Vista Hermosa, 100 yards, I mean, is absolutely enormous.

So, eventually, it took the landowner using a jackhammer in the dead of night to physically locate the well. And here is a video of the grand reveal of Rogalske 1, which was located mere feet away from the household’s front door.

Yeah, so this is what it looks like. It’s not much. But it really did take a landowner with a jackhammer to tell and to identify it so that the regulator could eventually plug and abandon it, which did happen. But it took three months and almost half a million dollars.

So this question of what to do with aged wells is taking on urgent significance nowadays as the city redevelops former oil fields. Currently, rapid real estate development and the need to address critical housing shortages in LA are compounding these long persisting environmental harms.

And here are some of the numerous recently completed and planned housing projects in Vista Hermosa. And existing residents like Danny and Rosalinda, who I mentioned earlier, argue that the dangers that are posed by oil wells, their leaks, their explosions, their health impacts are being exacerbated by the neighborhood’s transformation into a much denser place as these market rate luxury rental units are replacing single family homes and modest apartments.

While this construction boom creates opportunities to decommission wells, the developments also worsen existing risks in two ways. So first, developers don’t know where wells are located. As we saw with Rogalske 1, there are potentially hundreds of wells that are not documented or poorly documented.

And this creates a scenario where developers can plausibly deny responsibility for decommissioning wells just as like we saw with CalGEM. And then second, the city of Los Angeles allows developers to build directly over top of wells, which is contrary to CalGEM’s strong recommendations. This, on the one hand, promotes densification.

And many of us here today will know why that is important in planning for our energy futures. But it means that if there ever was a leak, the well could not be accessed. And the problem is that once a well is drilled, it actually never disappears even if it’s properly plugged and abandoned. And the former deputy director of CalGEM explained to me that, and I quote, “until we get hit by an asteroid and the Earth is removed along with the wells, the wells will remain a conduit.”

So in conclusion, as we transition energy regimes, we are faced with the expansive spatiotemporal reach of fossil fuels, which extends by way of infrastructures beyond the fossil fuel era. Greening infrastructures will mean accounting for our ongoing entanglement with pipelines and refineries and millions of wells. And as Vista Hermosa shows, processes of cleanup and decommissioning and transition will shape the future paths of not just energy production, but also really our municipal futures for generations. So thank you very much.

[APPLAUSE]

[JOHNATHAN GUY] Great. Hi, everyone. Thank you for coming. And thanks to Julie and Chuck and the Matrix for putting this on. My name is Johnathan Guy. I’m a PhD candidate in political science. Today, I’m going to be talking about my dissertation project, Selecting for Solar– Electricity Planning, State Structures and the Politics of Distributive Control.

I’m first going to talk about the motivation for the project, what the question is and why I’m choosing the case an empirical focus that I am, which is comparing India and Indonesia. I’m going to dive into this comparison. And I want to say as a preface, this is very much an ongoing work in progress. I have six months of fieldwork planned out this coming year. So I’ll have more refined findings after that.

But based on my case reading and preliminary visits to each country, I’m going to talk about three contrasts between the countries that I think– three potential explanations that explain why India has gone for renewables and Indonesia has not. And then I’m going to tie it all together at the end and zoom out to other countries and think more about how we can think about the political drivers of the energy transition. OK.

So we all know the story, right? We all know by now, you know, the first two decades of the 21st century are a story of falling renewables costs. Through investments in industrial policy and innovation, solar and wind have become cheap– cheap enough for many developed and developing countries to use at scale. But there’s a lot of variation, right?

And so my dissertation is trying to make sense of the variation in the uptake of wind and solar power– uptake that, at first glance, doesn’t seem to follow any recognizable pattern, right? So this is one of my favorite things to do, is to list the countries that had the highest levels of wind and solar as a percentage of electricity generation.

Does anybody have any idea what these countries might have in common? Right, they’re kind of all over the board. There are rich and poor countries, democratic and authoritarian, right, politically stable and unstable. When there’s much more of a pattern and we can talk about differences between wind and solar– wealthier countries, countries with higher levels of state capacity tend to adopt wind at higher rates.

But I’m going to be– my dissertation is much more focused on this comparison between India and Indonesia. Right, these are two countries that have pretty similar political systems, right, parliamentary democracies. They’re also both heavily reliant on coal and have very high– coal is integrated deeply into both political systems. Yet, we see this huge difference, right? We see– we see India incorporating wind and solar to a much greater extent in its electricity generation supply. And this puzzled me.

We can further dive into some of the data and show that just as India has really taken off since 2014, 2015, right, with the advent of the Modi government, we see similar patterns in power generation buildout on the fossil fuel side as well. Whereas India has dramatically decreased the pace of its– the addition of coal-fired capacity, in Indonesia it has increased over the same time period, right?

And we can also see this in terms of the project pipeline, right? There is the– the vast majority of coal plants in the pipeline– or not the vast majority, but the majority have been canceled, right? And in India– whereas in Indonesia, there are some cancellations, but we see to much greater extent exerted– a political effort, sustained political effort to build coal plants.

So why this difference, right? So previous scholarship has identified some potential reasons for India’s solar growth, and especially under Modi. One explanation is that Modi made very serious political commitments to wind and solar, and particularly solar, because he– he was elected and inaugurated the year before the Paris Agreement was signed. And he wanted to make– he also wanted to signal to international audiences and to domestic audiences that he was a modernizing reformer. This is an explanation that’s been advanced.

A second explanation is that solar is pretty cheap in India. Solar is higher– there are higher levels of irradiation, right? The sun shines more days of the year than in Indonesia. And then explanation three is that India is overall much more open to foreign investment. And this– since wind and solar are technologies that have been broadly developed in China and the Global North, that this explains why there’s been greater uptake.

But on further– both all of these explanations are sort of complicated or refuted by further investigation of these cases. Number one, Jokowi was similarly positioned, right? He was elected at the same time as Modi in 2014, had very similar– he also was elected on the basis of being a sort of modernizing reformer, right? But instead, went for coal, right?

Explanation two, solar is cheaper in India. There’s a lot of evidence to suggest that this might not actually be the case. And in fact– and further, there are plenty of very high solar penetration cases that have worse sunlight than Indonesia, for example, Vietnam.

And while India might have more foreign direct investment in general, this is not true in the power sector. In fact, a lot of India’s solar investment has been domestic. And a lot of Indonesia’s coal investment has been foreign.

So I’m going to talk about some of the case evidence. And I’m going to draw three contrasts. The first is in the status of India and Indonesia’s coal supply chains at the time that wind and solar got cheap, right? So here, we have graphs, first, of Indonesia’s coal supply chain. This is just showing production and exports relative to consumption. And in many ways, it’s showing the health of the supply chain.

It’s, you know– and here, we see that Indonesia’s supply produces far more coal than it consumes. It exports the vast majority of its coal. This has not always been the case. Whereas India, despite having just as much if not more coal than Indonesia, still relies on coal imports for an increasingly large share of its production, although this has been mitigated somewhat since the beginning of the Modi era.

So what is driving this difference, right, given that these countries have comparable coal endowments? Well, as I argue, this has to do with the deeper story of the deeper histories of coal exploitation, right? So compared to India, Indonesia’s coal industry is relatively young. It wasn’t really, really developed until the second half of the dictatorship that existed in Indonesia from the 1960s to the 1990s.

It wasn’t until the energy crisis of the 1970s that initial policy investments were made. And eventually, the industry took off. The rents that came from the industry were distributed fairly narrowly. And it wasn’t really until the 2000s that they were distributed more broadly, right?

And so, ultimately, Indonesia’s coal industry began to boom just as wind and solar got cheap. And part of the story of coal plant construction is a story of economic insurance, right? The government wanting to create domestic demand for coal in the event that there are downturns in the export market, OK?

India’s coal story is very different. India’s coal story is one of– it goes– begins much earlier because India democratized earlier and stayed a democracy. A lot of– as I argue, a lot of the rents associated with coal development, coal mining, have been stretched to accommodate various political constituencies and their demands. I can talk more in the Q&A if folks are interested about the different kinds of rents and how–

But the broad story is that by the time of the 1990s, these rents were placing tremendous strain on India’s ability to produce coal cost effectively. And this produced this import dependence and this energy security crisis. And so because of this, right, India experienced a supply chain breakdown. This created strong energy incentives, or energy security incentives, to make investments in solar policy, right?

Ironically, a lot of these– you know, the political incentives both to go for solar and the political incentives that sabotaged coal in the Indian case had to do with short-termism, right? Usually, when we think of climate politics, we think of– and green investment– we think of the ability– short-termism as a bad thing, right? Because we need the ability to impose big costs today in terms of benefits tomorrow. And as I argue, the opposite logic drove the transition in the Indian case.

OK, the second contrast. So renewables in general do thrive on outside investment. And by outside investment, I mean not just foreign investment but investment by private actors, right? So here, we can see some cross-national evidence for this, right? On the x-axis is financial liberalization measured by the Heritage Foundation. And on the y-axis, we have wind and solar share of electricity.

And we see there is a strong relationship between financial liberalization and wind and solar uptake, right? And this reflects broader scholarship that has found that sectoral governance and broader institutions governing finance are more important for the adoption of wind and solar than specific instruments in some cases like fee and tariffs or auctions. OK.

But there are a lot of commitment problems that stand in the way of wind and solar investment, right? These are emerging industries that developing countries are generally inexperienced with. And often, because of for various reasons, governments find it difficult to maintain and keep promises over the long term as is necessary in order to attract and sustain investment.

And here, we see an example of that in India, right, at the state level. Initially, it was actually very difficult. This headline is from about five years ago. It was actually very difficult to get state governments to agree and maintain their commitments to investors.

In Indonesia– Indonesia, like India, attempted to liberalize its power sector in the early 2000s. Unlike India, Indonesia was unsuccessful. The Supreme Court struck down the law. And so as a result, India and Indonesia have very different ownership structures and governance structures in the power sector.

In Indonesia, a single state-owned monopoly, PLN, dominates the generation, transmission and distribution segments. There is also– because electricity tariffs are set at the national level, often PLN is very constrained in its budget because of the political demands for subsidies. And as a result, it’s been very difficult to get PLN to invest in renewables because they have a higher share of upfront costs.

So an example of this is in the lead up to the 2019 elections, the government placed tremendous financial strain on PLN by not refusing to allow it to raise electricity prices. In response, PLN lobbied very hard to avoid renewables investment, OK? How much time?

A couple minutes.

Couple minutes? OK. So I’m going to zoom through this. So in India, by contrast, there was– both a lot of power procurement and the tariff setting happens– is both liberalized and happens at the state level rather than the federal level. Because of this, the central government didn’t face the same kind of fiscal pressures that state governments do. And so the result has been, sort of, battles between the center and the states over renewables procurement, where the center wants more because they don’t bear the political cost, and the states fight it.

The exception to this has been cases in which there are significant political incentives to expand capacity because wind and solar can be built quicker. Governments that are facing greater power deficits have had political incentive to build capacity quickly. And as I argue, that has incentivized them to build out wind and solar. OK.

So the takeaways from the investment story is that short-term incentives have kind of been bashed in the political economy of climate change literature because the incentives of these governments in developing countries to provide a lot of short-term benefits like electricity subsidies has seen to crowd out these longer term investments that are necessary for decarbonization. But as I find from my case evidence in India and other places, in cases where rapid increases in electricity supply are important, those lower– shorter construction times of wind and solar can actually cause short-termism to benefit decarbonization.

OK, I’m going to maybe skip to– I only have a couple of minutes. I think the political alignment stuff is more tentative. So maybe I can talk about, what are some overall takeaways from the comparison between India and Indonesia? One is that institutional constraints on the ability to control rents associated with traditional sources of power generation results in increased renewables.

And this has become really clear in India. I didn’t have really time to go through the story about coal India. But essentially, in Modi’s case, a lot of the rents associated with coal production were not really something that he could control. And because of that, building out renewables was more politically attractive. And I think we see similar cases in Turkey and South Africa.

Secondly, having domestic supporters capable of undertaking renewable projects efficiently instead of relying on foreign investment can make renewables more attractive to incumbents. In Indonesia, Jokowi didn’t really have the domestic corporate sector capable of executing these solar projects in the way that Modi did. Further, these firms were aligned with the BJP generally– not always against Congress, but generally with the BJP. And this was really important for making solar politically workable.

OK, so what can we learn overall? Number one, the fate of solar and wind relies, in part, on the status of patronage politics in developing countries, especially in traditional power generation sources, right? So what is the opportunity cost politically of going into solar and wind instead of continuing to invest in traditional power generation sources?

Number two, short-termism isn’t always a bad thing. Renewable energy has, especially wind and solar, has some short-term benefits that are important to consider. It’s also important to think more about the role of incumbency, right? Do incumbents have control over these rents that they use politically to manage their coalition, rents that are more typically associated with traditional power generation sources? When they don’t, a renewables transition is more likely.

And this has lessons for us here in the developed world as well in terms of thinking about negotiating agreements like JETP, the Just Energy Transition Partnership. You know, how compatible are the distributional benefits of these partnerships with the kind of incentives that incumbents face to maintain their ruling coalition?

Yeah. And I’m going to skip these cases because I think we’re out of time. I’m out of time. But–

You can take one more minute.

Well, I can tell you a little bit more about these cases, right? Like, I think that the political logic extends. I think that one key thing that broader cases show us is that the short-term benefits of wind and solar– benefits that are often– that come from shorter construction times are only valuable in environments where incumbents are actually able to make wind and solar projects proceed pretty quickly.

And in Bangladesh and Nigeria, even though that there are very strong political incentives to increase electricity supply, the governments have a very hard time negotiating with investors. This lengthens the process of solar and wind project completion and sort of dampens the sort of time benefit– the incentives that come from that time benefit, rather.

Yeah. In South Africa and Turkey, you see cases where there is initially, like, a lot of government support for renewables. And then, in both cases, the government pulls back. And I argue this has to do with democratic backsliding and the erosion of constraints between the executive and the governance of the power sector, right? In both of these cases, as, you know, Erdogan and Zuma get stronger, they’re able to control the rents associated with coal, and natural gas in the case of Turkey.

And once they– while initially they were constrained and they had more incentive to build out these alternative patronage networks in wind and solar, once they obtain greater control over the traditional sources of rents, it becomes their incentives. This is why these energy transitions stalled, is my argument. Anyway, thank you very much.

[APPLAUSE]

 

[ANDREW JAEGER] All right. [CLEARS THROAT] Is my mic audible? How was that? Great. OK, I’m trying a new thing of having my notes on my slides on my iPad. We’ll see how that goes. OK, thanks to all the organizers. Really appreciate this opportunity. And it’s been great so far.

So, yes. I’m Andrew Jaeger, PhD candidate in sociology here. My title– the title of my talk today, The Emerging Infrastructure of Carbontech. I’m not super happy with that title. Any suggestions welcome. Let’s see. Advance. There we go.

All right, I want to start with actually kind of a meta theoretical methodological approach relevant to the title of this, our discussion today. In discussing the political economy of climate change in many aspects like infrastructure or political coalitions or various sections of capital, our understandings of what green is have become, I think, somewhat dangerously reified, fixed, taken for granted, right? I mean, I think everyone here would recognize immediately that if we think about solar or wind, like, how green are those actually? That’s socially and politically constructed, right? It’s a starting point here.

The second you say green or fossil, we all here, probably, immediately have in mind a certain set of technologies, a certain set of actors, a certain set of battle lines that are just understood as naturally there. And one of my big arguments in my dissertation is that this is changing. And it’s been changing very quickly over the last five years or so.

Therefore, the usefulness of that heuristic, of green versus fossil, is waning. I do think it has been very useful in the past. But my argument– part of my argument today is that it’s becoming less useful.

And there’s two big reasons for that. One is that there is a far greater variety of technologies that are climate-related that could be considered green, but their greenness is open for debate very much. And the old battle lines, in many ways, are blurring.

As the technologies change– not only because of that, but I think largely because of that– the options for climate action are widening. It’s not just the old story of the fossil fuel industry wanting to go one way, which is basically block all climate legislation, and the climate action being a fairly straightforward task of building out renewables as quickly as possible, electrifying everything as quickly as possible, which, again, from the start, was always a socially, politically constituted strategy that was not– has no inherent greenness to it.

Also, more controversially, we’re arguing today, is that the fossil fuel industry appears to be going green in many ways. All right, advance. Oh, there we go. OK. I’m also going to suggest a different approach to thinking about this rather than just the old opposition between green and fossil, which, again, hasn’t been very useful and has no bearing on these wonderful talks today.

The way that I’ve been thinking about developing– trying to theorize this is to instead start with a different question, which is that, how are competing political actors framing particular climate technologies as green solutions and mobilizing them into broader techno-political projects? And what do I mean by techno-political projects? I’m actually taking out a lot of the [INAUDIBLE] I have to throw out here because of time.

I just want to say that these are basically political– long-term political movements that have embedded within them a vision of the future that they project out. They organize a coalition around that future. And there is a certain set of technologies embedded within that vision.

There’s a tension there, right, which we all recognize when we think about solar and wind. The tech needs to work. The tech needs to be viable. And the tech needs to be profitable. Because otherwise, private industry is not going to invest in it. And we have, as Brett Christopher– if anyone’s there– when was that? Last week– made very clear that profitability is the key metric for private investment, not cheapness, right?

OK, I’m going to shift into the empirical section now. So the first empirical claim here is that there is a new political project that is ascendant. I’m calling it carbontech. It’s organized around a growing set of technologies aimed at capturing, using, storing, and otherwise managing carbon emissions.

There is a lot of hype around this stuff. It comes from Silicon Valley. I’ve written a lot about it. It comes from the state of California, state officials and federal officials, and, in fact, states all around the world, especially at oil states. There is also a lot of critique of this project as it develops.

One of the main critiques, the most common critique, is that this is just literally a scam or a sham. These technologies just aren’t real. I hear that in my field work all the time, where I work with environmental groups, environmental justice groups.

And they have good reason to claim that, right? I mean, the fossil fuel industry, who is one of the main actors arguing for using these technologies, they’re not exactly– this industry is not exactly trustworthy, right? We have good reason to doubt what they’re talking about.

Another set of arguments is that there’s a moral hazard associated with these technologies, right? So when the IPCC, for instance, builds in to their projections of how to reach 1.5 degrees especially, but even 2 degrees, and they put in– and it implies billions of tons of carbon capture by 2050, 2045, 2030, uh, that sounds like it is creating a major incentive for states around the world to slow down on investing in renewables, to slow down the green transition as normally understood.

The other big critique is that this stuff is just too expensive, right? We’re talking about major infrastructure investments here, huge footprints. This photo here is– well, not photo– this rendering here is actually a very important distinction. This is not a real place. This is a rendering.

This is one of the most flashy, in many ways, politically viable and appealing versions of this sort of technology. It’s usually called CDR, or Carbon Dioxide Removal. And it is a purely technological approach to pulling carbon dioxide just out of the atmosphere, right?

So the dream of this stuff is you can put these big air-conditioning sort of systems out anywhere you want. You can build up a bunch of renewables around it. And you can– as long as you have the capital to do this, you can basically pull out as much carbon dioxide out of the air as you can bring money in and power, and to some degree, water.

The debates over this on both sides, the hype– and the hype– and the critics, they don’t have much empirically to go on, right? These are essentially hypothetical speculative debates. There are some exceptions.

That is, basically, within the last 15 years, there have been a number of mega carbon capture projects, mostly on coal and natural gas plants. And those have not gone well. This has gone very poorly, for the most part. And so that is essentially the empirical basis on which this debate has turned.

But in the last couple of years, there has been real movement. These investments, the Silicon Valley hype, these state incentives that have been moving towards investing in this stuff are actually, you know, breaking paydirt, right? They’re actually being deployed to some degree, right?

And so my empirical project here, which I’ve really only been involved in for the last few months– the vast majority of my research has been on the what you might call the political and ideological infrastructure of carbontech, right? The way that it was organized and legitimated around, the way the investments were created around them and hyped around them.

This latest research is really tracking the actual construction of the infrastructure of carbon management in California, which means infrastructure for taking it out of the air or capturing it from industrial sites or agricultural sites, as we’ll be talking about today, transporting it in different ways, processing it, using it, or storing it underground. And this is essentially exploratory research at this point. I’m just really interested in who’s building it, what’s being built, how it’s being built and why.

And the main research activity I’ve been pursuing in the last couple of months with this is essentially building a really big database. And it is pulling from a number of state and federal databases and private investment data which is from PitchBook.

Today, I’m just going to give a broad characterization of the actual progress so far. And then I’m going to zoom in on just one technology which a lot of people do not think of when they talk about carbon management or carbon capture, but is actually by far the most prevalent form of it in California and, in fact, in the US.

All right. So before I– let me look at my notes here. Yes, before I jump into this– OK. So this next chart is going to show evidence from California’s Sequoia database. This is essentially our big major database. Any time there is a big– well, even a medium-sized, I would say, project. Any project that might have some kind of impact on the environment, you need to usually pull a Sequioa permit.

And all those permits are available online. I have downloaded all of them since 2000. There’s about 280,000 permits. And so I’ve been processing through those. And this is the result so far. And you should– while the actual numbers are definitely– this is an alpha version, I would not– I would take them with a grain of salt still at this point. Yes, just take them with a grain of salt at this point.

The general direction that it shows I think is still valid. And it is fairly clear. I want to make just a few points here. One is that– yes, I think that’s still– it’s not visible enough. I can say more. I’ll say more.

The first half of the– the aughts saw very little investment on this. We’ve been increasing more or less linearly since 2000. And there has been a major– point number two, industrial CCS. There’s four project types up here. Three are types of digesters. Those are fairly simple, relatively simple carbon capture systems.

They actually capture methane, which is CH4 for greenhouse gas of course, from landfills, from wastewater sites and from agricultural sites, especially dairies. And if you look here, you can see there’s been an enormous growth in the use of dairy digesters in California, especially over the last five years.

The third point is that industrial carbon capture and storage, which is what that shiny direct air capture carbon dioxide removal plant would fall under, is actually fairly rare. There are only about– I count about 10 big industrial carbon capture projects, real projects that have actually been built to some degree over 24 years, and several of them– those over the last few years. That is very new. It is difficult to say much about that infrastructure at this point, though I can say something about them. I have been researching.

So let’s look at dairy digesters. Again, this is by far the most prevalent form and the form that has been growing the most rapidly over the last five years. What are these? Most simplest form, these are tarps over manure. These are still– I said simple. These are still multi-million dollar investments, $4 or $5 million per dairy on average.

Because once you capture this, what’s called biogas, from the cow manure, you have to process it quite a bit. And you have to have some kind of transportation network set up to actually turn it into what’s called renewable natural gas. And once that’s been done, it is more or less interchangeable with regular old natural gas.

And that is used for two things. One, the thing it’s been most used for is it’s compressed and it’s used in certain vehicles, especially buses and heavy duty trucks. They’re actually natural gas– you’ve probably never– I’ve never actually been to one of these fueling sites but they do exist, where you can actually fill up truck or bus with compressed natural gas and run a somewhat cleaner vehicle with it.

The other is, simply, it is blended into by utilities into the natural gas supply. That’s a relatively new thing. All of this is driven by California State subsidies and regulations. Hundreds of million dollars in tax breaks– I think that’s an– in tax breaks, rents and regulatory credits. I actually think this is an underestimate. I’m working on trying to get a better investment of this.

The growth– over here, this is pulled. Another part of the data set here pulled from EPA and California Department of Agriculture sites shows– I think that’s fairly visible– the last few years just are almost– it looks like an exponential rise in these things. And that is essentially because, first, there was a major [INAUDIBLE] in 2015 when California State implemented a new program that gives grants for the development of these. It unlocked a lot of financing.

There was also a change to the regulation that gives credits to these projects for the natural gas that they sell into the transportation system, which made these projects far more valuable. So the profitability of these projects directly obviously drove– is driving investment. And that profitability is determined not by any kind of market forces whatsoever, but by regulatory credits, right? This is a knob that is turned by the state by CAR– yes, by CAR, the California Air Resources Board.

What else can we say about this? It’s geographically concentrated. It’s almost entirely in the San Joaquin Valley, which is just north of Caylee’s site. This is the center of the California– the current center of the California dairy and oil industry. And they are clustered within the San Joaquin Valley.

And this is due to, basically, economies of scale. So what happens is the digesters are located on each of these dairies. And they pipe to some kind of central facility, where the processing happens. And then it is piped off to be used in these fueling sites– two minutes, OK– or to the actual utilities directly.

As these are concentrated in these areas, they’re also concentrating, more or less, environmental injustice in those areas, which are already some of the most horrible sites of, you know, air and water pollution in the state. The environmental justice movement in California has been fighting these things for years, years and years.

What else? What can we say about the investment here? Who is actually building these things? Well, there’s a firm called CalBioGas. It’s the largest developer. They’ve led at least 73 of the 170 active projects. I think it’s probably more than that too. Again, still working on this.

Who’s CalBioGas? Well, they’re a joint venture between California Bioenergy, which is a long-standing, you know, tech alternative fuel firm who mostly specializes in developing dairy digesters. And they have actually developed some of the technology for dairy digesters. And they’ve developed the expertise to manage these projects. So it’s really California Bioenergy which is doing the legwork of developing these projects. But Chevron has been a financial partner since at least 2020.

And one of the great– my research findings scoops here is, you know, it’s known publicly that there’s been a joint venture between Chevron and California bioenergy for all these years. They’ve actually entered into multiple joint ventures. But when an LLC like that enters into a joint venture, you can’t actually tell, like, what kind of equity which partner has, for instance.

And, actually, luckily, thanks to state filings where they– every single time they build one of these clusters, California Bioenergy, they applied for a tax break from the state of California. And when the state of California reviews those at a public meeting, they always publish their agenda with appendices for each of the tax breaks that they are considering.

And they always include the ownership structure of whoever they’re thinking of giving tax breaks to. And so I’ve actually never seen this reported before. But CalBioGas is about 56% Chevron. So most– in other words, the main owner of most of these clusters of dairy digesters is Chevron.

OK, wrapping up, the main point I wanted to make today. The leading edge of carbontech infrastructure, that we usually think of carbon capture as this shiny stuff, direct air capture and so on, it’s actually far less glamorous than that. It’s basically tarps over manure.

Digesters have been the leading edge of carbontech infrastructure in California. There’s been– there was a slow development of them over the aughts, increasing in 2010, and really an explosion in the last five or so years.

Why do I think this has happened? Well, first of all, they plug and play with the existing infrastructure, right? That renewable natural gas can plug right into the existing fossil infrastructure, which will be with us for even longer the longer that this– the more successful this project is, right?

The other reason, this solves a major problem for both of those industries. On one hand, all of these mega industrial dairies have a lot of manure that they have to handle. That’s actually just a problem that they– it’s a cost to them that they have had to deal with forever. This turns that cost into a profit center. They just get a revenue stream from this.

They don’t even have to manage. In most cases, they don’t even manage these digesters, right? It’s CalBio that manages the digesters. They don’t even really do any of the legwork. Other reason– yeah. Yeah, I’ll stop with the reasons there.

The other big point I want to say is that industrial carbon capture is probably next because it’s following the same sort of trajectory that the digesters followed. They recently have won major state and federal subsidies.

You’ve probably heard about them in the bipartisan infrastructure law and IRA from the federal level. California has been trying to subsidize– trying to get industrial carbon capture off the ground here for a long time. And there is now real serious money going into that from the state, from federal, and from Silicon Valley and other private investors.

They also are just about to clear some major regulatory hurdles in California. I was down in Bakersfield just a couple of weeks ago at some of the big public hearings. OK, I will– I’m ending here. And they’re just about to clear the big hurdle. They’re about to be able to store all the carbon they want to capture underground. This is a major deal. They’ve been trying to do this for years.

The last point, carbon capture can be both expensive and profitable. It kind of doesn’t matter how expensive it is. That’s one of the main arguments that’s been made against it. But as Brett Christopher was saying last week, to tie in to my initial point, profitability itself is socially and politically constructed, right? The viability of this stuff depends on maintaining those strong state subsidies.

I am, in some ways, committed to the idea that I think that this stuff is really growing, right? That’s been my argument for a long time. I think that the trajectory for growth is still there for a long time. But this is the weak point for those of us who think this is not the way that we should be going. It’s the subsidies and it’s the construction of this stuff as green. Thanks.

[APPLAUSE]

[DANIEL ALDANA COHEN] OK. [CLEARS THROAT] Thank you so much for three wonderful presentations. We’ve been talking a lot. So let’s just open it up actually right away and see if folks up here have questions. Julia has a mic.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] It’s for Andrew, my question actually. He explained how state incentives can expand the construction of dairy digestive sites and all of that. Could you explain a little bit more what are those incentives and if they could be utilized for other areas in, like, greener infrastructure, such as solar panels or something like that. Thank you.

[ANDERW JAEGER] OK. Yes, thank you for that question. So the two big subsidies– well, there are three big subsidies really. One is the grant program which comes from the state, which gives grants to project developers who are spending $5, $10, $20 million on centralized facilities and for processing this gas and building out the actual digesters at the dairies.

It’s considered an advanced technology. This is the same tax credit that gives money to chip fabricators and solar energy labs. Actually, I don’t know if you know Solyndra, the scandalous multi $100 million California solar firm. One of their early grants from this program was to Solyndra.

The other big subsidy is– actually, the major subsidy is called the Low Carbon Fuel Standard. And it is kind of complicated. I don’t want to take up all the time talking about it. But essentially, it is a subsidy for what are considered green alternative fuels. And this stuff is considered a green alternative fuel.

And the calculation that the state makes, more or less arbitrarily, of how green it is determines how much subsidy they get, and therefore the investment in this stuff. And in terms of solar, yes, there are also many subsidies for solar as well and things like this. But I think they’re insufficient.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thank you. Three very, very good presentations. I kind of– it kind of goes to all three of you, the question. And then I have a comment, and that is the responsibility of owning the energy infrastructure.

And I was thinking in your case, I would think there must be some responsibility somewhere with the sort of– for me, coming from Norway, it’s very strange that you can live above an oil well. So I’m just wondering, how does that work with the responsibility?

And Jonathan, you talked about mostly solar and also wind. And two weeks ago– or last week, Brett Christopher was here and said that– and presented a book, where he said that we don’t pay enough attention to the infrastructure. So with now the electrification of society, we have this very much focused on like, how can we make wind and solar profitable? But the infrastructure is kind of also a very big question and challenge.

So, for example, I can give one example from Norway today. We have just had gave money to the first very heavily subsidized offshore wind licensing. And the connector only goes to Norway– even though it, like, it would make would make it much more profitable if you also sent it to Netherlands, to Denmark. And this is because it becomes so politically contested. But it’s just one example. And then so I’m just wondering if you could comment something about– if that plays into your case with how much does the infrastructure cost in India or if it’s relevant at all.

And then, Andrew, I see also a lot of the political and economic drivers of the energy transition and the whole. I really liked being challenged on the green versus fossil industry and how we think about it. And if I can find my question here.

Well, I think what makes it simpler when you talk about CCS over geoengineering, it’s actually become something we can relate to. And it also has an infrastructure, where it’s kind of co-benefiting. But I’m wondering, like, if there’s any emphasis on this other– we have this different silver bullet. So CCS is one. What about blue hydrogen? Is there any talk about that here? It’s like the new bus.

So blue hydrogen is natural gas, where you take out the CO2 and store it somewhere. And that becomes– I’m from an oil state– or now gas. That’s what we pride ourselves of. And this is driving the development for new– this becomes a major argument. So the oil industry, oil and gas industry, will now drill for more gas in the long-term.

Now it’s going to be sent to Europe as the gas they need, natural gas they need. And then we’re going to carbon capture it. And I think it’s a very valid point with IPCC giving this leverage, which makes everything more complicated for what is green and what is brown and et cetera.

[CAYLEE HONG] Yeah, sure. Thank you for the question. So legally, it’s extremely clear that an owner or operator of a well is responsible. So that responsibility comes out through the polluter pays principle in California. But also, in individual leases, there’s almost always an obligation to decommission.

The problem, of course, is that we’ve seen in California, and really all over North America, is that oil and gas operators, whether they’re these– in my presentation, I’m talking about operators that drilled 100 years ago. They were mostly individuals. Some of them were hand-digging holes. They didn’t even have the technology to drill. So that’s exceptional.

But really, what’s happening nowadays is a kind of three-fold way in which responsibility is ceded, including in places like LA still. One is that, like we saw with my case study, the operator just disappears. Like, there’s no– as a corporation, they just– you can’t even find them. They’re gone.

More commonly, they go bankrupt, right? So there’s all sorts of loopholes and legal debates about how decommissioning obligations or environmental responsibilities gets paid out in this sort of waterfall of priority in a bankruptcy. But as recent cases in California show, usually, operators, because there’s never enough money to go around, will not end up paying for decommissioning costs. So that goes on to the state.

And third, what’s even probably more common, and which a lot of organizers and the state is paying attention to, is the transfer of these old wells to a smaller producer. So for example, Chevron, the California Resources Corporation, Exxon, large, well-capitalized firms, what they typically do is will sell down to smaller and smaller operators. And then that– at the end of this chain, they will go bankrupt.

So California, for example, has passed legislation to try to prevent those transfers where wells can’t be bonded. But yeah, there’s a major distinction between– or gap– between what’s legally required and what actually happens in practice when it comes to responsibility.

[JOHNATHAN GUY] I think the question was about, what’s the role of cost in– oh, like supplementary, like investments for wind and solar, like, in terms of grid management. Yeah, I think– I guess the way I think about this politically is that it’s another upfront cost. And it’s the one that is really a public good in the sense that everyone benefits from it because it increases the connectivity of the infrastructure.

And what’s interesting is that in India, we see a much more sustained effort to upgrade the grid and to also– and also in grid storage. I think that there are kind of two reasons why this is happening. One that I alluded to is that the central government isn’t fiscally constrained in the same way that these states are. They have the ability to make investments. And they don’t face this kind of subsidy trap that the states do.

And then second is that, basically, India is trying to diversify upstream into all these sorts of technologies in energy storage, in green hydrogen. And I think that there’s the potential to create new rents there and to benefit these firms. I think there’s also a security component to the story, like trying to– because a lot of these– like, green hydrogen has crossover benefits, spillover benefits in defense. So yeah, those would be my guesses. Yeah, thank you.

[ANDREW JAEGER] Thanks. Yes. There’s a lot I can say about that, but I’ll be– I’ll be quick. Yes, hydrogen is– there’s a lot of hype around hydrogen here as well for very similar reasons. And actually, one of the main reasons– one of the main arguments against these dairy digesters that are being deployed right now is that they are undermining the push for green hydrogen.

Because they more or less function– the RNG that’s produced more or less functions as an offset that the blue hydrogen producers can use to prevent– you know, to release themselves of their regulatory burden, right? Yeah, I think I’ve talked a lot. So I’ll stop there.

[DANIEL ALDANA COHEN] Good. Thank you, thank you. My voice has gone missing. All right, we’re at 1:27. So I will make one brief remark and then we’ll wrap this up. And if folks want to talk more with the panelists afterwards, please do. I have zillions of questions for all of you which we’ll get to in the shortness of time because we don’t have time anymore.

I think this panel confirms my feeling that the relationship between humans, capitalism and the planet can be summarized in just two words, which would be built environment, and that those two words, built environment, also named the common ground almost literally between almost all scholarly projects around the climate question. So I think it’s really fascinating to have three very different approaches coming from three very different disciplines, different questions. But they all kind of converge on the fights over the literal reconstruction of our physical interface with the planet.

So this has been super provocative. I think in the longer conversations that we’ll be having over the years, I think it’ll be really interesting to think about the disciplinary resources, but also obstacles to the research programs we’ve laid out here. Because I see you all transgressing conventional scholarly boundaries and research programs in ways that are very exciting. And I wonder how universities can change to more– to enable the kind of work that you’re doing so that this research program can flourish to help us all face down these emergencies.

Thank you all very much for coming– Julia for organizing the Matrix, Chuck, who’s hiding behind a wall, making this all work. And thank you again once again for coming, being part of this conversation. And let’s keep this going. Thanks.

[MUSIC] [APPLAUSE]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. For more information about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.